PADS® Schematic Design Reference

Manual

Release PADS VX.2.7

Document Revision 5

© 2007-2020 Mentor Graphics Corporation

All rights reserved.

This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this
document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire
notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable
effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function (see MG595892).
Use HTML for full navigation.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make
changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the
reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been
made.

The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in
written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation
of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor
Graphics whatsoever.

MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT,
EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS: The software and documentation were developed entirely at
private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to
FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure by or for the U.S.
Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in
the license agreement provided with the software, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable
mandatory federal laws.

TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of
Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior
written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark, as applicable. The use herein of a third-
party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to
indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics’
trademarks may be viewed at: mentor.com/trademarks.

The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of
Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.

End-User License Agreement: You can print a copy of the End-User License Agreement from:
mentor.com/eula.

Mentor Graphics Corporation

8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777
Telephone: 503.685.7000
Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210
Website: mentor.com
Support Center: support.mentor.com

Send Feedback on Documentation: support.mentor.com/doc_feedback_form

 Revision History ISO-26262

Revision Changes Status/Date

5 Modifications to improve the readability and comprehension of the Released
content. Approved by Regis Krug. March 2020
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the
Personal Automated Design System Release Notes for this product
are reflected in this document. Approved by Mike Bare.
4 Modifications to title page to reflect the latest product version Released
supported. Approved by Regis Krug. September
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the 2019
Personal Automated Design System Release Notes for this product
are reflected in this document. Approved by Mike Bare.
3 Modifications to title page to reflect the latest product version Released
supported. Approved by Regis Krug. March 2019
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the
Personal Automated Design System Release Notes for this product
are reflected in this document. Approved by Mike Bare.
2 Modifications to title page to reflect the latest product version Released
supported. Approved by Regis Krug. September
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the 2018
Personal Automated Design System Release Notes for this product
are reflected in this document. Approved by Mike Bare.

Author: In-house procedures and working practices require multiple authors for documents. All
associated authors for each topic within this document are tracked within the Mentor Graphics
Technical Publication’s source. For specific topic authors, contact Mentor Graphics Technical
Publication department.

Revision History: Released documents include a revision history of up to four revisions. For
earlier revision history, refer to earlier releases of documentation on Support Center.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
4 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Table of Contents

Revision History ISO-26262

Chapter 1
Support Files and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction to the Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Design Entry Tool Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Support File Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Borders Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
DxArchiver.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DxDesigner.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DxDesigner.xml File Format - LAYERS Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DxDesigner.xml File Format - ICTOBJECTS Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DxDesigner.xml File Format - SETTINGS Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DxDesigner.xml File Format - SIZES Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
DxDesigner.xml File Format - Databook SETTINGS Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PDF Writer Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Special Components File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Chapter 2
Dialog Boxes and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Add Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Add Pin Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Add Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Archiver Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Array Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Change Border Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Column Chooser Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Component Definition Update Dialog Box - Component Definitions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 5

 Table of Contents

Component Definition Update Dialog Box - Symbol Partitions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Constraints Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Databook Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Databook Window - CL View Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Databook Window - Query Builder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Databook Window - Symbols View Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Databook Window - Symbols View - Symbol View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Display Control Window - Objects Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Display Control Window - Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
File Viewer Utility Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Font Mapping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Generate Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Insert Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Merge Differences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
New Library Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
New Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Open Block Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Packager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
PADS Designer To PADS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Part Lister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Paste Special Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Project Integration Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

6 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Table of Contents

Replace Part Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
RINF Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Settings Dialog Box - Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Settings Dialog Box - Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Settings Dialog Box - Special Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Settings Dialog Box - Databook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Settings Dialog Box - Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Settings Dialog Box - Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Settings Dialog Box - Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Settings Dialog Box - Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Settings Dialog Box - Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Settings Dialog Box - Databook Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 7

 Table of Contents

Settings Dialog Box - Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Settings Dialog Box - Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Simulation Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Update Other Objects Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Verify Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Chapter 3
Design Entry Tool Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
icdbPartsLister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
DxArchiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
sch2pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
vdrc (Design Rule Checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Chapter 4
Property Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Property Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Visibility Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Property Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Property Name and Value Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Property Definitions in a Netlist Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Netlist Interpretation of Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
User-Defined Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Multiple and Duplicate Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Multiple Property Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Property Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Chapter 5
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Illegal Characters in Name Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Unnamed Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Name Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Compound Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Unique Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Pin Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Bus Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Chapter 6
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Diagnostics Tool Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
DRC Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

8 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Table of Contents

Interconnectivity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Migration Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
drc-001 - Invalid Property Name Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
drc-002 - Invalid Net/Bus Name Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
drc-003 - Invalid Property Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
drc-004 - Invalid Symbol Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
drc-005 - Property Name Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
drc-006 - Property Value Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
drc-007 - Net Name Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
drc-008 - Symbol Name Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
drc-009 - Non-Common Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Connectivity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
drc-101 - Output and Bidirectional Pins Connected Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
drc-102 - Output and Tri-State Pins Connected Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
drc-103 - Un-Loaded Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
drc-104 - Net Load Exceeds Max Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
drc-105 - Un-Driven Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
drc-106 - Multiple Output Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
drc-107 - Unconnected Pin(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
drc-108 - Hanging/Dangling Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
drc-109 - Un-Used Bus Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
drc-110 - Net Overlap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
drc-111 - Un-Driven Component Pins Connected Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
drc-112 - Input(s) or Bidirectional(s) Only Connected to Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
drc-113 - Inputs Only Connected to Connectors or To Another Component Input. . . . . 520
drc-114 - Two Pin Component Only Connected To Input Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
drc-115 - Two Pin Component Only Connected To Bidirectional Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
drc-116 - Output Directly Connected To Power Or Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
drc-117 - Output Pin To Output/Bidirectional Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
drc-118 - Input Pin Connected To The Same Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
drc-119 - Two Pin Component Shorted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
drc-120 - Range/Width Mismatch Across Two Pin Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
drc-121 - Net Connectivity Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
drc-123 - Single Pin Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
drc-124 - Wide Pin Range Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
drc-125 - Pin(s) Connected To Expected Net(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
drc-126 - Bus/Bus Content Versus Wide Pin Width Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
drc-127 - Unconnected Pins Near Dangling Net/Bus Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
drc-128 - Shorted and Aliased Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
drc-129 - Named Net Connected To No Connect Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Electrical Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
drc-201 - Open Collector Pin Not Pulled Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
drc-202 - Open Emitter Pin Not Pulled Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
drc-203 - Component Polarity Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
drc-204 - Voltage Drop Tolerance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
drc-205 - Power Tolerance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
drc-206 - Tristate Buffer Not Pulled Up or Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Hierarchy Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
drc-301 - Symbol Pin and Child Schematic Port Mismatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 9

 Table of Contents

drc-302 - Unconnected Block Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

drc-303 - Missing Child Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
drc-304 - Net Connected To Multiple Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
drc-305 - Net Connected To Ports With Different Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Integrity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
drc-401 - Missing Symbol Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
drc-402 - Missing Symbol Pin Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
drc-403 - Missing Block Symbol Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
drc-404 - Missing Block Symbol Pin Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
drc-405 - PIN Type Symbol Without a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
drc-406 - PIN Type Symbol With More Than One Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
drc-407 - Odd Number of Parentheses or Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
drc-408 - Component Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
drc-409 - Net Name Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
drc-410 - Power/Ground PIN Type Symbol Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
drc-411 - Symbol to Part Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
drc-412 - Component Symbol Does Not Exist in Central Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Power & Ground Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
drc-501 - Global Net Connected to Output Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
drc-502 - Legal Global Net Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
drc-503 - Local Net Defined As Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
drc-504 - Global Signal Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
drc-505 - Supply Pin Connected to Wrong Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
drc-506 - Un-connected Supply Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
drc-507 - Supply Pin Connected to Incorrect Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
drc-508 - Implicit or Explicit Power Not Connected to Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
drc-509 - Global Net Connected to Block Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
drc-510 - IC Device Powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
drc-511 - Invalid Connection of POWER/GROUND Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Device Specific Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
drc-601 - IC Device Specific Pin Connection Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
drc-603 - Bus Transceiver Pin(s) Hard-wired to Power/Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
drc-604 - Op. Amp. Differential Input Connected to Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
drc-605 - Multi-pin Capacitor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
drc-606 - Hardwired Bus Driver Output(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
HDL Checks Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
drc-701 - VHDL Reserved Keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
drc-702 - Verilog Reserved Keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
drc-703 - VHDL Data Type Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
drc-704 - VHDL Read-in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
drc-705 - VHDL Model Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
drc-706 - Block Symbol Pin and Hierarchical Port Mismatch(es). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
drc-707 - Net and Bi-directional Hierarchical Port Incompatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
drc-708 - Symbol Pin Type and Associated Model Port Mode Inconsistency. . . . . . . . . 599
Links Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
drc-820 - Isolated Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
drc-821 - Un-named Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
drc-822 - Multiple Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
drc-823 - Link and Net Naming Consistency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

10 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Table of Contents

DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Appendix A
Supplemental Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
HyperLynx LineSim - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Pin (Port) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Property Editing Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Verilog HDL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Verilog HDL Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Using Parameters in Verilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Example VHDL Netlist Output File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
The QCV Netlist Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Search Query Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Third-Party Information
End-User License Agreement
with EDA Software Supplemental Terms

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 11

 Table of Contents

12 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

 Chapter 1
Support Files and Variables

Support files control the configuration and appearance of the design entry tools. You can
customize many of the settings stored in these files from the design entry tool user interface, or
in the files themselves.
Introduction to the Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Design Entry Tool Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Support File Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Borders Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DxArchiver.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DxDesigner.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PDF Writer Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Special Components File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Introduction to the Design Entry Tool Interface

and Utilities
The design entry tool windows and utilities enable you to configure and customize the interface
to according to your own preferences. In the PADS Designer windows, you can configure how
you create and editdesigns and view your results. You can view the contents of the windows in
a variety of configurations using the design entry tool. The File Viewer utility enables you to
view the contents of log files generated by the design entry tool.
PADS Designer is a design entry tool that provides a solution for design creation, definition,
and reuse. It provides features for circuit design and simulation, component selection and
library management, signal integrity planning, project management, and team-based design.

You can customize the toolbars to show only the commands and icons you want to see. You can
also control window placement and visibility to organize your workspace.

Videos provide demonstrations of the user interface capabilities.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 13

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files

Video
PADS Designer UI Introduction — Click to view a video demonstrating the basic user
interface capabilities.

Note
The Design Entry Tool Start Page — Click to view a short video demonstrating the Start
page capabilities.

Video
Toolbar Tooltips — Click to view a short video demonstrating the toolbar button tooltips.

Design Entry Tool Support Files

Support files contain information that controls the configuration and appearance of the design
entry tools. You can customize many of the settings stored in these files from the design entry
tool user interface, or in the files themselves.

Filename Description
addins.ini Stores the configuration of custom Add-ins.
borders.ini Stores schematic border assignment settings.
The source of the .ini file is the Setting - Borders and Zone dialog
box: Setup > Settings menu item, Project (category), Borders and
Zones (subcategory).
You specify the location of the .ini file from the Setup > Settings
(menu item), Project (category), Border Symbols (field).
For more information, see the following:
• “Borders Initialization File Format” on page 21
• “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
busconts.ini Stores schematic bus contents settings.
The source of the .ini file is the Settings - Bus Contents dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Bus Contents
(subcategory).
You specify the location of the .ini file from the Setup > Settings
(menu item), Project (category), Bus Contents (field).
For more information, see the following:
• “Bus Contents File Format” on page 26
• “Creating and Editing Predefined Buses” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

14 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files

Filename Description
<layout_system>.cfg files Stores the PCB interface configuration for the design entry and
layout tool.
For more information, see the following:
• “PCB Interface Configuration Files” in the PCB Interfaces
User’s Guide
Client.cfg Stores client configuration attributes for the Remote Server
Configuration Manager.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\Client\Client.cfg.
For more information, see the following:
• “Client.cfg Configuration File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide
commontools.ini Stores custom Tools menu commands.
The source of the .ini file is the Customize Tools Menu dialog box:
Tools > Customize (menu item).
The location of the .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard.
For more information, see the following:
• “Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box” on page 190
dashtools.ini Stores configuration of custom toolboxes of the Dashboard tool.
.dxc file Stores color definition schemes.
The source of the .dxc file is the Settings - Objects dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory).
.dbb file Stores base configuration settings for the Databook tool
configuration.
For more information, see the following:
• “Creating a Databook Configuration File” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• “Modifying a Databook Configuration File with the DBCtool
Utility” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide
.dbc file Stores configuration settings to connect the Databook tool to an
ODBC database.
For more information, see the following:
• “Databook Tool Configuration File Format” on page 28

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 15

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files

Filename Description
dxpdf.ini Stores PDF writer settings.
The source of the .ini file is the PDF Writer dialog box:
File > Export > PDF (menu item).
The location of this .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard\dxpdf.ini. Any setting changes you make are
stored in a dxpdf.ini file of the project directory.
For more information, see the following:
• “Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• “PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab” on page 262
DxArchiver.xml Stores project archive settings.
The source of the .xml file is the Archiver Wizard:
Tools > Archiver (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “DxArchiver.xml File Format” on page 53
• “Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
DxDesigner.xml Stores project settings.
The source of the .xml file is the Settings dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “DxDesigner.xml File Format” on page 55
DxDesigner.wsp Stores window placement configuration.
The location of the .wsp file the directory specified by the WDIR
environment variable. There are multiple versions of this file for
each project type, such as:
• DxDesignerNL.wsp — Netlist project
• DxDesignerPADS.wsp — Integrated PADS project
For more information, see the following:
“Saving and Restoring the Window Configuration” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
hdlutils.ini Stores VHDL and Verilog netlist export configuration.
The source of the .ini file the Settings - Export HDL dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export
HDL(subcategory).
For more information, see the following:
• “Verilog Netlister Dialog Box” on page 424
• “VHDL Netlister Dialog Box” on page 425

16 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files

Filename Description
Launcher.cfg Stores configuration settings for the Client-Server Configuration
Manager.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\Launcher\
Launcher.cfg.
For more information, see the following:
• “Launcher.cfg Configuration File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide
locmap.cfg Stores variable definitions of soft pathnames defined by the WDIR
environment variable.
<project_dir>/LogFiles/ Stores log files produced by design entry tools.
<tool>.log The location of the .log file is <project>\LogFiles\<tool>.log.
manifest.xml Stores the file set produced by the Archiver tool.
The source of the .xml file is the Archiver Wizard:
Tools > Archiver (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
map.cfg Stores a map of pre-v2007 design entry tool attributes to the current
equivalent property names.
The design entry tool searches for the .cfg file in the following
locations in the following order:
1. Current project folder.
2. Each folder specified by the WDIR path, reading left-to-right.
For more information, see the following:
• “WDIR Variable Search Order” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide
NetlistVerify.ini Stores design rule check configuration settings for netlist type
Project Templates.
The source for the .ini file is the Verify dialog box: Tools > Verify
(menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 17

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files

Filename Description
NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini Stores initial design rule check configuration settings for netlist type
Project Templates.
The location of the .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard\ or %WDIR%.
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
PathsMap.cfg Stores configuration settings for the Client-Server Configuration
Manager.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\PathsMap.cfg.
<project>.prj Stores project-specific settings and configurations.
The source of the .prj file is the Settings dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item).
The location of the .prj file is in the project directory.
For more information, see the following:
• “DxDesigner.xml File Format” on page 55
• “Project Template File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide
scripts.ini Stores a list of scripts executed when the design entry tool starts.
The source of the .ini file is the Settings - Run on Startup dialog
box: Setup > Settings (menu item), Run on Startup (category).
scout.ini Stores cross reference (SCOUT) configuration settings.
The source of the .ini file is the cross reference (SCOUT) wizard:
Tools > Cross Reference (SCOUT) (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “Sample Scout.ini File” in the Cross Referencing a Design
manual
Server.cfg Stores configuration settings for the Client-Server Configuration
Manager server.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\Server\Server.cfg.
For more information, see the following:
• “Server.cfg Configuration File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide

18 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files

Filename Description
speccomp.ini Stores special component symbol assignment settings.
The source of the .ini file is the Settings - Special Components
dialog box: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category),
Special Components (subcategory).
You specify the location of the .ini file from the Setup > Settings
(menu item), Project (category), Special Components
(subcategory).
For more information, see the following:
• “Special Components File Format” on page 156
usertools.ini Stores custom menu commands.
The source of the .ini file is the Customize dialog box:
Tools > Customize (menu item).
The location of the .ini file is either the WDIR environment variable
path or the project location.
For more information, see the following:
• “Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box” on page 190
Verify.ini Stores configuration settings of the Verify tool.
The source of the .ini file is the Verify dialog box: Tools > Verify
(menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
VerifyDefaults.ini Stores initial configuration settings of the Verify tool.
The location of the .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard or the WDIR path.
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

Related Topics
Read-only User-Preference Settings [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 19

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Support File Reference

Support File Reference

Support files control the configuration and appearance of the design entry tools. You can
customize many of the settings stored in these files from the design entry tool user interface, or
in the files themselves.
Borders Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DxArchiver.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DxDesigner.xml File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PDF Writer Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Special Components File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

20 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Borders Initialization File Format

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s schematic border settings
The design entry tool reads the specified ASCII borders.ini file to configure the schematic
border settings. You specify the location of this .ini file from the Setup > Settings menu item,
Project category, Border Symbols field.
The borders.ini file stores schematic border assignment settings specified from the
Setup > Settings menu path, Project category, Borders and Zones subcategory.

Format
The borders.ini file is composed of five sections.

Figure 1-1. borders.ini File Content Overview

[SYMBOLS]
This section defines a border symbol for specified sheet sizes and
orientation.
Syntax Example:
Sheet=symbol_name
In the syntax example, Sheet specifies the size and orientation of the
sheet, symbol_name is name of the border symbol

Example:
A0SHEETL=Borders:a0sheet.1 (Defines the symbol for landscape orientation)
A0SHEETP=Borders:a0sheet.2 (Defines the symbol for portrait orientation)
. . .

[ZONE A0SHEETL]
(A zone exists for each configured sheet.
A0SHEETL is used as an example to match the sheets defined above.)
(See the table entries for VerticalZones and HorizontalZones in the topic
“Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones” on page 330 for content of
this section)
. . .
[ATTRIBUTES]
This section defines a set of properties that is attached to each border
symbol instance when a border is added or changed.

Syntax Example:
property_name1=property_value1
property_name2=property_value2

Example:
DEVELOPER=Thomas
COMPANY=ACME

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 21

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

[ANNOTATIONS]
This section describes the annotation format for links (from Setup >
Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference (subcategory). The
definition is stored here if it differs from the default form of the
following
Example:
FORMAT=$(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)

[DEFAULTS]
This section defines default values for border properties.

Syntax Example:
property1=value1
property2=value2;value3;value4

Parameters
The tables list the setting names and describe the editable parameter values in each section of
the borders.ini file.
Table 1-1. borders.ini - ZONE <SHEET_TYPE> Section
Setting Name Setting Description
HORZLABELING Specifies whether numbers or letters are used to denote the horizontal
zones, and whether the numbers or letters are ascending or descending as
shown in the following:

To access from the GUI:

Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Horizontal Zones (section), Letters, Numbers, and
Descending (options)
HORZNUMBER Specifies the number of horizontal zones on the schematic, such as in the
following example:
HORZNUMBER=8
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Horizontal Zones (section), Number of Zones (option)

22 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Table 1-1. borders.ini - ZONE <SHEET_TYPE> Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
OFFSETBOTTOM Specifies the bottom offset in the specified units for the horizontal zones
on the schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETBOTTOM=1270000
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 1.27e+006 sets the offset to 12.7mm, or .5in.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Horizontal Zones (section), Bottom Offset (option)
OFFSETTOP Specifies the top offset in the specified units for the horizontal zones on
the schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETTOP=1270000
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 1.27e+006 sets the offset to 12.7mm, or .5in.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Horizontal Zones (section), Top Offset (option)
VERTLABELING Specifies whether numbers or letters are used to denote the vertical zones,
and whether the numbers or letters are ascending or descending as shown
in the following:

To access from the GUI:

Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Vertical Zones (section), Letters, Numbers, and
Descending (options)
VERTNUMBER Specifies the number of vertical zones on the schematic, such as in the
following example:
VERTNUMBER=10
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Vertical Zones (section), Number of Zones (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 23

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Table 1-1. borders.ini - ZONE <SHEET_TYPE> Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
OFFSETLEFT Specifies the left offset in the specified units for the vertical zones on the
schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETLEFT=2540000
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 2.54e+006 sets the offset to 25.4mm, or 1.0in.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Vertical Zones (section), Left Offset (option)
OFFSETRIGHT Specifies the right offset in the specified units for the vertical zones on the
schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETRIGHT=2540000
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 2.54e+006 sets the offset to 25.4mm, or 1.0in.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (subcategory), Borders and
Zones (subcategory), Vertical Zones (section), Right Offset (option)

24 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Table 1-2. borders.ini - ANNOTATIONS Section

Setting Name Setting Description
FORMAT Specifies the appearance of cross-reference links by using the cross-reference
variable as shown in the following default example:
FORMAT=$(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)-$(block)

You can also insert text in the FORMAT specification.

To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Annotation Format for Links (option)

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones
Sheet Borders [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Support Files and Variables

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 25

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Bus Contents File Format

Bus Contents File Format

Input for: PADS Designer bus bundle information
PADS Designer reads predefined bus information from an ASCII busconts.ini file. You specify
the location of this .ini file from Setup > Settings, Project (category).
Format
The default busconts.ini filename replaces the conts.bc filename used in releases prior to 2007.

When PADS Designer loads a project, if a bus contents file for that project is specified in the
<design_name>.prj file, such as the following, the bus information contained in that file is
loaded into PADS Designer:

SECTION DesignInfo
. . .
KEY Bus_Contents “busconts.ini”
. . .
ENDSECTION

Parameters
• The contents of the 2007 and beyond busconts.ini file and the older conts.bc bus contents
file use similar formatting as follows:

$FORMAT_CARD$ Define header in pre-2007 conts.bc files.

(Not used with the busconts.ini file)
nA mC (Not used with the busconts.ini file)
$END$ Terminate header in conts.bc.
(Not used with the busconts.ini file)
bus_net_name signal_name1,signal_name2, …
signal_name1,signal_ signal_name3,signal_name4, …
name2, …

Field Description
nA The maximum size of the bus net name field.
(Not used with the busconts.ini file)
mC The size of the bus contents field. m is less than 64K.
(Not used with the busconts.ini file)
bus_net_name The value of the Net Name text property you assign to the bus.
signal_name The signal names you assign, separated by a comma. The signal
names must be separated with a comma.

26 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Bus Contents File Format

o Each line of the contents file can have up to 10,000 characters.

o Use an ampersand (&) at the end of a line to continue a bus definition on another
line.
Note, the continuation (second) line must also have the bus_net_name at the
beginning. See the following example:
Bus1 net1,net2,&
Bus1 net3,net4

o When using signal names that contain spaces, all of the signal names must be
enclosed in double-quotes (“ ”).

Note
Although this is allowed, it is not a recommended practice.

o Nested buses are not supported.

Examples
The following is an example of a busconts.ini bus contents file:

CPU_BUS ADR[0:15],DATA[0:8],CTL[0:3],&
CPU_BUS INAP[0:25],ADV[0:7]
MEM_BUS "ADR[0:10],CONTROL[10:20],NETNAME WITH SPACE"

Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Creating and Editing Predefined Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 27

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Input for: The design entry tool’s Databook tool.
The configuration (.dbc) file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting. Use the .dbc
file to connect the Databook tool to an ODBC database.
You can edit the file elements and subelements with a text or XML editor.

Note
Editing the .dbc file may require deleting component libraries associated with the Data
Source Name (DSN) and adding libraries back to the file.

Format
A .dbc file must conform to the following formatting restrictions:

• File sections appear in a specific order (see Table 1-3 on page 29):
1. Declaration Statement
2. dbc Element
3. CObject
4. CConfigSym
5. CConfigLib
6. CConfigLibEntry
7. CConfigAtt
8. CConfigTable
9. CConfigPref
10. CConfigScripting
11. End Statement
• File content is case-sensitive.
Standard XML file syntax is as shown here:

<element attribute1="value1" ... > elements' contents </element>

Nested XML file elements are called subelements.

For example:

<element>

<subelement1> ... </subelement1>

28 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

<subelement2> ... </subelement2>

</element>

If an element statement does not contain information, it appears in shorthand notation:

<element attribute1="value1" ... />

All XML file elements need to be numbered in order of appearance in the file.

For example,

<element1><element2><element3><element3><element4><element4><element1>

<element5><element5><element1>

See the Examples section in this topic for a sample of an XML file containing nested and
numbered elements.
Table 1-3. XML File Structure
File Section Example Value Description
Declaration <?xml version="1.0" The file begins with a standard
Statement encoding="UTF-8"?> XML declaration that includes a
UTF-8 encoding statement.
dbc Element <dbc version="1.0"> The dbc element is the top-level or
main element of the XML file with
version number as its attribute (this
element contains all of the other
file elements/subelements).
CObject <CObject0 overallSchema="21" CObject contains the Databook
flag="DX Databook Overlay main configuration (CConfig
Configuration File" element) and internal window data
BaseConfigurationURL=""> (CObList element).
<CConfig1> Note: Do not modify the
... CObList element or its
attributes.
</CConfig1>
<CObList128 CPersistList="0"/>
</CObject0>
CConfigSym <CConfigSym2> CConfigSym contains the list of
<CObArray3 symbols and it is a subelement of
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="0"/> CConfig.
</CConfigSym2> Note: CConfigSym cannot be
used to store symbols.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 29

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 1-3. XML File Structure (cont.)

File Section Example Value Description
CConfigLib <CConfigLib4> CConfigLib contains the list of
<CObArray5 libraries, and it is a subelement of
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="8"> CConfig with the following
subelements:
<CConfigLibEntry6 > ... </
CConfigLibEntry6> • CObArray which has the
following subelements:
... • CConfigLibEntry
</CObArray5> • CConfigTableEntry —
</CConfigLib4> Contains subelement
CStringList which lists all
table fields.
• CConfigAtt
• CConfigTable — Contains the
list of tables
CConfigLibEntry <CConfigLibEntry6> CConfigLibEntry is a subelement
<CConfigAtt7 ... > ... </ of CObArray and it contains the
CConfigAtt7> DataBook library configuration.
<CConfigTable32> ... </
CConfigTable32>
</CConfigLibEntry6>
CConfigAtt <CConfigAtt7 CConfigAtt contains the list of
UseCentralLibrarySymbols="0"> properties and it is a subelement of
<CObArray8 CConfigLib (CConfigAtt has
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="2"> subelement CConfigAttEntry).
<CConfigAttEntry9> ... </ Note: CConfigAttEntry is also
CConfigAttEntry> a subelement of CObArray.
<CConfigAttEntry9> ... </
CConfigAttEntry>
</CObArray8>
<CConfigAtt7>
CConfigTable <CConfigTable32> CConfigTable contains the list of
<CObArray33 tables and it is a subelement of
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="1"> CConfigLib (CConfigTable has
subelement CObArray).
<CConfigTableEntry34> ... </
CConfigTableEntry34>
</CObArray33>
</CconfigTable32>

30 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 1-3. XML File Structure (cont.)

File Section Example Value Description
CConfigPref <CConfigPref125 CConfigPref contains the
LoadIntoNewWindow="0" configuration file preferences and it
SymbolAttributesGet-Loaded="0" is a subelement of CConfig.
ComponentTracking="1"
AnnotateUndefinedAttributes="0"
Chan-geCompEnabled="0"
ComponentTrackingZoom="0"
MaintainAttVisibility="0"
LibraryAttEnabled="1"
LibraryAttName="DXDB_LIBNA
ME" AnnotateUndefine-
dAttributesValue=""
UseLoadTabAttribute="0"
LoadTabAttributeName="" An-
notateSelected="0"
AnnotateSelectedPrefix="ALT_*"
AnnotateRemoveAttri-butes="1"
ExcludedAttList="REFDES"/>
CConfigScripting <CConfigScripting126 CConfigScripting is a subelement
OnAddComponentEnabled="1" of CConfig and it contains
OnAnnoComponentEnabled="1" Databook scripting (automation
OnLoadComponentEnabled="1" control) information.
OnSelectComponentEnabled="1" CConfigScripting has subelement
On-ViewDocumentEnabled="1" CConfigScriptLanguage.
OnAfterAddComponentEnabled="1
" OnAfterAnnoCom-
ponentEnabled="1">
<CConfigScriptLanguage127
Filename="" type="0" pro-
gID="VBScript"/>
</CConfigScripting126>
End Statement </dbc> The file ends with the XML end
statement.

Parameters
Table 1-4. Element/Subelement Attributes
Element/Subelement Attribute Description
CConfigAtt UseCentralLibraryS Symbol data from Central Library is used.
ymbols="0" Values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 31

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 1-4. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)

Element/Subelement Attribute Description
CConfigAttEntry Fieldname="ID" Name of the column in the ODBC data
source table.
AttName="ID" Name of the property as it appears in the
Databook and the design entry tool.
DefaultValue="" Value used if the property is not present
(value is dependent on the property).
ExcludeWhenAnnot Properties to exclude when back-annotating
ating="0" to PADS Designer. Values are 0 (disabled)
and 1 (enabled).
ExcludeWhenLoadin Properties to exclude when loading into
g="0" Databook. Values are 0 (disabled) and 1
(enabled).
m_bNameVisible=" Property names are visible in the design
0" entry tool schematic after back-annotating.
Values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).
m_bValueVisible=" Property values are visible in the design
0" entry tool schematic after back-annotating.
Values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).
AttType="0" Field type. Values are 0 (Normal), 1
(Symbol), 2 (Document), 3 (Unused), 4
(Unique ID).
ValueType="0" Type of value. Values are 0 (Undefined), 1
(String), 2 (Numeric), 3 (Numeric_Int), 4
(Numeric_Float), 5 (Numeric_Double).
MagType="0" Numeric property values are displayed in
the Databook. Values are 0 (Unknown), 1
(Atto), 2 (Femto), 3 (Pico), 4 (Nano), 5
(Micro), 6 (Milli), 7 (Unity), 8 (Kilo), 9
(Mega), 10 (Giga), 11 (Tera), 12 (Auto), 13
(Percent).
UnitsString="" Unit suffix is annotated to symbols. Values
are expressed as a string (for example,
“mm” or “in”).
AddAsOat="0" For internal use only.
Required="0" Properties that are required. Values are 0
and 1 (property is required and included).

32 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 1-4. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)

Element/Subelement Attribute Description
ValidMag="2047" Valid magnitude for the selected property.
Value is the number, which is interpreted as
a binary mask that enables values described
in MagType (each MagType value is
interpreted as one bit).
ValidMagDir="63" For internal use only.
FutureUseBool1="0" For internal use only.
,
FutureUseBool2="0"
,
FutureUseStr1="",
FutureUseStr2=""
MatchCondition="-" SQL database language relation used for
matching.
=: exact match. For example, entering a
value of 50, only results in a match of 50.
Like: matches a character pattern using
wildcards. For example, entering a value of
*50, results in matches of ALS150, DP50,
and so on. Entering a value of *50*, results
in matches of ALS0500, ALS0505_sp, and
so on.
Note: Only applicable if Databook is
used by Variant Manager.
AttrUnplace="0" Property placement. Values are 0 (Name), 1
(Value), 2 (NameAndValue), 3 (Hide), 4
(Delete), 5 (None).
SerialKey="0" For internal use only.
CConfigLibEntry LibraryName="nam Library name.
e"
JoinTable="false" Tables linked to provide access to
component properties that reside in
multiple tables. Values are “true” or
“false.”
Locked="0" For internal use only.
SymbolExpression= Symbol expression used to find a valid
"" symbol.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 33

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 1-4. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)

Element/Subelement Attribute Description
JoinType="0" Tables linked vertically or horizontally.
Values are 0 (vertical join) or 1 (horizontal
join).
HorizJoinType="0" Records from tables are combined if the
values of the joined fields meet specified
criteria (inner join) or records are included
even if related records are not in joined
tables (left outer). Values are 0 (inner) or 1
(left outer).
CConfigPref LoadIntoNewWindo New window is created when components
w="0" are loaded. Values are 0 (window not
created) or 1.
SymbolAttributesGe Symbol properties are loaded along with
tLoaded="0" component properties. Values are 0
(properties not loaded) or 1.
ComponentTracking Automatic selection of the component in
="0" the design entry tool when selected in
Search/Verify windows. Values are 0
(component not selected) or 1.
AnnotateUndefined Values matching undefined value are
Attributes="0" annotated. Values are 0 (values not
annotated) or 1.
ChangeCompEnable New symbol can be overwritten when
d="0" annotating to a component. Values are 0
(symbol not overwritten) or 1.
ComponentTracking Zoom To Fit is performed on selection.
Zoom="0" Values are 0 (Zoom To Fit not performed)
or 1.
MaintainAttVisibilit Properties change their visibility when
y="0" annotated. Values are 0 (visibility not
changed) or 1.
LibraryAttEnabled= Special library property is annotated.
"0" Values are 0 (property not annotated) or 1.
LibraryAttName="D Name of the property that holds the library
XDB_LIBNAME" name (for example, DXDB_LIBNAME).
AnnotateUndefined String to match values (if a value matches,
AttributesValue="" it is not annotated).

34 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 1-4. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)

Element/Subelement Attribute Description
UseLoadTabAttribut Load tabs in the Databook Search window
e="0" use “LoadTabAttributeName.” Values are 0
or 1 (load tabs use
“LoadTabAttributeName”).
AnnotateSelected=" Annotate properties to selected
0" components. Values are 0 (not enabled) or
1.
AnnotateSelectedPre “AnnotateSelectedPrefix” is used in
fix="ALT_*" conjunction with “AnnotateSelected”
attribute.
AnnotateRemoveAtt Properties without values are removed
ributes="0" during annotation. Values are 0 (properties
not removed) or 1.
ExcludedAttList="R Comma-separated list of properties to be
EFDES" excluded when loading (for example, “Ref
Designator”).
CConfigScripting OnAddComponentE “OnAddComponentEnabled” automation
nabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnAnnoComponent “OnAnnoComponentEnabled” automation
Enabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnLoadComponent “OnLoadComponentEnabled” automation
Enabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnSelectComponent “OnSelectComponentEnabled” automation
Enabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnViewDocumentE “OnViewDocumentEnabled” automation
nabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnAfterAddCompon “OnAfterAddComponentEnabled”
entEnabled="1" automation callback is enabled. Values are
0 or 1 (enabled).
OnAfterAnnoCompo “OnAfterAnnoComponentEnabled”
nentEnabled="1" automation callback is enabled. Values are
0 or 1 (enabled).
CConfigScriptLanguage Filename="" Script filename.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 35

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 1-4. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)

Element/Subelement Attribute Description
type="0" Script programming language. Values are 0
(VBScript), 1 (JScript), 2 (User-Defined).
progID="VBScript" User-defined programming language name.
CConfigTableEntry Assembly="ODBC; Data source configuration file.
ALIAS=SampleLib;
CNS={ODBC;DSN
=SampleLib};DDS=
{Microsoft Access
Driver (*.mdb)};"
TableName="Capaci Database table name (for example,
tors" Capacitors).
CObArray CXMLTypedPtrArra Value is number of libraries listed in
ySize CObArrayElement.
CStringList ListSize="1" Number of fields stored in properties. Value
is the number of fields (decimal format).
ListItem0="ID" Lists of different types in .dbc file format.
Values are dependent on the list type used.
dbc overallSchema="21" Internal version number.
flag="Databook File type with "Databook Overlay
Base Configuration Configuration File" or "Databook Overlay
File" Configuration File"
BaseConfigurationURL=""> values.
Note: For flag="Databook Base
Configuration File", the value is the
.dbb file (see “Databook to Data Sources
Connections” PADS Schematic Design
Administrator’s Guide).

Examples
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<dbc version="1.0">
<CObject0>
<CConfig1>
<CConfigSym2>
<CObArray3/>
</CConfigSym2>
</CConfig1>
<CObList4/>
</CObject0>
</dbc>

36 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Related Topics
Databook Configuration File Overview [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 37

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

The design entry tool Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool uses the VerifyDefaults.ini file to
configure the checker.
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

38 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool
The design entry tool reads one or more ASCII VerifyDefaults.ini files along your WDIR path
to configure the design entry tool’s Verify tool settings. A Verify.ini file located in the project
folder stores your local settings. The settings stored in the local Verifiy.ini file take precedence
over those stored in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
For more information on why the design entry tool uses more than one copy of this file and how
the design entry tool accesses them, see “DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order” on
page 606.

You can modify an .ini file to set up your own DRC Verify tool default settings to do the
following:

• Change the default settings on the Settings pane

• Do the following on any of the Rules panes:
o Change the default value for a particular Rule check
o Change the rule check visibility
o Add your own groups and assign certain Rule checks to them
o Choose which check(s) you want to appear under each group
Format
The VerifyDefaults.ini file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting. The content is
divided into major sections.

Figure 1-2. VerifyDefaults.ini File Section Structure

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<VDRC>
<FlowType Name="<name>" />
<!--In NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini, Name=Netlist -->
<Checks>
<!-- See “DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File” on page 48 -->
</Checks>
<Defines>
<!-- See “DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File” on page 46 -
->
</Defines>
<GUI>
<!-- See “DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File” on page 41-->
</GUI>
</VDRC>

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 39

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Note
The NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini and VerifyDefaults.ini are similar. Values may vary slightly
for some checks.

Warning
Incorrect XML syntax in a VerifyDefaults.ini file could cause the design entry tool to hang
when starting Tools > Verify.

Parameters
None.
Related Topics
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

40 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s Design Rule Checker (DRC)
The <Defines> section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file defines Option Names and corresponding
Values that the DRC uses for certain rules checks.
Format
The figure shows the VerifyDefaults.ini file <Defines> section with added comments to indicate
which DRC checks use each option:

Figure 1-3. DRC VerifyDefaults.ini File - Defines Section Listing

<Defines>
<Option Name="ground_nets" Value="AGND CGND GND +0V* E FG AG E0V* G0V*
A0V*"/>
<!-- ground_nets is used by checks:
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511)
BusTranscPin (drc-603)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="power_nets"

Value="VCC +5V +18V +2.5V* -2.5V* +3.3V"/>

<!-- power_nets is used by checks:
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511)
BusTranscPin (drc-603)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="units"

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 41

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Value="Atto:a Femto:f Pico:p Nano:n Micro:u

Milli:m Kilo:k Mega:M Giga:G Tera:T" />
<!-- unit is used by checks:
VoltageDropCheck (drc-204)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205) -->
<Option Name="supply_pin" Value="DRC Supply Pin" />
<!-- supply_pin is used by checks:
SupNegConnected (drc-505)
SupNotConnected (drc-506)
SupWrongConnected (drc-507) -->
<Option Name="drc_power" Value="DRC Power" />
<!-- drc_power is used by checks:
PowerValueCheck (drc-205) -->
<Option Name="drc_value" Value="Value" />
<!-- drc_value is used by check:
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)-->
<Option Name="drc_tolerance" Value="DRC Tolerance" />
<!-- drc_value is used by check:
N/A -->

<Option Name="drc_negative" Value="DRC Negative" />

<!-- drc_negative is used by checks:
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204) -->
<Option Name="drc_positive" Value="DRC Positive" />
<!-- drc_positive is used by checks:
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205) -->
<Option Name="drc_voltage" Value="DRC Voltage" />
<!-- drc_voltage is used by checks:
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204) -->
<Option Name="drc_ic" Value="DRC IC" />
<!-- drc_ic is used by checks:
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203) -->
<Option Name="drc_power_factor" Value="DRC Power" />
<!-- drc_power_factor is used by checks:
N/A) -->
<Option Name="drc_vrrm" Value="DRC VRRM” />
<!-- drc_vrrm is used by checks:
N/A) -->
<Option Name="vhdl_file" Value="VHDL File" />
<!-- vhdl_file is used by check:
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->
<Option Name="verilog_file" Value="Verilog File" />
<!-- verilog_file is used by check:
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->

42 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

<Option Name="vhdl_type" Value="VHDL Type" />

<!-- vhdl_type is used by checks:
VhdlReservedKeyword (drc-701)
VhdlDataTypeMismatch (drc-703) -->
<Option Name="verilog_type" Value="Verilog Type" />
<!-- verilog_type is used by check:
VerilogReservedKeyword (drc-702) -->
<Option Name="vhdl_model" Value="VHDL Model" />
<!-- vhdl_model is used by check:
VhdlReservedKeyword (drc-701)
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->
<Option Name="verilog_model" Value="Verilog Model" />
<!-- verilog_model is used by check:
VerilogReservedKeyword (drc-702)
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->
<Option Name="global_signal" Value="Global Signal Name" />
<!-- global_signal is used by check:
GlobalSignals (drc-504) -->
<Option Name="supply_net" Value="Power Supply Net" />
<!-- supply_net is used by check:
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511)
BusTranscPin (drc-603)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="pin_type" Value="Pin Type" />
<!-- pin_type is used by check:
ConOUTBI (drc-101)
ConOUTTRI (drc-102)
FanIn (drc-103)
FanOut (drc-104)
UnconnectedPins (drc-107)
UndrivenCompPins (drc-111)
InputsConnectedToConnector (drc-112)
InputsConnectedToInputs (drc-113)
DipoleToInput (drc-114)
DipoleToBidirectional (drc-115)
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
OutputSameComp (drc-117)
InputSameComp (drc-118)
OclVDD (drc-201)
OemGND (drc-202)
TristatePinConnect (drc-206)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511) -->
<Option Name="ground" Value="GROUND" />
<!-- ground is used by check:
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
<Option Name="power" Value="POWER" />
<!-- power is used by check:
NumberConnDevice (drc-510) -->
<Option Name="part_number" Value="Part Number" />
<!-- part_number is used by check:
ImplicitPowerConnected (drc-508) -->
<Option Name="resistors" Value="*res*.*" />
<!-- resistors is used by check:
OutputSameComp (drc-117)
InputSameComp (drc-118)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 43

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

ICDevice (drc-601)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="serials" Value="" />
<!-- serials is used by check:
Un-loaded net (drc-103)
Un-driven Net (drc-105)
Multiple Output Drivers (drc-106)
Un-driven component pins connected together (drc-111) -->

<Option Name="net_class" Value="DRC_NCLS" />

<!-- net_class is used by check:
NetClass (drc-125) -->
<Option Name="net_check" Value="DRC_NCHK" />
<!-- net_check is used by check:
NetClass (drc-125) -->
<Option Name="net_class_default" Value="5V_TECH" />
<!-- net_class_default is used by check:
NetClass (drc-125) -->
</Defines>

Parameters
• The OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116) can pass Values specified in a ground_nets and
power_nets definition in the .ini file <Defines> section to the DRC, as shown here:
<Option Name="ground_nets" Value="GND +0V* E FG AG E0V* G0V*
A0V*"/>
<Option Name="power_nets" Value="VCC +2.5V* -2.5V*"/>

• You can use other Option Name definitions to indicate to certain rules checks which
schematic objects the DRC should evaluate. This type of option specifies a user-defined
value that corresponds to a property name on a schematic object. For example, the following
supply_pin definition specifies a value of “DRC Supply Pin”.
<Option Name="supply_pin" Value="DRC Supply Pin" />

• If you define a “DRC Supply Pin” property in your design and place the property on a net,
the checks SupNegConnected (drc-505), SupNotConnected (drc-506), and
SupWrongConnected (drc-507), if selected, evaluate that net.
Note
You or an administrator can modify the Values in the .ini <Defines> section to suit
each site. For example, you can change the Value in the supply_pin definition from
“DRC Supply Pin” to “Supply Pin Check”. You can then create a property named
“Supply Pin Check” and place it on a schematic object(s). However, you must not
modify the Option Name “supply_pin”.

Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax

44 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 45

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool
The <Settings> section of the .ini file relates to the various settings on the Verify tool Settings
pane, which specifies the scope of the DRC operation.
Format
Figure 1-4 uses numbered designators to cross-reference the .ini file code to the Settings pane.

Figure 1-4. DRC Verify Tool Settings Pane - Settings Section as it Relates to UI

46 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 47

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool
The <Checks> section of the .ini file contains the definition of each numbered check.
Format
Figure 1-5 uses the following numbered designators to cross-reference the .ini file code to the
Rules pane.

1. ID — Specifies an ID number.
2. State — Presets the checkbox as either Enabled (checked) or Disabled (unchecked).
3. Severity — Presets the Severity level as either Note, Warning, or Error.
4. GUI — Defines the Rule title that appears on the GUI.
5. Description — Text defined here appears at the bottom of the dialog box when a check
is selected.
6. Option text — Defines the Option title that appears on the GUI.
7. Option Value — Preset the value(s) in the Values column, or leave this out of the Check
Name definition if there are no values.
8. Option GuiObject (edit) — If set to “edit”, an edit box appears when you click on the
value.
9. Option Value — In Figure 1-5, this option value is the default setting for one of the
choices provided.
10. Option GuiObject (combobox)— If set to “combobox”, a dropdown list is available to
set the value.

48 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Figure 1-5. Verify Tool Rules Pane - Defaults File Checks Section as it Relates
to UI

Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 49

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s Design Rule Checker (DRC)
The <Rules> section specifies which groups appear in the Rules list, and which checks are
associated with each group.
Format
Figure 1-6 shows the <Rules> section of the .ini file. The figure also shows a portion of the
Checks section so you can see how the <Rules> section references a Check Name. In this
example, the “PropertyUnsupported” Check Name is the first entry in “Migration”. The
description that follows the figure uses the numbered designators as reference.

50 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Figure 1-6. DRC Rules Pane - Defaults File Rules Section as it Relates to UI

The following items explain the .ini file sections shown in Figure 1-6:

1. The <Rules> section of the .ini file defines the group name(s). This example defines the
first group as “Migration”.
2. Migration group checks reference Check Names, as defined in the <Checks> section.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 51

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

3. If you include the string State=”Enabled” in the Rules section, it overrides the State
declaration in the Checks section of the .ini file for a given check. This example shows
the PropertyUnsupported check disabled in the Checks section, yet it is enabled in the
Rules section. As seen in the UI (Figure 1-6), this check is enabled.
4. The second group specified in the Rules section is titled “Connectivity”.
Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

52 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxArchiver.xml File Format

DxArchiver.xml File Format

Input for: PADS Designer project archive settings.
To access from the GUI: Tools > Archiver (menu item), PADS Archiver (dialog box), Options
(page) or Additional Files (page)
The design entry tool reads the ASCII DxArchiver.xml file from your WDIR path to configure
the project archive settings in the tool. The DxArchiver.xml file is an optional input to the
DxArchiver command’s export option.
Format
The DxArchiver.xml file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting.

The lines that define configuration settings in the DxArchiver.xml file have the following
format:

<key name="setting_name" value="setting_value" />

Note
You should change only the value of a setting_value string in the DxArchiver.xml file. You
should never modify the setting_name string.

Parameters
Table 1-5. DxArchiver.xml Parameters
Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
The Options section specifies parameters of the archive operation.
Compression Type Specifies the file compression type of the project archive using
the following values:
• None — No compression. Default.
• Zip — Zip format file
DxProject Path Specifies the location of the project file.
PDF Type Specifies whether to output a PDF format file as part of the
project archive:
• 0 — Do not output a PDF format file. Default.
• 1 — Output a PDF format file.
SetSTATIC Specifies whether to change physical planes from Dynamic to
Static:
• 0 — Do not change physical planes. Default.
• 1 — Change physical planes.
TargetDirectory Path Specifies the location of the target directory of the project
archive.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 53

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxArchiver.xml File Format

Table 1-6. DxArchiver.xml Additional Files Section

Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
The Additional Files section specifies the File Path setting.
File Path Specifies folders and files included in the project archive.

Examples
Figure 1-7. DxArchiver.xml File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<DxArchiverProject version="1">
<DxProject Path=
"C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj"/>
<TargetDirectory Path="C:\gary_archives"/>
<Compression Type="Zip"/>
<PDF Type="1"/>
<AdditionalFiles>
<File Path="C:\project_archives\Archiver_test"/>
</AdditionalFiles>
</DxArchiverProject>

Related Topics
DxArchiver
Archiver Wizard

54 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s user interface configuration settings
The design entry tool reads one or more ASCII DxDesigner.xml files specified by the WDIR
path to configure the design entry tool session settings.
For more information on how the design entry tool accesses multiple DxDesigner.xml files
specified by the WDIR path, see “DxDesigner.xml File Precedence Order” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.

Format
The DxDesigner.xml file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting. The file content is
divided into major sections as shown in Figure 1-8.

Figure 1-8. DxDesigner.xml File Section Structure

<?xml version="1.0" ?>

<DxDesigner_Configuration_file version="1.2" name="DxDesigner.xml">
<DxDesigner>
<OBJECTS> <!--See OBJECTS on page 57 --> </OBJECTS>
<LAYERS> <!--See LAYERS on page 61 --> </LAYERS>
<ICTOBJECTS> <!--See ICTOBJECTS on page 64 --> </ICTOBJECTS>
<SETTINGS> <!--See SETTINGS on page 65 --> </SETTINGS>
<SIZES> <!--See SIZES on page 125 --> </SIZES>
<COLORS> <!--See COLORS Element on page 615 --> </COLORS>
. . .
</DxDesigner>
<DxDatabook>
<SETTINGS> <!--See Databook SETTINGS on page 128--> </SETTINGS>
</DxDatabook>
</DxDesigner_Configuration_file>

The lines that define configuration settings in the DxDesigner.xml file have the following
format:

<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />

You should only change the setting value.

If the readonly=”1” option is applied to an object or key name in DxDesigner.xml, such as

<object name=”NET” readonly=”1”/> or <key name=”VISIBLE” value=”1” readonly=”1”/>,
you cannot change the associated setting in the Setup > Settings dialog box.

Note
All objects allow the readonly=”1” option. Not all key names allow the readonly=”1”
setting. Read-only compatibility is indicated in the key name descriptions in these topics.
For more information, see “Read-only User-Preference Settings” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 55

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Parameters
• The following topics list the setting names and describes the editable parameter values in
each section of the DxDesigner.xml file:
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section” on page 57
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - LAYERS Section” on page 61
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - ICTOBJECTS Section” on page 64
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - SETTINGS Section” on page 65
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - SIZES Section” on page 125
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - Databook SETTINGS Section” on page 128
Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables
Read-only User-Preference Settings [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
DxDesigner.xml File Precedence Order [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

56 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section

The OBJECTS section of the DxDesigner.xml file defines the following: (The object names in
parentheses in the following list indicate UI labels.) NET, COMPONENT, ATTRIBUTE
(Property), LABEL (Name), PIN, BOX, LINE, CIRCLE, ARC, TEXT, WIRE, BUS,
WIRE_BUS, FRAME, POLYGON, DOCUMENT_CONTAINER, TABLE, and BLOCK.
Usage
<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />
For example:
<OBJECTS>
<object name="NET">
<key name="COLOR" value="0x00ff00"/>
<key name="FILL_STYLE" value="1"/>
<key name="LINE_STYLE" value="0"/>
<key name="SELECTABLE" value="1"/>
<key name="VISIBLE" value="1"/>
<key name="LINE_THICKNESS" value="1"/>
<key name="FILL_COLOR" value="0x00ff00"/>
</object>
...
</OBJECTS>

Arguments
• COLOR
Sets the color of each object using an RGB hex value. The default values for each defined
object are as follows:
0xffff00 — ATTRIBUTE (Property), BUS, LABEL (Name), WIRE, WIRE_BUS
0x00ffff — ARC, BOX, CIRCLE, COMPONENT, LINE, PIN, POLYGON, TEXT
0x9eb8cf — DOCUMENT_CONTAINER
0xff6820 — FRAME
0x00ff00 — NET
0x8b728f — BLOCK
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory)
• FILL_STYLE
Sets the fill style of each object using the following values:
0 — Hollow. Default for BOX, CIRCLE, COMPONENT,
DOCUMENT_CONTAINER, LINE, PIN, POLYGON, and WIRE.
1 — Solid. Default for BUS, NET, WIRE_BUS, and BLOCK.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 57

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

2 — Diagdn1
3 — Diagdn2
4 — Grey08
5 — Diagdn2
6 — Diagup1
7 — Horiz
8 — Vert
9 — Grid2
10 — Grid1
11 — X2
12 — X1
13 — Grey50
14 — Grey92
15 — Grey04
Fill style settings are not applicable (set to -1 by the design entry tool) to the following
objects: ARC, ATTRIBUTE (Property), FRAME, LABEL (Name), WIRE, and
TEXT.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)
• LINE_STYLE
Sets the line style of each object using the following values:
1— Dash
2 — Center
3 — Phantom
4 — Big dash
5 — Dot
6 — Dash-Dot
7 — Medium Dash
Line style settings are not applicable to the following objects:
ATTRIBUTE (Property), LABEL (Name), and TEXT.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)

58 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• SELECTABLE
Defines selection filter behavior as follows:
1 — The object is selectable. Default for BLOCK.
0 — The object is filtered from the selection and cannot be selected. Default for all
objects except BLOCK.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:View > Other Windows > Selection Filter
• VISIBLE
Sets object visibility state as follows:
0 — Not visible.
1 — Visible. Default for all objects.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:
o View > Other Windows > Selection Filter
o For ATTRIBUTE (Property) objects — Setup > Settings (menu item), Display
(category), Common Properties (option)
o For TEXT objects — Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Graphical
Text (option)
o For LABEL (Name) objects — Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category),
Name (option)
• LINE_THICKNESS
Sets line thickness to a value between 1 and 10.
1 — Thinnest line width. Default for all objects except BLOCK.
7 — Default for BLOCK.
10 — Thickest line width.
Line thickness settings are not applicable to the following objects: ATTRIBUTE (Property),
BUS, COMPONENT, DOCUMENT_CONTAINER, LABEL (Name), PIN, and TEXT
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory)
• FILL_COLOR
Sets the color of each object using an RGB hex value. The default value for each defined
object is set as follows:
o 0xffff00 — ATTRIBUTE (Property), BUS, LABEL (Name), WIRE, WIRE_BUS

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 59

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

o 0x00ffff — ARC, BOX, CIRCLE, COMPONENT, LINE, PIN, POLYGON, TEXT

o 0x9eb8cf — DOCUMENT_CONTAINER
o 0xff6820 — FRAME
o 0x00ff00 — NET
o 0xe7e5fa — BLOCK
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory)

60 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format - LAYERS Section

The LAYERS section of the DxDesigner.xml file defines the following: (The object names in
parentheses indicate UI labels.) SELECTION_LAYER, DYNAMIC_SELECTION_LAYER,
BORDER_LAYER, VALUE_LAYER, ANNOTATION_LAYER, HIGHLIGHT_LAYER,
BACKGROUND_LAYER, GRID_LAYER, DRAG_LAYER (Selection),
UNPLACEDCOMPONENT_LAYER, ZONES_LAYER (Border/Grid Zones),
ZONING_LAYER (Sheet Zoning Grid), CROSS_REFERENCE_LAYER
Usage
<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />
For example:
<LAYERS>
<layer name="SELECTION_LAYER">
<key name="COLOR" value="0xffffff"/>
<key name="FILL_STYLE" value="0"/>
<key name="LINE_STYLE" value="0"/>
</layer>
...
</LAYERS>

Arguments
• COLOR
Sets the color of each layer using an RGB hex value. The default values for each defined
layer are set as follows:
0xffffff — SELECTION_LAYER, ZONES_LAYER (Border/Grid Zones),
ZONING_LAYER (Sheet Zoning Grid)
0x00ffff — BORDER_LAYER
0xc0c0c0 — VALUE_LAYER, UNPLACEDCOMPONENT_LAYER
0xffff00 — ANNOTATION_LAYER,CROSS_REFERENCE_LAYER
0xff00ff — HIGHLIGHT_LAYER
0x000000 — BACKGROUND_LAYER
0x3a3a3a — GRID_LAYER
xffaaaa — DYNAMIC_SELECTION_LAYER
0x00ff00 — DRAG_LAYER (Selection)
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 61

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• FILL_STYLE
Sets the fill style of each layer using the following values:
0 — Hollow.
1 — Solid. Default for HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
2 — Diagdn1
3 — Diagdn2
4 — Grey08
5 — Diagdn2
6 — Diagup1
7 — Horiz
8 — Vert
9 — Grid2
10 — Grid1
11 — X2
12 — X1
13 — Grey50
14 — Grey92
15 — Grey04
Fill style settings are not applicable for any layers except the HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)
• LINE_STYLE
Sets the line style of each layer using the following values:
0 — Solid. Default for HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
1 — Dash
2 — Center
3 — Phantom
4 — Big dash
5 — Dot
6 — Dash-Dot
7 — Medium Dash
Line style settings are not applicable for any layers except the HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.

62 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 63

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format - ICTOBJECTS Section

The ICTOBJECTS section of the DxDesigner.xml file defines the following: (The object names
in parentheses indicate UI labels.) ICTBLOCK (View), ICTBUS, ICTCOMPONENT (Block),
ICTDIFFPAIR, ICTEDITCELL, ICTFPGA, ICTFUB (Editable Block), ICTGROUP,
ICTHIGHLIGHT_LAYER, ICTINVALIDCELL, ICTNET, ICTNETS (Global Net), ICTPIN,
ICTPORT, ICTSYMBOL.
Usage
<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />
For example:
<ICTOBJECTS>
<object name="ICTBLOCK">
<key name="COLOR" value="0xfffbf0"/>
<key name="TEXTCOLOR" value="0x000000"/>
</object>
...
</ICTOBJECTS>

Arguments
• COLOR
Sets the color of each object using an RGB hex value. The default values for each defined
object are as follows:
0xfffbf0 — Default for ICTBLOCK (View), ICTBUS, ICTCOMPONENT (Block),
ICTDIFFPAIR, ICTEDITCELL, ICTFPGA, ICTFUB (Editable Block), ICTNET,
ICTNETS (Global Net), ICTPIN, ICTPORT, ICTSYMBOL.
0xa6caf0 — Default for ICTGROUP.
0xffffce — Default for ICTHIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
0xb0b0b0 — Default for ICTINVALIDCELL.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), ICT (option)
• TEXTCOLOR
Sets the text color of each ICT object using an RGB hex value. The default value for all ICT
objects is as follows:
0x000000
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), ICT (option)

64 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format - SETTINGS Section

The SETTINGS section of the DxDesigner.xml file specifies general settings for the design
entry tool.
Usage
<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />
For example:
<SETTINGS>
<key name="ABSOLUTE_OATS" value="0"/>
<key name="ACTIVEWORKSPACE" value=""/>
<key name="ACTIVEWORKSPACESELECTIONTARGET" value="SCHEMATIC"/>
<key name="ADD_PROPERTIES_HINT_TAG" value="1"/>
<key name="ADD_PROPERTIES_HINT_TAG_TIMER" value="0"/>
<key name="ADISTANCE" value="20"/>
<key name="ADISTANCE_HR" value="508000"/>
<key name="STAGGER_DISTANCE_HR" value="908000"/>
<key name="ADVANCED_BOARD_MANAGEMENT" value="0"/>
</SETTINGS>

Arguments
• ABSOLUTE_OATS
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ADD_PROPERTIES_HINT_TAG
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ADD_PROPERTIES_HINT_TAG_TIMER
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ADISTANCE
Obsolete. Use ADISTANCE_HR.
• ADISTANCE_HR
Avoidance distance - high resolution. (Available only when Avoidance Routing is active:
=2.) Sets the minimum distance between nets and components or other nets.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 5.08mm
or 0.20in appears in the file as 508000 (5.08mm * 100,000).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Avoidance Distance (option)
• ANALOG_SIMULATION_MODE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 65

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• ANNO_CONDENSED_SEP
If the ANNO_USE_CONDENSED option is on (value=1), then you can specify the
separator (default = /) used between multiple link designators when a link goes to more than
one destination such as: 3-G4/D10/G9.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Condensed Separator (option)
• ANNO_DISABLE_ON_PORTS
Sets whether cross reference data is annotated onto the hierarchical ports of a hierarchical
design, as follows:
0 — Annotate cross reference data.
1 — Do not annotate cross reference data (Disable).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Disable Annotations On Ports (option)
• ANNO_LOC_OFFSET_X
Sets cross reference annotation text X-offset placement based on the annotation origin point
in the specified units. A positive number offsets the text to the right, a negative number
offsets the text to the left. Default: 0.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. A value of 1.143e+006 sets
the offset to 11.43mm, or .45in.
Can be set to Read-only?: Yes
To access from the GUI:Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), X-Offset (option)
• ANNO_LOC_OFFSET_Y
Sets cross reference annotation text Y-offset placement based on the annotation origin point
in the specified units. A positive number offsets the text vertically up, a negative number
offsets the text vertically down. Default: 0.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 762000 sets the offset to 7.62mm, or .3in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Y-Offset (option)
• ANNO_LOC_SPACING
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.

66 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• ANNO_MAX_LENGTH
Sets the maximum length (in characters) of the cross reference annotation. Default: 20.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Max Line Length (option)
• ANNO_ORIGIN
Sets the cross reference annotation text origin point (or none) for the as one of the following:
0 — None. Default.
1 — Upper left
2 — Middle left
3 — Lower left
4 — Upper center
5 — Middle center
6 — Lower center
7 — Upper right
8 — Middle right
9 — Lower right
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Annotation Origin (option)
• ANNO_SEP
Specifies a separator that appears between multiple cross-reference link designators when a
link goes to more than one destination such as 2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS. Default: semi-colon
(“;”).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Separator (option)
• ANNO_SIZE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ANNO_SIZE_HR
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ANNO_USE_CONDENSED
Sets the cross reference annotation text to use either condensed format or non-condensed
format when a link points to multiple destinations. Default: condensed format.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 67

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

0 — Display verbose, non-condensed cross reference links to a given sheet.

1 — Condense cross reference links to a given sheet. Default.
For example, based on the link destinations: 2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS. Turning on this option
(value=1) condenses the three entries that all go to page 3, as follows: 2-B7;3-G4/D10/G9.
Note that you set the condensed separator with the ANNO_CONDENSED_SEP setting
which in this example is set to “/” (the default).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Allow Condensed Annotations (option)
• ANNO_XREF_SUB_BUSES
Sets whether cross-reference data is annotated onto sub-buses connected to links, as
follows:
0 — Do not annotate cross-reference data.
1 — Annotate cross-reference data.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Cross-Reference sub-buses for Links (option)
• AREA_SELECTION_OVERLAP
Sets whether objects need to be completely enclosed in an area select operation to be
selected.
0 — The selection area must completely enclose an object in order for the object to be
included in a selection. Default.
1 — The selection area need only enclose a portion of an object for the object to be
included in a selection.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Area Select
by Overlap (option)
For more information, see the following:
“Selecting Schematic Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• ATTR_ON_SPLIT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ATTRON
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• AUTOHIDE_SCHEMATIC_PANANDZOOM
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.

68 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• AUTOLABELING_NETS
Controls whether the design entry tool names new nets automatically, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not name nets automatically. Default.
1 — The design entry tool names nets automatically based on the rules described in the
following:
“Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Name New Nets Automatically (option)
• AUTOLABELING_BUSES
Controls whether the design entry tool names new buses automatically, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not name buses automatically. Default.
1 — The design entry tool names buses automatically based on the rules described in the
following:
“Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Name New Buses Automatically (option)
• AUTO_CONNECT_NEW_TAP
Sets the ICT power supply tap autoconnect behavior, as follows:
0 — Turn off power supply tap autoconnect.
1 — If set prior to placing a tap in an Interconnectivity Table(Add > Poweror
Add > Ground), creates the connection to the corresponding global net (given by the
value of the tap symbol property “Global Signal Name”). The global net is eventually
added if it does not already exist. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Power supply tap autoconnect (option)
• AUTO_RIPPER_BUS_SEGMENT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• AUTO_RIPPER_BUS_SEGMENT_LENGTH_HR
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• AUTO_TEXT_ORIEN
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 69

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• AUTOLOG
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• AUTOMATICALLY_PROPAGATE_NET_NAMES
Controls the behavior of connector pin naming when connecting a net to a connector, as
follows:
0 — You can use different names between nets and associated connectors. Default.
1 — The design entry tool automatically synchronizes the net name with the connector
pin name no matter which name changes.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category),
Automatically synchronize on-sheet/off-links and net names (option)
• AUTOMATICALLY_SYNCHRONIZE_FUB_PORT_NAME_TYPE
Note
You must have a special component defined for any Pin Type that you want to use as
a port.

Controls the behavior of port symbol synchronization, as follows:

0 — Changing the Pin Type value of a pin on a local symbol representing hierarchy does
not automatically change the port symbol on the underlying schematic. You must
handle the port symbol change manually.
1 — Changing the Pin Type value of a pin on a local symbol representing hierarchy
automatically changes the port symbol on the underlying schematic. (See Figure 1-8
on page 55.) Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category),
Automatically synchronize FUB pin and associated port name and type (option)
• AUTOPAN
Controls schematic panning, as follows:
0 — Does not automatically pan screen when dragging a component to an edge of the
schematic.
1 — Automatically pans the screen when dragging a component. This eliminates the
need for using F6 to pan each time you move an object. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Auto Pan
(option)

70 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• BEGIN_NETS_IN_SPACE
Controls how nets are places on the schematic, as follows:
0 — Nets can only start at a component pin or at a junction with another net.
1 — Enables nets to start anywhere. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
• BELL
Obsolete.
• BIGCROSS
Obsolete.
• BITNUMBERS
Control the display of bit numbers on a ripped bus, as follows:
0 — Do not show bit numbers on a ripped bus. Default.
1 — Show bit numbers on a ripped bus.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Show
Ripper Indexes (option)
• BLOCKTYPE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• BORDERON
Controls the visibility of the schematic border shown in Figure 2-56 on page 331. This is not
referring to a border symbol.
0 — Hides the schematic border.
1 — Displays the schematic border. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Border
(option)
• BORDERZONES
Controls the visibility of the schematic zoning grid border label shown in Figure 2-56 on
page 331.
0 — Hides the zoning grid border label. Default.
1 — Displays the zoning grid border label.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Zone Labels
(section), Border (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 71

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• BOXSIZE
Obsolete. Use BOX_SIZE_HR.
• BOXSIZE_HR
Sets the drawing size (radius) of all boxes on dangling joints.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 127000
sets the size to 1.27mm, or 0.050in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Box Size
[<Units>] (option)
• BUBBLESIZE
Obsolete. Use BUBBLESIZE_HR.
• BUBBLESIZE_HR
Sets the size of the bubble on inverted pins.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 127000
sets the size to 1.27mm, or 0.050in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Inverted
Pin Bubble Size [<Units>] (option)
• BUS
Obsolete.
• BUS_DOTSIZE
Obsolete. Use BUS_DOTSIZE_HR.
• BUS_DOTSIZE_HR
Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net solder dots.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 305000 sets the size to 3.05mm, or 0.120in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item) Advanced (category), Bus Dot
Size [<Units>] (option)
• BUS_MODE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• BUSWIDTH
Obsolete. Use the LINE_THICKNESS option in the BUS object in the OBJECTS section.

72 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• BUSWIDTH_HR
Obsolete. Use the LINE_THICKNESS option in the BUS object in the OBJECTS section.
• CHANGE_TO_ALLOW_MULTIPLE_TYPES
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CHECK_COMP_DATES
Controls the design entry tool behavior with out-of-date symbols, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not flag out-of-date symbols.
1 — Enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date symbols. The software compares
the symbol in the host design and central library to ensure they are the same. If the
time/date stamp of the symbol is different from that in the host design, the design
entry tool places a magenta box around the out-of-date symbol. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Flag out-
of-date symbols (option)
• CHECK_REUSEBLOCK_DATES
Controls the design entry tool behavior with out-of-date managed blocks, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not flag out-of-date managed blocks. Default.
1 — Enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date managed blocks. The software
compares the managed block in the host design and central library to ensure they are
the same. If the time/date stamp of the managed block symbol is different from that in
the host design, the design entry tool places a magenta box around the out-of-date
managed block.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Flag out-
of-date Managed Blocks (option)
• COARSE_GRID
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• COMPONENT_TOOLTIPS
Controls the visibility of component tooltips (labels and properties) on schematics, as
follows:
0 — Hide component tooltips.
1 — Display component tooltips. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Show tooltips
(section), Components (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 73

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• COMPTEXTON
Sets symbol text visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — Hide symbol text.
1 — Display symbol text on schematics. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Symbol Text
(option)
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONTEXT_WINDOW
Obsolete.
• CONTINUE_ROLLBACK_DECISION
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONTINUE_REMOVE_ALL_BACKUPS_DECISION
Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current
project.
0 — Provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current project. Default.
4 — Do not provide warning.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
• CONTINUE_REMOVE_BOARD_BACKUPS_DECISION
Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current
board.
0 — Provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current board. Default.
4 — Do not provide warning.

74 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
• CONTINUE_REMOVE_SHEET_BACKUPS_DECISION
Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all current sheet backups.
0 — Provide a warning before deleting all current sheet backups. Default.
4 — Do not provide warning.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
• COPY_CONSTRAINTS_ON_COPY_BLOCK
Controls whether the tool copies constraints along with schematic data, as follows:
0 — Only schematic data is copied.
1 — The design entry tool copies constraints data during Copy Block and Copy Sheet
operations. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Sheet/ICT
Backup, Copy Constraints on Copy Sheet (option)
• COPY_CONSTRAINTS_OVERWRITES_VALUES
Controls whether constraints overwrite existing values during Copy Block and Copy Sheet
operations, as follows:
0 — Constraints do not overwrite existing constraints values in the project to which the
tool copies a block or sheet.
1 — Constraints overwrite existing constraint values in the project to which a block or
sheet is copied. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Copy
Constraints Overwrites All Values (option)
• COPY_CONSTRAINTS_USING_CRM
Controls Constraint Manager invocation method when you paste a sheet in the design entry
tool, as follows:
0 — The Constraint Manager tool does not open automatically in Conflict Resolution
Manager (CRM) when you paste a sheet in the design entry tool. Default.
1 — The Constraint Manager tool opens automatically in Conflict Resolution Manager
(CRM) when you paste a sheet in the design entry tool.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Copy and
Paste Sheet using Conflict Resolution (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 75

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• CROSS_REFERENCE_SIZE_HR
Sets the size of cross reference text. Default: 381000.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 381000 sets the offset to 3.81mm, or .15in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Text Size (option)
• CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_NAMES
Stores the schematic editor selection filter’s Custom Filter names.
This key name consists of multiple <value> lines, one corresponding to each custom filter
<value> line listed in the CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_OBJECTS. The first <value>
line corresponds to the first line listed in the Custom Selection Filter Objects list, the second
<value> line corresponds to the second item listed in the Custom Selection Filter Objects
list, and so on.

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Selection Filters (subcategory)
For more information, see CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_OBJECTS.

76 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_OBJECTS
Controls the custom selection filter settings represented by the following values:

This key name consists of multiple <value> lines; one line per custom filter listed in the
CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_NAMES (Custom Filters) list. The first <value> line
corresponds to the first item listed in the Custom Filter list, the second <value> line
corresponds to the second item listed in the Custom Filter list, and so on.
For each <value> line, activate the objects you want in that particular filter by adding the
appropriate values, separated by spaces (see the following default custom filter definitions).
Default Custom Filter Definitions:
<value>0 1 3 4</value> (Graphics)
<value>5 7 9 26 27</value> (Objects)
<value>2 6 8</value> (Text)

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Selection Filters (subcategory)
For more information, see CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_NAMES.
• CROSSCURSOR
Set the appearance of the schematic crosshair cursor as one of the following:
0 — None. Default.
1 — Small.
2 — Full Extent.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Crosshair
Cursor (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 77

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• DATETIME_FORMAT
Set the @DATETIME property format using the following variables and separator
characters (most common are / and : ):
%d — day
%m — month
%Y — year as four digits
%y — year as two digits
%H — hour
%M — minutes
%S — seconds
Default: %d/%m/%Y:%H:%M
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Date Format
(dropdown list option)
• DB_AUTO_BACKUP
Controls whether sheets and ICTs are backed up each time you open them.
0 — Do not backup sheets and ICTs. Default.
1 — Backup sheets and ICTs each time you open them.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
See also: DB_BACKUPS_LIMIT
• DB_BACKUPS_LIMIT
Set the number of sheet/ICT backups to save before overwriting them. The tool uses this
option if DB_AUTO_BACKUP is set to 1 (on). Set the value to between 4 and 20. If you
keep the default of 0, the design entry tool saves all backups without overwriting older ones.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
See also: DB_AUTO_BACKUP
• DB_ERR_VERBOSE
Sets the SCH/SYM parser database validation to display one of the following in the design
entry tool:
0 — Tallies the number of messages when done reading the design.
1 — Generates all error/warning messages. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

78 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• DBOXON
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• DEFAULT_VALUE_UPPER
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• DEFAULT_ZOOM
Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the PADS Designer configuration:
0 — Turns off the PADS Designer style pan and zoom.
1 — Turns on the PADS Designer style pan and zoom. Default.
Note
The tool uses this setting in conjunction with EXPEDITION_ZOOM and
PADS_ZOOM. Only one of these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory)
For more information, see the following:
“Panning and Zooming Default-Style” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• DEFMETHOD
Sets the behavior of border symbol placement on new schematic sheets as one of the
following:
0 — Does not place user-configured border symbol on new schematic sheets.
1 — Places a user-configured border symbol on new schematics. This symbol can be
from any location in the search order. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Enable user-configurable border symbols (option)
• DEFSHEET
Sets the following Border Sheet option as one of the following:
0 — Do not automatically add a border to new schematic sheets. Default.
1 — Automatically add a hardwired border schematic from a required location on new
schematics.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Automatically add border to new schematic sheets (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 79

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• DEF_USESHEET1
If DEFMETHOD=1, this setting lets you choose to use either the same user-configurable
border for all sheets, or a different border for the first sheet in a design, as follows:
0 — Do not use the sheet 1 border for new sheets. Default.
1 — Use the sheet 1 border for new sheets.
Rules:
o This setting has no effect on a top level schematic. You use this setting to specify
which border to use on the first sheet of a new schematic when you push into a
composite component.
o If you select this setting, the tool uses the border specified in Border for Sheet 1 on
the first sheet of the underlying schematic.
o If you clear this setting (value=0), the tool uses the border specified in Border for
Sheet 2-N on all sheets, including sheet 1.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Use sheet 1 border for underlying schematics (option)
• DETAIL
Controls how the design capture tool displays objects during object manipulation operations
as one of the following:
0 — The design capture tool displays a bounding box, which represents the object until
the operation is complete.
1 — The design capture tool continually displays objects while you are performing
operations, such as: adding, pasting, moving, copying, or rotating. Default.
Tip: Leaving this option on (value=1) slows down object movement. If you find the speed
of object operations slow, change this option setting.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
• DISPLAY_FULL_SIGNAL_NAME_ON_RIPPER
Controls how the design entry tool displays net names when you rip nets from a bus, as
follows:
o 0 — Displays only the ripper index value. Default.

80 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

o 1 — Displays the full net name of the ripped net.

Prerequisite:
BITNUMBERS=1 must be set before you can display the ripped net name.
For more information, see the following:
“Connectivity With Buses” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Use Full
Bus Name on Ripper (option)
• DISPLAY_REUSEBLOCK_WORK
Obsolete.
• DOTSIZE
Obsolete. Use DOTSIZE_HR.
• DOTSIZE_HR
Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net connection dots. The design entry tool determines
the connection dot size from the radius setting and the net linewidth.
You need to enter a radius value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of
63500 sets the increment to 0.635mm, or 0.025in.
If the net has a linewidth=1, the design entry tool displays the connection dot using the
radius value (0.025” in the second example in the following figure.)
If the net has a linewidth>1, the design entry tool increases the connection dot size
according to the net size. The design entry tool adds the radius value to the net line edge as
shown in the first example in the following figure:

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 81

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Dot Size
[<Units>] (option)
• DOTSIZE_THREE_SEGMENTS
Obsolete.
• DOTSIZE_THREE_SEGMENTS_HR
Obsolete.
• DXD_ALTERA_EXECUTABLE_OATH
Specifies the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable. Default: null string (“ ”).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Altera Executable Path (option)
• DXD_CLEAR_LIBRARY_BEFORE_INIT
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — You do not need to run the Simulation > Clean command ( ) manually
before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
False — Before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation, you need to run the
Simulation > Clean command manually. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Delete Design Units from HDL Design
(option)
• DXD_COMPILE_BEFORE_INIT
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — You do not need to run the Simulation > Compile command ( ) manually
before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
False — Before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation you need to run the
Simulation > Compile command manually. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Compile Files (option)
• DXD_CURRENT_FPGA_TOOL
Specifies which FPGA tool you want to execute (Xilinx or Altera). Default: null string (“ ”).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Current Tool (option)

82 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• DXD_DIAGNOSTICS_RUN_ON_CLOSE
Sets the design entry tool to run the automatic Diagnostics tool when the session exits.
0 — Does not run the Diagnostics tool. Default.
1 — Runs the Diagnostics tool when the design entry tool closes.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Diagnostics (category), Execute
Diagnostics on exit (option)
• DXD_ENABLE_EXTERNAL_EDITOR
Controls the design entry tool edit mode if the <proj_name>.prj file specifies a valid
DedicatedServerName, as follows:
False — Sets the session so that the first designer to open a sheet does not get read-write
access to the sheet. The sheet opens in read-only mode. The first designer who clicks
the Click to Edit button gets read-write access to the sheet.
True — Sets the session so that the first designer to open a sheet gets read-write access.
Any subsequent designer opening the same sheet gets read-only access.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Enable edit
mode for opened sheets (option), or Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA
Integration (category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Use External Text Editor
(option)
For more information, see “The Multi-User Environment” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
• DXD_ENABLE_START_PAGE
Controls whether the PADS Designer Start Page displays when you invoke the tool, as
follows:
0 — Does not display the Start Page.
1 — Displays the Start Page. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• DXD_EXPORT_BEFORE_INIT
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — You do not need to run the Simulation > Export HDL Files command ( )
manually before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
False — Before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation you must run
Simulation > Export HDL Files manually. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Export HDL Files (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 83

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• DXD_EXPORT_BEFORE_TOOL_LAUNCH
Controls whether to export HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA tool, as follows:
True — Exports HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA Tool the Launch FPGA
tool.
False — Does not export HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA tool. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Export Before Launch (option)
• DXD_EXTERNAL_EDITOR_EXECUTABLE
If the DXD_ENABLE_EXTERNAL_EDITOR setting is set to True, use this setting to
provide a path to your own text editor instead of using the one the design entry tool
provides. Default: null string (“ ”).
In addition to the path to the executable, include the parameter $(File) as in the following
example to enable the design entry tool to start the editor on the correct HDL file:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File)

If your text editor invocation supports a second argument to invoke on a specific line
number, you can add the argument $(Line) as in the following example:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File) $(Line)

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Executable File and Parameters (option)
• DSD_HDL_EXPORT_FOLDER
Sets the name of the export folder. Default: Exported.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL
(subcategory), Export Folder (option)
• DXD_HDL_EXPORT_LANGUAGE
Sets the default export language as one of the following:
0 — VHDL. Default.
1 — Verilog
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL
(subcategory), Default Export Language (option)
• DXD_ML_OBJECT_REFERENCES
This setting works with aproject.

84 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Use this setting to compute values of Function or Location or Product ID properties in

different formats, as follows:
0 — PADS Designer computes values in single-level format.
1 — PADS Designer computes values in multi-level format. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Multi-
Level Object References (option)
• DXD_ML_OBJECT_REFERENCES_SHORT_NOT
This setting works with aproject.
If DXD_ML_OBJECT_REFERENCES is set to value=1, this option controls the following:
0 — The design entry tool does not use shorthand notation.
1 — The design entry tool uses shorthand notation. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Multi-
Level Object References Use Shorthand Notation (option)
• DXD_MODELSIM_EXECUTABLE_PATH
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• DXD_OVERWRITE_TOOL_FILES_LIST
Controls whether to overwrite the tool files list before running the Launch FPGA tool, as
follows:
True — Prepares the project file in the FPGA tool with the HDL file list when you run
the Launch FPGA tool.
False — Does not overwrite tools HDL file list when you run the Launch FPGA tool.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Overwrite Tool Files List (option)
• DXD_SIMULATOR_EXECUTABLE
Sets the path to the ModelSim® folder that contains the executable. Default = null string
(“”).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), ModelSim Executable Path (field)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 85

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• DXD_SIMULATOR_USE_EXTERNAL
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — Use the ModelSim User Interface (UI) to set up and run the simulation instead
of the PADS Designer UI.
False — PADS Designer provides a dialog box to set up and run the simulation. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Use External ModelSim (option)
• DXD_XILINX_EXECUTABLE_PATH
Enter the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable. Default = null string (“”)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Xilinx Executable Path (option)
• DXDB_HIDE_CL_VIEW
Controls whether the central library view is visible in Databook when a .dbc configuration
file is loaded:
0 — The central library view is visible in Databook. Default.
1 — The central library view is not visible in Databook.
Can be set to Read-only? No
• DXDLITE_SHOW_EXPIRATION_WARNING_LEVEL
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• DXDIAG_ON_DB_UPGRADE
Controls the design entry tool behavior before opening a project that was created with an
earlier version of PADS Designer, as follows:
0 — Do not run Tools > Diagnostics before opening an updated project. Default.
1 — Before opening a project that was created with an earlier version of
PADS Designer, PADS Designer automatically runs Tools > Diagnostics after
successfully updating the project to the current version of PADS Designer.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Run
Diagnostics after update (option)
• DYNAMIC_PANNING
Controls dynamic panning, as follows:
0 — Do not use middle mouse button to pan the schematic.
1 — Use middle mouse button to pan the schematic. Default.

86 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? No.

• DYNAMIC_PLOTSIZE
Obsolete.
• DYNAMIC_XY
Controls component coordinate updating, as follows:
0 — Does not dynamically update component coordinates on the status bar during a
component move. This setting may improve performance slightly.
1 — Dynamically updates component coordinates on the status bar when moving a
component. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• EURO_ARROWS
This option is used in conjunction with option PINTYPE_ARROWS to set the appearance
of pintype arrows between full arrow and half arrow (European) style, as follows:
None.........(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “0”, EURO_ARROWS, not applicable)
Full Size....(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “0”)
Half Size...(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “1”)
Default for EURO_ARROWS: 0.
Notes:
o The design entry tool only displays pintype arrows for symbols that have block types
of Module and Composite. The design entry tool does not display pintype arrows for
a block type of Pin.
o If a pintype does not exist on the symbol pin, the design entry tool does not display
Pintype Arrows.
Different pin types are represented by different arrows. A list of these are shown in the
PINTYPE/Arrow Type Examples table in the topic “Settings Dialog Box - Advanced” on
page 403.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Pintype
Arrows (option)
• EURO_DATE
Obsolete. Use DATETIME_FORMAT
• EXPEDITION_ZOOM
Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the layout tool configuration:
0 — Turns off PADS Layout tool style pan and zoom.
1 — Turns on the PADS Layout style pan and zoom. Default.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 87

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Note
This setting is used in conjunction with DEFAULT_ZOOM and PADS_ZOOM.
Only one of these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory)
For more information, see the following:
“Panning and Zooming Xpedition Layout-Style” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• FIXED_TEXT_ROTATION
Controls the design entry tool text rotation behavior, as follows:
0 — (Off) The design entry tool handles text rotation as shown in the following example
on the right. For each rotation of the text (90, 180, and 270 degrees), the orientation is
changed as shown.
1 — (On) The design entry tool handles text rotation as shown in the following example
on the left. Rotating the text 180 degrees maintains the original orientation. Rotating
the “Text” string either 90 or 270 degrees produces the results shown in the example
on the left. Default.

Note
If you change the setting from On to Off after you have added text, any text
appearing in the 180 degree state or the 270 degree state (as shown on the left in the
example above) changes to the equivalent state as shown at the right in the example
when you apply the new setting.

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Fixed Text
Rotation (option)
• FUBPINTYPEON
Internal Use. Do not modify.

88 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• GRC_DESIGN_SCOPE
Sets the Graphical Rule Checker scope as one of the following:
Project. Default.
Board
Schematic
Sheet
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: GRC button ( )
• GRC_ISSUE_SCOPE
Configures the Graphical Rules Checker rule defaults that appear in the Setup > Settings
menu item, Graphical Rules Checker category. The construction of each line is, as
follows:
<value> 0 (checked) or 1 (unchecked): {rule_name}:{severity}:{value} </value>
The following shows the default settings:
<key name="GRC_ISSUE_SCOPE">
<value>1:Net overlap:Note</value>
<value>0:Object overlap:Note</value>
<value>1:Net off grid:Note</value>
<value>1:Pin off grid:Note</value>
<value>1:Text owner:Note:1.2in</value>
<value>1:Text alignment:Note</value>
</key>

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Graphical Rules Checker
(category)
• GRID_HIGHLIGHT_INTERVAL
Internal Use. Do not modify.
• GRID_HIGHLIGHT_MARKS
Internal Use. Do not modify.
• GRID_HIGHLIGHT_MARKS_INTERVAL
If GRIDON= 1 and GRID_HIGHLIGHT_MARKS= 1, this sets a grid highlight interval
(default = 10, meaning that for every ten grid units, a highlight mark displays).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• GRID_HR
Sets the grid display space increment for the active schematic or symbol window.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 89

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

The default value of 254000 sets the increment to 2.54mm, or 0.1in.

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Grid Spacing (option)
• GRIDON
Sets the schematic grid visibility, as follows:
0 — Grid is not displayed.
1 — Grid is displayed. Default.
If the grid is displayed, the LINE_GRID (Grid Type) setting determines how the grid
appears (dotted or lined).
Also see SNAP_TO_GRID_ON.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Display Grid (option)
• GRIDZONES
Turns on or off the schematic zone labels as shown in Figure 2-56 on page 331, as follows:
0 — Turns off zone labels. Default.
1 — Turns on zone labels.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Zone Labels
(section), Left-Top Corner of Each Zone (option)
• HATS
Internal use. Do not modify.
• ICE_AUTOFIT
Sets ICT autofit on or off, as follows:
0 — Turn autofit off.
1 — Turn autofit on. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Autofit Automatically (option)
• ICE_CELLS_SHOW_DIRECTION
Sets the ICT cell display characteristics for direction, as follows:
0 — Do not display direction. Default.
1 — Display direction.

90 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Cells display, Direction (option)
• ICE_CELLS_SHOW_NAME
Obsolete.
• ICE_CELLS_SHOW_PIN_NUMBER
Sets the ICT cell display characteristics for pin numbers, as follows:
0 — Do not display pin numbers. Default.
1 — Display pin numbers.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Cells display (section), Pin number (option)
• ICE_COMPONENTS_IN_COLUMNS
Sets the ICT components to display in one of the following configurations:
0 — Show components in rows, nets in columns
1 — Show components in columns, nets in rows.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Show components in (option)
• ICE_PINSDROPDOWN_LIST_SHOW_DIRECTION
Sets the ICT pin dropdown list to display pin direction, as follows:
0 — Do not display pin numbers.
1 — Display pin numbers. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Pins dropdown list display (section), Direction (option)
• ICE_PINSDROPDOWN_LIST_SHOW_NAME
Obsolete.
• ICE_PINSDROPDOWN_LIST_SHOW_PIN_NUMBER
Sets the ICT pin dropdown list to display pin numbers, as follows:
0 — Do not display pin numbers. Default.
1 — Display pin numbers.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 91

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Pins dropdown list display (section), Pin number (option)
• ICE_SLICEANDDICE_NETS_SHOW_MODE
Sets the ICT Slice and Dice nets choices as one of the following:
0 — Show only nets connected between the components of Slice and Dice. Default.
1 — Show nets connected between and to the components of Slice and Dice.
2 — Show all nets.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Slice and Dice (subcategory)
• ICE_SYMBOL_FORMAT
Select how Symbol label(s) appear in the Interconnectivity Table using any combination of
the following variables:
$(Name)
$(Symbol)
$(Ref Designator)
Default: $(Name)$(Symbol).
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, and
colon.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Symbol label format (option)
• ICT_HIDE_NOTCOMMON_PRP
Show only common properties in ICT viewer.
0 — Shows all properties. Default.
1 — Shows only common properties.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Properties (subcategory), Show Common Properties Only (checkbox)
• IMPORT_PADSPE_CL_PATH
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• KEYBINDINGS
Control the design entry tool key bindings, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool uses default key bindings.

92 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

1 — The design entry tool uses PADS Layout-style Key Bindings. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Xpedition
Style Keybindings (option)
For more information, see “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on page 427.
• LABELBRACKETS
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• LABELON
Obsolete
• LABELTHRESHOLD
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• LABEL_ON_SPLIT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• LANGUAGE
Set the User Interface language to one of the following:
Default
ENG — English
JPN — Japanese
PTB — Portuguese
CHN — Chinese
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Language
(option)
• LINE_GRID
If GRIDON is set to 1, LINE_GRID sets the active schematic or symbol window grid
display, as follows:
Dotted — Grid is displayed as dotted lines.
Lined — Grid is displayed as solid lines. Default.
The grid lines or dots display as one line per grid interval defined by GRID_HR (Grid
Spacing).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Grid Type (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 93

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• LONG_LINE_ERRORS
Set the maximum number of characters allowed in an error/warning message.
Default: 127
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• MIDSTROKE
If STROKES is on (value=1), this setting determines which mouse button you use to draw
predefined patterns in the schematic window to execute commands or functions, as follows:
0 — You draw strokes with the right mouse button. Default.
1 — You draw strokes with the middle mouse button.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory)
• MRU_SCHEMA
Points to the last-saved user color scheme. The project reopens to this scheme.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Save (option)
• MRU_SETTINGS
The design entry tool stores the last-viewed Setup > Settings dialog box pane, as follows:
<key name=”MRU_SETTINGS” value=”<pane_name>”/>

The next time you open the Setup > Settings dialog box, this pane is selected.
Default: Designs
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• MRU_SIZE
Sets the maximum number of Most Recently Used items displayed in the list.
Default: 6
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• NAMESON
Obsolete.
• NAV_BLOCK_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Controls filtering for blocks and schematics in the Navigator, as follows:
0 — Display all blocks or schematics (Wildcard).
1 — Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the displayed list. Default.

94 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: From the Navigator window, right-click block or schematic, then
click Filter
• NAV_BLOCK_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Sets the block info tip format in the Navigator window using any combination of the
following variables:
$(Name)
$(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon, and so on.
Default: $(View): $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)
• NAV_BLOCK_LABEL_FORMAT
Sets the block label format in the Navigator window using any combination of the following
variables:
$(Name). Default.
$(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, and
colon.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Label format (option)
• NAV_BLOCK_SHEET_RANGE_DISPLAY
Controls whether the Navigator window shows the sheet range of each block, as follows:
0 — Does not display the sheet range of each block in the Navigator window. Default.
1 — Displays the sheet range of each block in the Navigator window.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Display sheet range (option)
• NAV_BLOCK_SORT_DESCENDING
Controls the way blocks or schematics are sorted in the Navigation window according to the
chosen property as one of the following choices:
0 — Ascending. Default.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 95

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

1 — Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Right-click schematic node, and then choose Sort > Ascending
or Descending (menu item)
• NAV_BLOCK_SORT_ORDER_BY
Controls the way the Navigator window sorts blocks or schematics, as follows:
0 — Name. Default.
1 — View.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Right-click a schematic node, and then choose Sort > Name or
View (popup menu item)
• NAV_BOARD_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BOARD_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BOARD_LABEL_FORMAT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BOARD_SORT_ORDER_BY
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BUS_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Sets the format of the info-tip for bus objects in the Navigator window.
Values: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: Bus: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Bus info Tip format (option)
• NAV_BUS_LABLE_FORMAT
Sets the bus label format in the Navigator window using any combination of the following
variables:
$(Name). Default.
$(Path)
$(Type)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon, and so on.

96 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Bus label format (option)
• NAV_CABLE_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_CABLE_SORT_ORDER_BY
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_COMP_DISPLAY_MODE
Sets how the Navigator displays component symbols, as follows:
0 — Display all component symbols. Default.
1 — Display hierarchical only.
2 — Do not display component symbols.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Symbols
(subcategory), Display all components, Display hierarchical only, or Don’t display
components (options).
• NAV_COMP_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Controls filtering for symbol nodes in the Navigator window, as follows:
0 — Display all symbols (Wildcard). Default.
1 — Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the displayed list.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: From the Navigator window, right-click a symbol, and then
choose the Filter (menu item)
• NAV_COMP_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Configures the symbol info-tip in the Navigator using predefined variables and formatting
characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.
Variables: $(Custom), $(Name), $(Symbol), $(Type), $(Path), $(Ref Designator)
Default: $(Name) $(Symbol)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Symbols
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)
• NAV_COMP_LABEL_FORMAT
Configures symbol label in the Navigator window using predefined variables and formatting
characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 97

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Variables: $(Custom), $(Name), $(Symbol), $(Type), $(Path)

Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Symbols
(subcategory), Label format (option)
• NAV_COMP_SORT_DESCENDING
Controls the symbols sort order (either descending or ascending) in the Navigator window,
as follows:
0 — Ascending. Default.
1 — Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a component,
and then choose Sort > Descending (menu item)
• NAV_COMP_SORT_ORDER_BY
Controls the way symbol/component nodes are sorted in the Navigator window using one of
the following values:
0 — Custom.
1 — Name. Default.
2 — Symbol.
3 — Type.
4 — Path.
5 — Ref Designator.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Right-click on a symbol node, and then choose the Sort (popup
menu item)
• NAV_DISPLAY_SHEETS
Depending on which selection you choose, this option displays icons (shown in the
following figure) for each sheet and composite node within a design in the Navigator tree, as
follows:
0 — Always
1 — Only if there is more than one
2 — Never

98 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Display sheets (option)
• NAV_FLAT_VIEW
Controls how the design entry tool displays blocks in the Navigator window as one of the
following:
0 — Hierarchical view format. Default.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 99

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

1 — Flat view format.

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Hierarchical view or Flatten view (options)
• NAV_FUNCTIONBLOCK_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Obsolete.
• NAV_FUNCTIONBLOCK_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Obsolete
• NAV_FUNCTIONBLOCK_LABEL_FORMAT
Obsolete
• NAV_FUNCTIONBLOCK_SORT_DESCENDING
Obsolete
• NAV_FUNCTIONBLOCK_SORT_ORDER_BY
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_DOCUMENTBLOCK_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_DOCUMENTBLOCK_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_DOCUMENTBLOCK_LABEL_FORMAT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_DOCUMENTBLOCK_SORT_DESCENDING
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_DOCUMENTBLOCK_SORT_ORDER_BY
Internal use only. Do not modify.

100 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• NAV_NET_DISPLAY
Controls Navigator window display of nets and buses, as follows:
0 — Does not display nets and buses.
1— Does display nets and buses. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Display nets and buses (option)
• NAV_NET_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Controls filtering for nets in the Navigator window, as follows:
0 — Display all symbols (Wildcard). Default.
1 — Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the displayed list.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: In the Navigator window, right-click a net, and then choose the
Filter (menu item)
• NAV_NET_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Configures the nets info-tip format in the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: Net: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Net info tip format (option)
• NAV_NET_LABEL_FORMAT
Configures the nets label format in the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Net label format (option)
• NAV_NET_SORT_DESCENDING
Sets the nets and buses sorting order in the Navigator window, as follows:
0 — Ascending. Default.
1 — Descending.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 101

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a net, and then
select the Sort (menu item).
• NAV_NET_SORT_ORDER_BY
Sets the nets and buses sorting order in the Navigator window based on one of the following
values:
0 — Name. Default.
1 — Type.
2 — Path.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a net, and then
choose the Sort > Name, Type, or Path (menu item).
• NAV_SHEET_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Sets the sheet info tip format in the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Number)
Default: $(Number): $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)
• NAV_SHEET_LABEL_FORMAT
Sets the sheet label format in the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Number)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Label format (option)
• NAV_SHOW_REPLACE_SHEET_WARNING
Controls whether the design entry tool displays a warning before replacing selected sheets
during a copy in the Navigator, as follows:
0 — Do not provide Warning before replacing selected sheets.
1 — Provide Warning before replacing selected sheets. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

102 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Warn before replacing selected sheets during copy (option)
• NAV_SPLICE_SORT_ORDER_BY
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_LABEL_FORMAT
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_SORT_DESCENDING
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_SORT_ORDER_BY
Obsolete.
• NAV_WIRE_DISPLAY
Internal use. Do not modify.
• NET_FOURWAY_MODE
Specifies how the net connection displays on the schematic.
0 — Display the default net connection dot.
1 — Display the alternative four way net connection as shown:

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Alternative
four way net connection (option)
• NET_LENGTH
Obsolete.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 103

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• NET_LENGTH_HR
Specifies the length of the stub automatically placed on symbol pins at instantiation if you
select the Add Components with Nets Stubs option in Databook. Default: 1.016e+006.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Net Length (option)
• NET_SPACING
Obsolete.
• NET_SPACING_HR
Obsolete.
• NET_TOOLTIPS
Controls the visibility of net tooltips (labels and properties) on schematics, as follows:
0 — Hide net tooltips. Default.
1 — Display net tooltips.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Show tooltips
(section), Nets (option)
• NEW_ATTR_VIS
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NEW_PROJECT_CL
Stores the path to the last central library location entered in the File > New > Path dialog
box.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
• NEW_PROJECT_DEFAULT_CL
Sets a path to a default central library location that populates the New Project dialog box.
The dialog box uses this value if the NEW_PROJECT_CL setting is empty.
Default:/<install_dir>/<release>/standard/examples/SampleLib2007/SampleLib.lmc
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > New > Project (menu item), Central Library Path (option)
• NEW_PROJECT_DEFAULT_LOCATION
Sets a default location for new projects. The design entry tool uses this path when the
NEW_PROJECT_LOCATION setting is empty. If empty, the design entry tool uses
${WDIR}/DxProjects.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

104 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• NEW_PROJECT_LOCATION
Stores the path to the newest project (File > New > Project) location.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > New > Project (menu item), Location (option)
• NEW_PROJECT_NAME
Sets a default name for new projects. The design entry tool adds a number suffix when
needed. Default: Project
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• NON_UNDOABLE_MOVE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NO_UNDO_CBA_MOVE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• OATCHECK
Obsolete.
• OATS
Obsolete.
• OATSTOOLS_FILE_BYPASS
Obsolete.
• OPEN_VIEWS_ON_BULK_BLOCK_OPERATIONS
Sets the open sheets affected by a multi-sheet operation setting as one of the following:
0 — Do not open affected sheets. Default.
1 — Open affected sheets.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Open
affected sheets on multi-sheet operations (option)
The following are examples of multi-sheet annotation operations:
o Annotating component properties of symbols across multiple sheets with the
Databook tool.
For more information see “Annotating Component Properties on a Part or Symbol”
in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
o Updating property values with the Update Other Objects dialog box
(Tools > Update Other Objects menu item ).

For more information see “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the

PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 105

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• ORIENTATION
Sets the sheet orientation as one of the following:
0 — Landscape. Default.
1 — Portrait.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Sheet Orientation (section), Portrait or Landscape (option)
• PADS_ZOOM
Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the PADS® layout tool configuration:
0 — Turns off the PADS style pan and zoom. Default.
1 — Turns on the PADS style pan and zoom.
Note
This setting is used in conjunction with DEFAULT_ZOOM and
EXPEDITION_ZOOM. Only one of these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory), PADS Pan and Zoom (option)
For more information, see “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on page 427.
• PARTIAL_UNLIMITED_TEXT_LENGTH
Obsolete.
• PARTSLISTER_DEFAULTS
Sets the name for the Part Lister tool configuration file.
Default: PartsListerDefaults.ipl
Can be set to Read-only? No.
For more information, see “The Part Lister Configuration File” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• PE_FLOW_MODE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• PIN_TOOLTIPS
Controls the visibility of pin tooltips (labels and properties) on schematics, as follows:
0 — Hide pin tooltips. Default.
1 — Display pin tooltips.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

106 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Show
tooltips (section), Pins (option)
• PINTYPE_ARROWS
The tool uses this option in conjunction with the EURO_ARROWS option to set the
appearance of pintype arrows between full arrow and half arrow (European) style, as
follows:
None.........(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “0”, EURO_ARROWS, not applicable)
Full Size....(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “0”)
Half Size...(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “1”)
Notes:
o The design entry tool displays only pintype arrows for symbols that have block types
of Module and Composite. The design entry tool does not display pintype arrows for
a block type of Pin.
o If a pintype does not exist on the symbol pin, the design entry tool does not display
Pintype Arrows.
Different pin types are represented by different arrows. Topic “Settings Dialog Box -
Advanced” on page 403 shows a list of these.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Pintype
Arrows (option)
• PLACEHOLDER
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• PNUMSON
Sets Pin number visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — The design entry tool hides Pin numbers. Default.
1 — The design entry tool displays Pin numbers.
Note
The tool uses this setting in conjunction with the ATTRIBUTE object’s VISIBLE
setting. See “DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section” on page 57.

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Common
Properties (option checked), Pin Numbers (option)
• PRESERVE_CONSTRAINTS
Preserve the constraints of a block extracted from a schematic sheet and add them to the new
lower-level schematic.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 107

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

0 — Do not preserve constraints of the block.

1 — Preserve constraints of the block.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Preserve
constraints in extraction (option)
• PRESERVE_PACKAGING_INFO_ON_COPY
Controls what the design entry tool does with packaging information when you copy a
schematic, sheet, block, or design, as follows:
0 — Packaging information resets to default or empty values (depending on the
information type). Default.
1 — The design entry tool preserves packaging information such as reference
designators, instance values, pin numbers, and pin slots.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Preserve
packaging info on copy (option)
• PRINTDEVICENAME
Stores the last printer used from File > Print.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), select a printer from the Name
dropdown list in the Print dialog box
• PRINTFORCEBLACK
Controls the black and white print mode setting, as follows:
0 — Print output contains colors, depending on printer settings.
1 — Print output converts all output to black and white colors only. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), Map Colors to Black (option)
• PRINTHIERARCHY
Obsolete.
• PRINTING
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• PRINTLINETHICKNESS
Sets a minimum line thickness that the design entry tool uses when printing. Default: 1.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), Minimum line width (field)

108 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• PRINTORIENTATION
Internal use only. Do not modify. This entry stores the last-used Portrait or Landscape
setting, as follows:
1 — Portrait. Default.
2 — Landscape.
To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), Properties (button), Printing
Shortcuts (tab), Orientation (dropdown list)
• PRINTPAPERSIZE
Internal use only. Do not modify. This entry stores the last-used paper size.
• PRINTSCALE
Obsolete.
• PRINTSCALEFACTOR
Sets a scale factor for the print output. Use a factor of 1 to scale the print output to 100% of
normal. A factor of .9 scales the output to 90%. Default: 1.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), Scale factor (option and dropdown list)
• PRINTSCALETYPE
Obsolete.
• PRINTXMARGIN
Obsolete.
• PRINTYMARGIN
Obsolete.
• PROJECT_PLOT_ON_PC
Obsolete.
• PROPAGATE_PORTS_TO_SCH
Controls how the design entry tool handles missing ports to a lower-level schematic, as
follows:
0 — You must manually add missing ports to a lower-level schematic from a block
using the Add > Missing Ports menu item.
1 — Adding a pin to a block automatically causes the tool to add a corresponding port to
the lower-level schematic when you execute (right-click) Push Schematic from the
block. In addition, when you place parts containing multiple part database slots
(multiple parts in one package), the placed part automatically assigns a slot number
and corresponding pin values.
For more information, see “Connecting Hierarchical Levels Using a Top-Down Approach”
in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 109

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Propagate
Ports to Schematic (option)
• PROPERTIES_TOOLTIP
Obsolete.
• RB_USE_HOST_DESIGN_RULES
Sets the following Constraint Manager actions with managed blocks:
0 — The Constraint Manager tool merges clearances and widths design rules with the
managed block design. Default.
1 — The Constraint Manager tool uses the host design rules for clearances and widths
instead of merging them with the managed block design
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Managed
Blocks Use Host Design Rules (option)
• REMOVE_MISMATCHED_PORTS
Sets the design entry tool action for mismatched Symbol/Pin port connectors as one of the
following:
Ask — You are given a choice at the time the mismatch is found. Default.
Yes — Delete the found mismatched port connectors.
No — Do not delete the found mismatched port connectors.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Delete
mismatched Symbol/Pin port connectors (option)
• RESET_SCALE_ON_SYM_UPDATE
Controls the way the design entry tool handles a scaled symbol, as follows:
0 — When you execute the Tools > Update Symbols (menu item), the design entry tool
maintains the original local scale factor of any updated symbols, and also applies any
changed scale factor from the library. Default.
1 — When you execute the Tools > Update Symbols (menu item), the design entry tool
sets the local symbol scale factor to 1 for any updated symbols.
For example, when set to 0:
a. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry tool.
b. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor tool for that symbol to 0.8.
c. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.

110 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Results: The design entry tool applies both the local scale factor and the Symbol
Editor scale factor to the updated symbol. The design entry tool rescales the symbol
to 0.64.
For example, when set to 1 using the same scenario as the previous example:
a. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry tool.
b. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that symbol to 0.8.
c. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool resets the local scale factor to 1 on all symbols
requiring an update. For this example, the updated symbol in the design entry tool
reflects only the 0.8 scale factor set in the Symbol Editor.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Reset
Component Scale on Symbol Update (option)
For more information, see “Updating a Project With Changed Library Content” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
• RNUMSON
Sets reference designator visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — The design entry tool hides reference designators.
1 — The design entry tool displays reference designators. Default.
Note
The tool uses this setting in conjunction with the ATTRIBUTE object’s VISIBLE
setting. See “DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section” on page 57.

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Common
Properties (option checked), Reference Designators (option)
• ROUTE
Specifies the routing mode for new connections. Valid settings are, as follows:
0 — Straight
1 — Orthogonal
2 — Avoidance. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Route Mode (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 111

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

For more information, see the following:

“Setting Net and Bus Preferences” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• SCALEFACTOR
Provides a scale factor for the selected Font Style that is applied to the Size property value
that appears on all text objects. Default: 1.0 (100%).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Font Styles
(subcategory), Scale factor (option)
• SCH_LAYER_DIM_ENABLED
Sets the schematic layer dimming, as follows:
1 — The dim control bar is enabled.
0 — The dim control bar is disabled.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes
To access from the GUI: View > Display Control (menu item), Objects (tab), Layer
Display (section), Schematic (subsection), Dim (option)
• SCH_LAYER_DIM_FACTOR
Sets the brightness percentage of all objects on the schematic layer in the schematic
window, if SCH_LAYER_DIM_ENABLED" value=”1”. A value of 100 sets the brightness
of the schematic objects to full brightness. A value of 0 totally dims the objects on the
schematic layer. Default: 100.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes
To access from the GUI: View > Display Control (menu item), Objects (tab), Layer
Display (section), Schematic (subsection), Dim (control bar)
• SCH_LAYER_TOGGLE
Controls the visibility of schematic objects on the schematic layer. Default: 1.
1 — Show all schematic objects on the schematic layer.
0 — Hide all schematic objects on the schematic layer.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes
To access from the GUI: View > Display Control (menu item), Objects (tab), Layer
Display (section), Schematic (option)
• SCHEMATIC_TABS
Controls schematic sheet tabs, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool displays each schematic sheet as a separate window.
1 — The design entry tool displays each schematic sheet as a tabbed window. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No

112 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Window > Schematic Tabs (menu item)
• SCOPE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SD_CONNECTOR_PIN_SPACING
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SDISTANCE
Obsolete. See SDISTANCE_HR.
• SDISTANCE_HR
Specify a positive integer to set the number of pixels that determine the selection distance
boundary during object selection on a schematic.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 254000 sets the increment to 2.54 mm, or 0.1 in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Selection
Distance [<Units>] (option)
• SELBORDERS
Controls whether borders are selected, as follows:
0 — During an area selection, the design entry tool does not select borders.
1 — During an area selection, the design entry tool includes borders in the selection.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: View > Other Windows > Selection Filter (menu item),
Borders (option)
• SELNAMEON
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SELRIPPERS
Controls whether rippers are selected, as follows:
0 — During an area selection, the design entry tool does not select rippers.
1 — During an area selection, the design entry tool includes rippers in the selection.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: View > Other Windows > Selection Filter (menu item),
Rippers (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 113

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• SEPARATE_FLIP_MIRROR
Controls the Flip or Mirror operation when more than one object is selected, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of objects against the
symmetry axis of the entire selected group. Default.
1 — The design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of objects against each
object’s symmetry axis.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Flip/Mirror
objects separately (option)
• SHEETSIZE
Sets the default sheet size for all new schematics and symbols. Specify one of the following
sizes:
Note
The following values correspond to the SIZES definitions in “DxDesigner.xml File
Format - SIZES Section” on page 125:)

0 — A ()
1 — B. Default.
2 — C ()
3 — D ()
4 — E ()
5 — A4 ()
6 — A3 ()
7 — A2 ()
8 — A1 ()
9 — A0 ()
10 — Custom — User-definable width and height using the HEIGHT and WIDTH
values you specify.
11 — F ()
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size (option)
• SHEETZONINGGRID
Sets the visibility of schematic zoning grid shown in Figure 2-56 on page 331 as one of the
following:
0 — Hide the schematic zoning grid. Default.

114 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

1 — Show the schematic zoning grid.

Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Zoning Grid
(option)
For more information, see the following:
“Partitioning a Sheet Into Zones” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• SHOW_ALIGNMENT_MARKS
Controls dynamic alignment marker visibility when moving symbols:
0 — Do not show the dynamic alignment markers. Default.
1 — Show the dynamic alignment markers.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Grid toolbar, Show Alignment Markers button ( )
For more information, see the following:
“Dynamically Aligning Components” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• SNAP_TO_GRID_ON
Sets whether schematic objects snap to the grid as follows:
0 — Objects that you place or move on a schematic do not snap to the grid.
1 — Objects that you place or move on a schematic snap to the grid. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Grid Snap (option)
• SNAPTOPIN
Sets net route snapping to the nearest pin of a specified component, as follows:
0 — Snap net to pin is off.
1 — Snap net to pin is on. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Snap Nets to Pin (option)
• SORTON
Obsolete.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 115

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• STAGGER_DISTANCE_HR
Sets the distance the design entry tool uses when staggering nets. If the value is too small,
overlapping nets could result as shown in the following figure:

Enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 9.08mm or 0.3575in
appears in the file as 908000 (9.08mm * 100,000). Default: 200 (milliseconds)
• STROKE_DELAY
Specifies how much time the design entry tool allows for the user to complete a stroke.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• STROKES
Turns on or off the ability for you to draw predefined patterns in the schematic window
using the mouse, which map to commands or functions, as follows:
0 — Turns off strokes.
1 — Turns on strokes. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory), Strokes off (option)
For more information, see the MIDSTROKE description in this topic — Controls which
mouse button draws the strokes.
Also see “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on page 427.
• SG_PROPERTIES
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINS_IN
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINS_OUT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PIN_LABEL_SIZE
Internal use only. Do not modify.

116 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• SG_PIN_LENGTH
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PIN_SPACING
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_SYM_ATTR_SIZE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_ANALOG
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_IN
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_BI
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_OCM
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_OEL
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_OUT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_TRI
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• TABSSHEET_NAMES_ONLY
Controls what information the design entry tool displays in the schematic tabs, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool displays the schematic name followed by the sheet name on
schematic tabs. Default.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 117

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

1 — The design entry tool displays only the schematic sheet name on schematic tabs.

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Display
Only Sheet Names in Tabs (option)
• TEXTON
Obsolete.
• TEXTORIGIN
Sets the default origin point for all new text, labels, and properties you create. Valid values
(options) are:
0 — Lower center
1 — Lower left
2 — Lower right
3 — Middle center. Default.
4 — Middle left
5 — Middle right
6 — Upper center
7 — Upper left
8 — Upper right
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Text (subcategory), Default Text Origin (option)
• TEXTSIZE
Obsolete. Use TEXTSIZE_HR.
• TEXTSIZE_HR
Sets text size for all new text, labels, and properties you create.
Enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 2.54mm or 0.10in
appears in the file as 254000 (2.54mm * 100,000).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Text (subcategory), Default Text Size (option)

118 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• TEXT_THRESHOLD
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• TIPOFTHEDAY
Controls how the Tip of the Day displays, as follows:
0 — Do not display the tip of the day when you start the design entry tool.
1 — Display the tip of the day when you start the design entry tool. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Help > Tip of the Day (menu item)
• TIPOFTHEDAYFILEPOS
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• TIPOFTHEDAYTIMESTAMP
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UNDO
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UNDO_LEVEL
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UNIQUE_LABEL
Controls the design entry tool labeling behavior when you copy nets, components, or pins,
as follows:
0 — Do not automatically create a unique label during a copy operation. Default.
1 — The design entry tool automatically creates a unique label during a copy operation.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Unique
names on copy (option)
• UNIT
Sets the design entry tool unit of measurement as one of the following:
mm — millimeters
cm — centimeters
in — inches. Default.
Once set, the design entry tool uses the unit of measurement you specified for measurements
such as SHEETSIZE (Default Sheet Size) and GRID_HR (Grid Spacing).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Unit (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 119

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• UNLIMITED_TEXT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_PAGENUMBERS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_ANNOTATIONS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_BUS_RIPPERS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_BUS_SIGNALS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_PROPERTIES
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_RANGE
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_SD_RANGE
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_PRINT_ORDER
Specifies whether or not to update the print order to synchronize schematic sheet page
numbers with the print order shown in the Navigator window:
0 — Do not automatically update the print order.
1 — Automatically updates the print order.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Update
Print Order before updating Cross Reference (option)
• USEEXCLUDEINFO
Controls which sheets (if any) to exclude from printing or PDF generation, as follows:
0 — Do not exclude designated sheets from printout.
1 — Exclude designated sheets from printout. Default.

120 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Can be set to Read-only? No.

To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), Use exclusion info (option)
For more information, see the following:
“Excluding Sheets From Printing or PDF Generation” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• VALUESON
Obsolete.
• VERIFY_EXPEDITION_CONFIG_FILE
Obsolete.
• VERIFY_NETLIST_CONFIG_FILE
Obsolete.
• VERIFY_SYSTEMDESIGN_CONFIG_FILE
Obsolete.
• WHITEBACKGROUND_MODE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• WIREON
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• WIR_CONT_CHAR
Obsolete.
• WIR_FILE_CONTINUATION
Obsolete.
• WRITE_HIRES_SYMBOL_FILES
Obsolete.
• XPROB_HLU_ENABLE
Controls cross probing to highlight unplaced components, as follows:
0 — Do not highlight unplaced components during cross probing.
1 — Highlight unplaced components during cross probing. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category),
Highlight unplaced components (section), Enable (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 121

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• XPROB_HLU_LIMITOPEN
Controls cross probing to highlight unplaced components only on open schematics or ICTs,
as follows:
0 — Do not limit the highlight of unplaced components during cross probing to only
open schematics or ICTs.
1 — Limit the highlight of unplaced components during cross probing to only open
schematics or ICTs. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category),
Highlight unplaced components (section), Limit to already open documents (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN
Use this setting to limit cross probing between the design entry tool and other applications,
such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Allow cross probing with other applications to any applicable the design entry tool
schematic or ICT.
1 — Limits cross probing with other applications to just open the design entry tool
schematics or ICTs. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_COMP
(This setting is only applicable when XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing components on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with components on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Components (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_NET
(This setting is not applicable unless XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing with signal nets on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with signal nets on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

122 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Signal Nets (options)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_GLOBALNET
(This setting is not applicable unless XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing with global nets on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with global nets on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Global Nets (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_PIN
(This setting is not applicable unless XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing with global nets on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with global nets on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Pins (option)
• XPROB_SEL_ZOOMFIT
Controls whether the design entry tool zooms in on the selected, cross-probed object. This
setting also works with dynamic links to zoom in on the target object when the tool traverses
a link.
0 — Do not zoom in to selected objects during cross probing. Default.
1 — Zoom in to selected objects during cross probing.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Zoom
Fit to Selected objects (option)
• XREF_ANNOTATION_ON
Sets Pin number visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — Do not display cross reference annotations in the entire design. Default.
1 — Display cross reference annotations in the entire design.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 123

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Xref
Annotation (option)
• XTRAERRS
Control the design capture tool Check utility, as follows:
0 — Do not provide additional Check utility testing.
1 — Provide additional Check utility testing and error reporting operations. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

124 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format - SIZES Section

The SIZES section of the DxDesigner.xml file specifies sheet size settings for the design entry
tool.
Usage
<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />
For example:
<SIZES>
<size name="A_SIZE_HR">
<key name="HEIGHT" value="21590000"/>
<key name="WIDTH" value="27940000"/>
</size>
...
</SIZES>

Arguments
• A_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 0 as the following:
21590000 — HEIGHT (215.90mm or 8.5in)
27940000 — WIDTH (297.4mm or 11.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A (option)
• B_SIZE_HR
Predefines the B sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 1 as the following:
27940000 — HEIGHT (279.4mm or 11.0in)
43180000 — WIDTH (431.8mm or 17.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = B (option)
• C_SIZE_HR
Predefines the C sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 2 as the following:
43180000 — HEIGHT (431.8mm or 17.0in)
55880000 — WIDTH (558.8mm or 22.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = C (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 125

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• D_SIZE_HR
Predefines the D sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE = 3 as the following:
55880000 — HEIGHT (558.8mm or 22.0in)
86360000 — WIDTH (863.6mm or 34.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = D (option)
• E_SIZE_HR
Predefines the E sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 4 as the following:
86360000 — HEIGHT (863.6mm or 34.0in)
111760000 — WIDTH (1,117.6mm or 44.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = E (option)
• A4_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A4 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 5 as the following:
20999999.91 — HEIGHT (210.0mm or 8.268in)
29699999.02 — WIDTH (297.0mm or 11.693in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A4 (option)
• A3_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A3 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 6 as the following:
29699999.02 — HEIGHT (297.0mm or 11.693in)
41999999.82 — WIDTH (420.0mm or 16.535in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A3 (option)
• A2_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A2 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 7 as the following:
41999999.82 — HEIGHT (420.0mm or 16.535in)
59400000.58 — WIDTH (594.0mm or 23.386in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.

126 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A2 (option)
• A1_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A1 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 8 as the following:
59400000.58 — HEIGHT (594.0mm or 23.386in)
84099999.44 DxDesigner.xml Miscellaneous DxDesigner Settings Section — WIDTH
(841.0mm or 33.110in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A1 (option)
• A0_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A0 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 9 as the following:
84099999.44 — HEIGHT (841.0mm or 33.110in)
118900000.96 — WIDTH (1189.0mm or 46.811in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A0 (option)
• Z_SIZE_HR
Sets a custom sheet size for new schematics. If SHEETSIZE="10", then the design entry
tool uses the following the HEIGHT and WIDTH settings you define in the SIZES section:
<size name="Z_SIZE_HR">
<key name="HEIGHT" value="your_value"/>
<key name="WIDTH" value="your_value"/>
</size>

You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.

The default HEIGHT and WIDTH value of 2540000 sets the sheet size to 254 mm or 10 in.
square.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = Custom (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 127

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format - Databook SETTINGS

Section
The Databook SETTINGS section of the DxDesigner.xml file specifies general settings for the
Databook window in the design entry tool.
Usage
<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />
For example:
<DxDatabook>
<SETTINGS>
<key name="DXDB_AUTO_QUERY_LIBRARIES" value="1"/>
<key name="DXDB_AUTO_SIZE_RESULTS_COLUMNS" value="0"/>
<key name="DXDB_COLLAPSE_SYMBOLS" value="0"/>
<key name="DXDB_CONNECT_TABLES_WHEN_LOADING" value="0"/>
<key name="DXDB_DETECT_BAD_CRITERIA" value="1"/>
<key name="DXDB_DISPLAY_NUMERICS_WITH_MAGNITUDE" value="1"/>
<key name="DXDB_ENABLE_COLUMN_TOOLTIPS" value="0"/>
<key name="DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_CRITERIA_BCKGND" value="0xe9e9e9"/>
</SETTINGS>
</DxDatabook>

Arguments
• DXDB_AUTO_QUERY_LIBRARIES
Specifies whether the Databook tool performs a query on the selected library during
searches.
0 — The Databook tool does not perform a query. You must first select the library, then
click the search (!) icon in the Search window to get search results.
1 —The tool queries the library. Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Startup (tab), Automatically
query libraries when selected (option)
• DXDB_AUTO_SIZE_RESULTS_COLUMNS
Specifies whether the design entry tool adjusts the width of the Databook window data
columns based on content.
0 — Optimizes the size of the data cells. Default.
1 — Automatically adjusts the width of each column in the Results pane and shows
complete cell data.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Auto-size
query results columns (option)
• DXDB_COLLAPSE_SYMBOLS
Specifies whether the design entry tool displays records with different symbols as a single
row during searches.

128 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

0 — The Search pane displays records with identical fields but different symbols in
different rows. Default.
1 — The Search pane displays records with identical fields but different symbols, in the
same row.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Display (section),
Display records with different symbols as a single row (option)
• DXDB_CONNECT_TABLES_WHEN_LOADING
Specifies whether the Databook tool connects to all databases in the .dbc file at startup.
0 — The tool does not connect to any databases at startup.
1 — The tool establishes a connection to all databases referenced in the .dbc
configuration file at startup. Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Startup (tab), Database
Connections (section), Connect to databases at startup (option)
• DXDB_DETECT_BAD_CRITERIA
Specifies whether the Databook tool automatically detects bad search criteria during
searches.
0 — The tool does not detect bad search criteria.
1 — The tool detects bad search criteria. The tool automatically runs additional searches
when the initial search does not produce results. Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Performance
(section), Automatically detect bad search criteria (option)
• DXDB_DISPLAY_NUMERICS_WITH_MAGNITUDE
Specifies how to display numeric values in the Databook window Magnitude column.
0 — Displays the actual numeric value from the database (for example, 10e-9).
1 — Converts numeric values and displays them using a magnitude suffix (for example,
displays a capacitance value of 10 nF). Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Performance
(section), Display Numeric values with magnitude (option)
• DXDB_ENABLE_COLUMN_TOOTIPS
Specifies how to display content in Databook window columns too narrow to display entire
string value.
0 — Default.
1 — Shows cell contents for columns too narrow to display the entire string value.
Applies to both the CL View and Search windows.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 129

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Note
Exiting the design entry tool disables this option, and the CL View and Search
window columns open to their default sizes when you next invoke the Databook
tool.

To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Enable
Databook Window Column Tooltip (option)
• DXDB_ENABLE_DMS_CONNECTOR
Default: 1001.
• DXDB_IGNORE_COMPOSITES
Specifies whether to verify composites (block symbols) during live or hierarchical
verification.
0 — All components, including composites, are verified. Default.
1 — Composite symbols are not verified.
Note
Symbols in the associated subcircuit are subject to verification regardless of this
setting.

To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Verification
(section), Ignore Composites (option)
• DXDB_POSITION_ALL_LIBRARIES_FIRST
Specifies the position of <All> in the library combo box.
0 — Shows <All> as the last item in the library combo box. Default.
1 —Shows <All> as the first item in the library combo box.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Show
‘<All>’ as the first item in the Library combo box (option)
• DXDB_QUERY_RESULTS_LIMIT
Specifies the maximum number of query results to return. Default: 400.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Performance
(section), Query results limit (option)
• DXDB_QUERY_TIMEOUT
Specifies, in seconds, how long to wait before timing out. This time limit helps improve
performance on large data sets. Default: 60.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Performance
(section), Query timeout (option)

130 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

• DXDB_SEARCH_DISPLAY_PROPERTY_NAMES
Specifies whether to display PADS Designer property names or database field names from
the database table column headings for each library listed in the Search window.
0 — Displays PADS Designer property names. Default.
1 — Displays field names.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Display
(section), Database Field Names or Xpedition Designer Property Names (options)
• DXDB_STRIP_FROM_CONNECT_STRING
Specifies whether a database password is required at startup. Default: PWD.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), right-click in the Databook
window, and choose Properties (popup menu item), Strip from connect string when saving
(option)
• DXDB_UPDATE_TABLES_WHEN_LOADING
Specifies whether the Databook tool connects to all databases in the .dbc file at startup.
0 — The tool does not connect to all databases at startup. Default.
1 — The tool connects to all databases in the .dbc file at startup and checks the databases
for new or removed table fields. The tool modifies the .dbc file to reflect any changes.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Startup (tab), Database
Connections (section), Connect to databases and update tables at startup (option)
• DXDB_USE_CACHE
Specifies whether to use the Databook cache during verification.
0 — The cache is not used. Default.
1 — The Databook tool stores results of the initial search in memory which improves the
speed of subsequent searches.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Verification
(section), Use Databook cache (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_TEXT
Specifies the color of the grid text. Default: 0x000000.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_LINK_TEXT
Specifies the color for hyperlinked entries. Default: 0x640064.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Link Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_HIGHLIGHT
Sets the highlight color of found text. Default: 0x0000ff.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 131

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Highlighted Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_EVEN_BCKGND
Specifies the color of the even rows of the grid. Default: 0xf5f5e1.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Background (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ODD_BCKGND
Specifies the color of the odd rows of the grid. Default: 0xfffff5.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Verify (section),
Background (option), dropdown list to the right of the Background option
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_CRITERIA_TEXT
0x000000 — Default.
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_CRITERIA_BCKGND
0xe9e9e9 — Default.
• DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_TEXT
Specifies the color for text in the Verify grid. Default: 0x000000.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_EVEN_BCKGND
Specifies the background color in the even grids of the Verify grid. Default: 0xebebe1.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Verify (section),
Background (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_ODD_BCKGND
Sets the background color in the odd grids of the Verify grid. Default: 0xf5f5eb.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Verify (section),
Background (option), dropdown list to the right of the Background option
• DXDB_DO_NOT_STORE_USER_CREDENTIALS
Default: 0.
• DXDB_DROPBOX_LOCATION
Default: Null.

132 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Part Lister Initialization File Format

Input for: PADS Designer Part Lister
A Part Lister initialization file (<name>.ipl) stores Tools > Part Lister settings. The Part Lister
both reads from and writes to a <name>.ipl file.
Format
A Partlister.ipl file has the following structure:

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<PartListerConfiguration version="3">
<!-- Miscellaneous Part Lister settings, see the following tables for
more information -->
<Entry name="name" value="CORPORATE"/>
<Entry name="outputFormat" value="PLAIN"/>
<Entry name="outputFileExt" value="txt"/>
<Entry name="pagination" value="YES"/>
<Entry name="pagelength" value="150"/>
<Entry name="delimiter" value=" "/>
<Entry name="delimiterbefore" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="delimiterafter" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="addTitleRow" value="YES"/>
<Entry name="ignoreColumnWidths" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="open" value="YES"/>

<Header>
<!-- See the following tables for more information -->
</Header>
<Columns>
<!-- See the following tables for more information -->
</Columns>

<Preprocessor> <!-- This section is optional -->

<!--The following strips out the | symbol + suffix from a Part Number
See Ignoring DA/BS Piped Suffixes From Part Numbers
in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide-->
<Rule attribute="Part Number">
<Logic regexp="(.*)\|(.*)" value="\1"/>
</Rule>

<!-- The following lines excludes part with CLASS=EMB attribute

See Excluding Parts That Have the Legacy CLASS Attribute
in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide -->
<Rule attribute="CLASS" name="Part List Exclude">
<Logic regexp="EMB" value="True"/>
</Rule>
</Preprocessor>
</PartListerConfiguration>

The lines that define miscellaneous configuration settings in the Partlister.ipl file have the
following format:

<Entry name="setting_name" value="setting" />

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 133

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Note
You should only change the setting value.

If the readonly=”1” option has been applied to an entry name in the Partlister.ipl file, such as:
<Entry name="outputFormat" value="PLAIN" readonly=”1”/>, the associated setting cannot
be changed in the Tools > Part Lister dialog box.

Parameters
• The following tables list the setting names and describe the editable parameter values in
each section of the <name>.ipl file:
o Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section
o Part Lister Initialization File Header Section
o Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section

Table 1-7. Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section

Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
outputVersion Defines the output version. Do not change.
• 1 — Default
outputFormat Set the Part Lister report output format as one of the following:
• Text File — Produces a text file. Default
• HTML — Produces an HTML file.
• EXCEL — Produces an Excel spreadsheet.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Output format (option)
pagination Set the Part Lister output to paginate into separate pages as follows:
• NO — Do not split into pages. Default.
• YES — Separate into separate pages, with a length determined by
the pagelength setting.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Text Output (section), Split
into pages (option)
pagelength If pagination=YES, set the number of lines per page for the Part Lister
output.
• 65535 — lines per page. Default.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Text Output (section),
____lines each (option)

134 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-7. Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section (cont.)
Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
delimiter Specifies a delimiter character (such as pipe | ) between columns.
Example:
<Entry name="delimiter" value=" |"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced(tab), Delimiter (section), > (option)
delimiterbefore Controls the column delimiter placement in front of the first column as
one of the following:
• NO — Do not add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
Default.
• YES — Add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Delimiter (section), Before
first column (option)
delimiterafter Controls the column delimiter placement after the last column as one
of the following:
• NO — Do not add the column delimiter after the last column.
Default.
• YES — Add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Delimiter (section), After last
column (option)
addTitleRow Controls the Titles row that appears at the top of each column in the
Part Lister output as follows:
• NO — Do not add the Titles row at the top of each column.
• YES — Add the Titles row at the top of each column. Default.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Output (section), Add Title
Rows (option)
ignoreColumnWidths Controls the Part Lister use of column width settings in Text Output as
follows:
• NO — Do not use the column width settings.
• YES — Use the column width settings. Default.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Text Output (section), Ignore
Column Formatting (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 135

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-8. Part Lister Initialization File Header Section

Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
(Lines in Header Specify a Part Lister table header by adding lines in this Header section
section) such as the following:
text <Line text="Part Lister output for $(NAME)"/>
<Line text="Generated on $(DATE)"/>
The Part Lister provides the following fields to help you customize the
header:
• $(NAME) - Name of the Project, Board or Block (see example
below)
• $(DATE) - As shown in the example below
• $(TIME) - such as 14:45:28 (hh:mm:ss)
• $(VARIANT) - If PADS Designer is in the Variant mode (it means
that the variant view was created in the Variant Managerwindow),
this field displays the data specified in the current variant.
Tip: If you want to add a blank line between the Part Lister output
Header and the first row, use the following blank line as the final
header line:
<Line text=" "/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Header (tab), Header (pane)

Table 1-9. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section

Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
dec If type = PROPERTY, use the dec (decimal) argument to define the number of
decimal places (digits after decimal point). If the value displayed in the column
is not a real number, this setting is ignored.
If you specify 0 as dec value, all numbers in the column are rounded to the
nearest integer value.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Cost" label="Cost"
width="8" sum="YES" dec="2" key="SECONDARY"
display="Compress"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Decimal (option)

136 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-9. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)

Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
delimiter If type = PROPERTY and display = Full or display = Compressed, this setting
defines the delimiter used if a list of values is displayed in a column. May be any
string of characters. Default: the space character.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Id" label="test"
width="10" justification="RIGHT" sum="NO" display="Full"
delimiter=", "/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), List Delimiter (option)
display If Column type = PROPERTY, use the display setting to configure the column
display mode as one of the following:
• Full — Values for all objects are displayed as a list. The values are sorted
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value is repeated the appropriate number of times.
• Slots — Values for all objects are displayed as a list. The values are sorted
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value is repeated the appropriate number of times. The slot values are
appended after a slash character (such as: U1/1, U1/2, U2/1).
• Compress — All values are sorted alphanumerically. Repeated values are
removed. Then ranges such as A1, A2, A3 are shortened to A1-A3. Slots are
never appended. Default.
• Unique — All values are sorted alphanumerically. Repeated values are
removed. A list such as IC1, IC1, IC2, IC3, IC3, IC5 is shortened to IC1,
IC2, IC3, IC5.
• Total — The column displays the total of all numeric values for all objects.
Non-numeric values are ignored.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Mode (dropdown list)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 137

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-9. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)

Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
justification Use this argument to set the alignment of the column as one of the following:
• CENTER
• LEFT
• RIGHT
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Align (dropdown list)
key If type = PROPERTY, set key to one of the following:
• PRIMARY (Required) — This sort key must be applied to at least one
column of type PROPERTY, such as the default column Part Number as
shown in the following Example 1. If a Primary Key is not present on one of
the columns, the Part Lister output will be blank.
The purpose of this key is to define which column is used as the primary sort.
• Secondary Key — This secondary sort key can be applied to at least one
column of type Property, such as the default column Ref Designator as
shown in the following Example 2.
The purpose of this key is to determine which column to sort on if there are
identical values listed in the Primary Key row.
Example:
1. <Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number"
label="Part Number" width="15" sort="ASCENDING"
priority="2" key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
2. <Column type="PROPERTY" property="Ref Designator"
label="Ref Designator" width="15" key="SECONDARY"
display="Compress"/>
--------EXAMPLE REPORT OUTPUT USING ABOVE SETTINGS-------
|# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost |
-----------------------------------------------------------
| 1 | 1 |74LS08-SMD |U2 |1.32 |
...
| 6 | 3 |R47-2512 |R1-R3 |0.50, |
| | | | |0.50,0.50 |
| | | | |--------- |
| | | | |8.14 |

138 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-9. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)

Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
priority If Column type = PROPERTY and key=PRIMARY, and in addition, if
sort=ASCENDING or sort=DESCENDING, the priority argument determines
the sorting priority when more than one column has sort = ASCENDING or sort
= DESCENDING.
The priority value is set as an integer in the range 0-9. The value 9 means the
highest priority. The Part Lister first sorts the column with the highest priority. If
duplicate values occur in the first column, the Part Lister continues the sort using
lower priority columns. If there is more than one column with the same priority,
the order of column definitions (from top to bottom in the file) determines the
priority.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number"
label="Part Number" width="14" justification="LEFT"
sort="ASCENDING" key="PRIMARY" priority="5"
display="Compress"/>
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Value" label="Value"
width="5" justification="LEFT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" priority="4" display="Compress"/>
See also “BOM Output Example: Sorting Rows With Columns Designated as
Primary” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Partlister (menu item), Columns (tab), Sort (section), Priority (field)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 139

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-9. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)

Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
property If the Column type = PROPERTY, use this “property” argument to specify one
of the Common Properties (.prp), which represents the row values for this
column. Additionally, this field supports the following properties not in the list
of Common Properties:
• Name
• Id
• Partition
• Symbol Name
• Sheet
• Sheet Number
• Block
• Architecture (applicable to PADS Designer projects only)
• Function (applicable to PADS Designer projects only)
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Property (dropdown list)
sum Sets the column to total the numerical value of all data in the column as follows:
• NO — Does not total the numerical value of all data in the column. This is
the same behavior as leaving the sum setting out of the Column definition.
• YES — Totals the numerical value of all data in the column.
If the result of the summing produces more than the maximum number of
digits allowed for a particular field (specified by width), the sum total is
truncated on the right side. To indicate that a truncation has occurred, the Part
Lister places a hyphen (“-”) on the right side of the total.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Cost" label="Cost"
width="9" justification="LEFT" sum="YES" dec="2"
display="Full"/>

140 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-9. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)

Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
sort If type = PROPERTY and key=PRIMARY
Set whether the output is sorted by the contents of the column as one of the
following:
• None — If you leave the sort setting out of the column specification, the
column does not determine the sorting order.
• ASCENDING — The column contents sorts in ascending order
• DESCENDING — The column contents sorts in descending order
The sort is alphanumeric (meaning that A2 goes before A11) and case-
insensitive.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" sort="ASCENDING" priority="2"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
See also “BOM Output Example: Sorting Rows With Columns Designated as
Primary” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Sort (section)
text If the Column type = TEXT, use this “text” argument to specify a text value that
is displayed in the column rows.
Example:
<Column type="TEXT" label="test" width="10"
justification="RIGHT" text="test
text"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Text (field)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 141

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 1-9. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)

Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
type Choose a column type as one of the following:
• NUMBER — The column represents sequential row numbers.
• QUANTITY — The column represents quantities.
• PROPERTY — The column represents the value of a predefined property, as
selected in the Property pull-down list.
• TEXT — The column represents text. Use the setting text=” “ to add the text.
Examples:
<Column type="NUMBER" label="#" width="3" visible="NO"/>
<Column type="QUANTITY" label="QTY" width="5"/>
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
<Column type="TEXT" label="test" width="10"
justification="RIGHT" text="test text"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Type (dropdown list)
visible Set the column visibility in the output as follows:
• NO — Hide the column in Part Lister output.
• YES — Make the column visible in the Part Lister output.
Note that even if a column is hidden, it still may be used for sort order.
Example:
<Column type="NUMBER" label="#" width="3" visible="NO"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Hidden (option)
width Use this argument to specify the column width in characters. The value is an
integer in the range 1-1000. Any text longer than the specified width is right-
justified, and the last character is replaced with a hyphen (-).
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Width (option)

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

142 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Support Files and Variables
Creating a Part Lister Configuration File [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 143

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

project.prj File Format

Input for: PADS Designer
The design entry tool creates a <project>.prj file under each project folder when you open a
new project to hold the project-specific settings and configurations.
Format
A <project>.prj is divided into major sections. (Indentation is provided in the example for
readability.)

Figure 1-9. Project File Section Structure

SECTION DesignInfo
<!-- Also see table Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section --!>
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION iCDB
<!-- Also see Project File Settings - iCDB Section--!>
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION FlowSettings
KEY FlowType "<value>" <!-- value= DX | NETLIST | SystemDesign --!>
ENDSECTION
SECTION Template_Design
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION ICXProInfo
KEY ICXProDir “ICXPro”
ENDSECTION
SECTION <board_name> <!-- Also see table Project File Settings -
<board_name> Section --!>
. . .
ENDSECTION

Parameters
Table 1-10. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section
Setting Name Setting Description
Independent Libraries (Netlist project only)
LIST IndependentLibraries
VALUE "DIR [W] . (my_netlist_proj)"
ENDLIST
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Symbol Libraries

144 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 1-10. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
BorderSymbols Path to borders.ini file such as in following example:
KEY BorderSymbols "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\borders.ini"
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Border Symbols
(option)
Bus_Contents Path to busconts.ini file such as in following example:
KEY Bus_Contents "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\busconts.ini"
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Bus Contents
(option)
CentralLibrary (Not applicable to Netlist project)
Path to <library>.lmc file such as in following example:
KEY Central_Library "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\My_Lib.lmc"
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Central Library
Path (option)
CnsFileName (Netlist project only)
Path to Constraints Definition file as in the following example:
KEY CnsFileName \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard\isis\expedition.cns
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Constraints
Definition (option)
DBCFile Path to Databook <library>.dbc file such as in following example:
KEY DBCFile "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\My_Lib_DB.dbc"
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Databook
(category)
DxD_Version Lists the PADS Designer software version that last edited this project
as in the following example:
KEY DxD_Version "VX.2.6"
FrontEndSnapshot KEY FrontEndSnapshot "DxD"

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 145

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 1-10. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
LayoutID (Netlist project only)
Specifies the Layout Tool such as in following example:
KEY LayoutID "<ID>"
<ID> = one of the following:
ALLEGRO14
ALLEGRO15
ALLEGRO16
EXPEDITION
PADS2007
RINF (Zuken Visula Rinf)
RINF_VDP (Zuken Visula Rinf VDP)
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Layout Tool (option)
HdlUtilsConfigFile (Not applicable to Netlist project)
Specifies the location of the HDL utility configuration hdlutils.ini
file as in the following example:
KEY HdlUtilsConfigFile "hdlutils.ini"
NetNameDelimiter Specifies the Net Name Delimiter as either “None” (remove the
line), “( )”, or “[ ]” such as in following example:
KEY NetNameDelimiter "()"
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Net Name
Delimiter (subcategory)
NumberingType Specifies the Sheet Numbering schemes as either INDEPTH or
VERTICAL as in the following example:
KEY NumberingType "INDEPTH"
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Sheet
Numbering (subcategory)
OrderFileName KEY OrderFileName ".\"

146 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 1-10. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
PcbCfgFileName (Netlist project only)
Path to the PCB configuration file such as in following example:
KEY PcbCfgFileName \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard\<name>.cfg
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), PCB
Configuration (option)
PinComponents Path to Special Components speccomp.ini file such as in following
example:
KEY PinComponents "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\speccomp.ini"
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Special
Components (option)
PropertyDefinitions (Netlist project only)
Path to Property Definitions netlist.prp file such as in following
example:
KEY PropertyDefinitions \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard\netlist.prp
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Property
Definitions (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 147

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 1-10. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
SheetsEditMode For concurrent designs, set one of the following conditions for the
“Enable edit mode for opened sheets” setting:
• If set to “1”, the first designer to open a sheet gets read-write
access. Any subsequent designer opening the same sheet gets
read-only access designated by an information bar at the top of
the schematic window as follows:

If the designer who has read-write access closes the sheet, the
other designers with the same sheet opened see the following text
on the information bar:

• If set to “0”, the first designer to open a sheet does not get read-
write access to the sheet. Instead, the information bar displays the
following:

Any other designer who opens the same sheet sees the same bar.
The first designer who clicks the Click to Edit button gets read-write
access to the sheet. All other designers then see a message in the
information bar that describes who has locked the sheet as follows:

If the Hide button is clicked, the information bar is hidden, but a thin
yellow bar is visible at the top of the schematic window. Click on the
bar to expand the information bar again. If the text in the information
bar changes while it is hidden, it flashes a few times to let you know
something changed.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Enable edit mode
for opened sheets (option)

Table 1-11. Project File Settings - iCDB Section

Setting Name Setting Description
LIST Designs Lists the designs in the project as in the following example:
LIST Designs
VALUE “Board1”
ENDLIST
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards (subcategory)

148 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 1-11. Project File Settings - iCDB Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
DedicatedServer Specify the path to the dedicated Client-Server Configuration Manager as in
Name the following example:
DedicatedServerName “orw-my_server-w7a”
If the server becomes unavailable, the project will not open. You must edit
the <name>.prj file with a new server name.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Server Name (option)
iCDBDir Specifies the path to the folder that contains iCDB data as in following
example:
KEY iCDBDir “.\database”

Table 1-12. Project File Settings - <board_name> Section

Setting Name Setting Description
RootBlock Specify the Top Level Block as in the following example:
KEY RootBlock “block_name”
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards
(subcategory), Board<#>, Top level block (option)
CADBackAnno KEY CADBackAnno “0”

ConfigType KEY ConfigType "PCB"

SchematicDesignBackAnno If set to “1”, does not allow back annotation as shown in the
following example:
KEY SchematicDesignBackAnno “1”
If set to “0”, enables back annotation.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards
(subcategory), Board<#>, Allow back annotation (option)
SchematicDesignStatus If set to “1”, does not allow forward annotation as shown in the
following example:
KEY SchematicDesignStatus “1”
If set to “0”, enables forward annotation.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards
(subcategory), Board<#>, Allow forward annotation (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 149

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 1-12. Project File Settings - <board_name> Section (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description
SchematicConflict Specify the Conflict Resolution as one of FE (Front end always
wins) or BE (Back end always wins) as in the following
example:
KEY SchematicConflict “FE”
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards
(subcategory), Board<#>, Conflict resolution (option)
SearchPathScheme Specify the search path scheme as one of “(Default)” or
“(Industrial)” as in the following example:
KEY SearchPathScheme “(Default)”
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards
(subcategory), Board<#>, Search Path Scheme (option)

Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Project Template File [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

150 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format

PDF Writer Initialization File Format

Input for: PADS Designer, PDF Writer
The PDF Writer initialization file (dxpdf.ini) stores File > Export > PDF settings. The PDF
Writer tool both reads from, and writes to a dxpdf.ini file. The PDF Writer tool reads an
PADS Designer schematic, generates a hierarchical representation of the design, and saves the
design as an Adobe® Acrobat® PDF file.
Format
A dxpdf.ini file contains a list of parameters, such as those in the following example:

AddPopup 1
ChangeIct2Sch 1
Color 3
DisableMappedFonts 0
FONT_CUSTOM_FONTS Courier-Bold
FONT_FIXED Courier-Bold
FONT_GOTHIC Courier-Bold
FONT_KANJI HeiseiKakuGo-W5
FONT_OLDENGLISH Courier-Bold
FONT_PLOT Courier-Bold
FONT_ROMAN Times-Roman
FONT_ROMANBOLD Times-Bold
FONT_ROMANBOLDITALIC Times-BoldItalic
FONT_ROMANITALIC Times-Italic
FONT_SANSSERIF Helvetica
FONT_SANSSERIFBOLD Courier-Bold
FONT_SCRIPT Courier-Bold
FONT_SCRIPTBOLD Courier-Bold
HorizontalScale 100
LineThickness 1
MaxAnnos 100000
MaxObjs 100000
MaxPages 1024
SheetOrder
StartAcrobat 0
StrokeThickness 1
UrlProperties
UseDxDMapping 0
UseExclusion 1
VisibleHLs 1

See the descriptions in the following tables for more information on each parameter.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 151

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format

Parameters
Table 1-13. PDF Writer Initialization File Settings
Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
AddPopup Determines whether a popup menu appears in Adobe Acrobat as
follows:
• 0 — Does not create a popup menu.
• 1 — Creates a popup menu in the generated PDF file for each
component in the design. Default.
When you click a component in Adobe Acrobat, the shortcut menu
displays the symbol name, properties, and the option to push to the
underlying schematic if the component is a composite, as shown
below:

To access from the GUI:

Files > Export > PDF (menu item), General (tab), Add popup menu
on components (option)
ChangeIct2Sch Specifies whether to print an Interconnectivity Table (ICT) as a
schematic representation bitmap as follows:
• 0 — Does not create a bitmap. Default.
• 1 — Creates a bitmap of a schematic representation of the ICT,
including the ICT’s components and connectivity. The components
appear in a best-guess location, but the placement is not editable.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item), General (tab), Change ICTs to
schematics (option)

152 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format

Table 1-13. PDF Writer Initialization File Settings (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
Color Sets the PDF color options as follows:
Tip: Before selecting options 1, 2, or 4, select a reasonable color
scheme in PADS Designer. From PADS Designer, choose
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory), and then
specify colors that work with the white or black background.
• 0 — Generates a PDF file with a white background, maps all colors
to black, and suppresses (does not print) black text. Default.
• 1 — Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and white
background. PDF Writer retrieves the color map from the setup in
the design entry tool. See the following Tip.
• 2 — Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and black
background. PDF Writer retrieves the color map from the current
setup. See the following Tip.
• 3 — Generates a PDF file with a white background and maps all
colors to black. This option prints black text.
• 4 — Generates a PDF file with a white background and maps all
colors to black. This option prints color text.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item). General (tab), PDF Color Options
(dropdown list)
DisableMappedFonts Specifies the use of mapped fonts in the PDF file as follows:
• 0 — Enables mapped fonts in the PDF file. Default.
• 1 — Disables the use of mapped fonts in the PDF file.
HorizontalScale Specifies the horizontal scale as a percentage. Default: 100 (100%).
LineThickness Specifies the width for all lines in the schematic including boxes, arcs,
and so on. This value is a scale factor (default of 1.00 = 100%). If you
want to double the line thickness, use a value of 2.00 (200%). To
decrease line thicknesses by 1/2, use a value of 0.50 (50%).
Rule: This setting does not change text thickness.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF > Advanced (tab), Minimum line thickness
(option)
MaxAnnos Specifies the maximum number of annotations allowed in the PDF
output. Default: 100000.
MaxObjs Specifies the maximum number of objects allowed in the PDF output.
Default: 100000.
MaxPages Specifies the maximum number of pages allowed in the PDF output.
Default: 1024.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 153

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format

Table 1-13. PDF Writer Initialization File Settings (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
SheetOrder Sets the specific order in which to process sheets in a schematic
hierarchy.
Rule: Make sure that each composite block has a component-level
property. The component-level property should have a specific name
whose value is an integer as the starting page number for that set of
schematic sheets.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item),Advanced (tab), Schematic Sheet
Order Property (option)
StartAcrobat Specifies whether to start the PDF Reader as follows:
• 0 — Do not start the PDF Reader after PDF generation. Default.
• 1 — Start the PDF Reader after PDF generation.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item), Advanced (tab), Start PDF
Reader After Generation (option)
StrokeThickness Specifies the stroke thickness. Default: 1.
UseDxDMapping Sets font mapping as follows:
• 0 — Do not use PADS Designer font mapping. Default.
• 1 — Use the PADS Designer font mapping that you defined in the
Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Font Styles option.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item), Fonts (tab), Use PADS Designer
font mappings (option)
UseExclusion Sets an exclusion as one of the following:
• 0 — Do not exclude any sheets from the PDF file.
• 1 — Exclude any sheets from the PDF file that you have specified
to exclude. Default.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item), Advanced (tab), Use exclusion
info (checkbox)
For more information, see the following:
“Excluding Sheets From Printing or PDF Generation” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

154 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format

Table 1-13. PDF Writer Initialization File Settings (cont.)

Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
URLProperties Specifies properties whose values are URLs. PDF Writer generates
links in the PDF file for the values of these properties. Property names
show up in the PDF output surrounded by a link box to the actual URL.
Rules:
• You must use forward slashes (/) when specifying URL-valued
properties. Do not use backslashes (\).
• If the property name contains more than one string, such as
“Arbitrary Text”, enclose all strings in double quotes.
• If you are entering multiple property names, place a space between
names.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item) Advanced (tab), URL-valued
Properties (option)
VisibleHLs Sets hyperlink visibility in the PDF as follows:
• 0 — Does not display a box around hyperlink text.
• 1 — Displays a box around hyperlink text in the PDF. Default. You
can click the link to go to the location associated with the
hyperlink.
To access from the GUI:
Files > Export > PDF (menu item), General (tab), Visible
Component/Net Hyperlinks (option)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 155

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Special Components File Format

Special Components File Format

Input for: PADS Designer design entry tool’s special component symbol information.
The design entry tool reads predefined special component information from an ASCII
speccomp.ini file. You specify the location of this .ini file from the Setup > Settings menu
item, Project category, Special Components field.
The speccomp.ini file stores special component symbol assignment settings specified from the
Setup > Settings menu item, Project category, Special Components subcategory.

When the design entry tool loads a project, if a special components file for that project is
specified in the <design_name>.prj file, such as the following:

SECTION
. . .
KEY PinComponents "./speccomp.ini"
. . .
END SECTION

the special components information contained in that file is loaded into the design entry tool.

Format
The file is composed of one section.

Figure 1-10. speccomp.ini File Content Overview

[PINCOMPONENTS]
This section defines the symbol for specified special components.
Syntax Example:
PinComponentType=symbol_name
In the syntax example, PinComponentType specifies the special component,
symbol_name is the name of the symbol.

Example:
PORT_IN=builtin:HIER_INPUT_RIGHT.1 (Defines the symbol for an input
hierarchical connector)
PORT_BI=builtin:HIER_BIDIRECTIONAL_LEFT.1 (Defines the symbol for a bi-
directional hierarchical connector)
. . .

PinComponentType may be one of the following:

• GROUND_PINS
• NET_RIPPER
• PORT_ANALOG
• PORT_BI
• PORT_IN

156 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables

• PORT_OCL
• PORT_OEM
• PORT_OUT
• PORT_TRI
• POWER_PINS
• RIPPER_BUS_BUS
• RIPPER_BUS_NET
• RWTERM
• SHEET_PINS
• SPLICE
There can be multiple rows with the same PinComponentType.

Parameters
• symbol_name
Specifies the symbol name of the symbol.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings menu item, Project (category), Special Components (subcategory)

Design Entry Tool Environment Variables

The design entry tool has user-configurable environment variables.

Table 1-14. User-Configurable Environment Variables

Environment Variable Definition
HPGL_HEIGHT_SCALE Controls vertical scaling of fonts in HPGL output plot files.
See:
“Printing From Windows” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s
Guide
HPGL_WIDTH_SCALE Controls Horizontal scaling of fonts in HPGL output plot files.
See:
“Printing From Windows” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s
Guide
LM_LICENSE_FILE or Points to the license file, or to a license server using the
MGLS_LICENSE_FILE <port>@<host> terminology.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 157

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables

Table 1-14. User-Configurable Environment Variables (cont.)

Environment Variable Definition
PATH A list of directories through which the operating system searches
to find executables.
MGC_EPD_INVISIBLE_ Controls whether a particular add-in gets excluded when the
ADDIN_LIST design entry tool is invoked. By excluding add-ins, the design
entry tool startup time can be decreased. For example, the setting
MGC_EPD_INVISIBLE_ADDIN_LIST=“ProjectNavigator
Tree,ProjectNavigator Contents” will exclude these two add-ins
on startup. You will still be able to open each add-in from the
toolbar.
WDIR The WDIR environment variable specifies the design entry tool
search path to the location of customization, initialization, and
configuration files. The variable might have a value similar to that
shown in the following example:
WDIR = c:\myWDIR; c:\MentorGraphics\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard
Note: If using Linux®, the paths need to be separated by a
colon ":" instead of the semi-colon.
Also see: “Search Path Specification (WDIR)” in the PADS
Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide

Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Soft Pathname Settings [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

158 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 2
Dialog Boxes and Windows

Dialog boxes and windows provide a user interface for interacting with the tool.

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary

Dialog Box/Window Description
Add Block Dialog Box Use this dialog box to add a block to a schematic, or extract
selected objects to a schematic hierarchically below the block.
Add Pin Array Dialog Box Use this dialog box to create and place two or more pins with
different names properties into a symbol. For high density
symbols, this dialog box provides an efficient, one-step method
to define, name, and then place multiple pins into a symbol.
Add Properties Dialog Box Use this dialog box to add or change a property across a range or
list of objects.
Archiver Wizard Use this wizard to export a copy of a project and any related files
to a specified archive location.
Array Dialog Box Use this dialog box to define an array of objects.
Cadence Allegro Netlister Use this dialog box to export a Cadence Allegro netlist.
Dialog Box
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box Use this dialog box to define the scope (Project, Board, or
Block) to include in the .cce output file.
Change Border Symbol Use this dialog box to change the border symbol of one or more
Dialog Box sheets. The left side of the dialog box displays partitions and
symbols of the library. The right side of the dialog box displays a
preview of the selected border symbol. You can apply the
change to the current sheet or other sheets of the same size in the
project. You can optionally change the sheet size and orientation
to match the new border symbol.
Column Chooser Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the data sources you want to
search and the columns of property data that you want to appear.
Component Definition Use this dialog box tab to synchronize the component definitions
Update Dialog Box - of a project with the central library or a distributed library.
Component Definitions Tab
Component Definition Use this dialog box tab to synchronize the symbol partitions of
Update Dialog Box - Symbol the project with the symbol partitions of the central library or
Partitions Tab distributed libraries.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 159

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)

Dialog Box/Window Description
Constraints Window Use this window to view and edit constraints associated with the
selected object in a netlist project design. The constraints
definition file (<pcb_system_name>.cns), specifies constraints
and default constraint values for each layout tool, in \
<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\isis. The
Constraints window content changes based on the selected
object.
Customize Tools Menu Use this dialog box to customize the Tools menu to include
Dialog Box programs to launch from your design entry application.
Customize Dialog Box - Use this dialog box tab to create and customize toolbars.
Toolbars Tab
Customize Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to customize existing toolbars and menus,
Commands Tab and to create new menus.
Customize Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set the size and toolbar options for toolbar
Options Tab icons.
Databook Tool - Configure Use this dialog box tab to add a new component library to the
Dialog Box - Libraries Tab active configuration file. You can also edit libraries, delete
libraries, and add tables to libraries.
Databook Tool - Configure Use this dialog box tab to control the characteristics of how the
Dialog Box - Properties Tab PADS Databook tool interacts with the Library.
Databook Tool - Library Use this dialog box to edit PADS Databook tool library
Properties Dialog Box properties.
Databook Tool - Properties Use this dialog box to edit the PADS Databook tool startup,
Dialog Box search, appearance, and color properties.
Databook Window Use this window to interface to ODBC databases, and a central
library or distributed libraries. From these various component
locations, you can access and place parts on your schematic.
Databook Window - CL Use this window pane to display parts and symbols in the central
View Pane library.
Databook Window - Query Use this dialog box to build a set of conditions for the Databook
Builder tool to use in the search.
Databook Window - Use this window pane in a Netlist project to display symbols in
Symbols View Pane the symbol libraries.

160 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)

Dialog Box/Window Description
Display Control Window - Use this window tab to control the visibility of commonly-used
Objects Tab objects, such as tooltips, text, highlighting, and the grid, on the
schematic. You can also control the visibility of some Navigator
window items such as listings of nets. Easy access to these
settings enables you to keep your work area uncluttered by
hiding unneeded data until you need to see it.
Display Control Window - Use this window tab to control the visibility of specific
Properties Tab properties on the schematic. Easy access to the property
visibility enables you to keep your work area uncluttered by
hiding unneeded data until you need to see it.
File Viewer Utility Window Use this dialog box to view the contents of log files generated by
the design entry tool. These files are located in the project’s ./
LogFiles folder.
Find and Replace Text Use this dialog box to search for text, or to search for and replace
Dialog Box text.
Font Mapping Dialog Box Use this dialog box to select the source for font mapping.
Generate Symbol Dialog Box Use this dialog box to generate a new block symbol.
Insert Object Dialog Box Use this dialog box to insert an object into your document.
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the Keyin Netlister. Other tools
that do not directly integrate with the design entry tool, such as
some layout tools, use the Keyin netlist to import connectivity
data.
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Use this dialog box tab to configure the HyperLynx LineSim
Box - Options Tab tool to export to HyperLynx® for signal integrity simulation, or
to import any new data from HyperLynx.
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Use this dialog box tab to control the nets in the HyperLynx
Box - Schematic Topology LineSim tool schematic topology.
Tab
Merge Differences Dialog Use this dialog box to compare the current topology with the
Box imported topology.
New Library Symbol Dialog Use this dialog box to configure a new symbol in a Netlist
Box project.
New Project Dialog Box Use this dialog box to select a Project Template for a new
project, and then set parameters such as the project name, project
location, and library location (if applicable).
Open Block Dialog Box Use this dialog box to open a block that is internal or external to
the current project.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 161

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)

Dialog Box/Window Description
Packager Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the Packager, which prepares
the project for forward annotation by assigning reference
designators to map each component in the logical schematic to a
physical part.
PADS Designer To PADS Use this dialog box to specify a new or existing PCB design, and
Dialog Box then associate it with the PADS Designer project.
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Use this dialog box and tab to select basic settings for PDF
General Tab output.
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Use this dialog box and tab to select advanced settings for PDF
Advanced Tab output.
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Use this dialog box tab to specify the fonts PDF Writer uses for
Fonts Tab each PADS Designer font type.
Part Lister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to control the Part Lister, which creates a
Bill of Materials (BOM) for the design.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use the General pane to specify the name and location of the
General Pane output Bill of Materials (BOM) file, and the scope of the
generated BOM.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use the Advanced pane to specify the output file format Part
Advanced Pane Lister produces. If your design has variants, you can specify the
variant database in this pane.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use this dialog box Columns pane to configure the Part Lister
Columns output table that lists the parts used in a design.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use this dialog box pane to specify the column headers in the
Header Part Lister output table that lists the parts used in a design.
Paste Special Dialog Box Use this dialog box to paste or embed clipboard contents to a
PADS Designer schematic in a specified format, or to create a
link to information that can be updated in another application.
Project Integration Window Use this window to display the status of pending
synchronization issues. A green indicator light indicates there
are no pending changes. A yellow indicator light means that you
must take some action to incorporate the pending change into the
design entry tool.
Properties Window Use this window to view property information associated with
the selected object. You can also add or modify property values,
control property visibility, and add properties to the selected
object.

162 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)

Dialog Box/Window Description
Property Definition Editor Use this dialog box in a Netlist project to define the available
Dialog Box properties and their format in a central library. Use this editor to
define new properties, define property types and their associated
syntax, and change certain aspects of predefined system
properties.
Quick Connection View Use this dialog box pane to configure the general settings of the
Dialog Box - General Pane PADS Designer Quick Connection View (QCV) generic
netlister.
Quick Connection View Use this dialog box pane to configure the display settings of the
Dialog Box - Display Pane PADS Designer Quick Connection View (QCV) generic
netlister.
Quick Connection View Use this dialog box pane to configure the advanced settings of
Dialog Box - Advanced Tab the PADS Designer Quick Connection View (QCV) generic
netlister.
Replace Part Window Use this window in an integrated PADS project when replacing
parts to set the source part number, the replacement part number,
the scope for the replacement, and to specify how you want to
map pins and properties on the replaced part(s).
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Use this dialog box to set symbol replacement criteria.
Box
RINF Netlister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the RINF netlist output.
Scale Dialog Box Use this dialog box to scale the selected object up or down using
a scale factor that you specify.
Select Parts to Update Dialog Use this dialog box to update the project with updated parts from
Box the attached library.
Settings Dialog Box - Project Use this dialog box to define project-level settings such as
project paths, which are stored in the <design>.prj file.
Settings Dialog Box - Board Use this dialog box to configure a board.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to specify the location(s) of legacy
Symbol Libraries PADS Designer symbol libraries in either a new or existing
Netlist project.
Settings Dialog Box - Special Use this dialog box to create selection lists for specialized pin
Components components to be added to schematics.
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Use this dialog box to list the available bus contents and their
Contents values, modify existing bus contents values, or create new bus
contents.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 163

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)

Dialog Box/Window Description
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to specify the border symbol for each border
Borders and Zones type (one of A Landscape, A Portrait, A0 Landscape, A0 Portrait
and so on) and the zone characteristics used to divide the
schematic into navigation zones.
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Use this dialog box to configure how cross-reference
Reference annotations appear on the schematic.
Settings Dialog Box - Net Use this dialog box to control how net names are resolved into
Name Delimiter elements of buses.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to specify the configuration file location for
Databook Databook.
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Use this dialog box to specify the way sheets are ordered for
Numbering printing or PDF generation.
Settings Dialog Box - Export Use this dialog box to set the default export language and folder.
HDL
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL Use this dialog box to configure the VHDL export settings.
Settings Dialog Box - Export Use this dialog box to list packages to be inserted in the
HDL - External Packages generated VHDL or Verilog netlist.
Settings Dialog Box - Export Use this dialog box to map PADS Designer pin types to HDL
HDL - Port Map port mode types.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure the Verilog export settings.
Verilog
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set units and grid parameters for the
Schematic Editor schematic window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set the PADS Designer session
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom characteristics for strokes, pan, and zoom.
Settings Dialog Box - New Use this dialog box to configure new schematic sheets.
Sheets
Settings Dialog Box - Text Use this dialog box to set the default text origin and text size for
new text on a schematic.
Settings Dialog Box - Nets Use this dialog box to set net characteristics on the schematic
window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set the availability of objects, text, and
Selection Filters graphics selections that display onschematics.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure the pin and property
Symbol Editor characteristics for local or library symbols that appear in the
Symbol Editor.

164 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)

Dialog Box/Window Description
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to assign default properties to symbols.
Symbol Editor - Symbol
Default Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to assign default pin properties to symbols.
Symbol Editor - Pin Default
Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to assign default HLA properties to symbols.
Symbol Editor - Symbol
HLA Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to choose which rules to run with the
Graphical Rules Checker Graphical Rules Checker (GRC).
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to control the display and the behavior of the
Interconnectivity Table Interconnectivity Table (ICT).
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Use this dialog box to choose how to slice and dice ICT nets.
Slice and Dice
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Use this dialog box to control property visibility in the ICT.
Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure the block display characteristics
Navigator - Blocks in Navigator window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure sheet display characteristics in
Navigator - Sheets the Navigator window and control sheet copy behavior.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure symbol display characteristics
Symbols in the Navigator window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure net and bus characteristics in
Navigator - Nets and Buses the Navigator window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set what the PADS Designer tool displays
Display on schematic sheets.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set schematic or ICT object characteristics
Objects for color, text, fill style, line style, and font.
Settings Dialog Box - Font Use this dialog box to set the font style for new schematic text.
Styles
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to run the Diagnostics utility automatically
Diagnostics when you exit a design session.
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Use this dialog box to control cross probing parameters.
Probing
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ Use this dialog box to set up automatic sheet/ICT backups.
ICT Backup

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 165

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 2-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)

Dialog Box/Window Description
Settings Dialog Box - Project Use this dialog box to manage a project’s backups and backup
Backup settings. Depending on the settings, different triggers can cause
the project database to create a backup copy in a zipped file.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to control HDL simulation parameters.
Integrated Simulator
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Use this dialog box to control the FPGA tool configuration
Tools settings.
Settings Dialog Box - Run on Use this dialog box to define forms or scripts to run when the
Startup design entry tool starts.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to enter a user name and password for a
Databook Data Source DataBook data source.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to choose which installed features to load
Licensing when the application is started.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set advanced design entry tool settings.
Advanced
Simulation Setup Dialog Box Use this dialog box to set up the SDF (Standard Delay Format)
options for a ModelSim simulation session.
Update Other Objects Dialog Use this dialog box to choose the type of object you want to
Box update. You can also select the Range or scope of the update to
avoid interfering with others who might be working on the same
project concurrently, or to apply different updates to different
levels of the project.
Verify Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the Verify tool.
Verify Dialog Box - Use this dialog box pane to configure compatibility checking in
Interconnectivity Pane the Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool for component pin
types connected to system signals across multiple boards in a
design.
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to create a Verilog netlist file(s) for a design.
This netlister first runs the iCDB Compiler utility to generate a
Common Database for the design, and then runs the appropriate
utilities to generate the Verilog netlist (.v) files, which are used
for simulating the design.
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the iCDB-to-VHDL netlister.
This utility extracts data from the Integrated Common Database
(iCDB) and outputs it in VHDL IEEE 1076-1987 format.

166 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Block Dialog Box

Add Block Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• Add > Block

Use this dialog box to add a block to a schematic, or extract selected objects to a schematic
hierarchically below the block.
Figure 2-1. Add Block Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-2. Add Block Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Block name Defines the name of the block.
Extract schematic If checked, creates a hierarchical block and moves selected objects to a
new schematic lower in the project hierarchy.

Related Topics
Creating a Bottom-Up Hierarchical Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a Top-Down Hierarchical Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Replicating a Package Pattern [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Packaging by Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 167

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Pin Array Dialog Box

Add Pin Array Dialog Box

Scope: Symbol Editor
To access:
• Symbol > Add Pin Array
•

Use this dialog box to create and place two or more pins with different names properties into a
symbol. For high density symbols, this dialog box provides an efficient, one-step method to
define, name, and then place multiple pins into a symbol.

Objects
Table 2-3. Add Pin Array Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Range If selected, creates pin names in a defined range and sequence interval
(delta) value. Optionally, you can apply an alphanumerical prefix or
suffix to all pin names.
List If selected, creates pin names from comma-separated entries in the
Values field. Optionally, you can apply an alphanumerical prefix or
suffix to all pin names.
Value If the Range option is selected, defines the minimum and maximum
decimal range to apply to new symbol pin names.
Delta If the Range option is selected, defines the numeric sequence interval to
apply to the minimum and maximum pin range value.
Reverses the minimum and maximum range in the Value field or the
order of the comma-separated pin names in the Values field.
Values If the List option is selected, specifies a comma-separated list of pin
names to apply to the symbol.
If the List option is selected, this option causes pin names to display in
the Values field in a list format. Use this workspace to add, remove, or
reorder the list of comma-separated pin names that appear in the Values
field.
Prefix, Suffix Defines the alphanumeric prefix and suffix for each pin name in an
array.
Hint Displays a preview of pin names based on settings in the dialog box.
Note: This field refreshes when you change pin name values.

168 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Pin Array Dialog Box

Table 2-3. Add Pin Array Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Automatic pin side If checked, automatically assigns the location and type attributes to pin
recognition names based on pin array placement in a symbol. For example, when
you place the pin array on the right side of the symbol, the tool applies
the “Right” Side setting (pin location) in the Pins window.
Inverted If checked, adds a negation symbol to the pin (port) shape (Inverted =
True in the pin properties list).
If unchecked, does not apply negative values to the pin (port) shape
(Inverted = False in the pin properties list).
Pin Location Defines the default pin location (Side) attribute for pins in the array.
Choose one of the following:
• Left
• Right
• Top
• Bottom
Pin Type Defines the default pin type for all pins in the array. For more
information, see “Pin (Port) Types” on page 618.
Pin Spacing Defines the default spacing between the pins you place into a symbol
using the default spacing for grid points defined in Setup > Settings
menu item, Symbol Editor category.
To define grid spacing choose Setup > Settings menu item, Schematic
Editor category.
Name (column) Defines property names (from the Property Definition Editor in the
PADS Library Tools application) that apply to each pin in the array.
Check a checkbox to make a property name visible for pins in an array.
Use the buttons to add, remove, or reorder the list of
property names in the table.
When you add a new item to the list, a dropdown list is available in the
Name field to select an available property.
Value (column) Defines unique alphanumeric text to assign to pins in the array. Check a
checkbox to make a property value visible for pins in an array.
Position Defines the position of properties and values for each pin in the array.
Use the dropdown list in this field to select the following:
• Above Pin
• Below Pin

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 169

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box

Add Properties Dialog Box

To access:
• Edit > Add Properties
•

• Select one or more schematic objects, right-click, and choose the Add Properties menu
item.
Use this dialog box to add or change a property across a range or list of objects.
Figure 2-2. Add Properties Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-4. Add Properties Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Object
Type Specifies the type of object to which the property is added:
• Net
• Component
• Pin
• Unattached

170 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box

Table 2-4. Add Properties Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Property Specifies the property to assign to the selected object(s).
For components, blocks, or a pin or pins on a component or a block, you can
also specify either:
• Block values - Propagates the property to all instantiations of the block or
component.
• Instance values - Adds the property to only the selected instance of the
component or block.

Range Selected, activates the Prefix, Value, Delta, and Suffix fields, enabling you to
apply a range of names to the selected objects, with an optional prefix, a
numerical value, and an optional suffix.
List Selected, activates the Values field, enabling you to provide a comma-separated
list of values for the selected objects.
Prefix Active only for Range.
Specifies a string of one or more characters to prepend to each property value.
Value Active only for Range.
Specifies a starting value. The starting value can be a decimal number, a lexical
character(s), or a bus index. An identifier box appears preceding the value you
enter:
- For decimal numbers: (0, 1, 2, ...)

- For lexical characters: (a, b, c, ... z), (A, B, C, ... Z)

- For a selected bus, or a net ripped from a bus. This value indicates the
Index of the ripped net(s).
For more information, see the following:
“Ripping Nets From a Bus” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Delta Active only for Range.
Specifies an integer number multiple (positive or negative value) to use to
increment or decrement each bit of the selected group of objects.
Suffix Active only for Range.
Specifies a string of one or more characters to append to each property value.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 171

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box

Table 2-4. Add Properties Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Values Active only for List.
Enables you to provide a comma-separated list of values to apply to the selected
objects.
For more information, see the following:
“Manipulating Properties and Property Values on Multiple Objects” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Hint Gives you a preview of the selected property values before you apply them.

Related Topics
Creating Component Arrays [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Ripping Nets From a Bus [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

172 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Archiver Wizard

Archiver Wizard
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: From the design entry tool, choose the Tools > Archiver menu item ( ).
Use this wizard to export a copy of a project and any related files to a specified archive location.
Note
For more overview information on the PADS Archiver, such as why you would use this
tool, see “Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Description
The export archive process generates two files: the DxArchiver.xml file, which contains archive
settings; and an XML manifest file (manifest.xml), which contains describes the contents of the
archive package.

Objects
Table 2-5. PADS Archiver Wizard Contents
Field Description
Action Page
Export If enabled, selects the export project action.
Options Page
PADS Designer project file Defines the project to archive.
Target directory Defines the location of the archive copy.
Create pdf If checked, creates a single .pdf file that contains a line drawing
of each schematic sheet in the project.
Don’t compress If enabled, does not compress the output. The tool creates a copy
of the project and related files in the target directory.
Compress using Zip format If enabled, compresses the output into a single Zip format file.
The tool creates the archive in the target directory with a file
name of <project_name><timestamp>.zip.
Additional files Page
Add files to be archived Enables you to optionally add files to or delete files from the
archive. You can use the icons to manipulate the files.
Note: Archiver excludes the Address.adr file from ../
database/cdbsvr/ directory. Do not add this file to the
archive or your archive project will not open.
Results Page

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 173

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Archiver Wizard

Table 2-5. PADS Archiver Wizard Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Creating archive Lists the files copied to the archive location and any warnings
and/or errors associated with the archive.

Related Topics
Project Archive [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DxArchiver.xml File Format
DxArchiver
EDX Navigator [Enterprise Data eXchange (EDX) User's Guide]

174 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Array Dialog Box

Array Dialog Box

To access:
• Add > Array
•

Use this dialog box to define an array of objects.

Figure 2-3. Array Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-6. Array Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Rectangular array Selected, defines a rectangular array of the selected object(s), such as the
AND gate shown below, by specifying the:
• Number of Rows (2 in the example).
• Number of Columns (3 in the

example) .

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 175

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Array Dialog Box

Table 2-6. Array Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Diagonal vector Selected, defines a diagonal vector array, such as with the AND gate shown
below, by specifying the number of elements in the array (3 in the

example).

Related Topics
Creating a Graphical Component Array [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

176 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box

Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > Cadence Allegro
Use this dialog box to export a Cadence Allegro netlist.
Figure 2-4. Cadence® Allegro® Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-7. Cadence Allegro Netlister Contents
Field Description
Output File Specifies the name of the Cadence Allegro netlist file.
Name
Scope Defines the scope for the netlist file:
• Project
• Board (selected from the dropdown list)
• Block (selected from the dropdown list)
Options If checked, “Open the generated file” enables you to select:
• Open with - Specifies the program to use to open the file.
• Run new viewer for each generated file.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 177

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box

CCZ Exporter Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > eDxD Schematic
Use this dialog box to define the scope (Project, Board, or Block) to include in the .cce output
file.
Note
.cce files are compressed and encrypted versions of the .ccz format.

Figure 2-5. CCZ Exporter Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-8. CCZ Exporter Contents
Field Description
Output Folder Specifies the path to the output .cc (uncompressed) or .cce
(compressed and encrypted) file.
Enter a pathname or browse to its location.
Scope Enables you to select the scope to include in the output file:
Project - Selected, enables the “Run new window for each generated
file” option, allowing you to create new files, rather than
overwriting an existing file.

178 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box

Table 2-8. CCZ Exporter Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Options section
Open the generated file If checked, enables you to set the default program in which to open
the generated file.
Open with - If checked, enables you to enter a pathname or browse
to the program executable in which to open the generated file.
Options - If checked, enables you to enter any option supported by
editing the program tool defined in the Open with field. For
example, to edit in ANSI, Unicode or Print in Windows notepad,
enter switches /A /W /P, respectively.
Run new viewer for each Only available with Scope set to Project.
generated file If checked, displays the generated file in a new viewer.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 179

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Change Border Symbol Dialog Box

Change Border Symbol Dialog Box

Scope: Xpedition Designer
To access: Right-click an unused area of the sheet, and choose the Change Border popup menu
item.
Use this dialog box to change the border symbol of one or more sheets. The left side of the
dialog box displays partitions and symbols of the library. The right side of the dialog box
displays a preview of the selected border symbol. You can apply the change to the current sheet
or other sheets of the same size in the project. You can optionally change the sheet size and
orientation to match the new border symbol.
Figure 2-6. Change Border Symbol

180 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Change Border Symbol Dialog Box

Objects

Field Description
Apply changes to
Size Specifies the sheet size and orientation of the sheet(s) that you
want to change.
Range Specifies the range of sheets to change as one of the
following:
• Project
• Board
• Schematic
• Sheet. Default.
Size and orientation
Change sheet size and If checked, change the sheet size and orientation to the size
orientation to: and orientation specified by the Size field.
If “Include existing sheet of new size” is checked then change
the border of existing sheets to the new size.

Related Topics
Controlling Sheet Borders [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 181

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Column Chooser Dialog Box

Column Chooser Dialog Box

To access (Designer): Edit > Find and Replace > Search (menu item), click the button.
Use this dialog box to configure the data sources you want to search and the columns of
property data that you want to appear.
Figure 2-7. Column Chooser Dialog Box, Data Sources Example

182 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Column Chooser Dialog Box

Figure 2-8. Column Chooser Dialog Box, Properties Example

Objects
Table 2-9. Add Nets With Ports Contents
Field Description
(Data sources filter) The data source filter field at the top of the Data Sources section
of the dialog box, shown in Figure 2-7, filters the data sources list
based on the characters you enter.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 183

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Column Chooser Dialog Box

Table 2-9. Add Nets With Ports Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Data source list The list of project library and central library or a distributed
library and Databook tool data sources. Select each data source
you want to search.
To expand a data source category, click the plus (+), or to
collapse a category clicking the minus (-).
The default data source categories are:
• Design — Design objects such as symbols, buses, or nets you
have placed on a sheet.
• Local Symbols — Local symbols you have placed on a sheet.
• Managed Blocks — Self-managed blocks of the central
library or enterprise managed blocks of the production
library.
• Parametric Data — Component libraries of the Databook
data source. Click the minus symbol (-) to contract the
category.
• Parts — Part partitions of the central library or distributed
libraries.
• Symbols — Symbol partitions of the central library or
distributed libraries.
If the project includes Digi-Key® parts from PartQuest™
(www.partquest.com), the following local data source categories
appear:
• PL Parametric Data — Component libraries of the project
database.
• PL Parts — The part partitions of the project library.
• PL Symbols — The symbol partitions of the project library.
(Properties filter) The properties filter field at the top of the Properties section of
the dialog box, shown in Figure 2-8, filters the properties list
based on the characters you enter.
Properties list The list of properties from the data sources you have checked in
the Data Sources section of the dialog box. You check each
property that you want to appear as a separate column in the
Search (Designer) window.

Related Topics
Configuring Data Sources to Search and Properties to Display [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]

184 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Component Definition Update Dialog Box - Component Definitions Tab

Component Definition Update Dialog Box -

Component Definitions Tab
To access:
• Tools > Update Symbols
• Right-click a highlighted schematic object, and choose the Symbol > Update Symbol
popup menu item.
• Click the “Symbols - Symbols are out of date, update required” indicator light in the
Project Integration window.
Use this dialog box tab to synchronize the component definitions of a project with the central
library or a distributed library.
Objects
Table 2-10. Component Definition Update - Component Definitions Tab
Contents
Option Description
Component list Displays library symbols that differ from the symbols of the
project. The tool displays the library partition name and symbol
name of each symbol that is out of date. You can check one or more
components that you want to update.
Select all button Selects all rows of the component list.
Clear all button Clears all rows of the component list.
Reset Text Properties Reset text property values, such as color and size, of the project
symbol to the values specified by the central library or a distributed
library.
Reposition Text Repositions the location and origin of visible text properties of the
Properties project symbol to the default location and origin specified by the
library.
Replace Alternate Replaces the alternate symbols assigned to a part of the project with
Symbols the alternate symbols assigned to a part by the library.

Related Topics
Updating a Project With Changed Library Content [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 185

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Component Definition Update Dialog Box - Symbol Partitions Tab

Component Definition Update Dialog Box -

Symbol Partitions Tab
To access:
• Tools > Update Library Partitions
• Right-click a highlighted schematic object, and choose the Symbol > Update Library
Partitions popup menu item.
Use this dialog box tab to synchronize the symbol partitions of the project with the symbol
partitions of the central library or distributed libraries.
Objects
Table 2-11. Component Definition Update - Symbol Partitions Tab Contents
Option Description
Symbol list Displays each symbol where the symbol partition value of the project differs
from the library. The tool displays the symbol name, the current symbol
partition (project), and the new symbol partition (library).

Related Topics
Updating a Project With Changed Library Content [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

186 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Constraints Window

Constraints Window
Scope: Netlist project
To access: View > Other Windows > Constraints
Use this window to view and edit constraints associated with the selected object in a netlist
project design. The constraints definition file (<pcb_system_name>.cns), specifies constraints
and default constraint values for each layout tool, in \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\
standard\isis. The Constraints window content changes based on the selected object.
Note
You cannot add, delete, or modify the constraints definition file outside of the Constraints
window.

Tip
You can change the layout tool and the related constraints definition file for the project by
choosing the Setup > Settings menu item, Project category, and then choosing a layout tool
from the Layout Tool dropdown list.

Objects
Table 2-12. Constraints Window Contents
Field Description
Object Specifies the type of object displayed in the Constraint list:
• Components
• Nets
Constraint list A list of constraints and constraint values for the selected
objects. The tool displays a constraint value column for
each object of the type specified in the Object field. Each
value column heading is named with the Id property value
of the object. You can add or edit (override) a constraint
value by double-clicking a cell in a value column, and then
typing the value.
Tip: To see information about each constraint, hover
over a constraint name in the Constraint column. A
usage tip appears in hover text for each constraint.
To see if a constraint value is the default value from the
constraints file or it has been overridden (changed), hover
over a constraint value. For an overwritten constraint value,
the hover text is “Component Value = <n>?” or “Net Value
= <n>?”. For a default constraint value, the hover text is
“Default Value”.
PCB Interface button ( ) Opens the PCB Interface dialog box.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 187

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Constraints Window

Table 2-12. Constraints Window Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Delete Constraint Override Deletes the overridden constraint value of the selected
button ( ) constraint, and restores the default constraint value.
Delete All Constraint Deletes all overridden constraint values, and restores the
Overrides button ( ) default constraint value.
Make Differential Pair button Prerequisite: You have selected a pair of nets.
( ) Either one of the following happens:
• If the selected pair of nets is not a differential pair, the
tool makes them a differential pair.
• If the selected pair of nets is a differential pair, the tool
prompts you to delete the differential pair constraint
override.
Create New Class from Opens the “Save Values as Class” dialog box.
Settings button ( )
Show/Hide Detailed Toggles the display of the Default, Value, and Instance
Information button ( ) Value fields.
Default field Prerequisite: You have selected a constraint in the
Constraints list.
Displays the default constraint value defined by the
constraints definition file.
Value field Prerequisite: You have selected a constraint in the
Constraints list.
Displays the overriden constraint value if one exists. You
can edit the constraint value by double-clicking the Value
field.
Instance Value field Prerequisite: You have selected an instance of a
component or a net, and you have selected a constraint in
the Constraints list.
Displays the overriden constraint instance value. You can
edit the constraint instance value by double-clicking the
Instance Value field.
Design rule category tabs The tool displays design rule category tabs for each object
specified by the Object field. The constraints definition file
defines each design rule category tab.

Related Topics
Basic Design Workflow [PCB Interface User's Guide]
Creating and Editing Constraints [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

188 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Constraints Window

Design Constraint Rules [PCB Interface User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 189

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box

Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box

To access: Tools > Customize
Use this dialog box to customize the Tools menu to include programs to launch from your
design entry application.
Figure 2-9. Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-13. Customize Tools Menu Contents
Field Description
Menu Item Types
Common If checked, commands are available to all users of this machine in all projects.
Common tools are appended with “(common)” in the menu.
The PADS Designer tool stores common menu commands in a file named
commontools.ini in the \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard
directory.

190 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box

Table 2-13. Customize Tools Menu Contents (cont.)

Field Description
User Specific If checked, commands are available only to users pointing to a specific
%WDIR% directory or using a specific project.
The PADS Designer tool stores user specific menu commands in a file named
usertools.ini.
The Customize this project only checkbox controls the location of the
usertools.ini file:
• If checked, the usertools.ini file is in the project directory.
• If unchecked, the usertools.ini file is in the first writable directory in your
%WDIR% path.
Menu Items Lists the Menu items already defined in either the commontools.ini or
usertools.ini file (depending on your selection in the Menu Item Types section).
You can use the Remove, Move Up, Move Down, and Copy buttons to
manipulate items in this list.
The Add button populates the list with your new entries.
Menu Text Defines the text that appears in the Tools dropdown menu.
Command Associates the menu item with an executable command. You can Browse to
find the executable, or type in the path manually.
Arguments List the arguments to the command.
Initial Specifies the working directory for the tool associated with the command.
Directory

Related Topics
Customizing the Tools Menu [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 191

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab

Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab

To access: View > Toolbars > Customize (menu item), Toolbars (tab)
Use this dialog box tab to create and customize toolbars.
Figure 2-10. Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab

Objects
Table 2-14. Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab Contents
Field Description
Toolbars Displays the names of all system and user-defined toolbars. Select the
checkbox to display the toolbar.
Reset Returns the selected toolbar to its default state.
Reset All Returns all system toolbars to their default states.
New Opens the Toolbar Name dialog box, which enables you to enter a name
for the new toolbar. The toolbar appears in the center of the design
workspace.
Rename Opens the Toolbar Name dialog box, which enables you to enter a new
name for the selected user-defined toolbar.
Delete Deletes the selected custom toolbar.
Show text labels If checked, displays the button text with each button.

192 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab

Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab

To access: View > Toolbars > Customize (menu item), Commands (tab)
Use this dialog box to customize existing toolbars and menus, and to create new menus.
Figure 2-11. Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab

Objects
Table 2-15. Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab Contents
Field Description
Categories Lists categories of commands.
• New Menu — Displays a custom menu, which enables you to add a
menu to the menu bar.
• All Commands — Displays all application commands, which enables
you to add commands to menus and toolbars.
• Specific categories — Displays commands for each standard toolbar,
which enables you to add the commands to menus and other toolbars.
Commands Lists the commands for the selected category.
Description Displays the tooltip for the selected command.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 193

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab

Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab

To access: View > Toolbars > Customize (menu item), Options (tab)
Use this dialog box to set the size and toolbar options for toolbar icons.
Figure 2-12. Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab

Objects
Table 2-16. Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Show Screen Tips on If checked, displays the command tooltip when you hover over a
toolbars toolbar icon.
Show shortcut keys in If checked, displays the command shortcut when you hover over
Screen Tips a toolbar icon.
Large Icons If checked, displays the toolbar icons as large images.

194 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab

Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box -

Libraries Tab
Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• From PADS Designer:
o In the PADS Databook window (choose View > PADS Databook menu item)
Search pane, right-click and choose Configure > Edit Configuration popup menu
item, click Libraries tab.
o In the Search window (choose Edit > Find and Replace > Search menu item),
click the button, choose Settings > Edit Parametric Configuration menu
item, click the Libraries tab.
Use this dialog box tab to add a new component library to the active configuration file. You can
also edit libraries, delete libraries, and add tables to libraries.
Figure 2-13. Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 195

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab

Objects
Table 2-17. Databook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab
Option Description
Add Library Opens the Add Library dialog box from which you can add a library
to the Component Library list. Also see “Adding, Editing, or Deleting
a Library” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Add Table Opens the Add Table dialog box from which you can add a table to a
selected library in the Component Library list. Also see “Adding a
Table to a Library” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Remove Removes the selected library or table from the Component Library
list.
Properties Enables you to change the characteristics of the selected library using
the Add Library dialog box. Also see “Adding, Editing, or Deleting a
Library” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Update All Updates the table fields in the current configuration with the fields in
the database(s).
Set Order Opens the Reorder Libraries dialog box in which you can set the
order of the libraries in the Component Library list. You can move
selected libraries up and down, or arrange the entire list in
alphabetical order. Also see “Reordering Libraries” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Component Libraries Shows the list of libraries in the configuration.
Field Name Shows the table headers in the selected database library.
Field Type (icon) Shows the field type: Normal, Symbol, Document, or Unused. See
the table in the “Editing Library Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide for graphic
representations of the icons, or see Field Type (text) below for
descriptions.
Property Name Shows the property name as it appears in the symbol library. Double-
click the entry to edit it.
Load If checked, loads the property during verification. See “Databook
Tool Properties to Load” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Annotate If checked, annotates a property to a placed component. Properties
appear in the Properties window for placed components. See
“Databook Tool Properties to Annotate” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.

196 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab

Table 2-17. Databook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab (cont.)
Option Description
Name Visible If checked, shows the property name on the schematic with placed
components. See “Databook Property Names and Values Set to
Visible” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Value Visible If checked, shows the property value on the schematic with placed
components. See “Databook Property Names and Values Set to
Visible” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Verification Key Defines the field that must be satisfied during searches. All returned
results satisfy the conditions of this field, as well as satisfying any
combination of other conditions.
Check to select the field.
Field Type (text) These options relate to the preceding Field Type (icon) entry. See the
table in the “Editing Library Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
• Normal: A field (column) in the database whose values represent
normal properties and have no special meaning to the
PADS Databook tool. The PADS Databook tool passes the value
of a field whose field type is Normal to the design entry tool as a
property value.
• Symbol: A special field (column) in the database whose value
identifies the symbol that the PADS Databook tool should show
on the schematic.
Only one field name can be a Symbol field type.
• Document: A field (column) in the database whose values refer to
an external document, such as a path to a datasheet or web page.
Setting the field type to Document provides a link in the
PADS Databook tool property value that you can click to view a
document or a web page.
The PADS Databook tool does not annotate a property whose
field type is Document to the schematic. If you want to annotate a
file pathname or URL to the schematic, then set the field type to
Normal instead of Document.
• Unused: A field (column) in the database whose values do not
appear in the PADS Databook tool and are not available for
loading for verification or annotating to placed components.
• Unique ID: A field (column) in the database that contains the
unique identifier, or primary key, for records in the library. Only
one field in the library can have the Unique ID field type.
Magnitude Specifies a magnitude to show numeric property values in the
PADS Databook tool for the specified magnitude. Only active for
numerical data. See “Editing Library Properties”, Step 4g in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 197

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab

Table 2-17. Databook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab (cont.)
Option Description
Valid Magnitude Specifies the valid magnitude for the selected property. The Valid
Magnitude column only contains choices if the Magnitude column is
set to “Automatic.”
For example, capacitor manufacturers do not use milli or nano
magnifiers when specifying capacitance. Therefore, you can exclude
milli and non magnifiers in the Valid Magnitude column.
Units Specifies an appropriate unit for the selected property to append to
the magnitude.
For example, you might want the Value property for a capacitor to
have always have an “F,” or the Value property for an inductor to
always have an “H.”
Show Unit for IEC62 Specifies whether or not you want to show units in IEC62 format for
your components. This format uses the unit in place of the decimal
point, so a 2.2k resistor would appear as 2k2.
Use symbol data from Specifies to use the symbol associated with the part number. Active
Central Library only if you do not have a Symbol field in your database library and
you do have a Part Number field.
See “Associating Symbols with Library Components” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Move Up Moves a selected row(s) in the table up one row.
Move Down Moves a selected row(s) in the table down one row.

Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Databook Configuration File Changes [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Editing Library Properties [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

198 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box -

Properties Tab
Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• From PADS Designer:
o In the PADS Databook window (View > PADS Databook menu item) Search pane,
right-click and choose Configure > Edit Configuration popup menu item, click the
Properties tab.
o In the Search window (Edit > Find and Replace > Search menu item), click the
button, choose Settings > Edit Parametric Configuration menu item, click
the Properties tab.
Use this dialog box tab to control the characteristics of how the PADS Databook tool interacts
with the Library.
Description
The Properties tab contains the following panes:

• Component Instantiation/Annotation
• Component Annotation
• Selected Component Annotation
• Component Loading
• Cross Probing
• Symbols — You can specify which symbols to exclude when loading components into
the PADS Databook tool from PADS Designer for verification.
• Advanced
Objects
Table 2-18. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Instantiation/
Annotation
Option Description
Maintain Maintains the visibility of existing properties, based on the current component
Property if annotating, or symbol if adding a new part.
Visibility

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 199

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Table 2-18. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Instantiation/

Annotation (cont.)
Option Description
Annotate Annotates components with a property whose value defines the database
Special Library library name used when the part was added to the schematic or updated
Property (default property name is DXDB_LIBNAME).
Note: When using the Variants tool to substitute schematic components
(for example, a resistor for a capacitor), change the DXDB_LIBNAME
property value to the name of the component library (for example, Capacitor
Library) to enable the Library dropdown menu in the PADS Databook tool
Search pane, so you can select the component library. This procedure is also
useful whenever a component is loaded into the PADS Databook tool and you
need to select a part from a different library.
Annotate Used in earlier releases when migrating from ViewDataBook II, when text
Undefined files were common and used a string like "NULL" or "N/A" or "-" in the
Values database instead of "" (or ,, in a CSV file). Use this option to configure the
Databook tool to treat that string as an undefined value as follows:
• If checked, the Databook tool provides a property with the string, and a
netlister or downstream tool needs to interpret that value properly.
• If unchecked, the property is not added to the schematic.
Ignore system Ignores regional settings when placing components.
decimal sign If checked, the decimal point for the component value is shown with a comma
setting and use (,) in the PADS Databook tool, but placed with a period in the schematic.
For example, if the format of the component value is 2,2K in the
PADS Databook tool, then its value is 2.2K when placed on a schematic.

Table 2-19. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Annotation

Option Description
Change Component Changes the component when a new symbol is specified.
Enabled Note: When this option is selected, the graphic displayed in the
symbol previewer replaces the graphic on the schematic.
For example, if an analog graphic library and a resistor graphic library
use the res symbol name, the graphic for both libraries is replaced on the
schematic (may not be the intended result).

200 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Table 2-19. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Annotation

Option Description
Remove Stale Removes properties from the component when annotating properties
Properties from from the PADS Databook tool into an existing component in
Component PADS Designer if the following condition(s) are met:
• A property value is empty.
• A property value matches the Undefined Value option value, and the
Annotate Undefined Values option is not selected.
• The Annotate option (Libraries tab) is not selected for a property.
• A more generic version of the component that does not contain the
entire set of defined properties is being annotated.
For example, when a component is loaded into the PADS Databook
tool and properties are removed from the query, resulting in an
increased number of possible candidates.
Use European Displays all or selected properties in configuration using European
Notation for notation (based on International Electrotechnical Commission 62
Property Standards). Notation is applied to the PADS Databook tool Search
window values and schematic symbol labels.

Table 2-20. Properties Tab - Selected Component Annotation

Option Description
Enable Annotation to Annotates properties to designated components in PADS Designer.
Selected Component
Ignore Blocks If checked, the PADS Databook tool does not annotate properties to
any blocks that might be selected.

Table 2-21. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Loading

Option Description
Load Components Loads components into a new PADS Databook window pane instead of
into New Window the open Search pane.
Symbol Properties Loads symbol properties when loading a component from
Get Loaded PADS Designer. The PADS Databook tool scans the component and
symbol properties when loading a component from a schematic, and only
adds annotated properties to the component.
Use a property Selects a property type specified when loading a component from
value for the tab PADS Designer. The value PADS Designer uses when instantiating the
string component with any valid user-defined property is replaced, such as
REFDES.
Excluded Excludes the properties specified when loading a component from
Properties when PADS Designer.
Loading

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 201

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Table 2-22. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Cross Probing

Option Description
Enable Cross Highlights the relevant components on the schematic as the PADS Databook
Probing tool processes each group.
Zoom On Cross Zooms in on the component when selected in the PADS Databook tool
Probing (zoom action dependent on the component tracking preference selected).
Note: Available only after you use a load component or verify operation
to load components from a schematic into the PADS Databook tool.

Table 2-23. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Symbols

Option Description
Symbol Name Shows the name of the symbols you have added to the list to control
inclusion/exclusion.
Exclude Symbol Shows “yes” if you have checked the Exclude Symbol When Loading box
for the symbol, and “no” if the checkbox is unchecked.
Edit Opens the Symbol dialog box with the exclude status of the selected symbol
name.
Add Opens the Symbol dialog box for you to add a new symbol name and set it
to exclude.
Remove Removes the selected symbol from the list of symbol names.

Table 2-24. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Advanced

Option Description Values
Fraction Determines how fractional numbers appear in %.10f, %.16f, or
PADS Designer (format follows Visual C++ programming %f
language specifications).
For example, choosing %.10f displays all fractional values
with up to 10 digits to the right of the decimal point
(additional digits are rounded).
Tip: If you are unable to find a property value in
PADS Designer using search or verify, type %g into the
Fraction Format menu text field (ensures that numerical
data in the relational database is set to the appropriate
fractional format and numerical values are not rounded).

Related Topics
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Configuring the Databook Script [PADS Schematic Design Automation Reference]
Databook Configuration File Changes [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

202 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box

Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: In thePADS Databook (choose View > PADS Databook menu item, right-click in
the Search tab, and then choose the Configure > Edit Configuration popup menu item),
select a library ( ), and then click Properties.
Use this dialog box to edit PADS Databook tool library properties.
Note
The Databook tool stores changes you make in the PADS Databook tool Library Properties
dialog box in the Databook configuration file (.dbc).

Objects
Table 2-25. PADS Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box Options
Field Description
Library Name Specifies the Databool tool library name.
Symbol Expression Specifies the name of one or more symbols to apply to all
components in the library. The name can be a single symbol
name, a comma-delimited list of base symbol names, or a
wildcard expression.
If you specify a wildcard expression, the Databook tool
applies the symbol expression to all of the symbols in your
search path (for example, cap*, cap.1, res*, or res.1). You
should avoid wildcards when possible because they can return
unexpected matches.
You can assign more than one base symbol name to a
component by specifying the base symbol names in a
comma-delimited list. For example: “dl, dled, dled_bright”.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 203

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box

Table 2-25. PADS Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box Options
Field Description
Advanced button Displays the advanced options section of the Library Options
dialog box, which enables you to set the following:
• Tables Joined Vertically —Links tables vertically to
provide a single search interface for components stored in
multiple tables.
Linked tables must have the same structure and field data
types, and the tables must contain the same number of
columns with the same column names.
• Tables Joined Horizontally — Links tables horizontally
and provides access to component properties in multiple
tables.
Horizontally linked tables join disparate information about
the same set of components into a single virtual table.
Selecting Tables Joined Horizontally enables the Choose
Link Table button and Join Type options of the Library
Options dialog box.
• Join Type — Specifies the join type of tables joined
horizontally as either:
• Inner Join — Adds the combined records from two
tables to a query's results only if the values of the joined
fields meet specified criteria. The values of the joined
fields must be equal.
• Left Outer Join — Includes records even if there are no
related records in the joined tables.
• Enable case insensitive symbol search — Case insensitive
searches are performed on symbols in the database tables
(Default: unchecked).
• Enable case insensitive properties search — Case
insensitive searches are performed on properties in the
database tables (Default: unchecked).
Choose Link Table button Prerequisite: The “Tables Joined Horizontally” option is
selected.
Displays the Table Properties dialog box to specify the data
source and the link table name that defines the relationship
between tables.
Tip: It is usually only necessary to specify a link table if
you are using a non-relational database data source such as
a spreadsheet or text files.

Related Topics
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab

204 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box

Configuring the Databook Script [PADS Schematic Design Automation Reference]

Databook Configuration File Changes [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 205

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: In the PADS Databook window (choose View > PADS Databook menu item)
window, right-click, and choose the Properties popup menu item.
Use this dialog box to edit the PADS Databook tool startup, search, appearance, and color
properties.
Note
The design entry tool stores changes you make in the PADS Databook Properties dialog box
in the DxDesigner.xml file. See “DxDesigner.xml File Format” on page 55.

206 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-26. PADS Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options
Field (Tab) Description
Startup Defines the PADS Databook tool startup behavior:
• Enable database support (licensed) — If checked, enables you to select one
of the following Database Connections:
• Connect to databases at startup — Establishes a connection to all
databases referenced in the .dbc configuration file at startup (default
database connection setting).
• Connect to databases and update tables at startup — Connects to all
databases in the .dbc file at startup and checks the databases for new or
removed table fields (.dbc file is modified to reflect any changes).
• Connect to databases as needed — Reduces startup time by not
connecting to a database until the first time you execute a query against a
library. The PADS Databook tool then connects to the database
referenced by the library.
• Strip from connect string when saving — If checked, specifies that you must
enter the database password at startup.
— If unchecked, stores the database password in the DxDesigner.xml file,
so you do not have to enter the password at startup.
• Do not show CL View when configuration is loaded — If checked, hides the
CL View when the .dbc file is loaded. Default: unchecked. When you
invoke the PADS Databook tool and load a project file, only the Search
window appears.
Selecting this option simplifies opening a .dbc file for editing: In the
Databook tool Search window, right-click and choose the Configure > Edit
Configuration menu item.
Tip: Click the Show CL View button ( ) to open the CL View for the
current session.
Note: When the .dbc file is not loaded, the CL View always appears.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 207

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Table 2-26. PADS Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options (cont.)
Field (Tab) Description
Search Defines parameters for the PADS Databook tool searches:
Display
• Display records with different symbols as a single row:
— If checked, the Search pane displays records with identical fields, but
dfferent symbols, in the same row.
— If unchecked, the Search pane displays records with identical fields, but
different symbols, in different rows.
Performance
• Query results limit — Specifies the maximum number of query results to
return. Default: 400.
• Query time out — Specifies, in seconds, how long to wait before timing out
Default: 60 seconds.
• Automatically detect bad search criteria — If checked, detects bad search
criteria. Automatically runs additional searches when the initial search does
not produce results.
• Automatically query libraries when selected — If checked, performs a query
on the selected library. If unchecked, you must first select the library, then
click the search (!) icon in the Search window to get search results.
Verification
• Ignore composites
— If checked, specifies whether to eliminate composite symbols from
consideration during live or hierarchical verification. Symbols in the
associated sub circuit are still subject to verification regardless of the Ignore
composites setting.
— If unchecked, all components, including composites, are verified.
• Use Databook cache — Specifies whether to use the PADS Databook cache
during verification.
— If checked, the PADS Databook tool stores results of the initial search in
memory, which improves the speed of subsequent searches.
— If unchecked, the cache is not used.
Note: Depending on your database size, use of the Databook tool cache
can result in consumption of large amounts of memory

208 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Table 2-26. PADS Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options (cont.)
Field (Tab) Description
Appearance Display numeric values with magnitude (see “Editing Library Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide )
• If checked, converts numeric values and displays them using a magnitude
suffix (for example, displays a capacitance value of 10 nF).
• If unchecked, displays the actual numeric value from the database (for
example, 10e-9).
Auto-size query results columns
• If checked, automatically adjusts the width of each column in the Results
pane and shows complete cell data.
• If unchecked, optimizes the size of the data cells.
Show <All> as the first item in the library combo box.
• If unchecked, shows <All> as the last item in the library combo box.
Enable Databook Window Column ToolTips
• If checked, shows cell contents for columns too narrow to display the entire
string value. Applies to both the CL View and Search windows.
Note: Exiting the design entry tool unchecks this option, and the CL
View and Search window columns open to their default sizes when you
next invoke the Databook tool.
Display
• Database Field Names — Displays the field names from the database table
column headings for each library listed in the Search window.
• Xpedition Designer Property Names — Displays the design entry tool
property names for each library listed in the Search window.
Tip: Select the design entry tool Property Names when linking multiple
tables and for viewing the property names instead of table names.
Colors • Search — Changes search text, highlighted text, link text, and background
colors.
• Verify — Changes verify text and background.
• Restore Defaults — Restores the colors to their original settings.
Each color property dropdown list includes the following option:
• Other — Selects a color different from those available in the menu color
palettes

Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Searching for Components in Database Libraries [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 209

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window

Databook Window
Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• View > PADS Databook
• Databook button ( )

Use this window to interface to ODBC databases, and a central library or distributed libraries.
From these various component locations, you can access and place parts on your schematic.
Description
The following shows the PADS Databook window with the Search pane selected:

Figure 2-14. PADS Databook - Search Window

Objects
Table 2-27. PADS Databook Window - Search Pane Contents
Option Description
New Search Window Opens a new search window pane in the PADS Databook window.
See “Searching for Components in Database Libraries” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

210 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window

Table 2-27. PADS Databook Window - Search Pane Contents (cont.)

Option Description
Show CL View Prerequisite: The project is an integrated project type.
Opens the CL View pane in the PADS Databook window.
See “Databook Window - CL View Pane” on page 214.
Show Library Symbols Prerequisite: The project is a netlist project type.
View Opens the Symbols View pane in the PADS Databook window.
See “Databook Window - Symbols View Pane” on page 221.
New Live Verification Opens a Verify pane in the PADS Databook window in which to
Window verify components on the open sheet.
See “Verifying That Components on a Sheet Match the Database of
Parametric Data” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
New Hierarchical Opens a Verify Hierarchy pane in the PADS Databook window in
Verification Window which to verify components in the entire design.
See “Verifying That All Components in the Design Match the
Database of Parametric Data” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Close the Current Search, Closes the currently selected window pane tab at the bottom of the
or Close View PADS Databook window.

Library dropdown list Contains a list of libraries defined in your configuration file.
See “Databook Tool Libraries” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Query Builder button Enables you to build expressions to search the library for your
components.
See “Creating a Databook Search Query” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Criteria Button Shows a text box with the search criteria you defined in the Query
Builder.
See “Creating a Databook Search Query” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Execute the Query Refreshes the list of components based on the changes you have
made to the query builder or to the filter fields.
See “Searching for Components in Database Libraries” and
“Creating a Databook Search Query” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 211

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window

Table 2-27. PADS Databook Window - Search Pane Contents (cont.)

Option Description
Slot dropdown list Defines the slot for the selected component. Active only for slotted
components.
Slots assign specific gates for multi-gated or slotted components.
The slots are based on the pin numbers of the corresponding
component in the physical design.
When you add a slotted component to your schematic, the pin
numbers of the component appear on the pins.
See “Adding Generic Components to a Schematic With the
Databook Window” and “Adding Unique Components to a
Schematic With the Databook Window” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Load Selected Loads the part information of a selected component in the schematic
Component into the PADS Databook Search window. Same as right-click and
choose the Load into Databook popup menu item.

Add New Component Activates place mode in the schematic window, so you can place the
with All Properties component on the schematic. The component includes all properties
assigned to the component in the library.
See “Adding Unique Components to a Schematic With the
Databook Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Add New Component Activates place mode in the schematic window, so you can place the
with only Common component on the schematic. The component includes only the
Properties properties designated as generic properties in the library.
Use, for example, when you want to place a capacitor symbol but do
not yet know what value of capacitor you want.
See “Adding Generic Components to a Schematic with the Databook
Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Annotate Component Adds all properties (as assigned in the library) to the selected
with All Properties component on the schematic.
Use on generic components when you are ready to apply properties
of a unique component.
See “Annotating Component Properties on a Schematic With the
Databook Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Annotate Component Adds only the generic properties (as assigned in the library) to the
with Common Properties selected component on the schematic.
See “Annotating Component Properties on a Schematic With the
Databook Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

212 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window

Table 2-27. PADS Databook Window - Search Pane Contents (cont.)

Option Description
Annotate Properties to Adds the properties of the selected component to the selected
Selected Components symbol on the schematic.
You must enable this button in the Preferences tab of the Configure
dialog box. See the table Properties Tab - Selected Component
Annotation.
Clear the Current Search Removes the operations and expressions in the filter fields, and
clears the expressions in the Query Builder.

Add Component With Specifies that when you add a component, a net stub attaches to each
Net Stubs pin.

Add Pin Labels To Nets Specifies that when you add a component with a net stub, the net
includes a label to match the label of the pin.
Only active when Add Component With Net Stubs is active.
Symbol Preview window Shows a graphical representation of the component’s symbol. You
can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the right-click
popup menu. If you click in the window, you can zoom in with F8
and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a part by clicking in the
window and dragging the symbol onto the schematic.
Symbol dropdown list Defines the symbol to place in the schematic from a list of symbols
associated with the component in the library. Also shows the layout
decal associated with the component.

Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Searching for Components in Database Libraries [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 213

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View Pane

Databook Window - CL View Pane

Scope: PADS Designer, Integrated Project
To access: In the PADS Databook window, click the Show CL View button ( ).
Use this window pane to display parts and symbols in the central library.
Objects
Table 2-28. PADS Databook Tool - CL View Pane Contents
Tab Description
Part View Tab Displays a list of the parts in the central library that have associated
symbol, decal, and padstack data. Use these parts to create or edit
designs with logical (electrical) and physical (decal) characteristics.
See “Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab” on page 215.
Note: Part View lists symbols by part number.
Tip: You can use wildcards (*) in the Part View window to filter
parts. For example, typing PN12*89* into the Part filter produces a
match for the PN1234890ABC and PN12ABC89DEF parts. Best
practice is to use a complete search string ending with a wildcard.
Symbol View Tab Displays a list of symbols in the central library that do not have
associated decal or padstack data. Use these symbols to create or edit
designs with only logical (electrical) characteristics. You can also
use symbols to build and create new parts. See “Databook Window -
CL View - Symbol View Tab” on page 216.

Related Topics
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Working With Symbols and Components [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

214 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab

Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab

Scope: PADS Designer, Integrated Project
To access: In the PADS Databook window, click the CL View button ( ), and then click the
Part View tab.
Use the window pane tab to display parts and symbols in the central library.
Objects
Table 2-29. CL View Window Options — Part View Tab
Option Description
Add Nets Specifies to add a short section of a net to each pin of the symbol
when you add the symbol to the schematic.
Add Net Names Specifies whether or not to add net names to the sections of nets
attached to the symbol’s pins. The net names are the same as the pin
names. Active only when you check Add Nets.
Clear Filters button Clears all strings in the filter boxes.
Place Symbol button Activates place mode in the schematic window so you can place the
component on the schematic. See “Placing Symbols in a Design
With the Databook Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s
Guide for more information about adding symbols to your design.
Symbol Preview window Displays a graphical representation of the component’s symbol.
You can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the right-
click popup menu. If you click in the window, you can zoom in with
F8 and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a part by clicking in
the window and dragging the symbol onto the schematic.
Symbol dropdown list Displays a list of library symbols associated with the component,
allowing you to select the symbol to place in the schematic. Also
displays the layout decal associated with the part.
Fixed checkbox If checked, prevents changes to the decal during layout.

Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Placing One or More Instances of a Block [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 215

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab

Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab

Scope: PADS Designer, Integrated Project
To access: In the PADS Databook window, click the CL View button ( ), and then click the
Symbol View tab.
Use this window pane tab to display symbols in the central library.
Objects
Table 2-30. CL View Window Options — Symbol View Tab
Option Description
Add Nets Specifies to add a short section of a net to each pin of the symbol
when you add the symbol to the schematic.
Add Net Names Specifies whether to add net names to the sections of nets
attached to the symbol’s pins. The net names are the same as the
pin names. Active only when you check Add Nets.
Clear Filters button Clears all strings in the filter boxes.
Place Symbol button Activates place mode in the schematic window so you can place
the component on the schematic. See “Placing Symbols in a
Design With the Databook Window“ in the PADS Schematic
Design User’s Guide for more information about adding symbols
to your design.
Symbol Preview window Displays a graphical representation of the component’s symbol.
You can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the right-
click popup menu. If you click in the window, you can zoom in
with F8 and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a part by
clicking in the window and dragging the symbol onto the
schematic.
Symbol dropdown Displays a list of library symbols associated with the component,
allowing you to select the symbol to place in the schematic. Also
displays the layout decal associated with the part.

Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Placing Symbols in a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Replacing Local Symbols With Central Library Symbols [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Placing One or More Instances of a Block [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

216 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab

Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions

Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 217

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab

Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab

Scope: PADS Designer, Integrated Project
To access: In the PADS Databook window, click the CL View button ( ), and then click the
Reuse Blocks tab.
Use this window pane tab to display reuse blocks in the central library.
Objects
Table 2-31. PADS Databook Tool - CL View Options — Reuse Blocks Tab
Option Description
Add Nets Specifies to add a short section of a net to each pin of the symbol
when you add the symbol to the schematic.
Add Net Names Specifies whether or not to add net names to the sections of nets
attached to the symbol’s pins. The net names are the same as the
pin names. Active only when you check Add Nets.
Clear Filters button Clears all strings in the filter boxes.
Merge Buses button Interactively resolves conflicts between the reuse block and the
host design. Designates bus assignments in the host design
before saving and packaging.
Merge Globals button Interactively merge global nets from the reusable block to the
host design.
Merge Layers button Maps the reusable block layer stackup to the layer stackup in the
host design.
Renumber as needed These are Reference Designator settings for Reuse Blocks.
Increment By
Renumber From
Add Suffix
Add Prefix
Place Symbol button Activates place mode in the schematic window so you can place
the symbol on the schematic. See “Placing Symbols in a Design
With the Databook Window” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide for more information
about adding symbols to your design.
Symbol Preview window Displays a graphical representation of the reuse block symbol.
You can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the
right-click popup menu. If you click in the window, you can
zoom in with F8 and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a
reuse block by clicking in the window and dragging the symbol
onto the schematic.

218 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab

Table 2-31. PADS Databook Tool - CL View Options — Reuse Blocks Tab
Option Description
Symbol dropdown list Displays a list of library symbols associated with the reuse
block, allowing you to place it in the schematic. Also displays
the layout decal associated with the part.

Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Placing One or More Instances of a Block [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 219

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - Query Builder

Databook Window - Query Builder

To access: In the PADS Databook window (choose View > PADS Databook menu item),
Search pane, click Query Builder on the PADS Databook window Search pane.
Use this dialog box to build a set of conditions for the Databook tool to use in the search.
Objects
Table 2-32. PADS Databook Tool Query Builder Options
Field Description
Condition Enables the dropdown list boxes from which you can create a
condition expression.
AND Specifies that the next condition should be “ANDed” with the
previous condition or group of conditions. Not active until at
least one condition exists.
OR Specifies that the next condition should be “ORed” with the
previous condition or group of conditions. Not active until at
least one condition exists.
“(“ and “)” Groups conditions.
<- Removes the most recent condition or logical operator.
Add Adds the expression to the list of conditions.
Cancel Cancels the current expression.

Related Topics
Creating a Databook Search Query [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

220 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - Symbols View Pane

Databook Window - Symbols View Pane

Scope: PADS Designer, Netlist Project
To access: In the PADS Databook window, click the Show Library Symbols View button
( ).
Use this window pane in a Netlist project to display symbols in the symbol libraries.
Objects
Table 2-33. PADS Databook Tool - Symbols View Pane Contents
Tab Description
Symbols View tab Displays a list of symbols in the symbols library. You use these
symbols to create or edit designs with only logical (electrical)
characteristics. You can also use symbols to build and create new
parts. See “Databook Window - Symbols View - Symbol View Tab”
on page 222.

Related Topics
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Placing Symbols in a Design With the Databook Window [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 221

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - Symbols View - Symbol View Tab

Databook Window - Symbols View - Symbol View

Tab
Scope: PADS Designer, Netlist Project
To access: In the PADS Databook window, click the Show Library Symbols View button
( ), then click the Symbol View tab.
Use this window pane tab in a Netlist project to display symbols in the symbol libraries.
Objects
Table 2-34. Symbols View Window Options — Symbol View Tab
Option Description
Add Nets Specifies to add a short section of a net to each pin of the
symbol when you add the symbol to the schematic.
Add Net Names Specifies whether to add net names to the sections of nets
attached to the symbol’s pins. The net names are the same as the
pin names. Active only when you check Add Nets.
Clear Filters button Clears all strings in the filter boxes.
Place Symbol button Activates place mode in the schematic window so you can place
the component on the schematic. See “Placing Symbols in a
Design With the Databook Window” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide for more information
about adding symbols to your design.
Symbol Preview pane Displays a graphical representation of the component’s symbol.
You can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the
right-click popup menu. If you click in the window, you can
zoom in with F8 and zoom out with F7. You can also place a
part by clicking in the window and dragging the symbol onto
the schematic.
Symbol dropdown list Displays a list of library symbols associated with the
component, enabling you to select the symbol to place in the
schematic.

Related Topics
Placing Symbols in a Design With the Databook Window [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

222 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Display Control Window - Objects Tab

To access:
• View > Display Control (menu item), Objects (tab)
• , Objects (tab)

Use this window tab to control the visibility of commonly-used objects, such as tooltips, text,
highlighting, and the grid, on the schematic. You can also control the visibility of some
Navigator window items such as listings of nets. Easy access to these settings enables you to
keep your work area uncluttered by hiding unneeded data until you need to see it.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 223

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Note
Settings listed in this topic that you can control from more than one location within the
design entry tool are kept synchronized, regardless of which dialog box or window you use
to modify the setting.

Objects
Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents
Field Description
TheExpand button ( ) displays all subsections of the Objects tab.
The Collapse button ( ) hides all subsections of the Objects tab.
The Toggle hidden button switches between showing hidden items and
not showing hidden items. To hide an item row, right-click the item and
choose the Hide Selected row(s) menu item.
If you toggle to show hidden items, any items marked as hidden display in
orange. You can unhide one or more items by selecting them and right-
clicking, then selecting the Show selected row(s) menu item.
Favorites (optional)
<item_type> - Displays any Display Control window item that you add to the Favorites
<item_name> section by right-clicking on that item and choosing the Add to Favorites
menu item. The first time you add an item to the Favorites section, the
Favorites section displays with the item you added listed beneath in the
format: <item_type> - <item_name>. For example:

When you add an item to the Favorites section, the item displays in both
the Favorites section and in its original section/location. You can control
that item’s visibility in the schematic or Navigator windows from either of
those locations.
Appearance
Pin Type Arrows Toggles pin type arrow visibility on the schematic.
Half Size If the Pin Type Arrows option is enabled and this option is checked, the
arrow displays with only the upper half of the arrow showing. If the Pin
Type Arrows option is disabled, this option has no effect.
For additional information on the Half Size option, see the description for
Pintype Arrows in the topic “Settings Dialog Box - Advanced” on
page 403.

224 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Full Size If the Pin Type Arrows option is enabled and this option is checked, the
arrow displays with both sides of the pin center line showing. If the Pin
Type Arrows option is disabled, the Hierarchical Blocks option has no
effect.
For additional information on the Full Size option, see the description for
Pintype Arrows in the topic “Settings Dialog Box - Advanced” on
page 403.
Hierarchical Blocks If the Pin Type Arrows option is enabled and this option is checked, pin
type arrows are only visible on hierarchical blocks and not on any other
component type. If the Pin Type Arrows option is disabled, the
Hierarchical Blocks option has no effect.
Tooltips If unchecked, none of the tooltips for Components, Nets, or Pins display
when you hover over any of those objects, regardless of whether you have
enabled (checked) any of those object types under this option.
If checked, any Components, Nets, or Pins tooltips you enable display.
You can also control tooltip visibility from the Setup > Settings menu
item, Display category, Display pane, Show Tooltips section.
Components If you check both the Tooltips and Components options, hovering over a
component displays the corresponding tooltip.
Nets If you check both the Tooltips and Nets options, hovering over a net
displays the corresponding tooltip.
Pins If you check both the Tooltips and Pins options, hovering over a pin
displays the corresponding tooltip.
Ripper Index If checked, the bit numbers of ripped nets display.
If unchecked, the bit numbers of ripped nets do not display regardless of
whether you have enabled the Show Full Name option.
Note: This option only applies to the names of bus nets ripped after
you specify this option. It does not affect the names of bus nets already
ripped on the schematic.
Show Full Name The Ripper Index option must be enabled for this option to be operative.
If the Ripper Index option is enabled and the Show Full Name option is
checked, the full bus name displays on the ripped nets.
Note: This option only applies to the names of bus nets ripped after
you specify this option. It does not affect the names of bus nets already
ripped on the schematic.
Rulers Toggles the display of the rulers on the x and y coordinates of the
schematic.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 225

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Leader Line If checked, displays the leader lines on the schematic that visually
associate text objects to the owner of the text objects as shown in the
following figure:

Color by Net If checked, any nets configured with a custom color from the
Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Colored Nets
subcategory pane displays with the custom color.
If unchecked, nets configured with custom colors display with the default
net color rather than the custom color.
You define the default Net object color with the Setup > Settings menu
item, Display category, Objects subcategory, Objects pane.
Fill FPGA Area If checked, the tool shades the FPGA connectivity reserved areas on the
schematic.
Name Overbar If checked, the schematic displays negative-logic signals with an overbar,
such as UPPER_R/W.
Note: You designate a signal as negative logic when you initially
name the net using either the ~ or ^ prefix character, such as
~UPPER_R/W or ^UPPER_R/W. Enter which negative-logic character
the signals use as shown in the following figure:

If unchecked, the schematic displays negative-logic signals with the

defined prefix, such as ~UPPER_R/W or ^UPPER_R/W.
Physical Net If checked, displays the physical net name as a superscript of the electrical
Names net name. The physical net name represents a net that is connected on the
physical board by a trace, via, or plane segment.

226 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Text
Name If checked, displays label names on schematics. You can also control
name visibility with the Name option in the Setup > Settings menu item,
Display category, Display pane.
Symbol Text If checked, displays the symbol text on schematics. You can also control
symbol text visibility with the Symbol Text option in the Setup > Settings
menu item, Display category, Display pane.
Graphical Text If checked, displays graphical text (choose Add > Text menu item) on
schematics. You can also control graphical text visibility with the
Graphical Text option in the Setup > Settings menu item, Display
category, Display pane.
Invisible Text If checked, displays all text that has been set to hide from other tool areas,
such as property names and values from the Properties window. The
Invisible Text setting override other hide settings until you uncheck this
option.
Border
Border Outline If checked, displays a border box around schematic sheets as shown in
Figure 2-56 on page 331. This is not referring to a border symbol. You can
also control the schematic sheet border visibility with the Border option in
the Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Display pane.
Cross References If checked, displays cross reference annotations in the entire design. You
can also control cross reference visibility with the Xref Annotation option
in the Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Display pane.
Also see “Navigating the Design Using Links” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Zoning Grid If checked, displays the schematic zoning grid shown in Figure 2-56 on
page 331. You can also control the zoning grid visibility options from the
Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Display pane.
If you enable the Zoning Grid option, you can also control:
• Zone Labels — If checked, displays the zone labels at the top and left
side of the sheet. For example, at the top of the sheet you might see
numbers 1 through 5, and on the left side of the sheet you might see
letters A through D.
• Left-top Corner Of Each Grid — If checked, displays the zoning grid
label of each zone on the sheet. For example, a zone might be labeled
1A to represent the X/Y coordinate of the zone. This label appears in
the left-top corner of each grid zone.
Also see “Partitioning a Sheet Into Zones” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 227

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Zone Labels If checked, displays the zone labels along the left and upper side of each
schematic border as shown in Figure 2-56 on page 331. You can also
control the zoning label visibility with the Border option in the
Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Display pane.
Left-top corner of If checked, displays a grid label in the upper-left corner of each schematic
each grid grid region as shown in Figure 2-56 on page 331. You can also control the
grid label visibility with the “Left-Top Corner of Each Zone” option in the
Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Zone Labels section.
Navigator
Show All Symbols Controls how symbols display in the Navigator window
or Show (View > Navigator menu item ). Using the dropdown arrow , you
Hierarchical can change this field to one of the choices listed in the left column. You
Symbols Only or can also control symbol visibility with similar options in the
Don’t Show Setup > Settings menu item, Navigator category, Symbols subcategory,
Symbols Symbols pane.
Show Nets If checked, displays nets and buses in the Navigator window. You can also
control net and bus visibility with the Display nets and buses option in the
Setup > Settings menu item, Navigator category, Nets and Buses
subcategory, Nets and Buses pane.
Show Range If checked, displays the sheet range of each block in the Navigator
window. You can also control the sheet range visibility with the “Display
sheet range” option in the Setup > Settings menu item, Navigator
category, Blocks subcategory, Display Sheet Range option.
Layer Display — Also see “Controlling the Visibility of Schematic Documentation Using
Layers” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Schematic If checked, displays all objects on the schematic layer in the schematic
window. If checked, you can also control the following:
• Dim — If checked, you can control the brightness of the displayed
objects using the Dim slider bar.
— You can adjust the
brightness of the displayed schematic objects by clicking and dragging
the slider or clicking the plus sign (+) or minus sign (-).
User Layers This section enables you to add or remove user layers for your project, and
control the visibility of graphical objects you place on each layer. For
more information, see “Controlling the Visibility of Schematic
Documentation Using Layers” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

228 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Cross Probing
Zoom Fit to If checked, the design entry tool zooms in on the selected cross-probed
Selected Objects object. You can also control whether the design entry tool zooms in on the
selected cross-probed object with the Zoom Fit to Selected Objects option
in the Setup > Settings menu item, Cross Probing category, Cross
Probing pane.
Zoom to Pin The Zoom Fit to Selected Objects option must be enabled for this option to
be operative.
If the Zoom Fit to Selected Objects option is enabled and this option is
checked, when you cross probe a pin, the design entry tool zooms to show
the pin primarily. The Zoom Ratio setting determines the degree to which
the zoom magnifies the view of the pin.
If this option is disabled, when you cross probe a pin, the design entry tool
zooms to show both the pin and all or most of its component. The Zoom
Ratio setting determines the degree to which the zoom magnifies the view
of the pin and its component.
Zoom Ratio The Zoom Fit to Selected Objects option must be enabled for this option to
be operative.
The Zoom Ratio setting determines the degree to which the zoom
magnifies the view of the object(s): the left-most side of the slider
provides the highest magnification and the right-most side provides the
least magnification.
Selection & Highlight
Dim Mode Determines the level of dimming of unselected objects displayed on the
schematic. The left-most side of the slider displays unselected objects as
almost invisible and the right-most side of the slider applies no dimming at
all. Selected objects display at normal intensity.
Dynamic Highlight Specifies the color the tool uses to highlight currently selected objects.
Trace Connection If checked, graphically highlights the wires, nets, pins, connectors, and
Highlight components found using the Tools > Trace Connection menu item ( ).
Highlight Color Specifies the color used to highlight objects on the schematic when the
Trace Connection Highlight option is checked and the Trace Connection
menu item is used.
Scheme Control
Once you have configured the Display Control window, you can save the
configuration to a file. You can save multiple configuration schemes to
different files for later recall.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 229

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab

Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Indicates which saved scheme is active and enables you to switch between
schemes. To switch between schemes, click the dropdown arrow and
select a different scheme from the list.
Enables you to browse your file structure for a saved scheme and then
open it to reconfigure the Display Control window configuration.
Enables you to save the current Display Control window configuration to
a scheme. Click this button to display the Save Scheme dialog box, which
enables you to set the following parameters:
• Scheme name
Note: You can save the current window configuration to just one,
or all three of the following scheme location choices:
• Save locally with design
• Save in working directory
• Save in user defined location
If you select this choice, you can either browse to the location or enter
the path in the text field.
Deletes the currently active scheme.

Related Topics
Display Control Window - Properties Tab

230 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Properties Tab

Display Control Window - Properties Tab

To access:
• View > Display Control (menu item), Properties (tab)
• , Properties tab

Use this window tab to control the visibility of specific properties on the schematic. Easy access
to the property visibility enables you to keep your work area uncluttered by hiding unneeded
data until you need to see it.
Note
You can also control property visibility from the Properties window (choose
View > Properties menu item). If a particular property is not set to be visible on an instance
from the Properties window, you cannot make it visible from the Display Control window
Properties tab. The View > Properties window hide setting takes precedence. If a property is
set to visible from the Properties window, you can use the Display Control window to hide it,
and later show it again.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 231

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Properties Tab

Figure 2-15. Display Control Window - Properties Tab

Objects
Table 2-36. Display Control Window - Properties Tab Contents
Field Description
TheExpand button ( ) displays all subsections of the Properties tab.
The Collapse button ( ) hides all subsections of the Properties tab.
The Toggle hidden button switches between showing hidden items and
not showing hidden items. To hide an item row, right-click the item and
choose the Hide Selected row(s) menu item.
If you toggle to show hidden items, any items marked as hidden display in
orange. You can unhide one or more items by selecting them and right-
clicking, then selecting the Show selected row(s) menu item.

232 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Properties Tab

Table 2-36. Display Control Window - Properties Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties or Model Properties
<property_name> Lists properties defined in the property definition (.prp) file so that you
can control the visibility of each one individually on the schematic. Also
see the note preceding this table.
You can also add any item listed on this tab to the Favorites section in the
Objects tab. For example, if you right-click Ref Designator and choose
the Add to Favorites menu item, the tool adds the Ref Designator item to
the Objects tab Favorites section.

Scheme Control Section - Once you configure the Display Control window, you
can save the configuration to a file. You can save multiple configuration schemes to different
files for later recall.
Indicates which saved scheme is active and enables you to switch between
schemes. To switch between schemes, click the dropdown arrow and
select a different scheme from the list.
Enables you to browse your file structure for a saved scheme and then
open it to reconfigure the Display Control window configuration.
Enables you to save the current Display Control window configuration to
a scheme. Click this button to display the Save Scheme dialog box, which
enables you to set the following parameters:
• Scheme name
Note: You can save the current window configuration to just one,
or all three, of the following scheme location choices:
• Save locally with design
• Save in working directory
• Save in user defined location — If you select this choice, you can
either browse to the location or enter the path in the text field.
Deletes the currently active scheme.

Related Topics
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 233

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
File Viewer Utility Window

File Viewer Utility Window

To access:
• File > File Viewer menu item

Use this dialog box to view the contents of log files generated by the design entry tool. These
files are located in the project’s ./LogFiles folder.
Figure 2-16. File Viewer Window

Description
The File Viewer Utility window is divided into two smaller windows. The smaller window on
the left contains a list of files, and the smaller window on the right displays the text of the file
that is selected on the left.

The menus at the top of the File Viewer Utility window provide you with all of the capabilities
you need to view and manage files. Additionally, a toolbar across the top of the File Viewer
Utility window provides buttons that allow you to easy access to more commonly used menu
items. You can also access additional context-sensitive menus in each of the smaller windows
by right-clicking in the window and choosing any of the popup menu items.

Note
You cannot copy and paste sections of one File Viewer file into another File Viewer file.

234 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
File Viewer Utility Window

Objects

Field Description
Prints the active file.If no text is no highlighted, the tool prints the
,
entire file. If text is highlighted, the tool prints only the highlighted
portion.
To access from the menu: File > Print
Displays full pages of the selected file.
To access from the menu: File > Print Preview
Finds the text that you specify in the Find dialog box in the active
window. You can repeat the search from the last result by clicking the
Find Next button in the Find dialog box.
To access from the menu: Edit > Find and Edit > Find Next
Copies the selection and puts it on the Clipboard.
To access from the menu: Edit > Copy
Deletes the selected file.
To access from the menu: File > Delete
Displays files in a list.
To access from the menu: View > List
Displays information about each file in a window.
To access from the menu: View > Details

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 235

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

To access:
• Edit > Find/Replace

Use this dialog box to search for text, or to search for and replace text.
Figure 2-17. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box - PADS Designer

Objects
Table 2-37. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Find what Specifies the string of characters for which to search.The dropdown list provides
access to previously used search strings.
Within Defines the scope of your search.
Found Reports how many instances of the string were found

236 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Table 2-37. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
More >> Provides access to additional details to constrain or expand your text search. (Less
<< hides the additional details.)
• Look in - If checked, searches the specified area.
• Look for - Defines the type of text to look for. The dropdown list below the
options selects the scope of your search:
• Current Values - Searches the scope displayed in the Properties dialog box.
The scope can be symbol, block, or instance.
• All values - Searches all scopes. If the property has multiple values for
different scopes, the PADS Designer tool reports all values.
• Symbol values - Searches for the value on the central library symbol.
• Block values - Searches for values assigned to blocks in a flat hierarchy, or
to blocks at the top level of a hierarchical design. Does not search the
hierarchy below the block.
• Instance values - Searches for values on instances of a symbol anywhere in
a flat or hierarchical design.
• Options - Provides the following search limiters:
• Match case - If checked, any hits must match the exact upper and lower
case of the search string.
• Whole words - If checked, any hits must be a whole word. Ignores instances
where the search string is part of another word.
• Use wildcards - If checked, enables the following wildcard characters:
• * - for multiple characters
? - for any single character
Example 1:
Find Expression - ab*cd
Found String - abXYZcd
Replace Expression - klm*ryz
Replaced String - klmXYZryz
Example 2:
Find Expression - ad*y??
Found String - adXWYyZRF
Replace Expression - wert*tr??
Replaced String - wertXWYtrZR
• Use regular expressions - If checked, excludes the “Whole Words”
selection. See the topic “Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches” on
page 633.
• Search in selection - Searches only selected objects.
• Select properties only - (Find tab only.)
• Remove empty property - (Replace tab only.)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 237

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Table 2-37. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the search string and selects it
Find All Finds all occurrences of the search string and selects them. (Find tab only.)
Replace Specifies a character string to substitute for the found occurrences. (Replace tab
With only.)
Replace Replaces a single occurrence of the search string. (Replace tab only.)
Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the search string. (Replace tab only.)

Related Topics
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches

238 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Font Mapping Dialog Box

Font Mapping Dialog Box

To access: Choose the File > Export > PDF menu item, click the Fonts tab,and click
next to the appropriate font.
Use this dialog box to select the source for font mapping.
Figure 2-18. Font Mapping Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-38. PDF Writer Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents
Option Description
Use PADS Designer Uses the settings from Setup > Settings menu item, Display
mapping category, Font Styles subcategory to map fonts.
Use stroke font Displays a dropdown list of stroke fonts from which to select.
Use PDF native font Enables you to choose a native PDF font.
• Native PDF Font button — Displays a list of the available native
PDF fonts from which to select.
• Sample Font Listing button — Opens a PDF document showing
examples of the available native PDF fonts.
Recommendation: For most efficient and portable results, use
Native PDF fonts.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 239

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Font Mapping Dialog Box

Table 2-38. PDF Writer Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents (cont.)
Option Description
Use system scalable font Enables you to choose a system scalable font.
• System Scalable Font button — Displays a list of available
system scalable fonts (Windows fonts). Enables you to choose a
style and size for the font, and shows a sample of your selection.
The system scalable font you select overrides the selected stroke
font.

Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

240 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Generate Symbol Dialog Box

Generate Symbol Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > Generate Block Symbol
Use this dialog box to generate a new block symbol.
Figure 2-19. Generate Symbol Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-39. Generate Symbol Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Block Input Specifies the currently selected block.
Symbol Output Specifies the symbol name. Uses the same name as the block name, by default,
to create the hierarchical association.
If Symbol Provides two options for handling the existing symbol:
Already Exists • Overwrite It — Selected, overwrites a symbol that has the name specified
in the Symbol Output field.
• Update It — If you make changes to an existing symbol, this updates the
symbol to include your changes.
Open Symbol If checked, opens the generated symbol for editing in the Symbol Editor.
in Symbol
Editor
Link the If checked, links the symbol to the block, and you cannot modify the Symbol
symbol to the name. The block and its corresponding symbol have the same name.
block If un-checked, you can create a new symbol starting from the interface of the
active block, but no link is preserved. Creates a new “independent” symbol.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 241

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Generate Symbol Dialog Box

Table 2-39. Generate Symbol Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Advanced Displays the Advanced Options dialog box, which enables you to set the
button following:
• Symbol properties - Adds properties to the symbol you are creating. The
syntax for this field is: name=value. Use spaces to separate properties.
• Symbol property size - sets the size of the symbol attribute.
(Use whitespace to separate pins in the input and output pin list.)
• Input pin(s) - Specifies the names of inputs to the symbol. The
PADS Designer tool uses the values in this field as a last resort in the
algorithm that searches for I/O nets. Type the names of the input pins
separated by a space. Use the left and right arrow keys to scroll through
multiple name entries.
• Output pin(s) - Specifies the names of outputs from the symbol.
The following fields specify settings to override the values you assigned in the
Setup > Settings dialog box:
• Pin spacing
• Pin length
• Pin label size
Pin sides
• For each of the following pin types, select placement values of top, left,
bottom, or right for each:
• IN, OUT, ANALOG, BI, OCM, OEL, TRI

Related Topics
Creating a Bottom-Up Hierarchical Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

242 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Insert Object Dialog Box

Insert Object Dialog Box

To access: Add > Insert Object
Use this dialog box to insert an object into your document.
Figure 2-20. Insert Object Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-40. Insert Object Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Create New If selected, specifies that you want to insert a new object into the
document.
Create from File If selected, specifies that you want to insert an existing object into the
document.
Object Type Select the type of information you want to insert into the document.
Display as Icon If checked, display the link to the object as an icon in the document.
Result Describes the result of the selected option.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 243

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box

Keyin Netlister Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > Keyin Netlist
Use this dialog box to configure the Keyin Netlister. Other tools that do not directly integrate
with the design entry tool, such as some layout tools, use the Keyin netlist to import
connectivity data.
Figure 2-21. Keyin Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-41. Keyin Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the output file of the resulting Keyin netlist.
Scope Define the scope for the netlist file as one of the folowing:
• Project
• Board (specify which board form the dropdown list)
• Block (specify which block form the dropdown list)

244 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box

Table 2-41. Keyin Netlister Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Options If checked, the “Open the generated file” option enables you to
specify the following:
• Open with — Specify the program you want to use to open the
file (use the Browse button or specify the path to the viewer
program).
• Run new viewer for each generated file — Spawns a separate
view for each generated file.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 245

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab

HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > HyperLynx LineSim (menu item), Options (tab)
Use this dialog box tab to configure the HyperLynx LineSim tool to export to HyperLynx® for
signal integrity simulation, or to import any new data from HyperLynx.
Figure 2-22. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab

Objects
Table 2-42. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Load Data from Start the retrieving process of the selected nets in the schematic.
PADS Designer
button

246 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab

Table 2-42. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Connect to Connect to PADS Designer when the HyperLynx LineSim tool is started.
PADS Designer at Note: If this is selected, and you have nets selected in the schematic,
start the retrieving process is automatically started when LineSim is
started.
Selected Nets Display of selected nets.
Note: You can see all of the selected nets on the Schematic Topology
tab.
Tip: You can see all of the selected nets on the Schematic Topology tab.
Schematic Contents
Complete schematic Export using the complete schematic including interconnections.
Parts only Export using only the parts in the schematic, excluding interconnections.
schematic
Transmission Line Properties
Layer Determines the following transmission line parameters derived from the
layer stack-up:
• Copper thickness
• Dielectric thicknesses above and below
• Dielectric constants
LineSim assumes that a stack-up transmission line is routed on a board
with a plane layer. Stack-ups with no plane layers are allowed.
If a stack-up has not yet been defined for the current project, the default is
a six layer stack-up:
• Top side - external layer available for traces
• Ground Plane - not available for traces
• Inner signal layer - internal layer available for traces
• Inner signal layer - internal layer available for traces
• Power Plane - not available for traces
• Bottom side - external layer available for traces.
Default values for dielectric material type & thickness and copper weight
will be the same as those set by default in LineSim.
Length Defines the default transmission line length (trace length between pins in
a net) for simulation purposes. The default length is three inches (3000
mils).
Width Defines the default transmission line width. The default trace width is 6
mils (0.006 inches).

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 247

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab

Table 2-42. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Passives Prefixes Shows all reference designator prefixes used for passive components. The
Type column is a fixed list of passive device types: Inductor, Capacitor,
Resistor, Ferrite Bead, Models. See “HyperLynx LineSim - Passives
Prefixes - Models Usage” on page 618.
Tip: Separate the list with a space, comma, or semicolon.
Supply Nets Shows all nets in the design that are voltage supply nets.
To add a supply net, scroll to the bottom of the Supply Nets list, click
twice, slowly, in the Net box, and type the name of the net. Type the
voltage value in the Voltage box.
Filename Specify the path to the LineSim FFS export or import file in the box, or
you can select the Browse button to browse to the design project file.
Export to Opens HyperLynx and generates a LineSim schematic file.
HyperLynx button Note: To activate this button, install HyperLynx on the same machine
as PADS Designer.
Import from Imports the information from the listed file and populates the dialog box
HyperLynx button fields. The PADS Designer tool compares the imported data with the
currently loaded schematic topology.
Note: To activate this button, install HyperLynx on the same machine
as PADS Designer.
See also “Merge Differences Dialog Box” on page 251.

Related Topics
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab
Exporting to HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Importing From HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

248 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab

HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic

Topology Tab
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > HyperLynx LineSim (menu item), Schematic Topology (tab)
Use this dialog box tab to control the nets in the HyperLynx LineSim tool schematic topology.
Figure 2-23. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab

Objects
Table 2-43. HyperLynx LineSim - Schematic Topology Tab Contents
Field Description
Schematic Lists all of the nets loaded from PADS Designer.
Topology list

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 249

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab

Table 2-43. HyperLynx LineSim - Schematic Topology Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Automatically zooms to the selected net.
Tip: If a pin is selected, PADS Designer zooms to the pin parent
component.
Exclude/Include Deselects the selected electrical net or subnet in the Schematic Topology
Net button list (not in the schematic). If a subnet is excluded, it may cause other
subnets to become excluded if the chosen subnet is the only path between
other subnets.
Tip: Available only when an electrical net or subnet is selected
Change Direction: Specifies the direction for bidirectional pins.
Tip: The button contains the graphical representation of the pin
direction that will be applied when you click it.
Moves the selected pin up or down.

Related Topics
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab
Exporting to HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Importing From HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

250 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Merge Differences Dialog Box

Merge Differences Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: On the HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab (choose Tools > HyperLynx
LineSim (menu item), click Options (tab)), click the Import from HyperLynx button.
Use this dialog box to compare the current topology with the imported topology.
Note
HyperLynx must be installed on the same machine as the PADS Designer to access this
dialog box.

Figure 2-24. Merge Differences Dialog Box

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 251

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Merge Differences Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-44. Merge Differences Dialog Box - Schematic Topology tab Contents
Field Description
Current Topology Shows the topology retrieved from PADS Designer schematic or from
box previous import.
Imported Topology Shows the topology received from the current import.
box
Updated Properties Shows the updated property and values for the selected pin.
boxes
Accept button Back-annotates the model assignments.
Deny button Closes the dialog box without importing any new data.
Show stackup and Expands the dialog box to show more options.
trace changes
Changes in the Shows all changes made in the stackup.
stackup box
Layer Shows the layer on which the stackup resides.
Trace Width Shows the default transmission line length (trace length between pins in a
net) for simulation purposes.
Trace Length Shows the default transmission line width.

Related Topics
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab

252 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Library Symbol Dialog Box

New Library Symbol Dialog Box

Scope: Netlist project
To access: File > New > Library Symbol
Use this dialog box to configure a new symbol in a Netlist project.
Figure 2-25. New Library Symbol Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-45. Library Symbol Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Symbol name Enter a name that is applied to the symbol.
Library Choose the desired library.
Symbol creation method Choose one of the following symbol creation methods:
• Open a new empty symbol in Symbol Editor.
See also “Symbol Creation and Editing” in the PADS
Schematic Design User’s Guide.
• Launch the Symbol Wizard.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 253

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Project Dialog Box

New Project Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• File > New > Project
• New Project button ( )

Use this dialog box to select a Project Template for a new project, and then set parameters such
as the project name, project location, and library location (if applicable).
Description
The Project Templates list box appears on the left side of the New Project dialog box. The right
side of the dialog box changes based on which Project Template you choose.

Figure 2-26. New Project Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-46. New Project Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Name Specifies the name of the project
Location Specifies where the project is located on the network. You can
use the Browse button to navigate to a specific location

254 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Project Dialog Box

Table 2-46. New Project Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Central Library Path This field may be previously filled in from a Project Template
that you selected. Or, you can manually specify a central library
or navigate to one with the Browse button.
Enable concurrent design If checked, specifies a client-server Configuration Manager.
Server Name If you checked the previous box, you use this field to specify the
name of the server
Layout Tool From the dropdown list, choose the layout tool that your netlist
(Netlist project only) output will be targeting for this project.
Advanced button: This brings up an Advanced dialog box that
enables you to specify a path to:
Constraints Definition file (*.cns)
PCB Configuration file (*.cfg)

Related Topics
Creating a Design Entry Tool Project [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Project Templates [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 255

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Open Block Dialog Box

Open Block Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > > Open > Block
Use this dialog box to open a block that is internal or external to the current project.
Description
The open block appears as a tab in the schematic window.

Figure 2-27. Open Block Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-47. Open Block Dialog Box Fields
Fields Description
Look in Specifies the project that contains the block.
Block name Specifies the name of the block.
Block of type Specifies a block type to use to filter the list.
Open Opens the specified block in the schematic window.
Cancel Aborts the procedure and closes the window.

256 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Packager Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• Tools > Package

• Package button ( )

Use this dialog box to configure the Packager, which prepares the project for forward
annotation by assigning reference designators to map each component in the logical schematic
to a physical part.
Figure 2-28. Packager Dialog Box

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 257

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-48. Packager Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Project Displays the current project file or enables you to browse to a
project file.
Packaging Options — By default, the Packager maintains existing component packages and
minimizes the number of parts used by placing components into unused gates. Use the following
packaging options to control packaging behavior.
Operation • Package Symbols — Maintains any existing packaging. The
packager only packages new or unpackaged components.
Default.
• Repackage All Symbols — The Packager removes all the
Frozen Package properties and packages all components,
including previously packaged components.
• Repackage Unfixed Symbols — Packages all components
except those that have a Frozen Package property value of Fix.
• Verify Packaging — Checks the design to verify that it will
package correctly. Writes errors to the partpkg.log file.
Optimization If you have chosen either of the “Repackage” options in the
Operation field, this field is not applicable and is greyed out.
From the dropdown list, choose one of the following:
• Board — Enables symbols to be combined into packages
regardless of the symbol’s location within the schematic.
Default.
• Block — This option only allows symbols within the same
block to be combined into packages.
• Page — This option only allows symbols on the same page to
be combined into packages.
Scope A dropdown list displays the blocks that make up a design and the
sheets that make up each block.
If you leave the Scope field blank, the Packager works on the entire
design.
If you choose a block, the Packager narrows the scope to all sheets
in that block.
If you choose a particular sheet from one of the blocks, the
Packager narrows the operation scope even further to just that
sheet.

258 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Table 2-48. Packager Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Update PDB Properties on Displays component properties from the parts database (PDB) on
Symbol the schematic. Select this option if you are getting component
properties from the PDB, and not from the Databook tool. For
more information refer to “Annotating Component Properties on a
Schematic With the Databook Window” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Allow Alpha-only Prevents the Packager from replacing existing alpha-only
Reference Designators Reference Designators.
Log CDB Data Writes verbose information on the packaging process to the
Packager results tab and to a log file. To optimize performance,
enable this option to debug packager errors, and then disable once
the design is error-free.
Fill Reference Designator If checked, the Packager fills in Reference Designators (Ref Des)
Gaps when new unpackaged parts are added to the design.
Example: Given U100, U102, and U103: If a new part is added, it
is assigned Reference Designator U101 to fill in the gap between
U100 and U102.
If unchecked, Ref Des assignments continue at the top of the
existing numbering scheme when new unpackaged parts are added
to the design.
Example: Given the parts in the previous example: If a new part is
added, the gap between U100 and U102 is retained and the new
part is assigned Ref Des U104.
Report warnings for single If checked, the Packager includes warnings for this condition in the
pin nets PartPkg.log file and on the Packager tab in the Output window.
If unchecked, warnings for this condition are suppressed. Default.
PDB Extraction Options -- When you package a design, PADS Designer downloads a local
copy of all central library parts used in the design. This is known as extraction You use PDB
Extraction Options to control extraction behavior.
Only Extract Missing Extracts only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy.
Library Data Does not check for newer versions of local parts.
Extract Missing with If selected, enables you to extract parts from the attached library
Selected Library Data that differ from those in the local project.
• Select — Opens the “Select Parts to Update Dialog Box” on
page 319.
Update Local Library Data Extracts only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy.
with Newer Central Overwrites existing local parts with newer versions if they exist in
Library Data the central library.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 259

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Table 2-48. Packager Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Rebuild Local library data; Deletes local data and re-extracts.
Preserve locally built data Exception: If you have imported any data directly into the local
copy (for example, an FPGA Pin File), that data is preserved.
Delete local data, then Deletes all local data and re-extracts.
rebuild all local library
data

Related Topics
Packaging a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box

260 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
PADS Designer To PADS Dialog Box

PADS Designer To PADS Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > PADS Layout
Use this dialog box to specify a new or existing PCB design, and then associate it with the
PADS Designer project.
Description
If the active project board of the PADS Designer project is not yet associated with a PCB file,
the PADS Designer tool opens the PADS Designer To PADS dialog box when you initiate the
forward annotation process (Tools > PADS Layout menu item).

Figure 2-29. PADS Designer To PADS

Objects
Table 2-49. PADS Designer To PADS Contents
Field Description
Central Library Defines the path and filename of the central library.
Select template Specifies a start-up file for the new PCB design file, which you choose from
the dropdown list.
PCB file Specifies the path and filename of a PADS Layout PCB file. If the PCB file
does not exist, the PADS Designer tool creates it.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 261

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab

PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab

To access: File > Export > PDF (menu item), General (tab)
Use this dialog box and tab to select basic settings for PDF output.
Objects
Table 2-50. PADS PDF Dialog Box - General Tab Contents
Field Description
Output File Specifies the output PDF file.
Name
Range Specifies the range to print as one of the following:
• Project
• Block. Default for PADS Designer. Use the dropdown list to specify
which block.
PDF Color Options:
Black on White Generates a PDF file with a white background, maps all colors to black, and
(Suppress Black suppresses (does not print) black text. Default.
Text)
Color on White Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and white background. PDF
(Black Text) Writer retrieves the color map from the setup in PADS Designer.
Note: Select a reasonable color scheme in PADS Designer before
selecting this option. From PADS Designer, choose the Setup > Settings
menu item, click the Display category, click the Objects subcategory, and
then specify colors that work with the white background.
Color on Black Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and black background. PDF
Writer retrieves the color map from the current setup.
Note: Before selecting this option, select a reasonable color scheme in
PADS Designer. From PADS Designer, choose the Setup > Settings
menu item, click the Display category, Objects subcategory, and then
specify colors that work with the black background.
Black on White Generates a PDF file with a white background and maps all colors to black.
(Prints Text in This option prints black text.
Black)
Color on White Generates a PDF file with a white background and prints color text.
(Prints Color Note: Select a reasonable color scheme in PADS Designer before
Text) selecting this option. From PADS Designer, click the Setup > Settings
menu item, click the Display category, click the Objects subcategory, and
then specify colors that work with the white background.

262 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab

Table 2-50. PADS PDF Dialog Box - General Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Add popup menu If checked, creates a shortcut menu in the generated PDF file for each
on components component in the design. When you click a component in Adobe Acrobat,
the shortcut menu displays the symbol name, properties, and the option to
push to the underlying schematic if the component is a composite, as shown
below:

Note: Point to the shortcut menu, such as “Symbol” (as shown above) to
display the sub-menu.
Visible If checked, displays a box around hyperlink text in the PDF. Click the link to
Component/Net go to the text associated with the hyperlink.
Hyperlinks
Start PDF If checked, starts the PDF Reader.
Reader After
Generation
Change ICTs to If checked, creates a bitmap of a schematic representation of the
schematics Interconnectivity Table (ICT), including the ICT’s components and
connectivity. The components appear in a best-guess location, but the
placement is not editable.

Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 263

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

To access: File > Export > PDF (menu item), Advanced (tab)
Use this dialog box and tab to select advanced settings for PDF output.
Description
PDF Writer is used to read a PADS Designer schematic, generate a hierarchical representation
of the schematic design, and then save the design as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file.

Figure 2-30. PADS PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Objects
Table 2-51. PADS PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab Contents
Field Description
Stop At Stops the printing at the level specified by the property entered here.
Property Default: STD.

264 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Table 2-51. PADS PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
URL-valued Specifies properties whose values are potential URLs. PDF Writer generates
Properties links in the PDF file for the values of these properties.To add properties to the
list, type the property name(s) in the box. This causes the property name to
show up in the PDF output surrounded by a link box to the actual URL.
Rules:
• You must use forward slashes (/) when specifying URL-valued properties.
Do not use backslashes (\).
• If the property name contains more than one string, such as “Arbitrary
Text”, enclose the strings in double quotes.
• If you are entering multiple property names, place a space between names.
Schematic Sets the specific order in which to process sheets in a schematic hierarchy.
Sheet Order Rule: Make sure that each composite block has a component-level property
Property with a specific name whose value is an integer as the starting page number for
that set of schematic sheets.
Note: Point to the shortcut menu, such as “Symbol” (as shown above) to
display the sub-menu.
Minimum line Sets the width for all lines in the schematic including boxes, arcs, and so on.
thickness This value is a scale factor (default of 1.00 = 100%). If you want to increase
the line thicknesses two times over their present thickness, use a value of 2.00
(200%). To decrease line thicknesses by 1/2, use a value of 0.50 (50%).
Rule: This setting does not change text thickness.
Stroke font line Specifies the line width for stroke fonts.
width
Use exclusion If checked, excludes any sheets from the PDF file that you have specified to
info exclude. See “Excluding Sheets From Printing or PDF Generation” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 265

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

To access: File > Export > PDF (menu item), Fonts (tab)
Use this dialog box tab to specify the fonts PDF Writer uses for each PADS Designer font type.
Description
By default, the PADS Designer project font settings dictate PDF Writer font mapping. Any
settings you specify on this tab override the default settings.

Tip
To change PADS Designer default font settings, choose the Setup > Settings menu item,
click the Display category, and click the Font Styles subcategory.

PDF Writer reads an PADS Designer schematic, generates a hierarchical representation of the
schematic design, and then saves the design as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file.

You can map any PADS Designer font types to one of the following:

• Native PDF font

• System scalable font (Windows font)
• PADS Designer stroke font emulation
Figure 2-31. PADS PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

266 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-52. PADS PDF Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents
Field Description
DxD Font Name Displays the available PADS Designer font types.
PDF Font Displays the font mapping for each PADS Designer font type. (You
can change the font mapping from the “Font Mapping Dialog Box”
on page 239.)
Browse (...) button Opens the Font Mapping dialog box for the associated PDF Font so
that you can change the font mapping.
Use PADS Designer font If checked, uses the font mapping defined in the Setup > Settings
mappings menu item, Display category, Font Styles subcategory.
If not checked, uses the font mapping you select in the “Font
Mapping Dialog Box” on page 239.
Scale Factor Increases or reduces text size. The scaling factor is a percentage
value. The higher the value, the larger the text size.

Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
Font Mapping Dialog Box

Part Lister Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister
Use this dialog box to control the Part Lister, which creates a Bill of Materials (BOM) for the
design.
Note
If you have components in your design with properties that are used by Part Lister and that
are also dependent on packaging (such as Ref Designator property values), consider
packaging the design before running the Part Lister. See “Packaging a Design” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

Description
A list of panes appears on the left side of the Part Lister dialog box as shown in Figure 2-32. The
right side of the dialog box changes based on which pane you choose:

• “Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane” on page 272

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 267

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box

• “Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane” on page 274

• “Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns” on page 279
• “Part Lister Dialog Box - Header” on page 284
The Config Name field appears on all panes of the dialog box.

Figure 2-32. Part Lister Dialog Box

Object
The Config Name field at the bottom of the Part Lister dialog box shown in Figure 2-32
specifies the name of the Part Lister configuration.

When you click the Config Name field list button, a popup menu provides a list of
configurations found by the Part Lister tool in the configuration file search order. If you do not
provide a name, Part Lister tool uses the first configuration file it finds in the search order.

For more information about configuration files and the default files provided with the tool, see
“The Part Lister Configuration File” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Note
If you change any of the Part Lister dialog box settings to create a BOM, the Part Lister tool
saves a new configuration file in your project directory.

The tool provides several pre-defined configurations, as shown in the popup list of
configurations of Figure 2-33.

268 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box

Figure 2-33. Pre-Defined Configurations

The default configurations are as follows:

• DefaultCSV — Specifies a comma-separated value (CSV) format file (.csv) BOM of

symbol partitions and symbols as shown in Example 2-1.
Example 2-1. DefaultCSV BOM

• Parts-SymbolsByPartition — Specifies an Excel spreadsheet format file (.xlsx) BOM of

part numbers and symbols, sorted by symbol partition.
• Parts-SymbolsByPartitionHTML — HTML format file (.htm) BOM of part numbers
and symbols, sorted by symbol partition.
• Parts-SymbolsByPartitionText — Text format file (.txt) BOM of part numbers and
symbols, sorted by symbol partition as shown in Example 2-2.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 269

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box

Example 2-2. Parts-SymbolsByPartitionText BOM

• PartsListerDefaults — Specifies a text format file (.txt) BOM of part numbers sorted by
reference designator as shown in Example 2-3.
Example 2-3. PartsListerDefaults BOM

• PipedPartNumbers — Specifies a text format file (.txt) BOM of part numbers sorted by
reference designators. Suffixes of “piped” part numbers are ignored.
• PipedPartNumbersHTML — Specifies an HTML format file (.htm) BOM of part
numbers sorted by reference designators. Suffixes of “piped” part numbers are ignored.
• PipedPartNumbersXLS — Specifies an Excel spreadsheet format file (.xlsx) BOM of
part numbers sorted by reference designators. Suffixes of “piped” part numbers are
ignored.
• SingleLinePerRefDes — Specifies a text format file (.txt) BOM of part numbers sorted
by reference designators and a single line per reference designator as shown in
Example 2-4.

270 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box

Example 2-4. SingleLinePerRefDes BOM

• SingleLinePerRefDesHTML — Specifies an HTML format file (.htm) BOM of part

numbers sorted by reference designators and a single line per reference designator.
For more information about “piped” Part Number values, see “Ignoring DA/BS Piped Suffixes
From Part Numbers” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Related Topics
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Generating Bills of Materials [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 271

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister (menu item), General (pane)
Use the General pane to specify the name and location of the output Bill of Materials (BOM)
file, and the scope of the generated BOM.
Figure 2-34. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

Objects
Table 2-53. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the name of the output file. You can use the folder icon to browse
to an existing folder.
The default name in the text box is the name of the open project, with an
appropriate extension based on the settings for “Output” in the Advanced
pane.
Scope
Select one of the following scopes for the Part Lister to operate on:
• Project
• Board (specify which board from the dropdown list)
• Block (specify which block from the dropdown list)
Options

272 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

Table 2-53. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Open the Check to open the generated file at the conclusion of the Part Lister
generated file process.
Open with Check, and then specify the tool to use to read the file.
Options Specify options for the tool you specified to read the file. For example, if
you specify notepad.exe in the Open with field, you could use the /A option
to open the file as ANSI.
Config Name See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 273

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister (menu item), Advanced (category)
Use the Advanced pane to specify the output file format Part Lister produces. If your design has
variants, you can specify the variant database in this pane.
Figure 2-35. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

274 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Objects
Table 2-54. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents
Field Description
Output: format Specifies the type of output file from the dropdown list as one of the
following:
• Text File (PLAIN) — Produces a text file output such as:
Part Lister output for Board1
Generated on Monday, March 21, 2011
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
--------------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
2 1 CONN14P U3
...
6 3 R47-2512 R1-R3 0.50
------
8.14
• HTML — Produces an HTML file, such as:
Part Lister output for Board1 Generated on Monday, March 21, 2011

• EXCEL — (Prerequisite: Excel is installed.) Produces an Excel

spreadsheet, such as:

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 275

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Table 2-54. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Output: file Specifies the file extension of the output file. Automatically updates
extension depending on the setting specified in the format dropdown list.
Add Title Rows Specifies whether or not to include Column Titles (defined on the Header
pane) at the top of each column.
Examples:
• If checked — (The bolded lines in the following example show the title
rows added:)
Part Lister output for Board1Generated on Thursday,
March 24, 2011
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
----------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
...

• If unchecked — (The bolded lines shown in the previous example are

left out of the report:)
Part Lister output for Board1
Generated on Thursday, March 24, 2011
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32 ...
Text Output
Split into pages Enables use of the “lines each” field to specify the number of Text Output
lines produced before the Part Lister inserts a form feed.
Ignore Column If checked, the Part Lister output ignores all column settings in Text Output
Formatting specified in the Columns pane as shown in the following example:

#QTYPart NumberRef DesignatorCost1174LS374-

SMDU15.3221CONN14PU33274LS08-SMDU21.3242C1825-1U-63-10C1-
C252R10K-603R4-R563R47-2512R1-R30.508.14

If unchecked, the Part List uses the column settings as shown in the
following example:
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
----------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
2 1 CONN14P U3
3 1 74LS08-SMD U2 1.32
4 2 C1825-1U-63-10 C1-C2
5 2 R10K-603 R4-R5
6 3 R47-2512 R1-R3 0.50
--------
8.14

276 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Table 2-54. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Delimiter
Specifies a delimiter to use between the columns. Use the > button to select
either the \t (Tab) or the \ (Backslash) characters as a delimiter. Or, specify
your own delimiter in the text box, as shown in the second example below.
Examples:
• (Null - no delimiter)
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
----------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
2 1 CONN14P U3

• | (the pipe character)

# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost
--------------------------------------------------
1 | 1 |74LS374-SMD |U1 | 5.32
2 | 1 |CONN14P |U3 |

Also see the “Before first column” and “After last column” in the next table
row
Before first Adds the delimiter specified in the Delimiter text box in front of the first
column column.
After first column If checked, the Part Lister adds the delimiter specified in the Delimiter text
box after the last column.

|# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost |

----------------------------------------------------|
1 | 1 |74LS374-SMD |U1 | 5.32 |
2 | 1 |CONN14P |U3 | |

Example: (If both Before first column and After first column are checked:)
Variant Database
Config Specifies the pathname to a variant component database configuration file
(.dbc). Enables you to create BOMs for variants of a design.
Config Name See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 277

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

278 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister (menu item), Columns (pane)
Use this dialog box Columns pane to configure the Part Lister output table that lists the parts
used in a design.
Description
Figure 2-36. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane

You define and control Part Lister output columns in the left-side list box of the Columns pane
as shown in Figure 2-37. The configuration file (PartListerDefaults.ipl by default) defines the
content and settings of the columns pane, as shown in Figure 2-36. The example in Figure 2-37
shows how you can add your own column to this list (such as “Cost”) and delete others (such as
“Value” and “Description”). The buttons above the columns list enable you to customize the
columns as follows:

• — Add a new column

• — Reorder a selected column by moving it up

• — Reorder a selected column by moving it down

• — Delete a selected column

When you select a column from the column list, the right side of the Columns pane changes to
show the current configuration of the selected column. The following table in this topic
describes the settings accessible on the Columns pane for a selected column.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 279

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Figure 2-37. Part Lister Columns Pane

Objects
Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents
Field Description
Type Choose a column type as one of the following:
• Number — The column represents sequential row numbers.
• Quantity — The column represents quantities.
• System — The column represents internal PADS Designer properties.
• Property — The column represents the value of a predefined property, as
selected in the Property pull-down list.
• Text — The column represents text, which you specify in the Text box.
Note: Depending on which type you choose, other settings are not
applicable.

280 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Property/ If Type = Property, this field provides a pull-down list of the available Common
Text/System Properties (.prp) used to gather values for the selected column.
Additionally, this field supports the following properties not in the list of
Common Properties (manually enter one of these in the field rather than use the
dropdown list):
• Name
• Id
• Partition
• Symbol Name
• Sheet
• Sheet Number
• Block
If the Type = Text, you enter a text value that displays in the selected column.
If the Type = System, you choose an PADS Designer internal property from the
Property dropdown list.
Display
Align From the dropdown list, choose column alignment as one of the following:
• Center
• Left
• Right
Width Specify the column width in characters. The value is an integer in the range 1-
1000. Any text longer than the specified width is right-justified, and the last
character is replaced with a hyphen (-).
Mode If Type = Property, select the column mode as one of the following:
• Full — Values for all objects are displayed as a list. The values are sorted
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value repeats the appropriate number of times.
• Slots — Values for all objects display as a list. The values sort
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value repeats the appropriate number of times. The slot values are appended
after a slash character (such as: U1/1, U1/2, U2/1).
• Compress — All values sort alphanumerically. Repeated values are removed.
Ranges such as A1, A2, A3 shorten to A1-A3. Slots are never appended.
• Unique — All values sort alphanumerically. Repeated values are removed. A
list such as IC1, IC1, IC2, IC3, IC3, IC5 shortens to IC1, IC2, IC3, IC5.
• Total — The column displays the total of all numeric values for all objects.
Non-numeric values are ignored.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 281

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Decimal If Type = Property, define the number of decimal places (digits after decimal
point). If the value displayed in the column is not a real number, the Part Lister
ignores this setting.
If you specify 0 in the Decimal field, all numbers in the selected column round to
the nearest integer value.
Hidden If checked, the output does not display the column. Note that even if a column is
not visible, the Part Lister might use it for sort order.
List If Type = Property and Display Mode = Full or Compressed, sets the separator
Delimiter used if a list of values displays in a column. Can be any string of characters.
Default: space character.
Sort If Type = Property and you define a Primary Key (see Part Lister option More >
Primary Key in the following row), then you can set whether the output sorts by
the contents of the column. Choose one of the following sort options:
• None — The selected column does not determine the sorting order.
• Ascending — The selected column content sorts in ascending order.
• Descending — The selected column content sorts in descending order.
• Priority — Prerequisite - Ascending or Descending is selected. This field
determines the sorting priority if more than one column has the Sort
attribute set to Ascending or Descending.
The valid value is an integer in the range 0-9. The value 9 means the
highest priority. The Part Lister sorts the column with the highest priority
first. If duplicate values occur in this first column, the Part Lister continues
the sort using lower priority columns. If there is more than one column
with the same priority, the order of column definitions (from left to right in
the output) determines the priority.
The sort is alphanumeric (meaning that A2 goes before A11) and case-
insensitive.
See also “BOM Output Example: Sorting Rows With Columns Designated as
Primary” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

282 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
More If Type = Property, you have the option of additional column settings as follows:
• Primary Key (Required) — If checked, determines which column the Part
Lister uses as the primary sort. You must apply this primary sort key to at
least one column of type Property, such as the default column Part Number as
shown in the following Example Output.
If a Primary Key is not present on one of the columns, the Part Lister output
is blank.
• Secondary Key — If checked, determines which column to sort on if there
are identical values listed in the Primary Key row. Apply the secondary sort
key to at least one column of type Property, such as the default column Ref
Designator as shown in the following Example Output.
• Sum row values — If checked, totals the numerical value of all data in the
column. See the Cost column in the following Example Output.
If the result of the summing produces more than the maximum number of
digits allowed for a particular field (specified by width), the sum total
truncates on the right side. To indicate that a truncation has occurred, the Part
Lister places a hyphen (“-”) on the right side of the total.
Example Output:
----------------------------------------------------------
|# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost |
-----------------------------------------------------------
| 1 | 1 |74LS08-SMD |U2 |1.32 |
...
| 6 | 3 |R47-2512 |R1-R3 |0.50, |
| | | | |0.50,0.50 |
| | | | |--------- |
| | | | |8.14 |
Config See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.
Name

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 283

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister (menu item), Header (pane)
Use this dialog box pane to specify the column headers in the Part Lister output table that lists
the parts used in a design.
Figure 2-38. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane

Objects
Table 2-56. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane Contents
Field Description
Use Custom If checked, the text you enter in the Header text box appears at the top of
Header the Part Lister output.
Header

284 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

Table 2-56. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
(text box) Enter and edit text in this box to customize the header text that appears at
the top of each Part Lister Report. The Part Lister provides the following
fields to help you customize the header:
• $(NAME) - Name of the Project, Board or Block (see example below)
• $(DATE) - As shown in the example below
• $(TIME) - such as 14:45:28 (hh:mm:ss)
• $(VARIANT) - If PADS Designer is in the Variant mode (meaning that
the variant view was created in the EVM window), this field displays
the data specified in the current variant.
Tip: To add a blank line between the Header and the first row, place a
<Return> after the Header followed by one or more spaces.
Example 1:
Part Lister output for $(NAME)
Generated on $(DATE)
The above default header text results in the following (as an example):
Part Lister output for Board1
Generated on Thursday, November 30, 2012
Tip: To add a predefined property to the text box from a list, in the text
enter $( (dollar sign + left paren). Double-click a property from the list
to add it to the text box.
Config Name See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 285

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Paste Special Dialog Box

Paste Special Dialog Box

To access: Edit > Paste Special
Use this dialog box to paste or embed clipboard contents to a PADS Designer schematic in a
specified format, or to create a link to information that can be updated in another application.
Figure 2-39. Paste Special Dialog Box - Examples 1 and 2

286 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Paste Special Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-57. Paste Special Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Displays the name of the source data and its location. If the data was copied
from an application that did not provide the source data and its location to
the Clipboard, such as a MS-DOS based application, “Unknown Source”
appears.
Paste If selected, inserts the Clipboard contents into a document. See Example 1
in Figure 2-39.
Paste Link If selected, inserts the Clipboard contents into a document and creates a link
to another application as shown in Example 2 in Figure 2-39.
This button is available only when the Clipboard contents come from an
application whose contents data can be linked to the schematic editor.
Save the file containing the information you want to link before you copy
the information to the Clipboard.
As Specify the type of information you want to paste from the Clipboard. Some
of the possibilities are shown as follows:
Graphic A graphic representation of the Clipboard contents and the data needed to
edit an object. The name of the object in the list depends on the type of
contents on the Clipboard.
Formatted Text Text with Formatting — for example, Microsoft Excel table formatting.
Picture A graphic representation of information, such as a Windows metafile.
Bitmap A graphic representation used by pictures from other applications, such as
Paintbrush for Windows.
Display As Icon If checked, displays the pasted object using an icon. Example 2 in
Figure 2-39 shows the pasted object using the Adobe Acrobat Document
icon.
If unchecked, displays the pasted object as a simulated representation.
Example 1 in Figure 2-39 shows the pasted object as a page from the Adobe
Acrobat Document.
Change Icon If you check Display As Icon, use this button to display the Change Icon
button dialog box, which enables you to choose a different icon.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 287

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window

Project Integration Window

Scope: Integrated project
To access: Click the indicator light button ( or ) at the bottom of the user interface to toggle
the window visibility.
Use this window to display the status of pending synchronization issues. A green indicator light
indicates there are no pending changes. A yellow indicator light means that you must take some
action to incorporate the pending change into the design entry tool.

288 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window

Description
You toggle the window visibility by clicking the design synchronization indicator light in the
status bar at the bottom of the application as shown in the following figure:

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 289

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window

Figure 2-40. Project Integration Window Example

290 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window

Objects

Yellow Indicator Light Description

Synchronization
(PCB Layout) Indicates that the design entry tool needs to synchronize data with the
layout tool.
You must execute the back annotation process in the layout tool to
finish the synchronization which toggles the indicator light to green.
Also see “Back Annotating from PADS Layout to an Integrated
PADS Designer” in the PADS Layout User's Guide and Reference
Manual and “Interfacing Between PADS Designer and PADS
Layout” in the PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual.
Symbols
Library Indicates a change to the central library .lmc file.
When clicked, the tool sets the yellow light back to green.
Note: This indicator is triggered if a central library symbol
moves from one partition to another. You can determine if this is
the cause of a Library yellow condition by choosing the
Tools > Update Library Partitions menu item and viewing the
Component definition update dialog box, Symbols partitions tab. If
one or more symbols are listed, select them and click OK to
synchronize those instantiated symbols with the new central library
partition location.
Symbols Indicates that a symbol has changed in the central library .lmc file.
When clicked, the tool opens the Component definition update dialog
box, Component definitions tab, with the changed symbol(s)
selected. You should configure the dialog box options you want, and
then click OK.
Note: You can also access this dialog box by choosing the
Tools > Update Symbols menu item.
For more information, see the following:
“Updating a Project With Changed Library Content” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 291

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window

Yellow Indicator Light Description

Rippers Indicates that a new Net Ripper is waiting to load, which is specified
in the Setup > Settings menu item, Project (category), Special
Components (subcategory) pane.
When clicked, the tool updates all net rippers in the project.
Note: This is the same as choosing the Tools > Update Other
Objects menu item, then selecting the Bus Rippers type and the
Project range options.
For more information, see the following:
“Using a Customized Ripper Graphic” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Documentation
Evaluated (@) properties Indicates that properties such as @DATETIME or @SHEET need to
update. One way this condition occurs is when you create a new
sheet.
When clicked, the tool updates the @<property_name> properties to
reflect the new evaluated value. For example, the @DATETIME
property value is updated with the current date and time data.
Note: This is the same as choosing the Tools > Update Other
Objects menu item, then selecting the Properties type and the
Project range.
Print order Indicates that blocks or sheets moved in the Navigator hierarchy,
which affects print order.
When clicked, the tool updates the $(Number) properties to reflect
the new print order.
Note: This is the same as choosing the Tools > Update Other
Objects menu item, then selecting the Print Order type and the
Project range options.
For more information, see the following:
“Changing Sheet Print Order” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

292 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window

Yellow Indicator Light Description

Schematics
Bus Contents Indicates that a Bus Content definition changed and is out of sync
with instantiated versions of that bus.
When clicked, the tool synchronizes instantiated Bus Contents buses
with the Bus Contents (busconts.ini file) definitions.
• If you added a new value to a Bus Contents definition, you may
want to rip a new net from the instantiated bus on the schematic.
• If you removed a value from a Bus Contents definition, any
previously-ripped net that matches the removed value on that
instantiated bus disconnects. You need to edit the schematic to
reconnect that net another way or delete it.
Note: This is the same as choosing the Tools > Update Other
Objects menu item, then selecting the Bus Signals type and the
Project range.
For more information, see the following:
“Creating and Editing Predefined Buses” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Related Topics
Updating a Project With Changed Library Content [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 293

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Properties Window

Properties Window
To access:
• View > Properties
• Properties button ( )

• Double-click an object
• Select an object, and right-click and choose Properties (popup menu item).
Use this window to view property information associated with the selected object. You can also
add or modify property values, control property visibility, and add properties to the selected
object.
Objects
• The Properties window content changes based on the selected object as shown in the
following example Properties window.
Figure 2-41. Properties Window - Example

Related Topics
Creating a User-Defined Property for a Netlist Project [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Component Property [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Replicating a Package Pattern [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

294 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Properties Window

Changing the Value of a Component Property [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Restoring/Repositioning Symbol Properties to Defined Locations [PADS Schematic Design Us-
er's Guide]
User Interface Customization [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Property Editing Rules

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 295

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

This is accessible only from a Netlist project. A similar version of this dialog box is accessible
from the PADS Library Tools in the integrated PADS project.
To access: Tools > Property Definition Editor
Use this dialog box in a Netlist project to define the available properties and their format in a
central library. Use this editor to define new properties, define property types and their
associated syntax, and change certain aspects of predefined system properties.
Description
The values of the properties are stored on the data objects and are not defined in the Property
Definition Editor. User-defined properties are used to add custom information to symbols and
parts in PADS Designer.

The Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents table describes the Property Definition
Dialog Box fields.

The Default Values and Ranges in the Property Definition Editor table describes the default
values and ranges used by the Property Definition Editor.

The Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor table describes the regular
expressions used by the Property Definition Editor.

296 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Figure 2-42. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box- Netlist Project Only

Objects
Table 2-58. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Properties file Provides the path to the .prp file. Use the New Properties File button
( ) to specify a new properties file.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 297

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Table 2-58. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Property list This list shows the existing properties defined in the current .prp file.
Check the box of each property you want placed in a schematic when
the Packager is used.
You can manage the list as follows:
• Add a new property by clicking the New Properties button ( ).
An entry appears at the bottom of the list. Fill in the new property
name and choose the Format as one of: “Character String”,
“Integer”, or “Real” number.
• Delete a new property by clicking the Delete Property button
( ).
• Undelete a new property by clicking the Undo Delete button ( ).
• Click the Name or Format field name at the top of the list to
reorganize the list.
Advanced Click this button to expand the Property Definition Editor to view the
advanced features on the property you have selected in the Property list.
Options applied in Edit certain characteristics of the selected property in this section of the
design entry dialog box, such as Default Color and Default Font.
See the following table for more information.
Attach selected Specify the object type associated with the selected property such as:
property to Symbol, Pin, Net.
Include selected In PADS Designer, the Design entry option is the only choice.
property in property
lists for
Ignore notation Ignore notation settings when displaying property value. Check this
box to enable this feature.
Import button Use this button to display the “Import Properties From File” dialog box.
Specify a file from which you can import previously-created properties
into your current project.
The following table lists the properties, default values, and range defaults in this section of the
dialog box.

298 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Table 2-59. Default Values and Ranges in the Property Definition Editor
Attribute Default Options
Property Number Old number Integer
Note: Property Number information
displays but cannot be edited. This
enables you to correct any problems that
occur if you have duplicate property
names.
Regular Expressions (see the Regular “*” (editable) Any regular expression string
Expressions Used by Property Definition
Editor table)
Maximum number of characters 132 (editable) 1 - 255
Maximum number of lines 1 (editable) 1 - xxx
Default Text Height .08 (editable) Any height
Visible No Yes / No
Instanced Allowed Single Single / Multiple
Overrideable Yes Yes / No
Default Font Default (editable) Dropdown list of available
fonts
Default Color Red (editable) Dropdown list of available
colors
Regular expressions can be built up from the “single-character” regular expressions in the
following table:
Table 2-60. Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor
Character Description
c Any ordinary character not listed in this table. An ordinary character matches
itself.
\ Backslash. When followed by a special character, the regular expression
matches the “quoted” character.
. Matches any single character.
[c..] A non-empty string of characters, enclosed in square brackets, matches any
single character in the string. For example [abcdef] matches any single
character from the set 'abcdef'. When the first character of a string is a caret (^),
then the regular expression matches any character except those in the remainder
of the string. For example, [^12345] matches any character except '12345'. A
caret in any other position is interpreted as an ordinary character.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 299

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Table 2-60. Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor (cont.)

Character Description
[]...] The right square bracket does not terminate the enclosed string if it is the first
character (after an initial '^'), in the bracketed string. In this position, it is treated
as an ordinary character.
[l-r] The minus sign between two characters indicates a range of consecutive ASCII
characters to match. For example, the range '[0-9]' is equivalent to the string
'[0123456789]'. The '-' is treated as an ordinary character if it occurs first (or
first after an initial '^) or last in the string.
e* Closure (repeat) a regular expression zero or more times.
e+ One or more occurrences of an expression.
e? Zero or one occurrences of an expression.
e1e2 Regular expression concatenation.
e1|e2 Match either e1 or e2.
(...) Regular expression may be enclosed in parenthesis to force operator
precedence. The operator precedence is '[]', '*+?', concatenation and the
operator with the lowest priority is '|'. Some special macros have been pre-
defined to ease the task of regular expression construction.

300 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane

Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General

Pane
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > Quick Connection View (menu item), General (pane)
Use this dialog box pane to configure the general settings of the PADS Designer Quick
Connection View (QCV) generic netlister.
Figure 2-43. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane

Objects
Table 2-61. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Sets the location where the .txt netlist output file is located.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 301

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane

Table 2-61. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Scope Choose one of the following scopes:
• Project — Netlist the entire project. If selected, the Output File Name
field changes to Output Folder with an empty line, which indicates the
project folder is the default.
• Board — Netlist just the board you specify from the associated
dropdown list. If selected, the Output File Name field changes to
<board_name>.qcv.
• Block — Netlist just the block you specify from the associated
dropdown list. If selected, the Output File Name changes to
<block_name>.qcv.
Options
Open the If checked, you have the choice of the following:
generated file • Open with — Check this option to specify the text viewer you want to
use, such as C:\Windows\System32\notepad.exe.
• Run new viewer for each generated file — Check this option to specify
a new text viewer for each netlist run.
Send generated If checked, the output appears in a separate Quick Connection View in the
data into Output Output window
Window

Related Topics
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]

302 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display

Pane
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > Quick Connection View (menu item), Display (pane)
Use this dialog box pane to configure the display settings of the PADS Designer Quick
Connection View (QCV) generic netlister.
Figure 2-44. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 303

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Objects
Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents
Field Description
Display Nets If checked, the QCV output displays nets based on the following settings:
• Flat Mode — If checked, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name
above each group of related nets as shown in the following example
(Single Line Per Net is also set in this example):
FlatNet: PAR
NET : '/MICRO1/AMD_8111_TO_HUB1/PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6
NET : '/MICRO1/PAR'
NET : '/MICRO1/PCI_CONN1/PAR' J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1
• Compress Flat Nets — (Only available if Flat Mode is checked).
If checked, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name preceding the
compressed net and also eliminates the hierarchical pins. The following
example shows the compressed PAR net from above:
. . .
FlatNet: 'PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6 J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1
. . .
The three '/MICRO1/... net lines are listed without the FlatNet line
preceding them.
• Class Mode — If checked, groups nets by class in a separate section of
the netlist as noted by the following entry:
# begin ‘(Default)’ NetClass nets
. . .
• Display Properties/Net Classes — If checked, adds Property and
NetClass information for each net such as the following:
NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43
NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43Property:
NetClass=(Default)NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43
. . .
(Display Nets description is continued in the next table row)

304 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets • Single Line Per Net — If checked, QCV configures the output to put all
(continued) large nets on one line (20 is the maximum number of pins displayed per
net before a line break is issued) as shown in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2 C49-2
...
(all /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on one, possibly long, line)
If unchecked, QCV configures the output to break large nets into
separate lines as shown in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' GND-B C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C49-2 C52-2 C53-2 U32-A2 U32-A4 ...
(The /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on multiple lines)
• Only Global Net — If checked, the QCV output only lists global nets
such as the following (in this example, the Display Power/Ground
separately option was also checked):
# begin Power&Ground net list
NET : '/$1I49/GND' C1-1
NET : '/$1I72/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
• Separate No/Single Pin Nets — (Only available if “Only No/Single Pin
Nets” is unchecked.) If checked, QCV configures the output to list the
“No/Single Pin nets” in a separate section of the netlist as noted by the
following entry:
# begin one pin nets list
• Only No/Single Pin Nets — (Only available if “Separate No/Single Pin
Nets” is unchecked.) If checked, QCV displays just the no/single pin
nets.
(Display Nets description is continued in the next table row)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 305

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets • Display Power/Ground separately — If unchecked, QCV displays the
(continued) power and ground nets in the list with other nets as shown with the
ground net RLDRAM1/GND in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/CLK' U32-J12 U33-J12 U34-J12 U35-J12
...
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2 C213-2
...
NET : '/RLDRAM1/NCS0' U32-L2 U34-L2 U36-L2 U38-L2
...
(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed with other non-power/non-ground
nets such as /RLDRAM1/CLK and /RLDRAM1/NCS0.)
If checked, QCV displays the power and ground nets separate from
other nets instead of being merged with them.
# begin Power&Ground net list
. . .NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2
C213-2 ...
(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed in a section with other power/
ground nets.)
— If checked, you have the following options on how to split the
Power/Ground nets: (For more information see “Explicit/Implicit
Power Supply Definition” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide).
• Differentiate Power from Ground
• Split the Power/Ground into:
(Continued in the next table row)

306 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets • Differentiate Power from Ground — If checked, QCV separates the
(continued) Power and Ground nets into the following separate sections:
# begin Power nets list
NET : '/MICRO1/1.25V' 184PINX72DDR_LWR1-DDR_VREF ...
...
NET : '/POWER_BLOCK1/0.9V' C34-1 U42-2 U42-4
...
# begin Ground nets list
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' U32-A2 U32-A4 U32-A9 U32-B4 U32-B9
...

• Split the Power/Ground into:

- Explicit - connected to a P&G (Power & Ground) tap - Implicit -
defined in the PDB (Parts Database)
— If checked, QCV lists the Explicit Power and Ground nets in an
Explicit-designated section of the list. QCV lists the Implicit Power and
Ground nets in a separate section designated for Implicit Power and
Ground nets as shown in the following example:
# begin EXPLICIT Power&Ground net list
NET : '/MICRO1/1.25V' 184PINX72DDR_LWR1-DDR_VREF ...
NET : '/CLOCK_DIST1/GND' C24-1 C25-2 C26-1 C27-2 C55-2
...
NET : '/POWER_BLOCK1/0.9V' C34-1 U42-2 U42-4
...
# begin IMPLICIT Power&Ground net list
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' U32-A2 U32-A4 U32-A9 U32-B4 U32-B9
...
NET : '/RLDRAM1/0.9V' U32-A1 U32-C1 U32-C12 U32-T1 ...
...
(QCV lists the /RLDRAM1/GND net in a section with other Implicit
power and ground nets, meaning these were defined in the Parts
Database. QCV lists explicit power and ground nets in a section that
groups nets that are connected to a power or ground tap.)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 307

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display If checked, the output QCV netlist displays a separate components list
Components section that identifies components as shown in the following example:
# begin components list
COMP: '74LS374-SMD' 'U1' 'Logic:ls374.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R2' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R1' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'C1825-1U-63-10' 'C1' 'Discrete:c_linear_v.1'
COMP: 'C1825-1U-63-10' 'C2' 'Discrete:c_linear_v.1'
. . .
• Parts Mode — (Only available if Display Components is checked.)
If checked, the QCV display limits the output (from preceding example)
to the following:
# begin components list
COMP: '74LS374-SMD' 'U1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R2'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R1'
. . .

• Display Pins — (Only available if Display Components is checked.)

If checked, the QCV display adds pin information for each listed
component as shown in the following example for the R3 component
taken from the preceding example:
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3' 'Discrete:RES.1' Explicit Pin:
'1' 'B1' 'QDATA(1)' Explicit Pin: '2' 'B2' 'QD1'

• Display Properties — (Only available if Display Components is

checked.)
If checked, the QCV adds property information associated with each
component.
Display Un- If checked, the QCV output lists the unconnected pins in a separate section
connected Pins of the netlist as shown in the following entry:
# begin un-connected pins list
PIN : '/U3' U3-6
. . .
Note: This list does not include unconnected pins that terminate with a
No Connect Symbol.

308 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Un- If checked, the QCV output lists the unconnected pins that terminate with a
connected Pins via No Connect Symbol (by TERM):
No Connect # begin un-connected pins list
PIN : '/U1' U1-11 (by TERM)
Note: This option only works if the Include terminated nets (No
Connect) option is unchecked on the Advanced page.
For more information, see the following:
“Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net
Stubs)” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

Related Topics
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 309

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced

Tab
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > Quick Connection View (menu item), Advanced (pane)
Use this dialog box pane to configure the advanced settings of the PADS Designer Quick
Connection View (QCV) generic netlister.
Figure 2-45. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Objects
Table 2-63. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Contents
Field Description
Sort Choose how you want the output to be sorted as one of the following:
• None — No sort is specified
• Ascending — QCV orders each section of the output alphabetically A -
Z and numerically 1 - 9.
• Descending — QCV orders each section alphabetically Z - A and
numerically 9 - 1.
Filter Choose how you want the output to be filtered:
None, Ref. Des., Net Name, Part, or Class.
For filters other than None, enter the appropriate value.

310 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Table 2-63. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Special
Exclude Special If checked, exclude special components from the output.
Component
Use labels in paths If checked, labels appear in the output paths as shown in bold in the
following example:
'/HF_lpfilter/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
If unchecked, the output does not use labels in the paths, but uses a unique
identifier as shown in bold in the following example:
'/$1I72/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
Include terminated If checked, the QCV output lists nets that terminate with a No Connect
nets (No Connect) Symbol.
Note: If this option is checked, the Display Un-connected Pins via No
Connect on the Display page has no affect.
Also see the following:
“Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net
Stubs)in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

Related Topics
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
The QCV Netlist Output Format

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 311

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window

Replace Part Window

This is accessible only from an integrated PADS project.
To access:
• Edit > Find and Replace > Replace Part
• Right-click the part to replace, and choose Replace Part (popup menu item).
Use this window in an integrated PADS project when replacing parts to set the source part
number, the replacement part number, the scope for the replacement, and to specify how you
want to map pins and properties on the replaced part(s).
Objects

Field Description
Source Part Number Specify the part that you want to replace.
Note: If you invoke the Replace Part window by right-
clicking the part to replace and choosing the Replace Part
menu item, this field is already filled in.
Scope Click the dropdown arrow and select the scope for the
replacement from the list:
• Project — The entire project and all hierarchy
• Board — The active board and all hierarchy
• Schematic — The active schematic, excluding hierarchy
• Schematic Down Hierarchy — The active schematic,
including hierarchy
• Sheet — The active sheet, excluding hierarchy
• Sheet Down Hierarchy — The active sheet, including
hierarchy
• Initial selection — The selected part(s)
Note: If you invoke the Replace Part window by right-
clicking the selected part(s) to replace and choosing the
Replace Part menu item, the Scope defaults to Initial selection.
Replacement Part Number Specify the part that you want to use as a replacement. You can
either:
• Type the name of the replacement part in the field.
• Drag-and-drop the part from the PADS Designer Databook
window’s component pane.
• Drag-and-drop the part from the PADS Designer Search
window’s Library - Parts tab.
Tip: You must specify a valid replacement part number
before continuing.

312 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window

Field Description
Assistant If checked, displays the Replace Assistant when you click the
Replace button. The Replace Assistant enables you to choose one
of the following:
• Replace All — Replaces all un-replaced source parts with the
replacement part.
• Replace — Replaces the currently selected source part with
the replacement part, and selects the next part in the selection
series.
• Skip — Skips over the currently selected part without
replacing it, and selects the next part in the selection series.
• Cancel — Cancels the replacement process.
Preserve Ref Designator If checked, preserves the existing reference designator on the
replacement part.
Note: If you do not check this box, you will need to run the
packager later.
Part(s) found list Lists part numbers that match the source part number value
within the specified scope.
Advanced Click the plus sign (+) to expand the advanced options. Click the
minus sign (-) to hide these options. Click the Pin Mapping
button to open the Pin Mapping dialog box. Click the Properties
button to open the Property Mapping dialog box.
Pin Mapping button Displays the Pin Mapping dialog box, which displays all of the
pins of the Source Part (left side) and the Replacement Part (right
side). This dialog box enables you to control pin mapping. Use
the choices at the top of the dialog box to configure the dialog box
to:
• Map by Pin Number — Maps the pin numbers of the Source
Part to pin numbers on the Replacement Part.
• Map by Pin Name — Maps the pin names on the Source Part
to pin names on the Replacement Part.
• Map selected rows — Maps just the rows you select.
• Remove Mapping — Removes all mapping.
The results of your mapping display in the Mapped Pins section
of the dialog box.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 313

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window

Field Description
Properties button Displays the Property Mapping dialog box, which displays all of
the properties associated with the schematic source part and the
properties associated with the library definitions of the
replacement part. You can set the properties mapping to one of
the following:
• Library Only — On the replacement part, only use the
properties specified by the library part definition.
• Schematic wins —When a part instance property is duplicated
on the schematic and in the library part definition, use the
value on the schematic instance for the replacement part.
• Library wins — When a part instance property is duplicated
on the schematic and in the library part definition, use the
value in the library part definition for the replacement part.

Related Topics
Replacing a Symbol, Part, or Decal [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

314 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box

Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box

To access:
• Select a symbol, and choose the Edit > Replace Symbol menu item.
• Right-click, and choose the Replace Symbol popup menu item.
Use this dialog box to set symbol replacement criteria.
Figure 2-46. Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-64. Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Replace selected Click the Browse button to open the DataBook window, the CL View tab,
symbol(s)/part(s) from which you can choose a symbol to be used for the replacement.
with:
Preserve “Ref If checked, the replacement symbol retains the pre-existing Ref
Designator” Designator.
Replace part To modify the part number for the replacement select either of the
following:
• Symbol only — Only the symbol is replaced.
• Replace part with — Use the associated list box to select a new part
that is used to replace the selected part.
Replace selection Select one of the following:
in • Active sheet — Replaces the symbol in only the active sheet.
• All open sheets — Replaces the symbol in all open sheets.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 315

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box

Table 2-64. Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Property values To manipulate property values on the replaced symbol, select one of the
following:
• Use only library values — The replaced symbol uses only the property
values defined in the library.
• Merge (schematic values win) — Property values from the new symbol
are merged with the property values of the replaced symbol. If there are
duplicate properties, the values from the new symbol from the
schematic will take precedence over the existing values.
• Merge (library values win) — Property values from the new symbol are
merged with the property values of the replaced symbol. If there are
duplicate properties, the values from the new symbol from the library
will take precedence over the existing values.

Related Topics
Replacing a Symbol, Part, or Decal [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

316 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
RINF Netlister Dialog Box

RINF Netlister Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > RINF Netlist
Use this dialog box to configure the RINF netlist output.
Figure 2-47. RINF Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-65. RINF Netlister Dialog Box
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the output file of the resulting RINF netlist.
Scope Define the scope for the netlist file as one of the following:
• Project
• Board (specify which board form the dropdown list)
• Block (specify which block form the dropdown list)
Options If checked, the “Open the generated file” option enables you to
specify:
• Open with — Specify the program you want to use to open the
file (use the Browse button or specify the path to the viewer
program).
• Run new viewer for each generated file — Spawns a separate
view for each generated file.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 317

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Scale Dialog Box

Scale Dialog Box

To access:
• With a scalable object selected, choose the Format > Scale menu item.

• With a scalable object selected, click .

Use this dialog box to scale the selected object up or down using a scale factor that you specify.
Figure 2-48. Scale Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-66. Scale Dialog Box Option
Field Description
Scale Factor Select the scale factor to use. Use a number greater than 1 to enlarge and a
number between 0 and 1 to reduce.

318 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box

Select Parts to Update Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Tools > Package > Select
Use this dialog box to update the project with updated parts from the attached library.
Figure 2-49. Select Parts to Update Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-67. Select Parts to Update Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Out-of-sync parts Displays the out-of-sync part number, the timestamp of the part in
the project, and the timestamp of the part in the library.
Select All If checked, selects all rows in the table.

Related Topics
Packaging a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 319

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Settings Dialog Box - Project

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category)
Use this dialog box to define project-level settings such as project paths, which are stored in the
<design>.prj file.
Description
The project type template you choose determines the fields displayed.

Figure 2-50. Settings Dialog Box - Example Project Settings for Netlist
Template

Objects
Table 2-68. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents
Field Description
Central Library (Not available in a Netlist project)
Path Defines the path to the central library. Enter a pathname or browse to the
location.
Special Specify the path to the Special Components
Components Also see “Editing the Special Components List” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

320 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Table 2-68. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Border Symbols Specify the path to the Border Symbols
Also see “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Bus Contents Specify the path to the Bus Contents
“Bus Contents File Format” on page 26
Property (Netlist project only)
Definitions Specify the path to the Property Definitions file (netlist.prp)
Enable concurrent If checked, specify a concurrent design server. If you change the status of this
design box after you have created the project, you must restart PADS Designer for the
change to take effect.
See also “Distributed Multi-User Configurations” in the Concurrent Design
Administrator’s Guide.
Server Name If the “Enable concurrent design” box is checked, provide the path to the
dedicated Client-Server Configuration Manager server.
To change the server, you must open the project and modify this field.
If the server becomes unavailable, the project will not open. You must edit the
name.prj file manually with a new server name.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 321

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Table 2-68. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Enable edit mode If the “Enable concurrent design” box is checked, set one of the following
for opened sheets conditions for the “Enable edit mode for opened sheets” setting:
• If checked, the first designer to open a sheet gets read-write access. Any
subsequent designer opening the same sheet gets read-only access
designated by an information bar at the top of the schematic window as
follows:
If the designer who has read-write access closes the sheet, the other
designers with the same sheet open see the following text on the information
bar:
• If unchecked, the first designer to open a sheet does not get read-write
access to the sheet. Instead, the information bar displays the following:

Any other designer who opens the same sheet sees the same bar.
The first designer who clicks the Click to Edit button gets read-write access to
the sheet. All other designers then see a message in the information bar that
describes who has locked the sheet as follows:

If the Hide button is clicked, the information bar is hidden, but a thin yellow bar
is visible at the top of the schematic window. Click on the bar to expand the
information bar again. If the text in the information bar changes while it is
hidden, it flashes a few times to let you know something changed.
See also “The Multi-User Environment” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Layout Tool (Netlist project only)
Choose your layout tool from the dropdown list.
Use Custom (Netlist project only)
Constraints File If checked, specify a location to a Constraints Definition file.

322 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Table 2-68. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Use Custom (Netlist project only)
Configuration File If checked, specify a location to a PCB Configuration file.
If this option is checked and the configuration file path is specified using
absolute or relative settings, for example: C:\MyPath\name.cfg or .\
name.cfg, it will look for the file in the C:\Mypath folder or the project
folder respectively. In this case it will not search the paths if the file is not
found in the stated location but will output an error message.
If this option is checked and the configuration file path is not specified, or
the file name is entered with no path information such as namedfile.cfg, the
PADS Designer tool looks first in the project directory, then the WDIR path
and finally in the standard directory. If the configuration file is not specified,
the search looks for a file named vendorname.cfg.
If the file cannot be found, the PCB Interface dialog will warn the user.
If unchecked, the standard directory is searched for the configuration file listed
in the pcbsystem.ini file. If it is not found there, the WDIR variable list is
searched, read from left to right to find the listed configuration file.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 323

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Board

Settings Dialog Box - Board

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards (subcategory), Board
(Design# or name)
Use this dialog box to configure a board.
Figure 2-51. Board# Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-69. Settings Dialog Box - Boards# Contents
Field Description
Top level block Specify the top level block from the dropdown list.
Allow forward If checked, allow forward annotation.
annotation
Allow back annotation If checked, allow back annotation.
Note: If unchecked, the Packager (Tools > Package menu item)
ignores the setting. The Packager updates both the Pin Numbers and
Ref Designators regardless of this setting.
Conflict resolution

324 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Board

Table 2-69. Settings Dialog Box - Boards# Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Front end always wins If this radio button is selected, the front end wins during conflict
resolution regardless of whether front or back annotation is taking
place.
Back end always wins If this radio button is selected, the back end wins during conflict
resolution regardless of whether front or back annotation is taking
place.
Library options
Search Path Scheme Set the search path scheme name.
Symbol Partitions Lets you list and manage the available symbol partitions. Use the
following buttons to help create and manage the symbol partition list:
- New (or use <Insert> key): Create a new entry in list box
- Delete (or use <Delete> key): Deletes selected entry
- Move Up (or use <Alt> + <up-arrow>): Move selected entry up
one level
- Move Down (or use <Alt> + <down-arrow>): Move selected entry
down one level
PDB Search Path Lets you list and manage the available PartsData path.
Uses the same navigator buttons as shown for the previous Symbol
Partitions list.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 325

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries

Scope: Netlist project
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Symbol Libraries
Use this dialog box to specify the location(s) of legacy PADS Designer symbol libraries in
either a new or existing Netlist project.
Figure 2-52. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries

Objects
Table 2-70. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries Fields
Field Description
Main window Enables you to add or delete names of and paths to legacy symbol libraries.
Import Imports selected legacy symbol libraries into the current project.

Related Topics
Working With Symbols and Components [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

326 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Special Components

Settings Dialog Box - Special Components

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Special Components
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to create selection lists for specialized pin components to be added to
schematics.
Description
The dropdown list enables you to group the lists by type.

Figure 2-53. Settings Dialog Box - Special Components

Objects
Table 2-71. Settings Dialog Box - Special Components Fields
Field Description
Dropdown list Specifies the type of pin component to display in the window.
New Insert button Enables you to select components, of the type specified in the dropdown
list, to add to the display.

Related Topics
Editing the Special Components List [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 327

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents

Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Bus Contents (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to list the available bus contents and their values, modify existing bus
contents values, or create new bus contents.
Description
The results are stored in a bus contents file that you specify in Setup > Settings menu item,
Project category. For more information on Bus Contents and this file, see “Bus Contents File
Format” on page 26.)

Note
When you instantiate a predefined bus such as A(7:0),B(7:0) on the schematic, each net
ripped from this bus always uses the full bus name, regardless of whether the setting “Use
Full Bus Name on Ripper” is unchecked (disabled) in the Setup > Settings menu item,
Advanced category. In this example, every net ripped from this bus uses A(7:0),B(7:0) as the
property Name value.

Figure 2-54. Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents

328 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents

Objects
Table 2-72. Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents Fields
Fields Description
Name Lists the names of available buses. You can select the name to edit it.
Value Displays the values for each bus in the list. You can select the value to edit its
contents.

Related Topics
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Creating and Editing Predefined Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 329

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Borders and Zones
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to specify the border symbol for each border type (one of A Landscape, A
Portrait, A0 Landscape, A0 Portrait and so on) and the zone characteristics used to divide the
schematic into navigation zones.
Description
Control your border and zones visibility on the schematic with the following related
Setup > Settings, Display category settings (also see Figure 2-56):

• Zoning Grid
• Border (box)
• Zone Labels (section), Border
• Zone Labels (section), Left-Top Corner of Each Zone

Tip
To see these various Zone indicators, it might be helpful to turn off (uncheck) the
schematic grid which you can access at Setup > Settings menu item, Project
Schematic Editor category, Display Grid checkbox.

Figure 2-55. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

330 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Figure 2-56. Border, Border Symbol, and Zoning Grid

Objects
Table 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents
Field Description
(list of available Use the list of available border types to select which one you want to
border types) customize.
Add — Click this button to specify a new border. The New Size dialog
box appears to allow you to specify the height and width of the new
border.
Delete — Click this button to delete the selected border from the list.
Border symbol for The current border symbol for the first sheet is specified after this field
first sheet such as Borders: asheet.1
Click the Change button to specify a different border symbol for the first
sheet. Changes are stored in the Borders Symbols file that you specified in
the Setup > Settings menu item, Project category, Borders Symbols
field.
Border symbol for The current border symbol for the next sheet is specified after this field
next sheet such as Borders: asheet.1
Click the Change button to specify a different border symbol for the next
sheet. Changes are stored in the Borders Symbols file that you specified in
the Setup > Settings menu item, Project category, Borders Symbols
field.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 331

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Table 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Border Properties Click this button to bring up the Borders Properties dialog box. From this
button dialog box, you can view any properties currently associated with the
selected border symbol.
Clear Border Click this button to clear the border symbol association from the selected
Symbols button border type as shown in the following example:

Horizontal Zones Use the following settings to control the horizontal zones of the
schematic:
• Letters (A, B, C,...) - If selected, letters are used to denote the
horizontal zones
• Numbers (1,2,3,...) - If selected, numbers are used to denote the
horizontal zones
Descending - If checked, the letters or numbers start at the upper limit
on the left side, and decrease as they move to the right
• Number of Zones - Specify the number of horizontal zones
• Offset - Specify the horizontal offsets, both Top and Bottom (the units
specified in Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), are used)

332 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Table 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Vertical Zones Use the following settings to control the vertical zones of the schematic:
• Letters (A, B, C,...) - If selected, letters are used to denote the vertical
zones
• Numbers (1,2,3,...) - If selected, numbers are used to denote the
horizontal zones
Descending - If checked, the letters or numbers start at the upper limit
on the lower side, and decrease as they move up
• Number of Zones - Specify the number of vertical zones
• Offset - Specify the vertical offsets, both Left and Right (the units
specified in Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), are used)

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Controlling Sheet Borders [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Setting Zones to Match an Existing Border Symbol [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 333

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross Reference (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure how cross-reference annotations appear on the schematic.
Description
Figure 2-57. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

334 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

Objects
Table 2-74. Settings - Project - Cross Reference Option
Option Description
Annotation Format for Use the dropdown list to access the cross-reference variables:
Links $sheet, $hzone, $vzone, $sheet_number, and $block. Using these
variables or a combination of text and these variables, you can
configure the cross reference annotation as desired.
Example: A setting of $(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)-$(block)
produces the following:

Annotation Origin Use the dropdown list to choose the origin point (or none) for the
placement of the annotation text as one of the following:
• None
• Upper left
• Middle left
• Lower left
• Upper center
• Middle center (This is used in previous example)
• Lower center
• Upper right
• Middle right
• Lower right

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 335

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

Table 2-74. Settings - Project - Cross Reference Option (cont.)

Option Description
X-Offset Based on the annotation origin point, enter an X-offset value used to
offset the text on an x-axis in the specified units. A positive number
offsets the text to the right, a negative number offsets the text to the
left. In the example shown for the Annotation Format for Links
setting, the X-Offset was set to .45 inches.
You can set the unit (inches, millimeters, centimeters) used in X-
offset by editing the Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor
category options.
Y-Offset Based on the annotation origin point, enter a Y-offset value used to
offset the text on a y-axis in the specified units. A positive number
offsets the text vertically up, a negative number offsets the text
vertically down. In the example shown for the Annotation Format
for Links setting, the Y-Offset was set to .30 inches.
You can set the unit (inches, millimeters, centimeters) used in Y-
offset by editing the Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor
category options.
Text Size Enter a value for the text size.
You can set the unit (inches, millimeters, centimeters) used in text
size by editing the Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor category
options.
Max Line Length Sets the maximum length (in characters) of the cross reference
annotation.
Separator Specifies a separator between multiple link designators when a link
goes to more than one destination such as 2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS.
Disable Annotations On Specifies that cross-reference data is not annotated onto the
Ports hierarchical ports of a hierarchical design.
Cross-Reference sub- Specifies to annotate cross-reference data onto sub-buses connected
buses for Links to links.
By default, the Cross Reference tool only annotates cross-reference
location data onto links that have matching names. References to
both master and sub-bus locations are excluded. For example, when
this option is turned on and two buses DATA[7:0] and DATA[3:0]
connect to link symbols, the cross-referencing tool adds cross-
reference data to links within the schematic block that connect to
either DATA[7:0] or DATA[3:0].

336 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

Table 2-74. Settings - Project - Cross Reference Option (cont.)

Option Description
Allow Condensed Condense multiple links to a given sheet. For example, given the
Annotations following destinations from a link:
2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS. Turning on this option condenses the three
entries that all go to page 3 as follows: 2-B7;3-G4/D10/G9.
Note that the condensed separator is set in the following setting,
which in this example is set to “/” (the default).
Condensed Separator If the “Allow Condensed Annotations” option is checked, then you
can specify the separator used between multiple link designators
when a link goes to more than one destination such as: 3-G4/D10/
G9.
Complies with ISO 5457 If checked, link references comply with ISO 5457, which specifies
the size and layout of preprinted sheets for technical drawings.

Related Topics
Linking and Embedding Objects [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Partitioning a Sheet Into Zones [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 337

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter

Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Net Name Delimiter
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control how net names are resolved into elements of buses.
Description
The setting is stored separately for each project in the <name>.prj file.

Figure 2-58. Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter

Objects
Table 2-75. Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter Contents
Field Description
Net Name Delimiter Select one of the following net name delimiters:
• None “ ”
• Round Brackets “()”
• Square Brackets “[]”

Related Topics
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

338 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Databook

Settings Dialog Box - Databook

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Databook (subcategory),
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to specify the configuration file location for Databook.
Figure 2-59. Settings Dialog Box - Databook

Objects
Table 2-76. Settings Dialog Box - Databook Contents
Field Description
DataBookconfiguration Specify the configuration file location for DataBook. If you do
not include a full path to the configuration file, but only include
the filename, The Databook tool searches for the file first in the
project directory, and then in the WDIR directories from left to
right.

Related Topics
Creating a Databook Configuration Files [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 339

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Sheet Numbering (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to specify the way sheets are ordered for printing or PDF generation.
Description
Tip
For information about a setting that enables you to display the sheet numbering as part of the
Navigator sheet label, see the description for Setup > Settings, Navigator category, Sheets
subcategory, specifically regarding the use of the $(Number) sheet number property.

Tip
Whenever you change the Sheet Numbering setting, the Navigator is dynamically updated.
The print and PDF generation process reflects the numbers shown in the Navigator.
However, before a sheet numbering change takes place in the border property
@PRINTORDER, you must first update the numbering with Tools > Update Other
Objects > Page numbers. Also, if you close and reopen PADS Designer, the @PRINTORDER
property on each Border is automatically updated.

Figure 2-60. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

Objects
Table 2-77. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering Contents
Field Description
Numbering Schemes

340 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

Table 2-77. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering Contents (cont.)

Field Description
In-Depth If selected, the block order for printing is set to In-Depth as shown in the
example in the following diagram:

Vertical If selected, the block order for printing is set to Vertical as shown in the
example in the following diagram:

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 341

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL

Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the default export language and folder.
Description
Figure 2-61. Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL

The Export HDL settings are further set with the following Settings dialog box panes:

• “Settings Dialog Box - VHDL” on page 344

• “Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages” on page 346
• “Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map” on page 347
• “Settings Dialog Box - Verilog” on page 348
Objects
Table 2-78. Settings - Project - Export HDL Contents
Field Description
Default Export Set the default export language as one of either VHDL or Verilog.
Language
Export Folder Define the name of the export folder.

342 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL

Table 2-78. Settings - Project - Export HDL Contents (cont.)

Field Description
HDL Search Paths Specify where the design entry tool should search for the HDL files
attached to the design. If after you set these a file location is later changed
or no longer accessible, the Project Navigator window displays those
unfound files in a dark color as shown below:

To correct the unfound-file situation, specify a valid location to the files.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 343

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL

Settings Dialog Box - VHDL

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory),
VHDL (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure the VHDL export settings.
Description
These settings are stored in a <project_folder>/hdlutils.ini file.

Figure 2-62. Settings Dialog Box - Export - VHDL

Objects
Table 2-79. Settings - Project - Export HDL - VHDL - General Contents
Field Description
Log File Specify the output log file from the VHDL netlist operation
Global Signals Specify the package name where the global signals are placed
Down To Generate entities down to specified Level property
Use VHDL-93 Naming If checked, use VHDL-93 extended identifiers in component, pin
Conventions and generic names
Generate Only 1-Bit Wide If checked, generate only 1-Bit wide nets, pins, and ports.
Nets, Pins and Ports
Generate Multiple Netlists, If checked, the netlister placed each entity in a separate file. In
One For Each Entity such cases the field “Output File” changes to “Output Folder”

344 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL

Table 2-79. Settings - Project - Export HDL - VHDL - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Do not create parameters If checked, disables generation of component generics.
for corresponding
component attributes
Automatic empty model If checked, creates empty models for all “not bound” primitives.
creation
Suppress Messages If checked, suppress messages in the output log.

Related Topics
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 345

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages

Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External

Packages
Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), VHDL
(subcategory), External Packages (subcategory)
• Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), Verilog
(subcategory), External Packages (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to list packages to be inserted in the generated VHDL or Verilog netlist.
Objects
• This dialog box includes one main window, in which you enter the information for packages
to insert in the generated VHDL or Verilog netlist.
Proper syntax for VHDL is:
library USER_lib;
use USER_lib.USER_package.all;

Proper syntax for Verilog is:

`include "package_name.v"

346 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map

Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map

Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• (For VHDL) Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL
(subcategory), VHDL (subcategory), Port Map (subcategory)
• (For Verilog) Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL
(subcategory), Verilog (subcategory), Port Map (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to map PADS Designer pin types to HDL port mode types.
Objects
• The dropdown list in the HDL Port Mode column provides the available types.
Figure 2-63. Settings Dialog Box - Port Map

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 347

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog

Settings Dialog Box - Verilog

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory),
Verilog (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure the Verilog export settings.
Figure 2-64. Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Verilog

Objects
Table 2-80. Settings - Project - Export HDL - Verilog - General Contents
Field Description
Log File Specify the output log file from the Verilog netlist operation
Global Signals Specify the module name where the global signals are placed
Timescale Enter the Time Unit/Time Precision into the Timescale field to
specify an alternate timescale for the Verilog netlist. The default
timescale is 1ns/1ns.
Down To Generate modules down to specified Level property as one or more
of STD, VHDL, or Verilog

348 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog

Table 2-80. Settings - Project - Export HDL - Verilog - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Properties to Parameters Set one of the following choices to limit which PADS Designer
component properties are converted to corresponding Verilog
parameters:
• None - If checked, no Verilog parameters are created
• All - If checked, all component properties appear as Verilog
parameters
• Selected - If checked, only the properties specified in the
Selected list will be converted to corresponding Verilog
parameters. You separate multiple properties in the list with
spaces. If a property name has a space in it, quote it with either
single or double quotes, such as: “Part Number” or ‘Part
Number’.
Generate Only 1-Bit Wide If checked, generate only 1-bit wide nets, pins and ports.
Nets, Pins and Ports
Generate Multiple Netlists, If checked, the netlister places each module in a separate file. In
One For Each Entity such cases the field “Output File” changes to “Output Folder”
Automatic empty model If checked, creates empty models for all “not bound” primitives.
creation
Suppress Messages If checked, suppress messages in the output log.

Related Topics
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 349

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category)
Use this dialog box to set units and grid parameters for the schematic window.
Description
Figure 2-65. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

Set other schematic window characteristics from the following subcategories:

• “Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and • “Settings Dialog Box - Text” on page 357
Zoom” on page 352 • “Settings Dialog Box - Nets” on page 358
• “Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets” on
page 354

Objects
Table 2-81. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor Contents
Option Description
Schematic Units
Unit Set the PADS Designer unit of measurement as one of the following
settings from the dropdown list:
• Millimeters
• Centimeters
• Inches
Once set, PADS Designer uses the unit of measurement you have chosen
for measurements such as Default Sheet Size, New Sheets, or Grid
Spacing.

350 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

Table 2-81. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor Contents (cont.)

Option Description
Grid
Grid Snap If checked, schematic objects you place or move snap to the grid.
Note: You can also control the grid snap behavior from the Grid
toolbar, with the Grid Snap button.
See also the Zoning Grid description in “Settings Dialog Box - Display”
on page 384.
Grid Type Set the grid type from the associated dropdown list to either Lined or
Dotted for the active schematic or symbol window. The grid lines or dots
display one line per grid interval defined by the Grid Spacing.
Grid Spacing Set the grid display space increment for the active schematic or symbol
window.
Show markings Set the number of grid points for which the grid marking displays.
every <# > grid
points

Related Topics
Setting the Schematic Grid Pattern [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 351

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom

Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan and
Zoom (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the PADS Designer session characteristics for strokes, pan, and zoom.
Figure 2-66. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Strokes, Pan and Zoom

Objects
Table 2-82. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom
Contents
Fields Description
Pan and Zoom Sets the PADS Designer schematic window to pan and zoom in the style of
one of the following tools:
• Default Pan and Zoom — PADS Designer
• PADS Pan and Zoom — PADS layout tool
See also “Pan and Zoom Within Schematics” in the PADS Schematic Design
User’s Guide.
Strokes Either turns off strokes, which are predefined patterns of mouse movements
to execute commands or functions, or selects the mouse button you use to
draw the strokes in the schematic window. Choose one of the following:
• Strokes off — turns off strokes
• Right Button — Use right mouse button to execute stroke commands
• Middle Button — Use middle mouse button to execute stroke commands
See also “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on page 427.

352 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 353

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets

Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure new schematic sheets.
Figure 2-67. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets

Objects
Table 2-83. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Default Sheet Size

354 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets

Table 2-83. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Size Sets the default sheet size and orientation (Portrait or Landscape) for all
new schematics and symbols.
Specify one of the following sizes, specified in Landscape order as:
<width> x <height> (The setting determines the number value applied):
• A - 11” (297.4mm) x 8.5” (215.9mm)
• B - 17” (431.8mm) x 11” (279.4mm)
• C - 22” (558.8mm) x 17” (431.8mm)
• D - 34” (863.6mm) x 22” (558.8mm)
• E - 44” (1117.6mm) x 34” (863.6mm)
• A4 - 297mm (11.69”) x 210mm (8.26”)
• A3 - 420mm (16.53”) x 297mm (11.69”)
• A2 - 594mm (23.38”) x 420mm (16.53”)
• A1 - 841mm (33.11”) x 594mm (23.38”)
• A0 - 1189mm (46.81”) x 841mm (33.11”)
• Custom - user-definable width and height
If you select Custom as the sheet size, you specify the width and height
settings.
Width Sets the sheet width. The width setting is set automatically unless you
specify Custom as the sheet size. If you change the width setting without
selecting Custom as the sheet size, the sheet size is automatically changed
to Custom.
Height Sets the sheet height. The height setting is set automatically unless you
specify Custom as the sheet size. If you change the height setting without
selecting Custom as the sheet size, the sheet size is automatically changed
to Custom.
Sheet Orientation Sets the sheet orientation as one of the following:

• Portrait

• Landscape

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 355

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets

Table 2-83. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Border Sheet Sets the automatic sheet border placement on new schematics. A default
Options schematic sheet must exist. If it does not, you must create a new default
border sheet.
• Automatically add border to new schematic sheets: If checked, places a
hardwired border schematic from a required location on to new
schematics.
• Enable user-configurable border symbols: If checked, places a user-
configured border symbol on to new schematics. This symbol can be
from any location in the search order
• Use sheet 1 border for underlying schematics: Lets you choose to use
either the same user-configurable border for all sheets, or a different
border for the first sheet in a design.
Rules:
a. This setting has no effect on a top level schematic. You use this
setting to specify which border to use on the first sheet of a new
schematic when you push into a composite component.
b. If you select this setting, the border specified in Border for Sheet 1 is
used on the first sheet of the underlying schematic.
c. If you clear this setting, the border specified in Border for Sheet 2-N
is used for all sheets, including sheet 1.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

356 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Text

Settings Dialog Box - Text

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category), Text (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the default text origin and text size for new text on a schematic.
Figure 2-68. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Text

Objects
Table 2-84. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Settings - Text Contents
Field Description
Default Text Origin Sets the default origin point for all new text, labels, and properties you
create. Valid options are:
• Lower Center
• Lower Left
• Lower Right
• Middle Center. Default.
• Middle Left
• Middle Right
• Upper Center
• Upper Left
• Upper Right
Default Text Size Sets text size for all new text, labels, and properties you create.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 357

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Nets

Settings Dialog Box - Nets

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category), Nets (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set net characteristics on the schematic window.
Figure 2-69. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets

Objects
Table 2-85. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets Contents
Field Description
Avoidance When Avoidance Routing (see below) is active, sets the minimum
Distance distance between nets and components or other nets (avoidance distance).
Net Length Set the length of a net stub of parts you place from PADS Databook,
which uses the “Add Component With Net Stubs” option.
Snap Nets To Pin If checked, snaps nets to the nearest pin of a specified component.

358 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Nets

Table 2-85. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Route Mode Specifies the routing mode for new connections as one of the following:
• Straight
Straight routing specifies a straight connection between two points.
This “as is” form of routing can overlap or pass through components
and existing connections. Any incidental crossing of nets from straight
routing does not imply a connection, and does not create a solder dot.
• Orthogonal
Orthogonal routing begins with a horizontal or vertical orientation
depending on the point of origin as follows:
• From a joint — begins in a horizontal or vertical direction following
the cursor movement (left or right, horizontal — up or down,
vertical)
• From a pin — automatically begins in a horizontal or vertical
direction, depending on the orientation of the pin
• From a point on a net or bus segment — begins in a direction
perpendicular to the orientation of the segment
• Avoidance
Avoidance routing specifies an automatic connection between two
points that avoids components. Specifying intermediary points along
the connection creates a more distinct specification of the path of the
connection.
The distance between components and the connection is the avoidance
distance. The PADS Designer tool automatically staggers a connection
by the avoidance distance as the route hugs to the components or other
connections.
See also “Setting Net and Bus Preferences” in the PADS Schematic
Design User’s Guide.
Name New Nets If checked, the schematic capture tool automatically names nets based on
Automatically the rules described in the topic:
See also “Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design
User’s Guide.
Name New Buses If checked, the schematic capture tool automatically names buses based on
Automatically the rules described in the topics:
“Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s
Guide.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 359

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters

Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category), Selection Filters
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the availability of objects, text, and graphics selections that display
onschematics.
Figure 2-70. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Selection Filters,
PADS Designer

Objects
Table 2-86. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Selection Filters Contents
Field Description
Custom filter Displays the names of the predefined and custom filters.
All Enables the selection of all objects.
Graphics Enables the selection of lines, arcs, boxes, and circles.
None Disables the selection of all objects.
Objects Enables the selection of boards, borders, groups, nets and buses, pins,
rippers, symbols, and wires and wire buses.
Text Enables the selection of text attached to names, properties, and text.

360 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters

Table 2-86. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Selection Filters Contents
Field Description
Add Enables you to create a new custom filter name, and then select the desired
selection filters using the New Selection Filter dialog box.
Remove Deletes the currently selected custom filter.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Creating and Using Selection Filters [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 361

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Symbol Editor (category)
Use this dialog box to configure the pin and property characteristics for local or library symbols
that appear in the Symbol Editor.
Figure 2-71. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor

Objects

Field Description
Pins:
Default length Set the default length of new symbol pins (in grid points) by
changing the existing number or clicking either the up or down
arrow to increment/decrement the number.
Default spacing Set the default spacing between new symbol pins (in grid points)
by changing the existing number or clicking either the up or
down arrow to increment/decrement the number.
Properties:
Automatic pin side If checked, the symbol editor dynamically changes the pin
recognition orientation and applies a pin type and side definition in the Pins
window when you place a pin on a symbol.
Pin property position Set the pin property position using the dropdown list as either
Below Pin or Above Pin.

362 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor

Field Description
Symbol property position Set the symbol property position using the dropdown list as
either Below Symbol or Above Symbol.
Name visibility Set the name visibility using the dropdown list as either:
• Never show
• Show hidden properties
• Show placeholder
Symbol file format:
Use high precision If checked, the ASCII symbol file format uses point coordinates
and font sizes with a 1/100000 mm precision. This is required if
you are using metric symbols.
If unchecked, the symbol file format is compatible with
EXP2005.x or earlier software that used a 1/100 inch precision.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 363

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol

Default Properties
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Symbol Editor (category), Symbol Default
Properties (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to assign default properties to symbols.
Description
This dialog box enables you to configure symbols created by the Symbol Editor to add or
remove default symbol properties, assign a default value to all assigned properties, and control
the visibility and label position of each property. When assigning a default list of properties, sort
properties in the list to control the order of appearance.

Figure 2-72. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties

364 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties

Objects
Table 2-87. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties
Contents
Field Description
Move Up / Move Down — Moves selected entry up or down one level in
the list.
Delete — Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
• Below Symbol — Assigns the label position underneath the left side of
the last added property, or symbol item.
• Above Symbol — Assigns the label position above the left side of the
last added property, or symbol item.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 365

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin

Default Properties
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Symbol Editor (category), Symbol Default
Properties (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to assign default pin properties to symbols.

Description
This dialog box enables you to configure symbols created by the Symbol Editor to add or
remove default pin properties, assign a default value to all assigned pin properties, and control
the visibility and label position of each property. When assigning a default list of properties, sort
properties in the list to control the order of appearance.

Figure 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties

Objects
Table 2-88. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Contents
Field Description
Move Up / Move Down — Moves selected entry up or down one level in
the list.
Delete — Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.

366 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties

Table 2-88. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
• Above Pin — Assigns the label position above the pin.
• Below — Assigns the label position below the pin.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 367

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol

HLA Properties
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Symbol Editor (category), Symbol HLA Properties
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to assign default HLA properties to symbols.
Figure 2-74. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties

Objects
Table 2-89. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties
Contents
Field Description
Delete — Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library HLA properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
• Above Symbol — Assigns the label position above the symbol.
• Below Symbol — Assigns the label position below the symbol.

368 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker

Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker

To access:
• Setup > Settings (menu item), Graphical Rules Checker (category)
• GRC button ( )

Use this dialog box to choose which rules to run with the Graphical Rules Checker (GRC).
Objects

Field Description Severity1

Object overlap Configures the GRC to report overlapping Specifies to report a
objects based on the value setting. Change the violation as a Note,
value by double-clicking in the Values field Warning, or Error
and selecting the objects you want checked.
Net/Wire off grid Configures the GRC to report nets that are not
snapped to the grid.
Pin off grid Configures the GRC to report pins placed off
grid.
Text owner Configures the GRC to report text that is
placed too far away from its parent object
based on the value setting. Change the default
value by double-clicking in the Values
column and editing the default value.
Text alignment Configures the GRC to report text or
properties that are not aligned with each
other.
1. A Note is displayed as green, a Warning is displayed as blue, and an Error is displayed as red.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 369

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table

Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table (category)
Use this dialog box to control the display and the behavior of the Interconnectivity Table (ICT).
Description
This section of the Settings dialog box is divided into the following subcategories:

• “Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice” on page 372

• “Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties” on page 373
Figure 2-75. Setting Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table

Objects
Table 2-90. Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table Contents
Field Description
Symbol label Select how you want the Symbol label(s) to appear in the Interconnectivity
format Table using one of the formats in the expandable list. You can include
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon
and so on.
Show These two radio buttons toggle the components display configuration between
components the following:
in... • Show components in columns, nets in rows
• Show components in rows, nets in columns

370 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table

Table 2-90. Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Autofit If checked, autofit is on.
Automatically
Power supply If this is checked prior to placing a tap in an Interconnectivity Table (choose
tap Add > Power or Add > Ground), the connection to the corresponding global
autoconnect net (given by the value of the tap symbol property “Global Signal Name”) is
created. The global net is eventually added if it does not already exist.
Cells display
Direction If checked, the ICT cells display direction.
Pin number If checked, the ICT cells display pin numbers.
Pins dropdown list display
Direction If checked, the dropdown list displays the pin direction.
Pin number If checked, the dropdown list displays the pin number.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 371

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table (category), Slice and Dice
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to choose how to slice and dice ICT nets.
Figure 2-76. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

Objects
Table 2-91. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice Contents
Field Description
Nets Choose how to slice and dice ICT nets as one of the following:
• Show only nets connected between the components of Slice and Dice
• Show nets connected between and to the components of Slice and Dice
• Show all nets

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

372 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table (category), Properties
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control property visibility in the ICT.
Figure 2-77. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

Objects
Table 2-92. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties Contents
Field Description
Property Displays a list of available properties.
Visible If checked, specify which properties you want to be visible.
Buttons
Load Scheme Displays the Load Properties Scheme dialog box, which enables you to search
for, select, and load an XML-formatted file (*.p4i) that contains a saved
configuration of which properties you want to be visible.
Save Scheme Displays the Save Properties Scheme dialog box, which enables you to save the
current configuration of which properties are visible to a *.p4i file.
Uncheck all If unchecked, marks all the listed properties as hidden
Check all If checked, marks all the listed properties as visible

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 373

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

374 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Blocks (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure the block display characteristics in Navigator window.
Figure 2-78. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 375

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

Objects
Table 2-93. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks Contents
Field Description
Hierarchical or Controls how PADS Designer displays blocks in the Navigator as one of the
Flatten view following:
• Hierarchical view —
Each branch of the design hierarchy is represented by an instance of a
block. Leaf cells and child blocks, appear in the Symbols folder below the
parent.

• Flatten view —
Intermediate branches of the design hierarchy are collapsed. Only leaf
cells appear in the Symbols folder below the related sheet.

376 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

Table 2-93. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Display sheet If checked, the PADS Designer tool displays the sheet range of each block in
range the Navigator window as shown in the following example:

Label format Use this field to set the block label format in the Navigator window using any
combination of the following variables available from the dropdown list:
• $(Name)
• $(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.

Info Tip format Use this field to set the block info tip format (shown in the previous figure for
Label format) in the Navigator window using any combination of the
following variables available from the dropdown list:
• $(Name)
• $(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 377

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets

Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Sheets (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure sheet display characteristics in the Navigator window and
control sheet copy behavior.
Figure 2-79. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets

Objects
Table 2-94. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets Contents
Field Description
Display sheets Depending on which selection you choose as shown at the bottom of the
following figure, this option displays icons for each sheet and composite
node within a design in the Navigator tree.

378 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets

Table 2-94. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Label format Use this field to set the sheet label format in the Navigator window using
any combination of the following variables from the dropdown list as
shown in the following figure:
• $(Name)
• $(Number)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.

See also “Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering” on page 340.

Info Tip format Use this field to set the sheet info tip format (shown in the previous figure
for Label format) in the Navigator window using any combination of the
following variables from the dropdown list:
• $(Name)
• $(Number)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.
Warn before If checked, a warning is displayed during a condition similar to the
replacing selected following:
sheets during copy If you have sheet 1 of a design selected in the Navigator and you paste
another sheet 1 into the design, the PADS Designer tool displays a warning
before it overwrites the selected sheet.
If you do not have sheet 1 selected before copying another sheet 1 into the
design, the PADS Designer tool copies the new sheet 1 and rename it to
sheet1_1.

Related Topics
Changing Sheet Print Order [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 379

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols

Settings Dialog Box - Symbols

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Symbols (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure symbol display characteristics in the Navigator window.
Figure 2-80. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Symbols

380 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols

Objects
Table 2-95. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Symbols Contents
Field Description
Display ... Sets how the Navigator displays symbols as one of the following:
• Display all components — The Navigator tree displays all symbol
components as follows:

• Display hierarchical only — The Navigator tree displays only

hierarchical symbol components as follows:

• Don’t display components — The Navigator tree does not show any
symbol components as follows:

Label format Selects how Symbol label(s) appears in the Navigator tree list using one of
the formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Label format: $(Name) ($(Symbol))
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:

Info Tip format: Selects how Information Tip (the textbox that appears when you mouse-
over a list item) appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the formats
in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Info Tip format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
($(Symbol)
Results with a Navigator Info Tip box appearance of:

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 381

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses

Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and

Buses
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and Buses (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure net and bus characteristics in the Navigator window.
Figure 2-81. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses

Objects
Table 2-96. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses Contents
Field Description
Display nets and If checked, display nets and buses in the Navigator tree.
buses

Net label format: Selects how net label(s) appear in the Navigator tree list using one of the
formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Net label format: $(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:

382 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses

Table 2-96. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Net info Tip Selects how net info Tip appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the
format: formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Net label format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:

Bus label format: Selects how bus label(s) appear in the Navigator tree list using one of the
formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Bus label format: $(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:

Bus info Tip Selects how bus info Tip appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the
format: formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Bus label format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 383

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Display

Settings Dialog Box - Display

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category)
Use this dialog box to set what the PADS Designer tool displays on schematic sheets.
Figure 2-82. Settings Dialog Box - Display

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
DxDesigner.xml File Format

384 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Objects

Settings Dialog Box - Objects

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set schematic or ICT object characteristics for color, text, fill style, line
style, and font.
Figure 2-83. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Objects

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 385

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Objects

Figure 2-84. Settings Dialog Box - ICT Objects

Objects
Table 2-97. Settings Dialog Box - Objects Contents
Field Description
Objects Table Defines the characteristics of either schematic or ICT objects.
• Gray cells — unavailable.
• Active cells — Choose the desired characteristic from the
dropdown list or type in a value. The Width column values
range from 1 (thin) to 10 (widest).
Schematic Selected, enables you to set the characteristics of schematic objects.
ICT Selected, enables you to set the characteristics of ICT objects.
Load Scheme Loads pre-saved object settings from a *.dxc file.
Save Scheme Saves the existing object settings in a *.dxc file.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

386 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Font Styles (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the font style for new schematic text.
Figure 2-85. Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

Objects
Table 2-98. Settings Dialog Box - Display - Font Styles Contents
Field Description
Style Choose the font style from the list of available fonts. The remainder of the
Font Styles options configure the selected style. Any text on the schematic
that has a property of Font set to a particular style is now easily
customized. For example, if you customize the Fixed font style with the
available settings described in the following table rows, any Font property
that you set to Fixed changes accordingly.
Add new style Press this button to create a new style, which you enter in the “New style”
button dialog box.
Delete style button Press this button to delete the selected, custom style from the Style list.
Scale factor Use this option to provide a scale factor for the selected Style that is
applied to the Size property value that appears on all text objects.
Font Choose the font face from the dropdown list to configure the selected
Style.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 387

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

Table 2-98. Settings Dialog Box - Display - Font Styles Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Charset If the font you chose for the selected Style has multiple character sets,
choose the desired set from the dropdown list.
Bold, Italic, Select any of these checkboxes to apply the characteristic to the selected
Strikeout, style.
Underline

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Objects

388 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Diagnostics

Settings Dialog Box - Diagnostics

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Diagnostics (category)
Use this dialog box to run the Diagnostics utility automatically when you exit a design session.
Figure 2-86. Settings Dialog Box - Diagnostics

Objects
Table 2-99. Settings Dialog Box -Diagnostics Contents
Field Description
Execute Diagnostics If checked, the schematic capture tool runs the automatic Diagnostics
on exit utility when the session exits.

Related Topics
Checking Data Integrity With the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting Reported Errors [PADS
Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 389

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing

Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category)
Use this dialog box to control cross probing parameters.
Figure 2-87. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing - PADS Designer

Objects
Table 2-100. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing Contents
Field Description
Limit selection to already If checked, only the open schematic sheets or open ICTs cross
open documents probe to other applications, such as PADS Layout.
If checked, you can further control cross probing to any of the
following selected objects:
• for Signal Nets — If checked, enables cross probing for signal
nets on open documents.
• for Global Nets — If checked, enables cross probing for signal
nets on open documents.
• for Components — If checked, enables cross probing for
components on open documents.
• for Pins — If checked, enables cross probing for pins on open
documents.
Zoom Fit to Selected If checked, the PADS Designer tool zooms in on the selected,
objects cross-probed object. This setting also works with dynamic links, to
zoom in on the target object when a link is traversed.
Highlight unplaced components
Enable If checked, cross probing highlights unplaced components.

390 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing

Table 2-100. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Limit to already open If checked, only unplaced components on open schematic sheets or
documents open ICTs are highlighted.

Related Topics
Cross Probing Between the Design Entry Tool and Other Tools [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 391

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup

Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
Use this dialog box to set up automatic sheet/ICT backups.
Figure 2-88. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup

Objects
Table 2-101. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup Contents
Field Description
Create Automatic Sheet/ If checked, both sheets and ICTs are backed up each time you open
ICT Backup them. Use the “Number of backups” dropdown list (between 4 and
20) to set the number of sheet/ICT backups to save before
overwriting them. If you keep the default of 0, the PADS Designer
tool saves backups without overwriting older ones.
Warn before deleting all If checked, provides a warning before deleting all backups of the
sheet backups current sheet.
Warn before deleting If checked, provides a warning before deleting all sheet backups in
current board backups the current board.
Warn before deleting If checked, provides a warning before deleting all sheet backups in
project backups the current project.

392 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project Backup (category)
Use this dialog box to manage a project’s backups and backup settings. Depending on the
settings, different triggers can cause the project database to create a backup copy in a zipped
file.
Description
Most of the settings available from the Project Backup dialog box are also available from the
“iCDB Project Backup” utility. The one exception is that the Archiver tool can be controlled
from the Project Backup dialog box, but not the iCDB Project Backup dialog box.

The Project Backup dialog box shows the settings for the available backup types. The backup
types and the controls of the dialog box are described in the following tables.

Each backup type is further grouped under three categories: system, upgrade, or user. The
System Administrator can set permissions for which category a client can change settings. For
more information on setting Backup settings permissions, see the descriptions for
SystemBackupsSettings, UpgradeBackupsSettings, and UserBackupsSettings in the topic
“ProjectBackup.cfg Configuration File” in the Concurrent Design Administrators Guide.

Figure 2-89. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 393

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Objects
Table 2-102. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Types
Backup Type Category Description
AutoSave User Created every <Interval> if the content has changed
since the last AutoSave made by the current server
session.
Session Startup User Created on server session startup, before the database is
opened.
Session Shutdown User Created on server session shutdown, after the database
is closed.
Application User Compatibility replacement for AutoBackup
functionality. Triggered by applications in specific
situations (e.g. project close, save, etc.). The interval
<Interval> defines the minimum time period between
successive backups.
Diagnostics System Created before repairing the design with
PADS Designer Diagnostics.
CES Diagnostics System Created before repairing the design with Constraint
Manager Diagnostics
Database Upgrade Upgrade Created before iCDB database upgrade. The number of
backups to store is per software release version.
Clear All Constraints System Created before using “Clear All Constraints” in
Constraint Manager.
Update Reuse Block System Created before updating each Reuse Block in
PADS Designer.
Symbol Update System Created before each symbol update in the
PADS Designer tool.
Symbol Substitute System Created before each symbol substitution in the
PADS Designer tool.
Constraints Definitions Upgrade Created before constraint definition upgrade.
Upgrade
I/O Designer System Created before schematic changes made by I/O
Schematic Changes Designer.
User User Created when you select this option.
Archiver User Created by Archiver. See “Project Archive” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

394 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Table 2-102. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Types (cont.)

Backup Type Category Description
Project Repair System Created before repairing the design with the
Project > Repair menu item in iCDB Project Backup
(accessible from the Start > All Programs > Mentor
Graphics SDD > System Tools > iCDB Project
Backup).

Table 2-103. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Controls

Control Description
Limit Project Backup log file Over time the size of backup log files can grow to a size that
size between ___ kb and ___ reduces project performance. This setting limits the size of log
kb files so they cannot grow unchecked. When the file reaches the
upper limit, it erases enough of the earliest entries to make the
size match the lower limit.
Enable backups This global switch enables/disables the iCDB Project Backup
functionality entirely. This control is grayed out if you do not
have permission to set this feature. See the ActivateDeactivate
key description in the “Configuration File Parameter
Descriptions” topic in the Concurrent Design Administrators
Guide.
Edit Opens the Backup type settings dialog box so you can change
the settings for the selected type. The dialog box will not
appear if you do not have permission to changes settings on
that type of backup (see the topic “ProjectBackup.cfg
Configuration File” in the Concurrent Design Administrators
Guide).
In the Backup type settings dialog box, you can set the number
backups to save for each type, the frequency to make the
backups if the backup is time-based. You can set whether or not
to create log files for that type. You can also set whether or not
the backup type is active or not.
Defaults Sets all settings to default values.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 395

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration (category), Integrated
Simulator (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control HDL simulation parameters.
Figure 2-90. Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

Objects
Table 2-104. Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator Contents
Field Description
ModelSim Executable Enter the path to the ModelSim®folder that contains the executable (or
Path browse to it).
Actions Before Simulation Initialization
Export HDL Files If checked, you do not need to run Simulation > Export HDL Files
( ) manually before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
Delete Design Units If checked, you do not need to run Simulation > Clean ( ) manually
from HDL Design before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
Compile Files If checked, you do not need to run Simulation > Compile ( )
manually before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).

396 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

Table 2-104. Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Use External If checked, you use the ModelSim User Interface (UI) to set up and run
ModelSim the simulation instead of the PADS Designer UI.
If unchecked, the PADS Designer tool provides a dialog box to set up
and run the simulation.
Whether this is checked or not, you still need to provide the path to the
ModelSim executable in the ModelSim Executable Path field.
Executable File and If the following Use External Text Editor option is checked, this field
Parameters becomes available to provide a path (or browse to it) to your own text
editor.
In addition to the path to the executable, include the parameter $(File)
as in the following example to enable PADS Designer to start the editor
on the correct HDL file:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File)
If your text editor invocation supports a second argument to invoke on a
specific line number, you can add the argument $(Line) as in the
following example:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File) $(Line)
Use External Text If checked, you can provide a path to your own text editor in the field
Editor above.
If unchecked, the PADS Designer tool provides a text editor that you
can use.

Related Topics
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 397

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools

Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration (category), FPGA Tools
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control the FPGA tool configuration settings.
Figure 2-91. Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools

Objects
Table 2-105. Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools Contents
Field Description
Current Tool Choose which tool you want to execute (Xilinx or Altera) when you
click the Launch FPGA Tool button on the HDL/FPGA
Integration toolbar.
Overwrite Tools Files If checked, prepares the project file in the FPGA tool with the HDL
List file list when you click the Launch FPGA Tool button.
Export Before Launch If checked, exports HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA Tool.
Xilinx Executable Path Enter the path to the Xilinx folder that contains the executable (or
browse to it).
Altera Executable Path Enter the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable (or
browse to it).

Related Topics
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

398 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup

Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Run on Startup (category)
Use this dialog box to define forms or scripts to run when the design entry tool starts.
Objects
Table 2-106. Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup Contents
Field Description
Forms Lists the forms that are available when you start the design entry tool.
Scripts Lists the scripts that are available when you start design entry tool.
— Inserts a new form or script in the current list.
— Removes a form or script from the current list.
— Move a selected line item up in the list.
— Move a selected line item down in the list.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 399

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Databook Data Source

Settings Dialog Box - Databook Data Source

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), DataBook Data Source (category)
Use this dialog box to enter a user name and password for a DataBook data source.
Description
Oracle data sources require a user name and password, while they are optional for ODBC data
sources. The user name and password are encrypted and saved in the /<WDIR>/
DxDesigner.xml file.

Figure 2-92. Settings Dialog Box - DataBook Data Source

Objects
Table 2-107. Settings Dialog Box - DataBook Data Source Contents
Field Description
Save user If checked, the user name and password you provide below will be encrypted
name and and saved to the /<WDIR>/DxDesigner.xml file.
password
Data source Use the dropdown list to select the available data sources that have been
configured for your project. See “Creating a Databook Configuration File” in
the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide

400 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Databook Data Source

Table 2-107. Settings Dialog Box - DataBook Data Source Contents (cont.)
Field Description
User name Only active if you checked the “Save user name and password” checkbox.
Note: If you do not set a user name and password, the Databook tool
prompts you for a user name and password when you try to open a
configuration file to a password-protected data source.
Password Only active if you checked the “Save user name and password” checkbox. See
the Note in the previous “User name” description.
Note: You cannot re-set the password through the dialog box. To re-set the
password, in the /<WDIR>/DxDesigner.xml file, delete the XML code
between the <USERDATA>...</USERDATA> tags.
Connection Displays the connection type.
type
Alias Displays the alias for the database.
Server Displays the server name if one is assigned.
Database Displays the Database name.

Related Topics
Databook to Data Sources Connections [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 401

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Licensing

Settings Dialog Box - Licensing

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Licensing (category)
Use this dialog box to choose which installed features to load when the application is started.
Objects
• You have two methods to enable the desired licenses:
o Check out all available features
o Select options individually
Figure 2-93. Settings Dialog Box - Licensing Example

Related Topics
Enabling Licensed Features [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

402 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

To access: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category)
Use this dialog box to set advanced design entry tool settings.
Figure 2-94. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Settings Example

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 403

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Objects
Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents
Field Description
Alternative If unchecked, displays the default net connection dot.
four way net If checked, displays the alternative four-way net connection as shown:
connection

Area Select If checked, when you draw a box to select objects on a sheet, the objects do not
by Overlap need to be totally enclosed in the box to be selected. Even if just a portion of an
object is inside the selection box, the object is selected.
If unchecked, an object must be totally enclosed by the selection box to be
included in a selection.
For more information, see the following:
“Selecting Schematic Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Auto Pan If checked, automatically pans the screen when dragging a component around.
This eliminates the need to use F6 to pan each time you move an object.

404 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Automatically Scope: PADS Designer
synchronize Note: You must have a special component defined for any Pin Type that
block pin and you want to use as a port.
associated
port name and If checked, changing the Pin Type value of a pin on a local symbol representing
type hierarchy automatically changes the port symbol on the underlying schematic.
(See the following figure.)
Figure 2-95. Synchronize Symbol Pin and Associated Port

If unchecked, changing the Pin Type value of a pin on a local symbol

representing hierarchy does not automatically change the port symbol on the
underlying schematic. You must change the port symbol manually.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 405

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Automatically If checked, the design entry tool automatically synchronizes net names and bus
synchronize names with connected links. With this setting, the design entry tool always
Links and net keeps them synchronized no matter which name you change.
names If unchecked, you can use different names between nets or buses and connected
links.
Box Size [in] Sets the drawing size of all boxes on dangling net endpoints. This option
indicates what has been set.
Default: 0.050” (with inches set as the setting, or 1.27mm).
Bus Box Size Sets the drawing size of all boxes on dangling bus endpoints. This option
[in] indicates what has been set.
Default: 0.013” (with inches set as the setting, or 0.33mm).
Bus Dot Size Sets the drawing size (radius) of all bus connection dots. This option indicates
[in] what option has been set.
Default: 0.00 units.
Copy Scope: PADS Designer
Constraints If checked, the PADS Designer tool copies constraints data during Copy Block
on Copy and Copy Sheet operations.
Sheet
If unchecked, only schematic data is copied.
Crosshair Sets the appearance of the schematic cursor to one of the following from the
Cursor dropdown list:
• None
• Small
• Full Extent
Delete Scope: PADS Designer
mismatched Sets the design entry tool action for mismatched Symbol/Pin port connectors to
Symbol/Pin be one of the following:
port
connectors • Ask — You are given a choice at the time the mismatch is found
• Yes — Delete the found mismatched port connectors
• No — Do not delete the found mismatched port connectors

406 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Display Only If checked, the design entry tool displays only the schematic sheet name on
Sheet Names schematic tabs as shown below:
in Tabs

If unchecked, the design entry tool displays the schematic name followed by the
sheet name on schematic tabs as follows:

Display Controls how bus pin numbers on the design display when a bus is connected to
shortened Pin more than ten pins (represented as bus pins).
Numbers If unchecked, all bus pin numbers in the sequence display as shown here:

If checked, the bus pin numbers display in shortened form using an ellipsis as
shown here:

Note: When you check or uncheck this option, the tool updates the display
of all bus pin numbers currently on the schematic as well as the bus pin
numbers of any new bus pins you subsequently add.
For more information, see the following:
“Connectivity With Buses” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 407

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Dot Size [in] Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net connection dots. The design entry tool
determines the connection dot size from the radius setting and the net line
width. This option indicates what has been set.
If the net has a line width=1, the design entry tool displays the connection dot
using the radius value (0.025” in the second example in the following figure.)
If the net has a line width>1, the design entry tool increases the connection dot
size according to the net size. The design entry tool adds the radius value to the
edge of the net line edge as shown in the first example in the following figure:

408 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Fixed Text • If checked (on), the design entry tool handles text rotation as shown in the
Rotation following example (on the left). Rotating the text 180 degrees maintains the
original orientation. Rotating the “Text” string either 90 or 270 degrees
produces the results shown in the example on the left.
• If unchecked (off), the design entry tool handles text rotation as shown in
the following example (on the right). For each rotation of the text (90, 180,
and 270 degrees), the orientation is changed as shown.
Example 2-5. Fixed Text Rotation

Note: If you change the setting from checked (on) to unchecked (off) after
you have added text, any text appearing in the 180 degree state or the 270
degree state (as shown on the left in the example above) changes to the
equivalent state as shown at the right in the example when you apply the new
setting.
For more information, see the following:
“Changing Object Orientation” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Flag out-of- If checked, enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date managed blocks.
date Managed The software compares the managed block in the host design and central library
Blocks to ensure they are the same. If the time/date stamp of the managed block symbol
is different from that in the host design, the design entry tool places a magenta
box around the out-of-date managed block.
Flag out-of- If checked, enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date symbols. The
date symbols software compares the symbol in the host design and central library to ensure
they are the same. If the time/date stamp of the symbol is different from that in
the host design, the design entry tool places a magenta box around the out-of-
date symbol.
For more information, see the following:
“Updating a Project With Changed Library Content” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 409

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Flip/Mirror Controls the Flip or Mirror operation when more than one object is selected as
objects follows:
separately • If checked, the design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of objects
against each object’s symmetry axis
• If unchecked, the design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of
objects against the symmetry axis of the entire selected group.
For more information, see the following:
“Changing Object Orientation” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Highlight Scope: PADS Designer
excluded parts If checked, parts that have the Forward to PCB property value set to False
in schematic appear on the schematic with highlighting as shown on the right in the
following figure:

See also “Controlling Part Inclusion/Exclusion in BOM/PCB” in the

PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Inverted Pin Controls the size of the bubble on inverted pins. This option indicates what has
Bubble Size been set.
[in]
Language Scope: PADS Designer
Sets the User Interface language to one of the following:
• Default
• English
• Japanese
• Portuguese
• Chinese
Log Verify Scope: PADS Designer
result in If checked, specifies that the results of the verification pass that occurs when
output you publish a managed block in the PADS Designer tool appear in the Output
window window.
during
Publish If unchecked, the verification results are only output to a log file.
Managed
Blocks

410 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Net snap Sets the distance, in inches, for a net to snap to a pin or another net. Default:
distance [in] 0.000. By default, when you add a net to a sheet, the design entry tool snaps the
net to a pin or another net if the cursor is within half a grid of the schematic grid
pattern.
For more information, see the following:
“Setting the Schematic Grid Pattern” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Open affected If checked, the design entry tool opens any sheet where a a multi-sheet
sheets on annotation operation changed a symbol property. Default: Unchecked. The tool
multi-sheet reports the change in the Output window as follows:
operations Changes for Annotation operation were made to the following
sheets:
<schematic_name>.<sheet_name>
To undo changes made the sheet visit the sheet by clicking the
link above.
The following are examples of multi-sheet annotation operations:
• Annotating component properties of symbols across multiple sheets with the
Databook tool.
For more information see “Annotating Component Properties on a Part or
Symbol” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
• Updating property values with the Update Other Objects dialog box
(Tools > Update Other Objects menu item ).
For more information see “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 411

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Pintype Select between the following appearance of pintype arrows between full arrow
Arrows and half arrow (European) styles:
• None
(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “0”, EURO_ARROWS, not applicable)
• Full Size
(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “0”)
• Half Size
(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “1”)
Notes:
• The design entry tool only displays pintype arrows for symbols that have
block types of Module and Composite. The design entry tool does not
display pintype arrows for a block type of Pin.
• If a pintype does not exist on the symbol pin, the design entry tool will not
display Pintype Arrows.
Different pin types are represented by different arrows. A list of these is shown
in the PINTYPE/Arrow Type Examples table following this table.
Preserve If checked, the design entry tool preserves packaging information such as
packaging reference designators, instance values, pin numbers, and pin slots when copying
info on copy a schematic, a schematic sheet, a block, or a design.
If unchecked, the packaging information resets to default or empty values
(depending on the information type) when you copy a schematic, schematic
sheet, block, or design.
Preserve If checked, the tool preserves the Reference Designator and pin numbers on the
packaging component when you use cut (right-click and choose the Cut popup menu item)
info on cut and paste (right-click and choose the Paste popup menu item) to move the
component from one place to another.
Propagate Scope: PADS Designer
Ports to If checked, any pins that you add to a block automatically cause corresponding
Schematic ports to be added to the lower-level schematic when you right-click the block
and then choose the Push Schematic popup menu item. In addition, when you
place parts containing multiple part database slots (multiple parts in one
package), the placed part automatically assigns a slot number and
corresponding pin values.
If unchecked, you must manually add missing ports to a lower-level schematic
from a block using the Add > Missing Ports menu item. In the case of multiple
parts in one package, you can manually assign slots using the command or let
the Packager make the assignment during packaging.
See also “Connecting Hierarchical Levels Using a Top-Down Approach” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

412 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Push to block Scope: PADS Designer
on double If checked, double-clicking on a block opens the underlying schematic of the
click block. This action is equivalent to doing any of the following actions: pushing
into a block by right-clicking and choosing the Push popup menu item,
choosing the Edit > Push menu item, or typing the shortcut "h".
If unchecked, double-clicking on a block has no effect.
Reset If checked, when you choose the Tools > Update Symbols menu item, the
Component design entry tool sets the local symbol scale factor to 1 for any updated
Scale on symbols. For example:
Symbol 1. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry tool.
Update
2. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that symbol to 0.8.
3. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool resets the local scale factor to 1 on all
symbols requiring an update. The design entry tool reflects only the 0.8
scale factor set in the Symbol Editor.
If unchecked, when you choose the Tools > Update Symbols menu item, the
design entry tool maintains the original local scale factor of any updated
symbols, and also applies any changed scale factor from the library. Using the
same scenario in the previous example:
1. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry tool.
2. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that symbol to 0.8.
3. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool applies both the local scale factor and the
Symbol Editor scale factor to the updated symbol. For this example, the
design entry tool rescales the symbol to 0.64.
See also “Updating a Project With Changed Library Content” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Run If checked before opening a project that was created with an earlier version of
Diagnostics the design entry tool (PADS Designer), the Diagnostics Tool automatically runs
after update after successfully updating the project to the current version of the design entry
tool.
For more information, see the following:
“Checking Data Integrity With the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting Reported
Errors” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Selection Specify a positive integer to set the number of pixels that determine the
Distance [in] selection distance boundary to an object on a schematic. This option indicates
what has been set.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 413

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Show Ripper If checked, displays the bit numbers on a ripped bus.
Indexes For more information, see the following:
The description in this table for the field: Use Full Bus Name on Ripper
“Connectivity With Buses” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Unique names If checked, the design entry tool automatically creates a unique label for a
on copy copied net, component, or pin.
Update Print If checked, the design entry tool automatically runs a Print Order check in
Order before background mode to ensure the page numbers on the schematic sheets are
updating consistent with the actual print order shown (optionally) in the Navigator
Cross window. You can manually access this check by choosing the Tools > Update
Reference Other Objects menu item and clicking the Print Order option in the Update
Other Objects dialog box.
For more information on the Print Order check, see “Update Other Objects
Dialog Box” in the PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual.
By default, the Navigator window does not display schematic print order. For
information on enabling the display of schematic print order in the Navigator
window, see “Viewing Schematic Sheet Print Order” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Use Full Bus If checked, the PADS Designer tool displays the full net name when you rip
Name on nets from a bus as shown below:
Ripper

If unchecked, PADS Designer just displays the bus ripper index value when you
rip nets from a bus as shown below:

Note: The option must be set before you can display the signal name.
For more information, see the following:
“Connectivity With Buses” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Xpedition If checked, the design entry tool uses Xpedition Layout-style key bindings.
Style Key If unchecked, the design entry tool uses default key bindings.
bindings
For more information, see “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on
page 427.

414 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 2-109. PINTYPE/Arrow Type Examples

PINTYPE Arrow Type Example
ANALOG Hollow

BI Solid
IN Solid

OCL Filled Diagonal

OEM Hollow

OUT Solid

TRI Hollow

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 415

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Simulation Setup Dialog Box

Simulation Setup Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• In Navigator window, open the popup on the selected HDL Design. Choose Simulation
Settings.
• Tools > Simulation Options
Use this dialog box to set up the SDF (Standard Delay Format) options for a ModelSim
simulation session.
Figure 2-96. Simulation Setup Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-110. Simulation Setup Dialog Box - SDF Tab Contents
Field Description
Files In this list, add one or more standard delay format (SDF) files,
which describe various interconnect delays to run back-annotated
simulations.
Disable SDF Warnings If checked, set the simulator to disable these warning reports.
Reduce SDF Error To If checked, set the simulator to reduce the severity of error found
Warnings to warnings.
Multi-Source Delay From the dropdown list, set to one of the following: latest, min,
or max. Or leave blank for none.

416 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Update Other Objects Dialog Box

Update Other Objects Dialog Box

To access: Tools > Update Other Objects
Use this dialog box to choose the type of object you want to update. You can also select the
Range or scope of the update to avoid interfering with others who might be working on the same
project concurrently, or to apply different updates to different levels of the project.
Figure 2-97. Update Other Objects Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-111. Update Other Object Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Type (select one or more of these types to update)
Properties See also “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Bus Signals See also “Creating and Editing Predefined Buses” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Bus Rippers See also “Using a Customized Ripper Graphic” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Print Order If you select a sheet from the Navigator and apply the “Exclude
from Printout” option (right-click Exclude from Printout popup
menu item), you must update the associated Border property
@PRINTORDER using this Print Order option.
See also “Excluding Sheets From Printing or PDF Generation”
and “Changing Sheet Print Order” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 417

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Update Other Objects Dialog Box

Table 2-111. Update Other Object Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Update Borders See also “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Range (before choosing one of these, you need to open a sheet within the desired range)
Project (All project types) If you want to propagate the change throughout the entire project,
open any schematic sheet in the project.
Board (PADS or Netlist If you want to update all sheets under a particular board, open
project) any sheet within the board.
Schematic (PADS or Netlist If you want to update all sheets within a particular schematic,
project) open one of the sheets within the desired schematic.
Sheet (All project types) If you only want to update one particular sheet, open that sheet.

418 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box

Verify Dialog Box

To access:
• Tools > Verify
• Verify button ( )

• From the Navigator, right-click a board design, and choose Verify popup menu item.
Use this dialog box to configure the Verify tool.
Description
The left column of the Verify dialog box (shown in Figure 2-98) provides access to the Settings
pane, and to the design rule check (DRC) groups.

Figure 2-98. Verify Dialog Box - Rules Panes

You use the Settings pane in the Verify dialog box (shown in Figure 2-99) to configure the DRC
scope and to see which Defaults file and which Configuration file the Verify tool uses. See the
remaining tables in this topic for more information on this pane.

You can click on any of the DRC groups and see the individual DRCs for that group displayed
in the pane on the right side of the dialog box. See “DRC Groups” on page 477 for detailed
information on these design rule checks. You can also refer to “Design Objects” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guidefor a description of the design hierarchy.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 419

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box

Figure 2-99. Verify Dialog Box - Settings Pane (PADS Designer)

Objects
Table 2-112. Verify Settings Pane Contents - PADS Designer
Field Description
Board If chosen, the Verify tool checks the selected board.
PADS
Integrated or
Netlist project
Schematic If chosen, the Verify tool checks the schematic of this block or design.
Sheet If chosen, the Verify tool checks the first sheet of this block or design.

420 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box

Table 2-112. Verify Settings Pane Contents - PADS Designer (cont.)

Field Description
All hierarchy If chosen, checks all hierarchy. Works with Schematic or Sheet options.
underneath
Level Property Choose either STD, VHDL, or Verilog to limit how far the Verify tool
descends into the hierarchy.
Show If checked, the Verify tool shows hierarchical paths in the DRC report.
hierarchical
paths
Configuration Shows the path to either the Verify.ini or NetlistVerify.ini file that stores your
File local Verify dialog box default settings.
Defaults Displays a menu that enables you to do one of the following:
button Save Current — PADS Designer saves your Verify dialog box settings to the
local VerifyDefaults.ini file. PADS Designer stores only the settings that differ
from the /<install_dir>/<release>/SDD_HOME/standard/VerifyDefaults.ini
file in your local copy.
Default — PADS Designer restores the Verify dialog box settings to those
specified in: /<install_dir>/<release>/SDD_HOME/standard/
VerifyDefaults.ini.

Related Topics
DRC Groups
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Migration Rules Group
Connectivity Rules Group
Hierarchy Rules Group
Integrity Rules Group
Power & Ground Rules Group
Device Specific Rules Group
HDL Checks Rules Group
Links Rules Group
Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 421

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane

Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane

Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• Tools > Verify (menu item), Interconnectivity (pane)
• Verify button ( ),Interconnectivity (pane)

Use this dialog box pane to configure compatibility checking in the Design Rule Checker
(DRC) Verify tool for component pin types connected to system signals across multiple boards
in a design.
Description
The Verify dialog box, Interconnectivity pane (shown in Figure 2-100) is a user-configurable
interface that enables you to specify which connections you want checked based on object type,
and how you want the specified connections handled by the DRC Verify tool. You click on each
icon in the grid to toggle between the four checking options.

You can refer to “Design Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide for a more
detailed description of design objects.

Figure 2-100. Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane (PADS Designer)

422 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane

Objects
You configure compatibility checking between two types of objects by locating one type of
object on the X axis, locating the other type of object on the Y axis, and clicking where they
intersect to toggle the icon between the checking options described in the following table.
In the PADS Designer tool, the Interconnectivity pane displays additional checkbox options as
shown in Figure 2-100. If you check the checkbox at the intersection of two pin types, the tool
also verifies the validity of the connection between the two pin types of active components.
Table 2-113. Verify Settings - Interconnectivity Grid Options
Field Description
Ignore Connection Specifies that the tool will not report a connection it identifies
between the two object types specified on the X and Y axis of the
Interconnectivity Grid, and will not flag it as a warning or error.
Report Connection Specifies that the tool will report all the connections it identifies
between the two object types specified on the X and Y axis of the
Interconnectivity Grid.
Generate a Warning Specifies that the tool will generate a warning when it identifies a
connection between the two object types specified on the X and
Y axis of the Interconnectivity Grid.
Generate an Error Specifies that the tool will generate an error when it identifies a
connection between the two object types specified on the X and
Y axis of the Interconnectivity Grid.

Related Topics
DRC Groups
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 423

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > Verilog Netlist
Use this dialog box to create a Verilog netlist file(s) for a design. This netlister first runs the
iCDB Compiler utility to generate a Common Database for the design, and then runs the
appropriate utilities to generate the Verilog netlist (.v) files, which are used for simulating the
design.
Description
These utilities are run automatically when invoked from the Verilog Netlister dialog box so you
do not have to invoke each utility separately.

If state, flowchart, or table blocks exist in the design, the appropriate HDL Generator is run on
the blocks to generate a Verilog netlist (.v). All settings are stored in an hdlutils.ini file that the
Verilog netlister creates in the project directory.

Figure 2-101. Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 2-114. Verilog Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output File Specify the output file of the resulting Verilog netlist
From Block You can enter a specific schematic name or leave this field empty
to generate Verilog files for all schematics in the design

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters

424 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Boxes and Windows
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box

VHDL Netlister Dialog Box

Scope: PADS Designer
To access: File > Export > VHDL Netlist
Use this dialog box to configure the iCDB-to-VHDL netlister. This utility extracts data from the
Integrated Common Database (iCDB) and outputs it in VHDL IEEE 1076-1987 format.
Figure 2-102. VHDL Netlister Dialog Box

Description
You set up the netlister from Setup > Settings, Project category, Export HDL(subcategory,
VHDL subcategory.

The VHDL Netlister produces an ASCII output file with a .vhd extension in the Generated HDL
directory specified in the project. Any existing .vhd file with the same base name is overwritten.

Objects
Table 2-115. VHDL Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output Folder Specify the output folder/file of the resulting VHDL netlist
From Block You can enter a specific schematic name or leave this field empty
to generate VHDL files for all the schematics in the design

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 425

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box

426 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 3
Design Entry Tool Commands

You can execute design entry tool commands from the user interface using the command line
toolbar or keybindings and strokes. Also, you can execute some shell-level commands from the
Windows command prompt without invoking the design entry tool.
Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes

One method for you to quickly execute design entry tool commands is to use a predefined set of
key sequences. For example, the key sequence CTRL+N opens a new project in the design entry
tool. Another method to execute commands is to draw predefined stroke patterns in the
schematic window with the mouse.
The tool accesses predefined key bindings and stroke patterns from a VBScript file (.vbs).
Which .vbs definition file your design entry tool accesses depends on which pan and zoom
setting you choose in the Strokes, Pan and Zoom pane of the Settings dialog box (choose
Setup > Settings menu item, expand the Schematic Editor category, click Strokes, Pan and
Zoom subcategory).

Tip
You can view your predefined key bindings by choosing the Help > Show Bindings menu
item.

A new schematic window appears containing the key binding definitions. A list of stroke
bindings display at the bottom of the window list as a sequence of numbers to reflect the stroke
grid. For more information, see the table in “Key Bindings and Strokes” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Tip
You can view your predefined stroke definitions graphically by toggling on the
Help > Show Strokes menu setting.

A graphical representation of each stroke displays in the schematic window.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 427

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary

The pan and zoom setting choices are as follows:

• Default Pan and Zoom — The tool accesses the predefined settings from:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\vdbindings.vbs
• Xpedition Pan and Zoom — The tool accesses the predefined settings from:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\exped_wvo.vbs
• PADS Pan and Zoom — The tool accesses the predefined settings from:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\vdbindings.vbs

Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command

Summary
The following table lists a number of design entry tool commands you can execute from a
command shell (DOS).
Note
Use the −help or −h switch as indicated with the following commands to see a list of options
and their description.

Table 3-1. Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Descriptions

Command Description
AllegroNetlist Saves the current sheet in a Cadence Allegro netlist format in a .tel
(-help) file.

DxArchiver In the PADS Designer tool, the Archiver utility collects and stores
(-h) schematics, symbols, and other data associated with a specific design
or project in the design entry tool.
See also “Project Archive” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
edifExporter Export an EDIF netlist.
(-h)
icdbPartsLister Configure the Part Lister tool for creating a list of the parts used in a
(-h) design.
For more information, see the following:
“Generating Bills of Materials” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
“icdbPartsLister” on page 431

428 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary

Table 3-1. Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Descriptions (cont.)

Command Description
KeyinNetlist Save the design as an PADS Layout Keyin netlist.
(-help)
package Configure and run the Packager, which prepares the specified project
for forward annotation by assigning reference designators to map
each component in the logical schematic to a physical part.
See also “package” on page 433
RinfNetlist Save the current sheet in a Zuken RINF netlist format in an .frp file.
(-help)
QuickConnectionView Write the design out as a netlist to an ASCII file.
(-help)
sch2pdf Generate PDF files for the design entry tool schematics from the
(-h) DOS command line.

vdrc (-usage) Start the Design Rule Checker (DRC).

For more informaiton, see the following:
“vdrc (Design Rule Checker)” on page 440
“Verify Dialog Box” on page 419

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 429

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands

Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands

The design entry tool provides a number of commands you can execute from a command shell
(DOS) instead of from within the designer entry tool UI.
icdbPartsLister. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
DxArchiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
sch2pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
vdrc (Design Rule Checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

430 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
icdbPartsLister

icdbPartsLister
You invoke the Part Lister from the command line.
Usage
icdbPartsLister [-p | -proj]=file.prj [-b | -board]=name
[-s | -block]=name [-a | -architecture]=name
[-c | -cfg]=file.ipl [-o | -out]=file
[-l | -level]=level

Arguments
• -p or -proj=<file>.prj
Specify the path to the <file>.prj project file
• -b or -board=name
If you do not want to run the Part Lister on the entire project, specify the specific board
(name) or optionally choose a block as shown in the next argument.
• -s or -block=name
If you do not want to run the Part Lister on the entire project or a specific board, specify a
block (name).
• -a or -architecture=name
Use this option to choose a specific VHDL architecture (name).
• -f or -function=name
Use this option to choose a specific function.
• -c or -cfg=file.ipl
Choose a <file>.ipl file that contains the Part Lister options.
• -o or -out=file
Specify the output file path.
• -l or -level=level
Specify a custom level.
Examples
If your design is called circuit1, you could invoke the Part Lister with this command:

icdbPartsLister circuit1 -i circuit1.ipl -o circuit1.lst

However, since the name of the initialization and output files are arbitrary, you may create
several different initialization files to produce various output files, such as separate parts lists
and cost summaries. If you wanted to generate cost summaries for several different designs, you

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 431

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
icdbPartsLister

might have an initialization file for this purpose, so you could invoke the Part Lister with this
command:

icdbPartsLister circuit1 - i costlist.ipl -o costlist.lst

The Part Lister looks in your current project directory (by default) for the initialization (.ipl) file
you are calling out. If the Part Lister does not find the .ipl file in the current project, it then looks
in your “STANDARD” directory as defined in your WDIR environmental variable. If the Part
Lister still cannot find the .ipl file, it generates an error message indicating the problem.

Related Topics
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary

432 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
package

package
Shell-level command
Configure and run the Packager, which prepares the specified project for forward annotation by
assigning reference designators to map each component in the logical schematic to a physical
part.
Usage
package -j<path_to_proj> [-n<design_name>] [-ob | -op] [-Block=<block_name>]
[-Add | -Refresh | -Replace | -CleanBuild] [-Update[=<file>]] [-u<directory>] [-p<file>]
[-b<file>] [-l<file>] [-d] [-i] [-a] [-NoFill] [-W1PinNets]
[-r] [-s] [-CW] [-y]
[-k] [-1 | -2] [-help]
Arguments
• -j <path_to_proj>
Required. Specify the path to the project file.
• -n <design_name>
Specify the design or configuration name.
• Packaging Optimization
If neither the -ob or -op options are used, symbols are combined into packages regardless of
the symbol’s location within the schematic. Or specify the Packaging Optimization as one
of the following:
-ob — Only allows symbols within the same block to be combined into packages.
-op — Only allows symbols on the same page to be combined into packages.
• -Block= <block_name>
Define the scope of the packaging operation. If you omit this option, the Packager works on
the entire design. If specify a block, the Packager narrows the scope to all sheets in that
block. If you specify a particular sheet from one of the blocks such as <schematic_name>1,
the Packager narrows the operation scope even further to just that sheet.
• -Add
Extract only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy. Does not check for newer
versions of local parts.
• -Refresh
Extract only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy. Overwrites existing local
parts with newer versions if they exist in the central library.
• -Replace
Delete local data and re-extracts. Exception: If you have imported any data directly into the
local copy (for example, an FPGA Pin File), that data is preserved.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 433

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
package

• -CleanBuild
Delete all local data and re-extracts.
• -Update[ =<file> ]
Specify a file that contains a list of parts that get updated during packaging. If no file is
specified, update all parts.
• -u<directory
Specify a Central Database.
• -p <file>
Specify the target Parts Database (cad.pdb).
• -b <file>
Specify the output BAM (db_wasis.BAM).
• -l <file>
Specify a file for the logfile output.
• -d
Write verbose information on the packaging process to a log file. To optimize performance,
enable this option to debug packager errors, and then disable once the design is error-free.
• Packaging Operation
If neither the -i, -r, or -s options are set, the Packager maintains any existing packaging. The
packager only packages new or unpackaged components. Otherwise, set the packaging
operation as one of the following:
-i — The Packager removes all the Frozen Package properties and packages all components,
including previously packaged components.
-r — Packages all components except those that have a Frozen Package property value of
Fix.
-s — Checks the design to verify that it will package correctly. Writes errors to the
partpkg.log file.
• -a
Prevents the Packager from replacing existing alphanumeric Reference Designators.
• -NoFill
If you do not specify this option, the Packager fills in Reference Designators (Ref Des)
when new unpackaged parts are added to the design. For example; Given U100, U102, and
U103... If a new part is added, it is assigned Reference Designator U101 to fill in the gap
between U100 and U102.
If you specify this -NoFill option, the Packager assigns Ref Des numbers to continue at the
top of the existing numbering scheme when new unpackaged parts are added to the design.

434 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
package

For example; Given the parts in the previous example, if a new part is added, the gap
between U100 and U102 is retained and the new part is assigned Ref Des U104.
• -W1PinNets
The Packager includes warnings for this condition in the PartPkg.log file and on the
Packager results tab. If this option is not specified, warnings for this condition are
suppressed.
• CW
Close window on completion.
• -y
Update BAM files only. The Packager will not update the Central Database.
• -k
Select this option if you are getting component properties from the parts database (PDB),
and not from Databook.
• -1
Low level of debug output is sent to the standard output.
• -2
High level of debug output is sent to the standard output.
• -help
Display the package command argument usage to the command window.
Related Topics
Packager Dialog Box
Packaging a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 435

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
DxArchiver

DxArchiver
Run this command from a command shell (DOS).
The DxArchiver export option exports the design entry tool project data files in a specified
location and format. The archive export process generates the manifest.xml file, which contains
the contents of the archive package.
Note
For more overview information on the Archiver, such as why you would use this tool, see
“Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Usage
DxArchiver [−p file_name] [−t directory] [−c file_name] [−l log_file] [-zip] [-createpdf]
[−noGUI]
DxArchiver −h
Arguments
• -p file_name
(Optional) Specifies the path and name of the design entry tool project (.prj) file to archive.
• -t directory
(Optional) Specifies the target directory.
• -c file_name
(Optional) Specifies the path to the DxArchiver.xml file.
• -l log_file
(Optional) Creates a log file of the archive.
• -zip
(Optional) Compresses the contents and creates a single Zip format file (.zip) of the project
and related files.
• -createpdf
(Optional) Creates a PDF format file (.pdf) of all the schematic sheets in the project file.
• -noGUI
(Optional) Tells DxArchiver not to use the wizard.
• -h
Displays help.

436 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
DxArchiver

Examples
• Display help for the DxArchiver command:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\common\win32\bin\DxArchiver.exe
-h

• Archive the project using only the command defaults:

DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxDWIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj

• Archive the project with an additional folder and file specified in the DxArchiver.xml
file. Also, compress the contents of the archive into a single Zip format file and create a
PDF format file of the schematic sheets.
DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj
-c C:\project_archives\DxArchiver.xml -t C:\project_archives
-zip -createpdf

The contents of the DxArchiver.xml specify an additional folder and file to include into
the archive:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<DxArchiverProject version="1">
<AdditionalFiles>
<File Path="./IOPT"/>
<File Path="./AdditionalFiles\XCVR_top.v"/>
</AdditionalFiles>
</DxArchiverProject>

Related Topics
DxArchiver.xml File Format
Archiver Wizard
Project Archive [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 437

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
sch2pdf

sch2pdf
In addition to using the PDF Writer interface, you can also generate PDF files for schematics
from the DOS command line. The command line program is named sch2pdf.exe.
Usage
sch2pdf -project <project_file> [-eevm <filename>] [-a <output_filename>]
[-c <colorCode>] [-d] [-e] [-g* global_override] [-i <hyperlink>] [-l <level>]
[-o <order>] [-s] [-p] [-f] [-v] [-udx] [-u <font_name> ]
[-schematic <name>]
Parameters
Command line options are described in the following tables.
Table 3-2. Command Line Options for Generating a PDF File
Option Description
-a Overrides the default output filename of <design>.pdf
-c Refer to “Command Line Color Codes For Generating a PDF File” in the
following table for a list of color code options.
-d Disable compression
-e Use exclusion info
-eevm Path to variant manager <filename>
-f Displays a PDF file in Adobe Acrobat with a list of fonts supported on your
system
-i Interprets component property name <hyperlink> as potential URL
-l Property (<level>) to stop descending composite symbols (specifies multiple
levels separately)
-o Component property names (<order>) whose values override sheet order (use
with Scout)
-p Adds a pop-up menu on components
-project Path to the .prj project file
-s Starts the Adobe Acrobat viewer and displays the output file
-schematic Specify the name of only one particular schematic to be generated.
-udx Use PADS font mapping
-u Disable font mapping for a particular named font. Use strokes for the specified
font. The possible <font_name> values are: "all" "Fixed" "Roman" "Roman
Italic" "Roman Bold" "Roman Bold Italic" "Sans Serif" "Script" "Sans Serif Bold"
"Script Bold" "Gothic" "Old English" "Kanji" and "Plot".
-v Makes all hyperlinks visible in a PDF document

438 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
sch2pdf

Command line color codes are described in the following table:

Table 3-3. Command Line Color Codes For Generating a PDF File
Color Code Description
0 Black on white, suppresses black text
1 Color on white
2 Color on black
3 Black on white, prints text in black
4 Color on white, print color text
Other command line options are described in the following table:
Table 3-4. Additional Command Line Options for Generating a PDF File
Option Description
-g* Overrides memory allocation defaults. Use only on very large designs that
do not otherwise complete.
-ga Maximum number of annotations
-go Maximum number of objects
-gp Maximum number of pages

Related Topics
Design Entry Tool Commands

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 439

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
vdrc (Design Rule Checker)

vdrc (Design Rule Checker)

In addition to using the Verify dialog box, you can also run the DRC from the DOS or Linux
command line. The command line program is named vdrc.
Usage
vdrc -proj <project_file.prj> [-board <board_name>] -block <block_name>
-def <definition_filename> [-dxd_std] [-group <group_name>] [-hier]
[-page <sheet_name>] -set <settings_filename.ini> [] [-usage]
Arguments
Table 3-5. Command Line Options for vdrc Command
Option Description
-proj (Required) Specify a path to the project_file.prj file. The vdrc command uses
the .prj file contents to determine settings such as the Bus Contents and others,
which overrides any duplicate settings that might appear on the command line.
-board Specify a board that vdrc will check, such as Board1.
-block (Required) Specify the block that vdrc will check, such as Schematic1.
-def (Required) Specify the path to the default Verify configuration file. This file
contains settings usually specified by an administrator for multiple users or to
determine standardized checks. If you do not specify this file, vdrc uses the
default file stored with the installation for your type of project, such as C:\...\
standard\VerifyDefaults.ini or C:\...\standard\VerifyDefaultsSD.ini.
-dxd_std If specified, the vdrc output is formatted for a browser, with HTML tags with
links to the objects.
-group Specify the Verify group_name in order to execute all checks within the
specified group such as Connectivity, Electrical, and so on.
-hier If specified, vdrc checks the specified block and all hierarchy below the block.
-page If you specify a page sheet_name, only that sheet will be verified.
-set (Required) Specify the path to the user settings stored in a Verify.ini
configuration file. If you do not specify this path, the settings defined in the
Default Verify configuration file will be used. See the preceding -def option
description.
-usage Displays the vdrc command usage information.

Related Topics
Design Entry Tool Commands
Verify Dialog Box

440 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

The design entry tool commands are grouped alphabetically. Online viewers can click on a
letter below to access each alphabetic group:

A B C D E F G I L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z

Table 3-6. A - Command Line Commands

Command Description
a<n>size <n> = 0 through 4
Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to a <n>.
When you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to
a<n>. (Executing this command does not change the project settings for
sheet size.)
adistance Sets the avoidance distance between components. The routing distance can
be specified with the aroute command. A connection is automatically
staggered by the avoidance distance as the route hugs to the components or
other connections.
ainvis Makes the specified attribute invisible in the active schematic or symbol
window. If you enter the ainvis command on the command line and execute
the command, the Make Attribute Invisible dialog box appears. You can
either enter an attribute name in the Name field to make a specific invisible,
or you can leave the wildcard (*) symbol in the Name field to make all
properties invisible.
align Aligns the selected components to a side of the window.
Syntax: align <side>
where <side> equals one of the following: left, right, top, or bottom.
anvis Makes the name portion of the specified properties visible in the active
schematic or symbol window. The Make Attributes Name Visible dialog box
appears. Enter the attribute name in the Name field and click OK. You can
use the wildcard characters when entering the attribute name.
aoff Changes the attributes settings to off.
aon Changes the attributes settings to on.
arc Adds an arc in the schematic or symbol drawing. Arcs are dynamically
created by specifying the endpoints and stretching the segment to specify the
arc.
For more information, see the following:
“Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 441

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-6. A - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
aroute Changes the routing mode to full avoidance routing. Executing this command
changes the routing mode specified in the DxDesigner.xml file (key
name=”ROUTE” value=”2”) to avoidance routing.
array Creates an array for one or more selected objects. Arrays are created by
selecting the command and defining the relative or absolute spacing.
Using positive values for the spacing settings creates the array to the right
and/or upward in the window.
For more information, see the following:
“Creating a Graphical Component Array” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
arrowson Turns on Pintype Arrows
arrowsoff Turns off Pintype Arrows
asize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to a. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to a.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)
avis Makes the specified attributes visible in the active schematic or symbol
window.
To make an attribute visible, enter the avis command from the command line.
The Make Attributes Visible dialog box appears. Enter the attribute name in
the Name field and click OK. You can use the wildcard characters when
entering the attribute name
avvis Makes the value portion of the specified attributes visible in the active
schematic or symbol window.
To make a value visible, enter the avvis command from the command line.
The Make Attribute Value Visible dialog box appears. Enter the attribute
name in the Name field and click OK. You can use the wildcard characters
when entering the attribute name.

Table 3-7. B - Command Line Commands

Command Description
bb This command brings up the Change Bounding Box dialog that enables you to
modify the bounding box of your current drawing.
• L1X: Lower left x-coordinate (should typically be 0)
• L1Y: Lower left y-coordinate (should typically be 0)
• UrX: Upper right x-coordinate (should typically be width of drawing)
• UrY: Upper right y-coordinate (should typically be height of drawing)
bcast Turn broadcasting on or off.

442 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-7. B - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
bcomposite Set blocktype composite.
bcopy Copies the selected objects or areas of the drawing into the clipboard,
overwriting the previous contents of the clipboard.
For more information, see the following:
“Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
bcut Removes the selected objects or areas from the window into the buffer,
overwriting the previous buffer contents.
For more information, see the following:
“Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
boff Turns the border for the active window off.
bon Turns the border for the active window on.
box Adds a box to the schematic or symbol drawing. The box is dynamically
created when you drag the mouse.
For more information, see the following:
“Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
bpaste Copies the contents of the buffer to an indicated location in the active window.
For more information, see the following:
“Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
bsize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to b. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to b.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)
bus Adds a bus in the active schematic window.
A bus is a collection of nets that can operate as a group or as individual nets
within the bus. A bus is created between components, from a single
component, or between nets.
For more information, see “Connectivity With Buses” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

Table 3-8. C - Command Line Commands

Command Description
cattribute Displays the Properties window (if not already open) for the selected schematic,
component, net, symbol or pin.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 443

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-8. C - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
cb Lets you change the border on the open schematic. When you execute the
command, a Change Border dialog box appears. Fill in or browse to the path to
the border you want to use.
ccomp Changes the symbol that the selected component represents.
Syntax: ccomp <new_component_name>
If you do not enter <new_component_name>, the Change Component dialog
box appears to prompt you to enter the component name and whether you want
to preserve REFDES. Preserve REFDES defaults to no.
chgattr The Change Attribute dialog box appears so you can change only the selected
property.
chglabel The Change Label dialog box appears so you can change only the selected label
(name).
chgtext The Change Text dialog box appears so you can change only the selected text.
cinst Updates the pin numbers of all selected components. This command does not
updated the REFDES attribute information.
circle Adds a circle to the active schematic or symbol window.
For more information, see the following:
“Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
color Changes the color or selected objects in the active window to the color you
specify.
Example: color blue
If you enter only the command “color”, the Change Color dialog box appears to
prompt you to enter the color.
component Adds a component to the schematic drawing.
If you do not specify the component name, the Add Component dialog box
appears so you can enter the component name.
copy Copies the selected object or group of objects.
For more information, see the following:
“bpaste”
“Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
csize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to c When you
execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to c (Executing this
command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)

444 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-8. C - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
ctoff Toggles the display of all text, labels, and properties associated with all
component symbols to off. Text, labels, or properties you add on the component
level are unaffected.
cton Toggles the display of all text, labels, and properties associated with all
component symbols to on. Text, labels, or properties you add on the component
level are unaffected.
cuapply Update components to match symbols, mark as compliant, and clear optional
highlight. When you execute the command, the Apply Symbol Updates to
Components dialog box appears. Select whether to apply the command to All or
Selected, then select the desired slot.
cucheck Check components for compliance with their symbols. When compliant, the
component on the design matches the symbol in the library. Highlight & select
all out-of-date components.
cycle Automatically changes a specialized pin to the next component of the same type
of a user-configured list.

Table 3-9. D - Command Line Commands

Command Description
db Delete border.
defshoff Toggles off default border functionality. New schematics will not have a
default border applied to them.
defshon Toggles on default border functionality. New schematics will have a default
border applied to them.
defsh1off Toggles off use of different border for underlying schematics. They will have
the same border as sheets 2 – <N>.
defsh1on Toggles on use of different border for underlying schematics. They will use
the sheet 1 border.
defshcfg Use borders from user-configurable file and location.
defshfix Use borders from fixed file and location.
delete Deletes the selected objects in the active document. The delete command can
be reversed using the undo command.
If you delete a component, net segment, or bus segment from a schematic, all
connections become dangling connections.
If the object you delete has dangling connections, by default these wires
(including attached labels and properties) are also deleted. If you want to
preserve net labels and properties from deletion in this case, use CTRL+ Del.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 445

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-9. D - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
directory Lists all the schematics and the symbols used on the schematics (in memory)
and identifies from which library the schematics and symbols were accessed.
dirsym Lists all the symbol files in project directories as specified in the <name>.prj
file.
Enter the dirsym command in the command line field and execute the
command.
Restriction: dirsym truncates file names to the first 16 characters.
doff Toggles the display of objects during object manipulation operations to off.
The default value for detail is the current value set in your DxDesigner.xml
file.
When you use this command, a bounding box is displayed to represent the
object until the operation is complete. If you use the don command, the objects
are continually displayed while you are performing object operations, such as:
adding, pasting, moving, copying, or rotating.
don Toggles the display of objects during object manipulation operations to on.
The default value for detail is the current value set in your DxDesigner.xml
file.
When you use this command, the objects are continually displayed while you
are performing object operations, such as: adding, pasting, moving, copying,
or rotating. If you use the doff command, a bounding box is displayed to
represent the object until the operation is complete.
Tip: Using this command slows down object movement. If you find the speed
of object operations slow, change this option setting. Click the right mouse
button or the space bar while dragging an object to toggle detail settings on the
fly.
dsize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to d. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to d.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)

Table 3-10. E - Command Line Command

Command Description
egoff Exclude globals fm unique labels off.
egon Exclude globals fm unique labels on.
esize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to e. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to e.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)
execute Execute a command ID.
commandid

446 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-10. E - Command Line Command (cont.)

Command Description
exit Exit the design entry tool session

Table 3-11. F - Command Line Commands

Command Description
fcloseall Saves all open symbol and schematic windows.
If a file has been modified, a dialog box opens asking if you want to save it.
form Run a form.
full Shows the full view of the schematic or symbol displayed in the active
window.

Table 3-12. G - Command Line Commands

Command Description
goff Turns off the grid display for the current schematic or symbol window. The
grid will not display if the spacing number specifies too many dots to be
drawn.
Also see the description in the topic “Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor”
on page 350.
gon Turns on the grid display for the current schematic or symbol window.
Also see the description in the topic “Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor”
on page 350.
grid Toggles the grid display on and off.
Also see the description in the topic “Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor”
on page 350.
ground Add ground pin to schematic
gspace Changes the grid display space increment for the current schematic or symbol
window. Grid increments are 0.01 inch.

Table 3-13. I - Command Line Commands

Command Description
ib Insert a border on the open schematic. When you execute the command, the
default border for the sheet size and orientation (portrait or landscape) of the
schematic is inserted.
in Zooms in on the design.
io Select pins that exist on a symbol corresponding to the open schematic for
which you want to instantiate hierarchical I/O pins

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 447

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-14. L - Command Line Commands

Command Description
label Adds a label to the selected object. Using the label command, you can add a
label and specify the name, expand, visibility, scope, and sense values for the
label.
line Adds a line between two points or a series of line segments in the schematic or
symbol window.
For more information, see the following:
“Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
linvis Makes the display of the specified labels invisible in the active schematic or
symbol window.
If you do not select a label before or during the execution of the command, the
Make Label Invisible dialog box appears to let you specify the label. You can
use wildcard characters to specify a group of labels.
loff Turns off the display of the labels associated with nets, components, and pins
for the active schematic or symbol window.
logmemory Log memory.
lon Turns on the display of the labels associated with nets, components, and pins
for the active schematic or symbol window.
longstrings Searches the schematic sheet and reports labels, properties, text, or OATs that
are longer than 127 characters.
lsense Changes a label to signify a logical inversion by drawing an inverted bar over
the label in the active schematic or symbol window. If a selected label already
has the overbar, this command removes the overbar from the label.
lvis Makes the display of the specified labels visible in the active schematic or
symbol window.
If you do not select a label before or during the execution of the command, the
Make Label Visible dialog box appears to let you specify the label. You can
use wildcard characters to specify a group of labels.

Table 3-15. M - Command Line Command

Command Description
move Attaches selected objects to the cursor for movement. Also enables use of the
arrow keys for fine placement.
To complete the move after executing the command, click the mouse button.

448 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-16. N - Command Line Commands

Command Description
name Changes the name of the selected attribute.
Example: name <NEW_ATT_NAME>
If you do not enter <NEW_ATT_NAME>, the Change Attribute Name dialog
box appears for you to enter the new attribute name in.
narray Automatically completes adding nets to a bus when any one net has been
placed and labeled. Execute this command after you have selected the net.
Syntax:
narray <direction>
Where <direction> is one of the following:
• righttoleft
• lefttoright
• toptobottom
• bottomtotop
naspace Auto net array space.
net Adds a net that connects two component pins and/or nets in the schematic
window. You also use this command to connect or continue a dangling net.
For more information, see the following:
“Connecting Components With Nets” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Ripping Nets From a Bus in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
noff Turns off the display of the internal names associated with objects in all
schematic or symbol windows. If a net or component is labeled, the internal
name is not displayed.
non Turns on the display of the internal names associated with objects in all
schematic or symbol windows. If a net or component is labeled, the internal
name is not displayed.
nsym New local symbol.
Also see “Creating and Editing a Local Symbol” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 449

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-17. O - Command Line Commands

Command Description
o1 through o9 Sets the default origin point for all new text, labels, and properties that you
create. The origin number represents the positions shown:
1-------------------4--------------------7
| | |
| | |
2-------------------5--------------------8
| | |
| | |
3-------------------6--------------------9
odetail Lists a detailed description of each object or selected objects for the active
schematic or symbol. If you do not select any objects, the list contains all the
objects in the active window.
offsheet Add offsheet connector.
onsheet Add onsheet connector.
oroute Changes the routing mode to full orthogonal routing. Executing this command
changes the routing mode specified in the DxDesigner.xml file to orthogonal
routing.
out Zooms out on the design.

Table 3-18. P - Command Line Commands

Command Description
pdbslot Applicable in types only:
A dialog box appears to allow you to changes or update the slot of the selected
component or group of components to a specified slot of the package in the
Parts Database. The Slot dropdown list provides a list of available slots with
pin numbers.

placedetail Report on placeholders.

poff Turns off the display of pin numbers.
pon Turns on the display of pin numbers.

450 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-18. P - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
pop Returns back through the stack of previously issued psch, psym, and psheet
commands. The pop command will take a numerical argument specifying the
number of levels to pop. If no argument is specified, the value of 1 is assumed.
There is no need to select an object prior to issuing a pop command, as it will
use the stack to determine the results.
Special Condition:
When you open a sheet from a sheet node in the Navigator Tree, executing a
Pop command will always return you to sheet 1. This is true for all sheets,
including sheet 1.
Why:
Navigator opens the design root, and then pushes to the desired sheet
Workaround:
Open the schematic from the File > Open menu item, or from a design root in
the Navigator Tree.
For more information, see the following:
“Navigating With the Toolbar and Popup Menus” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
power Add power connection.
psch Pushes through the hierarchy into a schematic block.
You must select the component before selecting the command to push down to
the corresponding schematic.
For more information, see the following:
“Navigating With the Toolbar and Popup Menus” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
psheet Pushes through sheets of a schematic or symbol set in sequential order, or
pushes to a specified sheet.
• To push through the sheets in sequential order, enter the psheet command
in the command line field and execute the command.
To push to a specified sheet, enter the psheet command with the sheet number
in the command line field and execute the command. For example, psheet 12.
Also see:
“Navigating With the Toolbar and Popup Menus” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
psym Pushes through the hierarchy into a symbol block.
You must select the component before selecting the command to push down to
the corresponding symbol.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 451

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-19. Q - Command Line Commands

Command Description
quit Quit PADS Designer.

Table 3-20. R - Command Line Commands

Command Description
read Refreshes memory with the active block. This affects only the open schematic
or symbol.
reflect Reflects the selected object(s) as a mirror image across a designated horizontal
or vertical line. You use the mouse to designate the line you want the object
reflected around.
The reflection line is snapped to the nearest orthogonal line and objects are
reflected about the line 180 degrees.
For more information, see the following:
“Changing Object Orientation” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
refresh Updates the data in the active window. Use this command if the visual display
of the data has been disrupted.
RenameNet Rename net.
roff Turns off the display of reference designators.
ron Turns on the display of reference designators.
rotate Rotates the selected object(s) to the left in 90-degree increments.
For more information, see the following:
“Changing Object Orientation” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
run Runs a script from the command line. Enter the run command followed by the
name of the script.

Table 3-21. S - Command Line Commands

Command Description
scale Scales the size of a selected object or group of objects up or down by the scale
factor you specify in the Scale dialog box.
Toolbar:
Menu: Format > Scale
For more information, see the following:
“Resizing Sheet Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

452 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-21. S - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
schematic Opens a new or existing schematic window for the creation and editing of
schematics and symbols.
scomp Selects the component by a specified symbol name.
sdistance Selects the distance, in screen pixels, surrounding an object that the cursor
must be placed within to select an object in a schematic or symbol window.
setenv Set environment variable.
sicdb Select iCDB index.
seticdbstore Set iCDB store retries.
retries
size Changes text, properties, or labels to a specified size in the schematic or
symbol window.
slabel Selects the specified labels in a schematic or symbol window.
slot Applicable in type only:
Changes or updates the slot of the selected component or group of components
to a specified slot of the package.
sname Selects objects (such as components, nets, pins, and buses) in a schematic or
symbol window by specifying either the Internal name(s) or label(s).
snap Snaps objects in the open schematic to the grid you have enabled and defined
in the Settings dialog box (choose Setup > Settings menu item, Grid section).
See “Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom” on page 352.
The Snap command takes one parameter, which you specify as “all” or
“selected”, to indicate the scope of the command. For this command to be
active, grid must be selected, and a grid spacing must be defined.
Example:
snap selected
snaps selected objects to the grid you have defined.
soff Turns off the Snap to Pin option.
son Turns on the Snap to Pin option.
sroute Changes the routing mode to straight routing.
stext Selects the specified text string in a schematic or symbol window.
You can use wildcard characters when specifying the text string.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 453

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-21. S - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
stretch Stretches the selected object in any direction. Stretchable objects are: Lines,
Boxes, Circles, Arcs, and Pins.
For more information, see the following:
“Resizing Schematic Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
string Changes the name of selected string. This command will change the name of
any selected label, attribute, name, or text string.
stub Add net stubs and optional labels to selected components.
Syntax:
stub Parameter
Where:
• Parameter = No - if you do not want to label the stubs.
• Parameter = Label - if you want to add labels to the stubs. These labels
take the names of the associated symbol pins.
svalue Selects the objects associated with the specified attribute value(s), as well as
the associated objects (such as, components, nets, pins, or buses) in a
schematic or symbol window.
system Open a system window.

Table 3-22. T - Command Line Commands

Command Description
text Adds text in the active schematic or symbol window.
Annotations can be inserted anywhere in a symbol or schematic drawing. Text
within a schematic or symbol drawing has no association with the graphical or
connectivity data.
For more information, see the following:
“Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
toff Turns off the visibility of text in a schematic. Default: on.
ton Turns on the visibility of text in a schematic. Default: on.

Table 3-23. U - Command Line Commands

Command Description
ubat Update the default values for properties assigned to the border for the open
schematic.

454 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-23. U - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
undo Reverses changes you make in a symbol or schematic drawing, such as
stretching or moving an object.
uoff Turns off the creation of unique labels from internal names when components,
nets, buses, or pins are copied, arrayed, or pasted from the buffer.
uon Turns on the creation of unique labels from internal names when components,
nets, buses, or pins are copied, arrayed, or pasted from the buffer.

Table 3-24. V - Command Line Commands

Command Description
value Changes the value portion of the selected attribute(s) to the specified value.
voff Turns off the display of simulation values.
von Turns on the display of simulation values.

Table 3-25. W - Command Line Commands

Command Description
wclose Closes the active symbol or schematic drawing. If you made changes to the
document since it was last saved, you are asked if you want to save the
changes. If you close a document without saving, you lose all unsaved
changes.
wtext Open text file.

Table 3-26. Z - Command Line Commands

Command Description
zoom Zoomed in on a specified area of the window.
Also see “Panning and Zooming Default-Style” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
zselect Zooms in on the selected area of the window.
Tip: If you want to zoom in more tightly than the default, you set the
VL_FULL_ZOOM environment variable, using the syntax
VL_FuLL_ZOOM=1. If you do not set this environment variable, you will zoom
in at a medium distance from the selected area.
Also see “Panning and Zooming Default-Style” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 455

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 3-26. Z - Command Line Commands (cont.)

Command Description
zsize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to a custom
size. When you execute this command, you specify the custom sheet size.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.
Rule: Execute the zsize command in one of the following ways:
• Press the Tab key immediately after entering each of the Width and Height
values and then press Enter.
• When you have entered the values, do not press Enter. Instead, click OK.
• Use the following syntax in the Command Line box:
zsize width height

456 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 4
Property Characteristics

You use properties to create information that the design tool interprets when it packages the
design, creates a netlist, verifies the design, or forward annotates to layout.
You can add properties to:
• Bus or net segments • Schematics (unattached)
• Components • Symbol pins
• Component pins • Symbols (unattached)

Note
You cannot place user-defined properties on boxes, lines, arcs or circles.

You use the Property Definition Editor tool to define or edit user-defined properties in the
PADS Designer tool. Property definitions establish data type and syntax rules associated with
each property value, such as maximum length and allowable characters.

There are two property definition files, one for each project type.

• Integrated - uses the centlib.prp file.

• Netlist- uses the netlist.prp file (not available in the Solid Edge PCB Design release)
For more information on the different project types, refer to “Project Templates” in the
PADS Designer User’s Guide.

The design tool predefines several properties. For information on a specific predefined property,
refer to the Properties Glossary.

Property Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Visibility Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Property Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Property Name and Value Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Property Definitions in a Netlist Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Netlist Interpretation of Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
User-Defined Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Multiple and Duplicate Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Multiple Property Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 457

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Hierarchy

Property Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Property Hierarchy
The library tool supports a multi-level property hierarchy that enables the librarian to assign a
property, and optionally a property value, to a local symbol, a library object in the central
library or a symbol file associated with a distributed library where it is most meaningful.
Likewise, the design entry tool supports a multi-level property hierarchy that enables you to
assign a property, and optionally a property value, to a design object in the design at different
levels depending on whether you require property variations across replicated blocks.
Properties may be defined at multiple levels as shown in the following figures.

Figure 4-1. Integrated Project Property Hierarchy

Figure 4-2. Netlist Project Property Hierarchy

458 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Property Characteristics
Property Hierarchy

Table 4-1. Project Property Levels

Level Description
Instance Instance-level property assignments are stored in the design with a
hierarchical path to the assigned object. You add, edit, or delete instance-
level property assignments with the design entry tool.
You can promote a block-level value to the instance-level.
You can restore a block-level or part-level value, by deleting the instance-
level value.
The Packager or cross reference tools use the instance property.
The Packager tool assigns Ref Designator property and Part Name
property values to the instance level after a packaging operation.
Block Block-level property assignments are stored in the design. You add, edit,
or delete block-level property assignments with the design entry tool. You
can also assign block-level properties with the Search window.
The property definition may be specified to be placed on a symbol
automatically when the symbol is added to the design.
Part (Integrated projects only) You assign part-level properties with the Part
Editor tool. Part-level properties are stored in the central library.
Symbol You assign symbol-level properties to a symbol or a symbol pin with the
Symbol Editor. The symbol-level properties of a local symbol are stored in
the design. The symbol-level properties of a library local symbol are
stored in the central library with an integrated project or the symbol file
with a netlist project.

For information about property definitions, see “System and User-Defined Property Definition”
and the “Property Definition Editor Dialog Box” in the PADS Library Tools User’s Guide.

If the same property exists at multiple levels in the property hierarchy, then precedence rules
determine what property value the design entry tool uses. Table 4-2 shows the property
precedence rules.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 459

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Hierarchy

Table 4-2. Property Precedence Rules

Precedence Level Description
1 Instance Instance level properties override block, part, and symbol
level properties.
If the property definition is specified to be overridable, then
the property may be removed or the property value may be
edited on a symbol, symbol pin, or net placed on a
schematic or an Interconnectivity Table (ICT).
If the property definition is specified to allow multiple
instances, then instance level values can vary across
instances of a symbol, symbol pin, or net placed on a
schematic or an Interconnectivity Table (ICT).
You can globally add or replace instance level values with
the property values defined at the part level by specifying the
packager tool option “Update PDB properties on the
Schematic”. See “Packager Dialog Box” on page 257.
2 Block A block level property value overrides a part level or a
symbol level property.
If the property definition is specified to be overridable, then
the property may be removed or the property value may be
edited on a symbol, symbol pin, or net placed on a sheet.
3 Part (Integrated projects only) A part level property value
overrides a symbol level property.
4 Symbol Symbol level properties have the lowest precedence level.

For example, a librarian defines a Cost property on a part in the central library, specifies to place
the property on a schematic automatically when the schematic designer places the part symbol,
and specifies the property value as “1.25”. Next, you place the part symbol on a sheet. At this
point the tool adds the Cost property value of “1.25” at the block level. Later, you, change the
Cost property value to “1.33” on the sheet. The “1.33” value replaces the “1.25” value at the
block level because the new value exists in the context of a schematic block. The original “1.25”
value is retained at the part level.

If properties of central library change after a symbol or part is added to a design, then you can
resynchronize the schematic design by running the packager tool with the “Update PDB
Properties on the Schematic” option selected. See “Packaging a Design” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

For an example of varying instance values across reused schematic blocks, see “Design
Structure” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

460 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Property Characteristics
Visibility Options

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Visibility Options
Visibility options for properties are controlled by check boxes in the Properties window.
You can make properties visible or invisible at the symbol and/or schematic level. If you are in
a symbol window and properties are visible, they are also visible on the schematic window. If
you specify properties visible on the symbol, you cannot make them invisible on the schematic.

Having the properties set as visible while you are placing them on the symbol is helpful.
However, as a general rule you should change the display of the property to invisible after you
have placed them on the schematic so they do not clutter the schematic drawing.

Note
Making a property invisible does not delete the property. It only helps to reduce the clutter
from the schematic display.

If you want the Ref Designator (REFDES) property to be invisible on the schematic, deselect
the Ref Designator check box (one for the property name and one for the property value) in the
Properties window.

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Property Format
The format for properties is: NAME = VALUE You must specify the property name exactly as
you want the netlist to interpret it. For example, to associate reference designator information
with a symbol, add an property, such as REFDES=U?. REFDES is the property name and U? is
the property value.
There are several ways to define an property value:

• Explicit value - the value is constant (exactly as you enter it)

• Multiple value - the value represents multiple properties
• Variable value - the value changes
• Expression value - the value is dependent on characteristics of the design

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 461

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Name and Value Restrictions

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Property Name and Value Restrictions

Do not create property names beginning with $ or *, since the design entry tool reserves names
beginning with $, and since * is the wildcard character. Also avoid using % and ? in property
values.
Do not use mathematical characters such as /, *, -, or +, in property values (except when
specifying variable definitions for parameterized properties). You must enter the property
NAME in upper case. Under certain conditions, you can enter the property value in upper, lower
or mixed case. However, you must remember that third party tools which use the
PADS Designer netlists do not all support mixed case property values. These tools may require
upper case values. Check with your tool provider to confirm whether you can use mixed case
with the tool.

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Property Definitions in a Netlist Project

In a netlist project, user-defined properties add custom information to symbols.
Use the Property Definition Editor to:

• Define the format of available properties

• Define new properties
• Define property types and their associated syntax
• Change certain aspects of predefined system properties
Property values are not defined in the Property Definition Editor. The data objects of a
schematic store the property values.

Note
You cannot delete system properties. Simulation tools do not use user-defined properties.

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a User-Defined Property for a Netlist Project [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

462 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Property Characteristics
Netlist Interpretation of Properties

Netlist Interpretation of Properties

The design entry tool has a flexible scheme that allows an unrestricted number of properties.
Netlisting interprets almost all properties, with each layout tool looking for a particular set of
properties.
Either flattened or hierarchical, netlists interpret explicit and multiple property values. Only
flattened netlists interpret variable and expression property values.

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

User-Defined Properties
You can create any property to define unique information about your design such as optional
labels or part numbers used in the design.
The PADS Designer tool cannot interpret user-defined properties. The netlist process lists the
properties in the netlist file if you add them before the netlist is executed. You can interpret
user-defined properties for application specific functions using scripting or the PADS Designer
utilities.

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Multiple and Duplicate Properties

Most objects can have multiple properties (properties with different names) associated with
them. Duplicate properties on a single object, properties with the same name, usually have
different values.
The design entry tool allows the following objects to have multiple properties (properties with
the different names) on a single object. Duplicate properties (properties with identical names)
on a single object usually have different values.

The design entry tool allows duplicate properties as outlined below:

Table 4-3. Legal Duplicate Properties
Object Duplicate
Symbol Unrestricted duplicates (if you name symbols, every named symbol must
have a unique name)
Schematics No duplicates

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 463

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Multiple Property Values

Table 4-3. Legal Duplicate Properties (cont.)

Object Duplicate
Components No duplicates (except SIGNAL, PROBE, EQUATE, and PINSWAP
properties)*
Pins No duplicates
Net/bus segments No duplicates (except PROBE property)*
* Duplicate properties must be enabled in the configuration file if you wish to run the PCB
Integration program. Refer to the PCB Integration Help for more information.

Most symbol properties are not accessible from the component level. You can add identical
properties to the component and change the property value on the component to override the
property value on the symbol. See “Multiple Property Values” on page 464.

Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Multiple Property Values

The format for multiple property values is: name = value,value,value
Separate multiple property values with commas or colons. For example, #=[a,b,c,d] or
TPHL=10:17:25.

Related Topics
Property Characteristics
Multiple and Duplicate Properties
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Property Ranges
A property value can express a numerical range for a bus or a pin by specifying beginning,
ending, and incremental integer values. The design entry tool expands an property value with a
range to create a series of properties.
The format for property value ranges is:

NAME[F:L:I]

where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the numbers in the
range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.

464 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Property Characteristics
Property Ranges

Separate the numbers with colons. You must enclose the range in brackets, and you can only
express the range in numeric characteristics.

Given the values shown in the following table:

Table 4-4. Property Ranges Example
This Range... Becomes Properties...
#=[1:4] #=1, #=2, #=3, and #=4
#=[1:20:2] #=1, #=3, #=5, #=7, #=9, #=11, #=13, #=15, #=17, #=19
#=A[1:3],#=B[1:3],#=C[1:3] #=A1, #=A2, #=A3, #=B1, #=B2, #=B3,
#=C1, #=C2, and #=C3

In PCB design, multiple values of the property #=1,4,8,12, when attached to a symbol pin and
used in conjunction with a PARTS=4 property, indicate that this pin represents:

• pin 1 of the first part of the package

• pin 4 of the second part of the package
• pin 8 of the third part of the package
• pin 12 of the fourth part of the package
Related Topics
Property Characteristics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 465

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Ranges

466 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 5
Names

A name is a string of characters you apply to sheet objects.

You can apply the same name to more than one net. Using the same name for more than one net
establishes connectivity between those nets.

You can apply the same name to more than one bus.

You must name all pins on a block and you must name the ports of the underlying schematic to
correspond to the pins. The design entry tool uses these name matches to maintain connectivity
between a symbol and the underlying schematic.

You do not have to name symbols, but if you do, the name for each symbol must be unique to
avoid packager errors. You should not name module symbols, although naming composite
symbols (blocks) can make the design easier to read. You will receive packager errors if more
than one symbol has the same name. For more information on local symbols and their types,
refer to “Creating and Editing a Local Symbol” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Illegal Characters in Name Identifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Unnamed Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Name Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Compound Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Unique Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Pin Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Bus Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Illegal Characters in Name Identifiers

This topic identifies illegal characters in schematic block names, schematic names, sheet names,
and net names.

Block and Schematic Names

It is recommended that you name blocks and schematics using the file and folder naming
convention allowed by Windows. A good convention is to use names comprised of numerals (0-
9), lowercase letters (a-z), uppercase letters (A-Z), or underscore (_).

Netlist type projects may use a dollar sign ($) in a block or schematic name.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 467

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Unnamed Objects

Illegal characters in a block name or a schematic name include the following:

/ \ | * , @ # % ^ & < > ' " ( ) = ? : . <space>

On Windows platforms, block names and schematic names cannot be the same as names
reserved by Windows such as: COM(0-9), LPT(1-9), CON, PRN, AUX, NUL, and CLOCK$.

Note
You can detect if a block/symbol name has an invalid name format with the Verify tool,
Rule ID drc-004. See “Migration Rules Group” on page 496.

Sheet Names
It is recommended that you specify sheet names comprised of numerals (0-9), lowercase letters
(a-z), uppercase letters (A-Z), or underscore (_). Illegal characters in a sheet name include the
following:

* , @ # $ % ^ & < > ' ( ) = ? . <space>

Net Names
Name strings used for net names can consist of any characters (including spaces).

Illegal characters in a net name include the following:

@ $ ' " \ ; < > { } *

Net names cannot begin with a double forward slash (//).

Related Topics
Names

Unnamed Objects
Unnamed Objects are nets, buses, or symbols to which you have not applied a name. Whether or
not you name them, the design entry tool automatically assigns a unique internal ID to each
object. All internal IDs begin with $ (for example, $1N12). If you name an object and set the
name to visible, the design entry tool displays the name.
If you copy a net, bus, or symbol, the name you applied to the original is also assigned to the
copy, but the design entry tool automatically changes the internal ID to keep it unique.

Pin names are defined by the central library symbol and you cannot change them in the design
entry tool.

468 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Names
Name Ranges

Related Topics
Names

Name Ranges
Names can express a numerical range for a bus or a pin by specifying beginning, ending, and
incremental integer values. The design entry tool expands names with a range to create a series
of names.
The format for name ranges is:

• NAME[F:L:I]
where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the
numbers in the range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.
The following shows legal range formats:

• out.[1:5] - creates out.1, out.2, out.3, out.4, and out.5

• a[10:3:2] - creates a10, a8, a6, a4
• a[1:2]b[2:1] - creates a1b2, a1b1, a2b2, a2b1
A radix qualifier may follow the range specification to indicate a binary, hexadecimal, or octal
specification. Separate the qualifier from the range specification with a slash.

• The name identifier A[8:C/H] is equivalent to A8, A9, AA, AB, and AC.
You can specify a bus range only with numeric characters. For example, data[b7:b0] is not a
valid format. If the bus range you want to label is decimal (for example, 7:0), use the format
data[7:0].

Related Topics
Names

Compound Names
Use compound names or bundles to label busses or pins that are not expressible as a single
range. You form a compound name with several name identifiers (with or without ranges). You
separate the names using commas. The system expands compound name identifiers separately
from left to right.
To enter a compound name, use the following format:

• NAME[F:L:I], NAME,NAME[F:L],...

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 469

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Unique Names

where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the
numbers in the range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.
o A[0:3],B,D[1:4] - is equivalent to A0,A1,A2,A3,B,D1,D2,D3,D4
o A[2:1],B[3:0],C - is equivalent to A2,A1,B3,B2,B1,B0,C
Related Topics
Names

Unique Names
The design entry tool creates different types of names when components, nets, busses, or pins
are copied, arrayed, or pasted from the buffer.
Related Topics
Names

Pin Names
You specify pin names and ranges (width) with name identifiers. Pin names establish and
maintain connectivity between components. The pin range of a multi-bit pin must be identical to
the range of a connecting bus.
The exception to this is when the component has the $ARRAY property. All pins on a symbol
must have a label for identification during any netlisting process. For symbols that do not
normally have labels, such as resistors and capacitors, make the labels invisible.

Related Topics
Names

Bus Names
Bus names specify the nets contained in the bus. The names of the nets connected to the bus can
either correspond to the bus name or the nets can be aliased to different names.
Note
The Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter (choose Setup > Settings menu item,
Project category, Net Name Delimiter subcategory) enables you to control how net names
are resolved into elements of buses. See “Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter” on
page 338.

470 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Names
Bus Names

Related Topics
Naming Connectivity Objects [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Bus Contents File Format
Names

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 471

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Bus Names

472 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 6
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference

The topics in this section provide reference information for some of the design entry tool
diagnostic tools.
Diagnostics Tool Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
DRC Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Interconnectivity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Migration Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Connectivity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Electrical Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Hierarchy Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Integrity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Power & Ground Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Device Specific Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
HDL Checks Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Links Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Diagnostics Tool Tests

You can run the Tools > Diagnostics tool to check for design data integrity.
This table shows the tests that the Diagnostics tool executes.
Table 6-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests
Checks for Description
Symbol types Verifies that symbols are either of type pin or type port, but not both.
Message:
Invalid symbol definition type <name>.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 473

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests

Table 6-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests (cont.)

Checks for Description
Invalid nets Verifies that each sheet-level net is part of a logical net. (Logical nets
constitute the connectivity and the design entry tool displays them in
Navigator).
Messages:
Invalid unconnected net found …
Invalid net found …
Invalid buses Verifies that all buses in the project include graphical data.
Message:
Invalid bus found …
Sheet order data Verifies that custom sheet order values, if specified, are not corrupt.
Corrupt sheet order values could result in incorrect PDF Writer output.
Message:
Inconsistent sheet ordering data for <name> schematic.
Sheet internal Validates internal properties that store sheet IDs.
identifiers Message:
Sheet <name> has a missing identifier which is needed to generate
object IDs.
Component graphical Verifies that all components have graphical data. You can create
data logical-only components that do not contain graphical data in
Constraint Manager or PADS Layout, but these logical-only
components must not exist on the schematic.
Message:
Components <name> without graphical data found on schematic
<name> and need to be deleted.
Net connections Verifies that the project does not include nets connected to non-existent
pins.
Message:
Net <name> connected to a non-existent pin.
Rippers Verifies bus ripper data consistency.
For example, the signals listed on an internal property as being
connected with a bus may be inconsistent with actual signals present in
the bus.
Messages:
Ripper refers to non-existent bus, and should be deleted.
Ripper refers to a signal which is not a member of the bus, the signal
reference should be deleted from the ripper.

474 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests

Table 6-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests (cont.)

Checks for Description
Managed blocks Verifies that the managed blocks instantiated in the design are marked
as read-only.
Message:
Missing read-only flag for block <name>.
Empty blocks Checks if there are any empty blocks present. If a block (such as a
schematic or an ICT) present in the Integrated Common Database
(iCDB) does not have any data, you cannot open the block from the
Navigator. You can safely delete the empty blocks, because they do not
impact connectivity in any way and do not contain any data.
Message:
Empty invalid block <name> found and needs to be deleted.
Top level name Verifies that the name of the top level block stored in the project file
consistency uses the same case as the name in the database.
Message:
Block names differ: <name1> in database, <name2> in project file.
Duplicate internal IDs Verifies that PADS Designer symbols pins have unique IDs.
Message:
Symbol <name> has pins with duplicate IDs needed for Backup/
Rollback.
Bus signal Verifies that no shorts exist due to incorrect naming of rippers.
connections Message:
Invalid connection of <net_name1> to <net_name2> on schematic
<sch_name>.
Component names Verifies that no component name contains the invalid '$' character. The
fix removes '$' characters from names.
Message:
Invalid Component Name(s) <name1>, <name2>, … on schematic
<sch_name>.
Pass-through pins Verifies connectivity of component pass-through pins:
• Pins correctly connect to one logic net.
• Connections to the master pin (with flag ForwardPCB) do not
repeat.
Message:
Incorrect connection of pass-through pin … to net … on schematic …

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 475

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests

Table 6-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests (cont.)

Checks for Description
Empty labels Verifies that no labels contain an empty string. You must either remove
the empty-string label, or add a valid string to the label.
Message:
Elements with empty label on schematic <schematic.sheet>
Connectivity Verifies that schematic sheet graphical data is synchronized with
logical data. The fix recompiles schematic graphical data to
synchronize with the logical data.
Message:
Connectivity not up to date with schematic sheet.
Attributes (properties) Verifies that there are no duplicated properties on an object. An object
should not contain more than one property with the same name and
same value.
Message:
<schematic> has components with duplicated attributes (properties)
Sheet name Verifies that there are no illegal characters in the sheet name. Illegal
characters include: . * , @ # $ % ^ & < > \ ( ) = ?
Message:
Sheet <OldSheetName> has incorrect name. Name shall be changed to
<NewSheetName>.

Related Topics
Checking Data Integrity With the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting Reported Errors [PADS
Schematic Design User's Guide]

476 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Groups

DRC Groups
The topics in this section provide reference information for the Design Rule Checker (DRC)
Verify tool rule groups.
See “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Interconnectivity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Migration Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Connectivity Rules Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Electrical Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Hierarchy Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Integrity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Power & Ground Rules Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Device Specific Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
HDL Checks Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Links Rules Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Interconnectivity Rules Group

Scope: PADS Designer and Xpedition System Designer
The Interconnectivity rules group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Interconnectivity
category) enables you to configure design rule checks for net interconnectivity between pins
based on pin type.

Interconnect Compatibility Checks

In the Interconnectivity pane, you specify compatibility checking between two specific pin
types by clicking on the icon at the intersection of the two pin types to toggle between four
different check options. The check option you assign determines how the Design Rule Checker
(DRC) Verify tool reports connections between those two object types. See “Verify Dialog Box
- Interconnectivity Pane” on page 422 for more information about the four checking options.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 477

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Figure 6-1. Interconnectivity Pane - PADS Designer

Table 6-2 below lists each Interconnectivity Group rule description and the output message if
the rule is violated. References to specific design objects are appear as variables in the table, for
example: <schematicname>. See “Design Object References in Messages” on page 494 for
more information.
Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Output Description: Checks for unconnected Output pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-OUT - [schematic:<schematicname>, component:
<refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] OUT pin is
not connected
Row: Output Description: Checks Output - Output interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-OUT - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] OUT pin
connected to OUT pin

478 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Input Description: Checks for unconnected Input pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-IN - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:
<referencedesignator>(<componentid>), pin: IN] IN pin is not
connected
Row: Input Description: Checks Output - Input interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-IN - [flatnet : <componentid>, component:
<referencedesignator>(<componentid>), pin: OUT] OUT pin
connected to IN pin
Row: Input Description: Checks Input - Input interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-IN - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<referencedesignator>(<componentid>), pin: IN] IN pin connected
to IN pin
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks unconnected Bi-directional pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-BI - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <flatnetname>] BI pin is not connected
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Output - Bi-directional interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-BI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to BI pin
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Input - Bi-directional interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-BI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>,
pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to BI pin
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Bi-directional - Bi-directional
Column: Bi-directional interconnectivity
Message:
drc-BI-BI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>,
pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to BI pin

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 479

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks for unconnected Tri-state pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-TRI - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:
<referencedesignator>(<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] TRI pin
is not connected
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks Output - Tri-state interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<referencedesignator>(<componentid>), pin:<pinname>] OUT
pin connected to TRI pin
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks Input - Tri-state interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<referencedesignator>(<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] IN pin
connected to TRI pin
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks Bi-directional - Tri-state interconnectivity
Column: Bi-directional Message:
drc-BI-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to TRI pin
Row: Tri-state Description: Check Tri-state - Tri-state interconnectivity
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-TRI-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<referencedesignator>(<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] TRI pin
connected to TRI pin
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks for unconnected OpenCollector pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-OCL - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin is not connected
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks Output - OpenCollector interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to OCL pin

480 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks Input - OpenCollector interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to OCL pin
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks Bi-directional - OpenCollector
Column: Bi-directional interconnectivity
Message:
drc-BI-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to OCL pin
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks Tri-state - OpenCollector interconnectivity
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-TRI-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentname>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to OCL
pin
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks OpenCollector - OpenCollector
Column: OpenCollector interconnectivity
Message:
drc-OCL-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to OCL pin
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks for unconnected OpenEmitter pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-OEM - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin is not connected
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks Output - OpenEmitter interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to OEM pin
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks Input - OpenEmitter interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to OEM pin
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks Bi-directional - OpenEmitter interconnectivity
Column: Bi-directional Message:
drc-BI-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to OEM pin

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 481

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks Tri-state - OpenEmitter interconnectivity
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-TRI-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to OEM pin
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks OpenCollector - OpenEmitter
Column: OpenCollector interconnectivity
Message:
drc-OCL-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to OEM pin
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks OpenEmitter - OpenEmitter interconnectivity
Column: OpenEmitter Message:
drc-OEM-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to OEM
pin
Row: Analog Description: Checks for unconnected Analog pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-ANALOG - [schematic: <schematicname>,
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Analog pin is not
connected
Row: Analog Description: Checks Output - Analog interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to Analog
pin
Row: Analog Description: Checks Input - Analog interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to Analog pin
Row: Analog Description: Checks Bi-directional - Analog interconnectivity
Column: Bi-directional Message:
drc-BI-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to Analog pin

482 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Analog Description: Checks Tri-state - Analog interconnectivity
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-TRI-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to Analog
pin
Row: Analog Description: Checks OpenCollector - Analog interconnectivity
Column: OpenCollector Message:
drc-OCL-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to Analog
pin
Row: Analog Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Analog interconnectivity
Column: OpenEmitter Message:
drc-OEM-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to Analog
pin
Row: Analog Description: Checks Analog - Analog interconnectivity
Column: Analog Message:
drc-ANALOG-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>,
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Analog pin
connected to Analog pin
Row: Power Description: Checks for unconnected Power pin
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-POWER - [schematic: <schematicname>,
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Power pin is not
connected
Row: Power Description: Checks Output - Power interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-POWER - [flatnet : <schematicname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to Power
pin
Row: Power Description: Checks Input - Power interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to Power pin

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 483

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Power Description: Checks Bi-directional - Power interconnectivity
Column: Bi-directional Message:
drc-BI-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to Power pin
Row: Power Description: Checks Tri-state - Power interconnectivity
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-TRI-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to Power pin
Row: Power Description: Checks OpenCollector - Power interconnectivity
Column: OpenCollector Message:
drc-OCL-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to Power
pin
Row: Power Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Power interconnectivity
Column: OpenEmitter Message:
drc-OEM-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to Power
pin
Row: Power Description: Checks Analog - Power interconnectivity
Column: Analog Message:
drc-ANALOG-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Analog pin connected to Power
pin
Row: Power Description: Checks Power - Power interconnectivity
Column: Power Message:
drc-POWER-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Power pin connected to Power
pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks for unconnected Ground pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-GROUND - [schematic: <schematicname>,
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Ground pin is not
connected

484 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Ground Description: Checks Output - Ground interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to Ground
pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks Input - Ground interconnectivity
Column: Input Message:
drc-IN-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to Ground pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks Bi-directional - Ground interconnectivity
Column: Bi-directional Message:
drc-BI-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to Ground pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks Tri-state - Ground interconnectivity
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-TRI-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to Ground
pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks OpenCollector - Ground interconnectivity
Column: OpenCollector Message:
drc-OCL-GROUND - [flatnet :<flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to Ground
pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Ground interconnectivity
Column: OpenEmitter Message:
drc-OEM-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to Ground
pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks Analog - Ground interconnectivity
Column: Analog Message:
drc-ANALOG-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>,
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Analog pin
connected to Ground pin

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 485

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message (cont.)

Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Ground Description: Checks Power - Ground interconnectivity
Column: Power Message:
drc-POWER-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Power pin connected to Ground
pin
Row: Ground Description: Checks Ground - Ground interconnectivity
Column: Ground Message:
drc-GROUND-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>,
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Ground pin
connected to Ground pin

Interconnect Compatibility Checks Via Serial

In the PADS Designer tool, the Interconnectivity pane displays serial checkbox options as
shown in Figure 6-1. If you check the serial checkbox at the intersection of two pin types, the
tool also verifies the validity of the connection between the two pin types of active components
when they are connected via a serial component like a capacitor or a resistor. For example, if
you configure the Verify tool to report an Information, Warning, or Error when there are cases
of interconnectivity between ground and open collector pins (Grid Intersection: Row=Ground /
Column=OpenCollector), you may also report the condition if a serial component connects the
pins (Grid Intersection: Row: OpenCollector / Column: Ground). Serial components are defined
in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. For more information, see “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)” on
page 38.

Table 6-3 below lists each Interconnectivity Group, Interconnected via Serial, rule description
and the message if the rule is violated. References to specific design objects appear as variables
in the table, for example: <schematicname>. See “Design Object References in Messages” on
page 494 for more information.
Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -
Description and Message
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Output Description: Checks Output - Input interconnectivity via serial
Column: Input Message:
drc-OUT-IN - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to IN pin
(via serial component)

486 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Output Description: Checks Bi-directional - Output interconnectivity via
Column: Bi-directional serial
Message:
drc-OUT-BI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to BI pin
(via serial component)
Row: Output Description: Checks Tri-state - Output interconnectivity via serial
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-OUT-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to TRI pin
(via serial component)
Row: Output Description: Checks OpenCollector - Output interconnectivity via
Column: OpenCollector serial
Message:
drc-OUT-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to OCL
pin (via serial component)
Row: Output Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Output interconnectivity via
Column: OpenEmitter serial
Message:
drc-OUT-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to OEM
pin (via serial component)
Row: Output Description: Checks Analog - Output interconnectivity via serial
Column: Analog Message:
drc-OUT-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to Analog
pin (via serial component)
Row: Output Description: Checks Power - Output interconnectivity via serial
Column: Power Message:
drc-OUT-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to Power
pin (via serial component)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 487

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Output Description: Checks Ground - Output interconnectivity via serial
Column: Ground Message:
drc-OUT-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to Ground
pin (via serial component)
Row: Output Description: Checks Output - Output interconnectivity via serial
Column: Via Serial Message:
drc-OUT-OUT - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to OUT
pin (via serial component)
Row: Input Description: Checks Bi-directional - Input interconnectivity via
Column: Bi-directional serial
Message:
drc-IN-BI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to BI pin (via
serial component)
Row: Input Description: Checks Tri-state - Input interconnectivity via serial
Column: Tri-state Message:
drc-IN-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to TRI pin
(via serial component)
Row: Input Description: Checks OpenCollector - Input interconnectivity via
Column: OpenCollector serial
Message:
drc-IN-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to OCL pin
(via serial component)
Row: Input Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Input interconnectivity via
Column: OpenEmitter serial
Message:
drc-IN-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to OEM pin
(via serial component)

488 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Input Description: Checks Analog - Input interconnectivity via serial
Column: Analog Message:
drc-IN-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to ANALOG
pin (via serial component)
Row: Input Description: Checks Power - Input interconnectivity via serial
Column: Power Message:
drc-IN-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to POWER
pin (via serial component)
Row: Input Description: Checks Ground - Input interconnectivity via serial
Column: Ground Message:
drc-IN-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to GROUND
pin (via serial component)
Row: Input Description: Checks Input - Input interconnectivity via serial
Column: Via Serial Message:
drc-IN-IN - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] IN pin connected to IN pin (via
serial component)
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Tri-state - Bi-directional interconnectivity via
Column: Tri-state serial
Message:
drc-BI-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to TRI pin
(via serial component)
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks OpenCollector - Bi-directional
Column: OpenCollector interconnectivity via serial
Message:
drc-BI-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to OCL pin
(via serial component)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 489

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Bi-directional
Column: OpenEmitter interconnectivity via serial
Message:
drc-BI-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to OEM pin
(via serial component)
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Analog - Bi-directional interconnectivity via
Column: Analog serial
Message:
drc-BI-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to Analog pin
(via serial component)
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Power - Bi-directional interconnectivity via
Column: Power serial
Message:
drc-BI-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to Power pin
(via serial component)
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Ground - Bi-directional interconnectivity via
Column: Ground serial
Message:
drc-BI-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to Ground
pin (via serial component)
Row: Bi-directional Description: Checks Bidirectional - Bi-directional
Column: Via Serial interconnectivity via serial
Message:
drc-BI-BI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>,
pin: <pinname>] BI pin connected to BI pin (via serial
component)
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks OpenCollector - Tri-state interconnectivity
Column: OpenCollector via serial
Message:
drc-TRI-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to OCL pin
(via serial component)

490 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Tri-state interconnectivity via
Column: OpenEmitter serial
Message:
drc-TRI-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to OEM pin
(via serial component)
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks Analog - Tri-state interconnectivity via serial
Column: Analog Message:
drc-TRI-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to Analog
pin (via serial component)
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks Power - Tri-state interconnectivity via serial
Column: Power Message:
drc-TRI-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to Power
pin (via serial component)
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks Ground - Tri-state interconnectivity via serial
Column: Ground Message:
drc-TRI-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to Ground
pin (via serial component)
Row: Tri-state Description: Checks Tri-state - Tri-state interconnectivity via
Column: Via Serial serial
Message:
drc-TRI-TRI - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] TRI pin connected to TRI pin
(via serial component)
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks OpenEmitter - Open collector
Column: OpenEmitter interconnectivity via serial
Message:
drc-OCL-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to OEM
pin (via serial component)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 491

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks Analog - OpenCollector interconnectivity via
Column: Analog serial
Message:
drc-OCL-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to Analog
pin (via serial component)
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks Power - OpenCollector interconnectivity via
Column: Power serial
Message:
drc-OCL-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to Power
pin (via serial component)
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks Ground - OpenCollector interconnectivity via
Column: Ground serial
Message:
drc-OCL-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to Ground
pin (via serial component)
Row: OpenCollector Description: Checks OpenCollector - OpenCollector
Column: Via Serial interconnectivity via serial
Message:
drc-OCL-OCL - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OCL pin connected to OCL
pin (via serial component)
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks Analog - OpenEmitter interconnectivity via
Column: Analog serial
Message:
drc-OEM-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to Analog
pin (via serial component)
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks Power - OpenEmitter interconnectivity via
Column: Power serial
Message:
drc-OEM-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to Power
pin (via serial component)

492 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks Ground - OpenEmitter interconnectivity via
Column: Ground serial
Message:
drc-OEM-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to Ground
pin (via serial component)
Row: OpenEmitter Description: Checks OpenEmitter - OpenEmitter interconnectivity
Column: Via Serial via serial
Message:
drc-OEM-OEM - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OEM pin connected to OEM
pin (via serial component)
Row: Analog Description: Checks Power - Analog interconnectivity via serial
Column: Power Message:
drc-ANALOG-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname> component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Analog pin connected to
Power pin (via serial component)
Row: Analog Description: Checks Ground - Analog interconnectivity via serial
Column: Ground Message:
drc-ANALOG-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Analog pin
connected to Ground pin (via serial component)
Row: Analog Description: Checks Analog - Analog interconnectivity via serial
Column: Via Serial Message:
drc-ANALOG-ANALOG - [flatnet : <flatnetname>
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Analog pin
connected to Analog pin (via serial component)
Row: Power Description: Checks Ground - Power pin interconnectivity via
Column: Ground serial
Message:
drc-POWER-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Power pin connected to
Ground pin (via serial component)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 493

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -

Description and Message (cont.)
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Power Description: Checks Power - Power interconnectivity via serial
Column: Via Serial Message:
drc-POWER-POWER - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Power pin connected to Power
pin (via serial component)
Row: Ground Description: Checks Ground - Ground interconnectivity via serial
Column: Ground Message:
drc-GROUND-GROUND - [flatnet : <flatnetname>,
component:<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Ground pin
connected to Ground pin (via serial component)

Design Object References in Messages

If an interconnectivity rule is violated, a message appears in the DRC tab of the Output window
(View > Output menu item). Messages refer to design objects as follows:

• <bitnumber> — The bit number of a bus net. Bit numbers are ordered from left to right,
starting at 0, regardless of the index number. For example, the bit number of bus net
MyBus[0] of MyBus[31:0] is 32.
• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <busname> — The Name property value of a bus on a sheet.
• <busnet> — The name of a net that is a member of a bus.
• <buspinwidth> — The width of a bus pin as defined by the number of nets collected
into a bus pin.
• <buswidth> — The width of a bus as defined by the number of nets collected into a bus.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <drcnchkvalue> — The DRC_NCHK property value of a component pin.
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <fpgasignalname> — The FPGA Signal Name property value of an FPGA component
pin.
• <globalnetname> — The Name property value of a global net.
• <length> — Either the number of characters of a design object’s name or value or the
maximum number of characters criteria specified by a design rule.

494 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group

• <minimum> — The minimum number of design objects or circuit conditions required to

satisfy a design rule.
• <netalias> — The net alias of two connected nets with two different names.
• <netloadvalue> — The sum total of pin, port, and physical pin load values connected to
a net.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <objectcount> — The number of design objects found by the Verify tool.
• <partnumber> — The Part Number property value of a component.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <pindrivevalue> — The maximum pin drive capability of a component.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.
• <pinwidth> — The width of a component or block symbol bus pin.
• <portname> — The Name property value of a hierarchical pin (port) symbol of an
underlying schematic.
• <porttype> — The Pin Type property value of a hierarchical pin (port) symbol of an
underlying schematic.
• <powervalue> — The minimum or maximum power tolerance value of a component.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
• <propertyvalue> — The value of a property.
• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
• <voltagevalue> — The minimum or maximum voltage tolerance value of a component.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 495

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

Migration Rules Group

The Migration Rules Group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Migration category)
checks property, name, and label formats that result from migration from a third-party
schematic or a schematic created by a pre-iCDB version (v2007 or earlier) of the
PADS Designer tool. These design rule checks report design conditions that could affect PCB
layout or simulation results.
You should run the migration design rule checks immediately after a schematic migration. This
enables you to fix the issues in the original schematic and then migrate again. See “Design
Entry Tool Translators Introduction” in the
PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator User’s Guide.

Although called Migration Rules, this group of design rule checks also works on projects
created entirely in the iCDB version of the PADS Designer tool.

You use one of the following methods to fix a rule violation:

• Change the property value or property name to meet the criteria.

• Change the criteria or limit in the Values column of the Verify dialog box.
The migration design rule checks confirm that components and nets follow the property, name,
and label format rules that you enable.

drc-001 - Invalid Property Name Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

drc-002 - Invalid Net/Bus Name Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
drc-003 - Invalid Property Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
drc-004 - Invalid Symbol Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
drc-005 - Property Name Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
drc-006 - Property Value Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
drc-007 - Net Name Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
drc-008 - Symbol Name Exceeds Maximum Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
drc-009 - Non-Common Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

drc-001 - Invalid Property Name Format

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that Property names (formerly ATTRIBUTES) comply with the required syntax as
defined in 'Options: Legal characters'.

496 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

Options and Values

• Legal characters — Legal characters defined using Perl Compatible Regular
Expressions (PCRE).

Description
When you enable drc-001, the Verify tool reports each property name that does not use the legal
characters specified by the Legal characters option.

Note
The rules for attribute names in the pre-iCDB versions of the design entry tool are different
from the rules for property names in the iCDB versions of the design entry tool.

Message
drc-001 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>)] Property
<property> has invalid format

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

drc-002 - Invalid Net/Bus Name Format

Scope: PADS Designer
The translated Net/Bus Name does not comply with the format supported in the application.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 497

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

Options and Values

• Net legal characters — Legal characters defined using Perl Compatible Regular
Expressions (PCRE)
• Bus legal characters — Legal characters defined using Perl Compatible Regular
Expressions (PCRE)
• Include port labels — Check port labels using bus name legal syntax
See the PCRE official website (www.pcre.org).

Description
When you enable drc-002, the Verify tool reports net or bus names (previously called labels by
the pre-iCDB versions of the design entry tool) that do not use the legal characters specified by
the Net legal characters and Bus legal characters options. If the Include port labels option is
enabled, the tool reports port labels that do not use the legal characters specified for net and bus
names.

Message
drc-002 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Net name <netname> has invalid
format

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

drc-003 - Invalid Property Format

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the value of an ATTRIBUTE that was mapped to a Property matches the required
syntax for that property.

498 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

Options and Values

• Legal characters — Legal characters defined using Perl Compatible Regular
Expressions (PCRE).
See the PCRE official website (www.pcre.org).

Description
When you enable drc-003, the Verify tool reports each property name that does not use the legal
characters specified by the Legal characters option.

Message
drc-003 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] Property
<property> = has invalid value format

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

drc-004 - Invalid Symbol Name

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for valid symbol names on migrated designs to ensure they comply with the supported
syntax.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 499

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

Options and Values

• Instance component label legal characters — Legal characters defined using Perl
Compatible Regular Expressions (PCRE)
• Block component label legal characters — Legal characters defined using Perl
Compatible Regular Expressions (PCRE)
• Ignore port labels — Port labels may have bus name syntax and can be checked by drc-
002
See the PCRE official website (www.pcre.org).

Description
When you enable drc-004, the Verify tool reports each instance component label that does not
use the legal characters specified by the Instance component label legal characters option. The
tool reports each block component label that does not use the legal characters specified by the
Block component label legal characters option.

If you enable the Ignore port labels option, the tool does not report cases of port labels that
violate the legal characters specified for instance component or block component labels. You
can use drc-002 to report port labels that do not use legal characters.

Message
drc-004 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Label <componentid>
of component <symbolname> has invalid name format

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

500 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

drc-005 - Property Name Exceeds Maximum Length

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that a mapped ATTRIBUTE's name does not exceed the maximum value for Property
names.

Options and Values

• Max. number of characters — The maximum length of the property name.

Description
When you enable drc-005, the Verify tool reports each property name that exceeds the
maximum length specified by the “Max. number of characters” option.

Message
drc-005 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] Property
<property> name length <length> exceeds max value <length>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
• <length> — Either the number of characters of a design object’s name or value or the
maximum number of characters criteria specified by a design rule.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 501

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

drc-006 - Property Value Exceeds Maximum Length

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the length of the value field of a migrated property does not exceed the maximum
allowable length specified in the Property Definition file for that property.

Options and Values

• Max. number of characters — The maximum length of the property value.

Description
When you enable drc-006, the Verify tool reports each property value that exceeds the
maximum length specified by the Max. number of characters option.

Message
drc-006 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>)] Property
<property> = <propertyvalue> value <length> exceeds max value <length>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
• <propertyvalue> — The value of a property.
• <length> — Either the number of characters of a design object’s name or value or the
maximum number of characters criteria specified by a design rule.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

502 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

drc-007 - Net Name Exceeds Maximum Length

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the name of a migrated net does not exceed the maximum length supported by the
application.

Options and Values

• Max. number of characters — The maximum length of the net name.

Description
When you enable drc-007, the Verify tool reports each net name that exceeds the maximum
length specified by the Max. number of characters option.

Message
drc-007 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Net label <netname> value name
length <length> defined in exceeds max value <length>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <length> — Either the number of characters of a design object’s name or value or the
maximum number of characters criteria specified by a design rule.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

drc-008 - Symbol Name Exceeds Maximum Length

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the name of a migrated symbol does not exceed the maximum length supported by
the application.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 503

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

Options and Values

• Max. number of characters — The maximum length of the symbol name.

Description
When you enable drc-008, the Verify tool reports each symbol name (not the symbol file name)
thats exceed the maximum length specified by the Max. number of characters option.

Message
drc-008 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Label <componentid>
value name length <length> of component <symbolname> exceeds max value <length>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
• <length> — Either the number of characters of a design object’s name or value or the
maximum number of characters criteria specified by a design rule.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

drc-009 - Non-Common Property

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports non-common properties.

Description
When you enable drc-009, the Verify tool reports each symbol that uses a property that is not
common between the schematic and the central library property definition file (centlib.prp).
Examples of non-common properties that result from a migration include Height, Value, or
Description.

504 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group

Note
In the pre-iCDB versions of the design entry tool properties are upper-case (all caps). In the
iCDB versions of the design entry tool, properties may be leading cap or mixed-case.

Message
drc-009 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] A non-
common property: <property>

Where:

• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Property Characteristics
Design Entry Tool Translators Introduction [PADS Designer Symbol and Schematic Translator
User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 505

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Connectivity Rules Group

The Connectivity rules group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Connectivity category)
checks net connections that can cause functional problems, or damage components.
For example, it is a rule violation to have multiple output pins connected to a net. Rewiring a net
is often the way to correct a rule violation.

The connectivity rule checks use the Pin Type (Integrated) or PINTYPE (Netlist) properties that
you assign to pins. For more information, see “Pin Type (PINTYPE)” in the
PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.

drc-101 - Output and Bidirectional Pins Connected Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

drc-102 - Output and Tri-State Pins Connected Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
drc-103 - Un-Loaded Net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
drc-104 - Net Load Exceeds Max Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
drc-105 - Un-Driven Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
drc-106 - Multiple Output Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
drc-107 - Unconnected Pin(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
drc-108 - Hanging/Dangling Net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
drc-109 - Un-Used Bus Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
drc-110 - Net Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
drc-111 - Un-Driven Component Pins Connected Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
drc-112 - Input(s) or Bidirectional(s) Only Connected to Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
drc-113 - Inputs Only Connected to Connectors or To Another Component Input . . . 520
drc-114 - Two Pin Component Only Connected To Input Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
drc-115 - Two Pin Component Only Connected To Bidirectional Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
drc-116 - Output Directly Connected To Power Or Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
drc-117 - Output Pin To Output/Bidirectional Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
drc-118 - Input Pin Connected To The Same Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
drc-119 - Two Pin Component Shorted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
drc-120 - Range/Width Mismatch Across Two Pin Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
drc-121 - Net Connectivity Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
drc-123 - Single Pin Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
drc-124 - Wide Pin Range Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
drc-125 - Pin(s) Connected To Expected Net(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
drc-126 - Bus/Bus Content Versus Wide Pin Width Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
drc-127 - Unconnected Pins Near Dangling Net/Bus Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

506 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

drc-128 - Shorted and Aliased Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

drc-129 - Named Net Connected To No Connect Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

drc-101 - Output and Bidirectional Pins Connected

Together
Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for conflicting connections of output pins connected to bidirectional pins which may
damage the hardware.

Description
When you enable drc-101, the Verify tool reports each net that connects a pin with Pin Type
OUT to another pin with Pin Type BI. An output pin is assumed to be driving at all times. A
bidirectional pin drives a net when an output enable is set. In a situation where the bidirectional
pin is enabled, the net is over-driven and could damage a component.

Message
drc-101 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Output and bidirectional pins are
connected together

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

drc-102 - Output and Tri-State Pins Connected Together

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for conflicting connections of output pins and tri-state pins which may damage the
hardware.

Description
When you enable drc-102, the Verify tool reports each net that connects a pin with Pin Type
OUT to another pin with Pin Type TRI. An output pin is assumed to be driving at all times. A
tristate pin drives a net when an output enable is set. In a situation where the tristate pin is
enabled, the net is over-driven and could damage a component.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 507

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Message
drc-102 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Output and tristate pins are
connected together

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

drc-103 - Un-Loaded Net

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when a net driven by an output pin is not connected to an input pin. Connections
through serial components and components with 'Analog' pins may be ignored to limit the
number of error messages.

Options and Values

• Ignore Analog pins — Do not report nets connected to pins with Pin Type ANALOG.
• Ignore serial symbols — Treat serial symbols as transparent, checking the source and
load of the electrical net to eliminate false errors. Serial symbols are defined in the
'Defines' section of the VerifyDefault.ini file under the 'Serials' Option. (e.g.
discrete:res.1 *cap*.*)

Description
When you enable drc-103 , the Verify tool reports each net that does not connect a pin with Pin
Type OUT to a receiving pin with Pin Type IN or BI.

If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the Verify tool disregards the specified
symbols, such as resistors, that have a single electrical path through them. If an input pin is on
the other side of the serial symbol, the design rule check passes.

You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

508 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Message
drc-103 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname> Sheet: <sheetname>] Net not
connected to a load

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-103 because net MyUnloadedNet driven by output pin OUTpin does
not connect to an input pin. Instead net MyUnloadedNet connects to a serial symbol that is then
connected to a component with bidirectional pin BIpin. To treat serial symbols as transparent,
enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-104 - Net Load Exceeds Max Drive

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the total load on a driver does not exceed the driver's maximum fan-out capability.

Options and Values

• Drive property (must exist in Property Definition File) — The name of the pin drive
property. Default: “DRC Pin Drive”.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 509

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• Load property (must exist in Property Definition File) — The name of the pin load
property. Default: “DRC Pin Load”.
• Default Drive — Default pin drive value to be used if a pin does not have a DRC Pin
Drive property value.
• Default Load — Default pin load value to be used if a pin does not have a DRC Pin
Load property value.
• Hierarchical Pin Load — Hierarchical pin (port) load value.
• Physical Pin Load — Pin load value assigned to physical elements, such as routing, vias,
and packaging, connected to a net.
• Input Load — Report cases of nets connected to pins with Pin Type IN.
• Bi-directional Load — Report cases of nets connected to pins with Pin Type BI.

Description
When you enable drc-104, the Verify tool reports each net with a total net load that exceeds the
highest pin drive value.

The tool calculates total net load for each net as follows:

Total net load = Sum of pin load values connected to the net + sum of hierarchical pin (port)
load values connected to the net + sum of physical pin load values connected to the net

You specify the value of the DRC Pin Drive property and the DRC Pin Load property on each
symbol pin. See “Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
If you do not specify the Pin Drive and Pin Load properties, then the tool calculates pin drive
and pin load based on the values specified by the Default Drive and Default Load options.

Message
drc-104 - [flatnet: <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Net load <netloadvalue> exceeds
specified maximum driving capability <pindrivevalue> of net driver

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

510 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• <netloadvalue> — The sum total of pin, port, and physical pin load values connected to
a net.
• <pindrivevalue> — The maximum pin drive capability of a component.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Pin Drive [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Pin Load [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-105 - Un-Driven Net

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when a net connected to an input pin is not driven by an output pin. Pins connected to
No Connect symbols or serial components such as resistors may be ignored.

Options and Values

• Bi-directional Load — Report bidirectional pins that are not driven by an output pin.
• Ignore serial symbols — Treat serial symbols as transparent, checking the source and
load of the electrical net to eliminate false errors. Serial symbols are defined in the
'Defines' section of the VerifyDefault.ini file under the 'Serials' Option. (e.g.
discrete:res.1 *cap*.*).

Description
When you enable drc-105, the Verify tool reports each net that does not connect to a pin with
Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type IN.

If you enable the Bi-directional Load option, the tool reports each net that does not connect a
pin with Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type BI.

If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the tool disregards serial symbols. If an output
or bidirectional pin is on the other side of the serial component, the design rule check passes.

You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

Message
drc-105 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Un-driven net

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 511

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-106 - Multiple Output Drivers

Scope: PADS Designer
A net is driven by multiple drivers which may result in an electrical conflict and damage the
hardware.

Options and Values

• Bi-directional Drive — Treat bidirectional pins as drivers.
• Ignore serial symbols — Treat serial symbols as transparent, checking the source and
load of the electrical net to eliminate false errors. Serial symbols are defined in the
'Defines' section of the VerifyDefault.ini file under the 'Serials' Option. (e.g.
discrete:res.1 *cap*.*).

Description
When you enable drc-106, the Verify tool reports each net that does not connect to a pin with
Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type IN.

If you enable the Bi-directional Load option, the tool reports each net that does not connect a
pin with Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type BI.

If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the tool disregards serial symbols. If an output
or bidirectional pin is on the other side of the serial component, the design rule check passes.

You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

512 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Message
drc-106 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] More than one driver on a net

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-107 - Unconnected Pin(s)

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for unconnected pins, from an un-connected component down to specific pin types.

Options and Values

• Two pin components — Either Include two pin components, Exclude two pin
components, or Only check two pin components.
• Input — Report components that have unconnected input pins.
• Output — Report components that have unconnected output pins.
• Bidirectional — Report components that have unconnected bidirectional pins.
• Tristate — Report components that have unconnected tristate pins.
• Others — Report components that have unconnected pins that are not input, output,
bidirectional, or tristate.
• All inputs — Report components that have all input pins disconnected.
• All outputs — Report components that have all output pins disconnected.
• All pins — Report components that have all pins disconnected.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 513

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Description
When you enable drc-107, the Verify tool reports each component pin that is not connected to a
net. You can configure the rule to ignore pins with certain pin types. See “Preventing Errors for
Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs)” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Message
drc-107 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:
<refdesignator>([<path>]<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] <pintype> pin is not connected

drc-107 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:

<refdesignator>([<path>]<componentid>] None of component <pintype> pins connected

drc-107 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:

<refdesignator>([<path>]<componentid>] None of component pins connected

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs) [PADS Sche-
matic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-108 - Hanging/Dangling Net

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for nets with no connections (hanging) or nets with only one connection (dangling).
Special component pins and block symbol pins are treated as regular symbol pins.

514 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Options and Values

• Include Buses — Optionally reports any bus un-connected at both ends or where one
segment is only connected at one end. Nets ripped from the bus are not counted as a
connection.

Description
When you enable drc-108, the Verify tool reports each net that is not connected at one or two
ends. A dangling net, or net stub, is a net that is unconnected at one end, while a hanging net is
a net that is unconnected at both ends. The tool checks nets only; bus segments are ignored. See
“Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs)” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Message
drc-108 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] dangling
net segment

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs) [PADS Sche-
matic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-109 - Un-Used Bus Nets

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports buses where not all bus bits are connected on schematic level.

Options and Values

• Check for un-ripped nets — Optionally reports any bus signal not ripped from to this
bus.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 515

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• Check for missing rippers on nets — Optionally reports any bus signal used outside bus
without ripper to this bus (but connected to it by name).

Description
When you enable drc-109 connectivity check with the “Check for un-ripped nets” option, the
Verify tool reports each bus that includes a bus element that is not ripped out as a net. When you
enable drc-109 connectivity check with the “Check for missing rippers on nets” option is
enabled, the Verify tool reports each bus that includes a bus element that is ripped out as a net
but is not connected to a pin.

Note
If a bus is connected to a bus pin, the Verify tool will not report any unripped or unused bus
elements.

Message
drc-109 - [schematic: <schematicname>, bus: <busname>] Bus <busname> contains un-
ripped net '<netname>'

drc-109 - [schematic: <schematicname>, bus: <busname>] Bus <busname> contains un-used

net '<netname>'

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <busname> — The Name property value of a bus on a sheet.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-109 “Check for un-ripped nets” option because the net, MyBus0, is not
ripped from the bus, MyBus[3:0], and violates drc-109 “Check for missing rippers on nets”
because the net, MyBus1, is not connected.

516 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-110 - Net Overlap

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when nets overlap each other on the schematic.

Description
When you enable drc-110, the Verify tool reports nets that graphically overlap along the same
axis. This check does not consider net crossings.

Message
drc-110 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: <netname>] Net overlaps with
net: "<netname>"

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-110 because net, NetOverlapA, vertically overlaps net, NetOverlapB,
along the vertical axis.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 517

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-111 - Un-Driven Component Pins Connected Together

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that multiple input or bi-directional pins of the same component that are connected
together are driven. Nets connected via passive serial components may optionally be ignored.

Options and Values

• Input — Report input pins that are not driven.
• Bi-directional — Report bidirectional pins that are not driven.
• Ignore serial symbols — Treat serial symbols as transparent, checking the source and
load of the electrical net to eliminate false errors. Serial symbols are defined in the
'Defines' section of the VerifyDefault.ini file under the 'Serials' Option. (e.g.
discrete:res.1 *cap*.*).

Description
When you enable drc-111, the Verify tool reports each undriven net that connects multiple pins
with Pin Type IN or BI on the same component. The tool ignores single unconnected input pins.

If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the tool disregards series components. If an
output pin is on the other side of the serial component, the design rule check passes.

You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

Message
drc-111 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname> Sheet:
<schematicname>.<sheetname>] Un-driven input component pins

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).

518 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-111 because net, MyUndrivenCommonNet, is undriven and connects to
multiple input pins, INpin1 and INpin2, of a common component.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-112 - Input(s) or Bidirectional(s) Only Connected to

Connectors
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when input or bi-directional pins of a component are only connected to a connector.
These pins may be un-driven.

Options and Values

• Connector(s) — Space-delimited list of connector symbol names.

Description
When you enable drc-112, the Verify tool reports each pin with Pin Type IN or Pin Type BI that
connect to one of the specified connector symbols.

You specify connector symbol names in the Connector(s) option Value field as:
symbol_partition:symbol name. You may use wildcard character (*) to match symbol names.
For example, Connectors:CONN_44p.* matches: Connectors:CONN_44p.1,
Connectors:CONN_44p.2, or anything similar.

Note
Use an asterick (*) wildcard to represent one or more characters, or a question mark (?)
wildcard to represent a single character.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 519

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Message
drc-112 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] <pintype>
pin '<pinname>' connected only to connector '<symbolname>'

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-113 - Inputs Only Connected to Connectors or To

Another Component Input
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when input pins of a component are connected to a connector symbol or the input pin of
another component. These pins may be un-driven.

Options and Values

• Connector(s) — Space-delimited list of connector symbol names.

Description
When you enable drc-113, the Verify tool reports input pins that connect only to one of the
specified connector symbols or another component input pin.

You specify connector symbol names in the Connector(s) option Value field as:
symbol_partition:symbol name. You may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one or more
characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,

520 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Connectors:CONN_44p.* will match: Connectors:CONN_44p.1, Connectors:CONN_44p.2, or

anything similar.

Message
drc-113 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Inputs only
connected to connectors or to another component input

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-114 - Two Pin Component Only Connected To Input

Pins
Scope: PADS Designer
Both pins of a two pin component are connected to input pins. The absence of a driver could be
a problem.

Description
When you enable drc-114, the Verify tool reports two-pin components, such as resistors and
capacitors, that do not connect to a driver.

Message
drc-114 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Dipole only connected
to input pins

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 521

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-114 because both pins of a two-pin, dipole component are connected to
input pins, and no net driver.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-115 - Two Pin Component Only Connected To

Bidirectional Pins
Scope: PADS Designer
Both pins of a two pin component are connected to bi-directional pins. The absence of a driver
could be a problem.

Description
When you enable drc-115, the Verify tool reports two-pin components, such as resistors and
capacitors, that do not connect to a driver.

Message
drc-115 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Dipole only connected
to bidirectional pins

522 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-115 because both pins of a two-pin, dipole component are connected to
bidirectional pins.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-116 - Output Directly Connected To Power Or Ground

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for any Output, Bi-directional, Tri-state, Open Emitter or Open Collector pin connected
directly to Power/Ground nets. Individual symbols or entire symbol partitions can be excluded
from the check.

Options and Values

• Ignore symbols — Space-delimited list of symbols or symbol partitions to exclude from
the check.

Description
When you enable drc-116, the Verify tool reports each power or ground net that connects to a
pin with Pin Type OUT, BI, TRI, OEM, or OCL.

In the Ignore symbols option Value field, you may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one
or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,
Resistor:* matches: Resistor:101-RES, Resistor:102-RES, or anything similar.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 523

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

You specify power and ground nets one of the following ways:

• Global nets you add to the schematic with a POWER or GROUND Special Component.
• Assign the Power Supply Net property to a net.
• The VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See an example in the Power and Ground
Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610.

Message
drc-116 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Output pin directly connected to Power/Ground

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-117 - Output Pin To Output/Bidirectional Pin

Connection
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when an output pin of a component is connected to another output or bi-directional pin
of the same or another component, either directly or through a resistor. Specify the resistor
symbol in the options as 'symbol_partition:symbol name'.

Options and Values

• Resistors — Space-delimited list of resistor symbols to ignore.
• Output pin — Report output pins that are connected.
• Output pin via a resistor — Report output pins that are connected via a resistor.

524 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• Bi-directional pin — Report output pins connected to bidirectional pins.

• Bi-directional pin via a resistor — Report output pins connected to bidirectional pins via
a resistor.

Description
When you enable drc-117, the Verify tool reports each pin with Pin Type OUT that is connected
to another pin with Pin Type OUT or BI of the same or another component. The connection may
be direct or through a specified resistor symbol.

In the Resistors option Value field, you may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one or
more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,
Resistor:* matches: Resistor:101-RES, Resistor:102-RES, or anything similar.

Optionally, you can specify resistors in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Resistors
specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on
page 609.

Message
drc-117 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Output pin
connected to bidirectional pin

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-118 - Input Pin Connected To The Same Component

Scope: PADS Designer

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 525

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Reports when an input pin of a component is connected to an output or bi-directional pin of the
same, either directly or through a resistor. Specify the resistor symbol in the options as
'symbol_partition:symbol name'.

Options and Values

• Resistors — Space-delimited list of resistor symbols to ignore.
• Output pin — Report input pins connected to output pins of the same component.
• Output pin via a resistor — Report input pins connected to output pins of the same
component via a resistor.
• Bi-directional pin — Report input pins connected to bidirectional pins of the same
component.
• Bi-directional pin via a resistor — Report input pins connected to bidirectional pins of
the same component via a resistor.

Description
When you enable drc-118, the Verify tool reports each pin with Pin Type IN that connects to a
pin with Pin Type OUT or BI of the same component. The connection may be direct or through
a specified resistor symbol.

In the Resistors option Value field, you may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one or
more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,
Resistor:* matches: Resistor:101-RES, Resistor:102-RES, or anything similar.

Optionally, you can specify resistors in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Resistors
specification example of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

Message
drc-118 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Input pin
connected to <pintype> pin "<pinname>" of the same component

drc-118 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Input pin

connected to <pintype> pin "<pinname>" of the same component via a resistor
'<symbolname>'

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

526 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.

• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-118 in two ways:

• Input pin, INpin1, is connected to output pin, OUTpin3, via a resistor component.
• Input pin, INpin2, is connected to output pin, OUTpin3, directly.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-119 - Two Pin Component Shorted

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when the pins of a two pin component are shorted.

Description
When you enable drc-119, the Verify tool reports each two pin component, such as a resistor or
a capacitor, with a net connecting the pins.

Message
drc-119 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Dipole pin is shorted to '<pinname>'

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 527

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-120 - Range/Width Mismatch Across Two Pin

Component
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports range/width inconsistency between nets connected on both ends of a two pin
component.

Options and Values

• Report range mismatches — Report two pin components that are connected to nets that
have mismatched ranges.

Message
drc-120 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Width mismatch across
component

drc-120 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Range mismatch across

component - <netname> of bus <busnet> (<busname>) and bit <bitnumber> of bus <busnet>
(<busname>)

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <bitnumber> — The bit number of a bus net. Bit numbers are ordered from left to right,
starting at 0, regardless of the index number. For example, the bit number of bus net
MyBus[0] of MyBus[31:0] is 32.
• <busnet> — The name of a net that is a member of a bus.
• <busname> — The Name property value of a bus on a sheet.

528 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Example
This circuit violates drc-120 because the bus range is mismatched across the component. Bit
number 0 of bus XBus[3:0] (XBus3) is connected to bit number 3 of bus YBus[3:0] (YBus0).

This circuit violates drc-120 because the bus width is mismatched across the component. The
single-bit width net, ANet, connects to the 2-bit bus, BBus[1:0].

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-121 - Net Connectivity Integrity

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that nets intended to be connected together are connected via specific symbols specified
in the Options and defined as 'Partition:symbol name'.

Description
The Verify tool tests three types of connectivity:

• Intra-page - Two or more nets on the same sheet, with the same name that are not
physically connected.
• Inter-page - Two or more nets on different sheets of the same schematic that have the
same name.
• Hierarchical - An external net in a schematic sheet that does not have a corresponding
pin on the corresponding symbol.

Options and Values

• Inter-page connection symbol(s) — Space delimited list of connection symbols that join
nets between sheets. For example, “builtin:bi_flat.* builtin:in_flat.* builtin:out_flat.*”.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 529

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• Intra-page connection symbol(s) — Space delimited list of connection symbols that join
nets within a sheet. For example, “builtin:con_inter_bi.* builtin:con_inter_i.*
builtin:con_inter_o.*”.
• Intra-page checks — Report nets that are missing intra-page (internal) connection
symbols.
• Inter-page checks — Report nets that are missing inter-page (flat) connection symbols.
• Hierarchical checks — Report nets in a schematic sheet that do not have a corresponding
pin on the corresponding hierarchical symbol.
• Duplicate symbols connected to one net — Report nets that connect to duplicated
connection symbols.
• Report extra intra-page or inter-page connection on nets — Report nets that connect to
extra (redundant) intra-page or inter-page connections.
• Use Link symbols as Intra-page and Inter-page symbols — Report intra-page or inter-
page nets that do not connect to a link symbol.

Tip
Use a different symbol for each type of check. If you use the same symbol for all checks,
and then run all checks at one time, you may see unexpected interactions and associated
erroneous messages.

Description
When you enable drc-121, the Verify tool reports nets that are not connected via specific
symbols.

In the Inter-page and Intra-page connection symbol(s) option Value fields, you may use
wildcard characters (*) to represent one or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to
represent a single character. For example, builtin:con_inter_bi.* matches:
builtin:con_inter_bi.1, builtin:con_inter_bi.2, or anything similar.

Message
drc-121 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Missing
internal connection symbols on net

drc-121 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Missing flat

symbol on net

drc-121 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Extra flat

symbol on net

drc-121 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Missing

hierarchical symbol on net

530 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

drc-121 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Duplicate

[<pintype>|flat] symbol(s) found on net

drc-121 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Redundant

[<pintype>|flat] symbol on net

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.

Example
This circuit violates drc-121 intra-page connectivity check because the internal connection
symbol(s) specified by the “Intra-page connection symbol(s)” option is missing from net
MyNotPCN.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 531

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

This circuit violates drc-121 inter-page connectivity check because the flat symbol(s) specified
by the “Inter-page connection symbol(s)” option is missing from the net MyNotPCNy at the
MySchematic.2 sheet.

This circuit violates drc-121 hierarchical connectivity check because the block instance
MyChildBlock has a pin MyNotPCNz but the schematic MyChildBlock is missing a matching

532 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

hierarchical symbol on the net MyNotPCNz. The Verify tool reports this condition as “Missing
hierarchical symbol on net”.

This circuit violates drc-121 hierarchical connectivity check because the MyChildBlock
schematic has a hierarchical symbol on the net MyNotPCNz but the block instance

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 533

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

MyChildBlock is missing a matching pin. The Verify tool reports this condition as “Extra flat
symbol on net”.

This circuit violates drc-121 “Duplicate symbols connected to one net” option because the net,
“duplicate”, connects to multiple inter-page connection symbols. The second instance of the
connection symbol is not required.

This circuit violates drc-121 “Report extra intra-page or inter-page connection on nets” option
because the net “redundant”, connects to multiple inter-page connection symbols. The second
instance of the connection symbol is not required.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

534 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax

DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-123 - Single Pin Nets

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports any net connected to only one pin.

Options and Values

• Show connection only — Include the schematic name in reports of single pin nets.
• Include nets with No Connect symbols — Report single pin nets that connect to No
Connect symbols.

Description
When you enable drc-123, the Verify tool reports any net connected to only one pin.

Message
drc-123 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] One pin net

drc-123 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] One pin net

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 535

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

drc-124 - Wide Pin Range Check

Scope: PADS Designer and Xpedition System Designer
Wide pin range check

Options and Values

• Consider single pin nets/pins — Report single bit nets connected to bus pins or bus pins
connected to a single bit pins. Default: Disabled, Warning.

Description
When you enable drc-124, the Verify tool reports any discrepancy in the number of bits in a bus
and the component/block pin to which it connects. Optionally, it can report a net connected to a
bus pin or a bus pin connected to a single bit pin.

Message
drc-124 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Pin
(<pinwidth> width) is connected to a bus of a different range (<buswidth> width)

drc-124 - [schematic: Logical System View, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Pin
(<pinwidth> width) is connected to a bus of a different range (<buswidth> width)

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pinwidth> — The width of a component or block symbol bus pin.
• <buswidth> — The width of a bus as defined by the number of nets collected into a bus.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-125 - Pin(s) Connected To Expected Net(s)

Scope: PADS Designer

536 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Checks if one or more pins of a component or a group of components are connected to one of
the nets listed in the pin property DRC_NCHK. Several net classes can be defined for a given
pin.

Options and Values

• Show connection only — Include the schematic name in reports of single pin nets.
• Include nets with No Connect symbols — Report single pin nets that connect to No
Connect symbols.

Description
When you enable drc-125, the Verify tool reports each component and pin that connects to a net
class and net specified by the DRC_NCLS (net class) and DRC_NCHK (net check) properties.

You specify the net class property DRC_NCLS on a symbol. For example, assigning the net
class/value pair DRC_NCLS=POWER to one or more symbols indicates that a net from the
POWER net class must connect to the component.

You specify the net check property DRC_NCHK on a symbol pin. For example, assigning the
net class/value pair: DRC_NCHK=POWER;VCC*,VDD*, indicates that the pin is associated
with a component from the POWER net class and must connect to the VCC* or VDD* nets.

Note
Use an asterisk (*) wildcard character to represent one or more characters, or a question
mark (?) wildcard character to represent a single character.

See “Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.

The Verify tool checks the net class that you specify with the DRC Net Class Default in the
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. For example, the net class default property, shown
below, indicates that the Verify checks the POWER net class. See the DRC Net Class Default
specification example of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

<Defines>
<Option Name="net_class_default" Value="POWER" />
</Defines>

Optionally, you can specify the name of the DRC_NCHK and DRC_NCLS properties in the
VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the DRC Net Check Property name, DRC Net Class Property name
specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on
page 609.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 537

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Message
drc-125 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Pin
with "DRC_NCHK" attribute is connected to wrong net [<path>]<netname>. Expected
<drcnchkvalue>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <drcnchkvalue> — The DRC_NCHK property value of a component pin.

Example
This circuit violates drc-125 because PIN1 connects to the GND global net instead of one of the
POWER net class nets: VCC* or VDD*.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC_NCHK [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC_NCLS [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

538 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

drc-126 - Bus/Bus Content Versus Wide Pin Width Match

Scope: PADS Designer and Xpedition System Designer
Reports when a bus width is different from the pin it is connected to. Optionally it can check the
connectivity for shifted or inverted connections (A[0:7] vs. A[7:0]).

Options and Values

Bit to bit match check — Report cases of shifted or inverted bit-to-bit connections. Default:
Disabled.

Description
When you enable drc-126, the Verify tool reports each bus that has an inconsistent width or a
bus member mismatch, bit-to-bit.

Message
drc-126 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>]
<buspinwidth> bit wide pin <pinname> is connected to <buswidth> bit bus/bus content
<busname>

drc-126 - [schematic: Logical System View, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>]

<buspinwidth> bit wide pin <pinname> is connected to <buswidth> bit bus/bus content
<busname>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <buspinwidth> — The width of a bus pin as defined by the number of nets collected
into a bus pin.
• <buswidth> — The width of a bus as defined by the number of nets collected into a bus.
• <busname> — The Name property value of a bus on a sheet.

Example
Bus Width Check Examples:
• A circuit that connects the 7-bit bus, MYBUS=A,B,C[3:0],D, to the 3-bit bus, DD[2:0],
violates drc-126 because the bus widths do not match.
• A circuit that connects a 5-bit bus, ADDR[4:0], to a 6-bit bus, ADDRESS[5:0], violates
drc-126 because the bus widths to not match.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 539

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

Bit to Bit Match Check Examples:

• A circuit that connects the 5-bit bus, ADD[4:0], to the 5-bit bus, ADDRESS[5:1],
violates drc-126 bit to bit match check because the bit numbers are shifted.
• A circuit that connects the 5-bit bus, ADD[4:0], to the 5-bit bus, ADDRESS[0:4],
violates drc-126 bit to bit match check because the bit range is inverted.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs) [PADS Sche-
matic Design User's Guide]

drc-127 - Unconnected Pins Near Dangling Net/Bus Ends

Scope: PADS Designer
Unconnected pins near dangling net/bus ends.

Options and Values

• Radius — Specify the minimum distance from the pin to the net or bus. Specify a unit
(mm, cm, or in) consistent with the schematic units for the project (choose
Setup > Settings menu item, Schematic Editor category).
• Show only nearest pin — Report the nearest pin that violates the rule. Exclude all others.

Description
When drc-127 is enabled, the Verify tool reports each pin that is disconnected even if they
appear to connect to a net or bus. You can specify the minimum distance from the pin to the net
or bus with the Radius option.

Message
drc-127 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Unconnected pin is near dangling net '<netname>' end

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

540 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs) [PADS Sche-
matic Design User's Guide]

drc-128 - Shorted and Aliased Nets

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports nets of different names connected together (typically nets between two buses) or aliased
using the | (pipe) notation. Optionally display only the segment where the alias is created.

Options and Values

• Show only nets which created the alias — Report the net segment that created the alias.

Message
drc-128 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Net [<netalias>] is an
alias, please check this is intentional

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <netalias> — The net alias of two connected nets with two different names.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs) [PADS Sche-
matic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 541

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group

drc-129 - Named Net Connected To No Connect Symbol

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when a named net is connected to a 'No Connect' symbol which will remove it from the
PCB netlist.

Message
drc-129 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] '<symbolname>'
symbol connected to named net '[<path>]<netname>'

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs) [PADS Sche-
matic Design User's Guide]

542 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

Electrical Rules Group

The Electrical Rules Group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Electrical category)
checks electrical conditions related to pull-up resistors, pull-down resistors, power tolerance,
and component polarity.
For example, if an open-emitter pin is not pulled down to ground through a pull-down
component, an electrical design rule is violated. Adding or replacing a component is often the
way to correct an electrical rule violation.

drc-201 - Open Collector Pin Not Pulled Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

drc-202 - Open Emitter Pin Not Pulled Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
drc-203 - Component Polarity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
drc-204 - Voltage Drop Tolerance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
drc-205 - Power Tolerance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
drc-206 - Tristate Buffer Not Pulled Up or Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

drc-201 - Open Collector Pin Not Pulled Up

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that an Open Collector pin is connected to power through a pull-up component (resistor
defined in VerifyDefaults.ini).

Description
When you enable drc-201, the Verify tool reports each Open Collector type (OCL) pin that is
not connected to a pull-up resistor that you specify in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the
example in the Resistors row of Table 6-4 on page 610.

Message
drc-201 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Open
Collector pin is not pulled up

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 543

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-202 - Open Emitter Pin Not Pulled Down

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that an Open Emitter pin is connected to ground through a pull-down component
(resistor defined in VerifyDefaults.ini).

Description
When you enable drc-202, the Verify tool reports each Open Emitter type (OEM) pin that is not
connected to a pull-down resistor that you specify in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example
in the Resistors row of Table 6-4 on page 610.

Message
drc-202 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Open
Emitter pin is not pulled down

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-203 - Component Polarity Check

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that polarized components have their positive pin connected to a voltage greater or
equal to the voltage of their negative pin.

Options and Values

• Voltage Drop Components — Space-delimited list of polarized component names.

544 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

Description
When you enable drc-203, the Verify tool reports each polarized component specified that does
not connect to the correct polarity ground or power net specified. The tool reports incorrectly
named polarized nets that connect to a power supply.

You specify each polarized component symbol in the Voltage Drop Components option Value
field as: “<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character.
For example, Sample.cappol.* matches: Sample.cappol.1, Sample.cappol.2, or anything similar.

You assign the DRC Positive property to the positive pin and the DRC Negative property to the
negative pin of each component symbol specified. See “Verify DRC Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.

Optionally, you can specify the DRC Positive property and DRC Negative property names in
the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example in the DRC Positive Property row in Table 6-4 on
page 610.

You specify the polarized power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example
in the Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610.

Message
drc-203 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Positive pin is
connected to lower voltage level than the negative pin

drc-203 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Positive pin incorrectly

connected

drc-203 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Negative pin wrong

connected

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.

Example
The right-most circuit violates drc-203 because the positive pin is connected to a lower voltage
level (GND) than the negative pin (+5V).

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 545

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Positive [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Negative [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-204 - Voltage Drop Tolerance Check

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks voltage across symbols against manufacturer's tolerances entered in volts in the Min
Value; Max Value settings (e.g. 500mV;1V).

Options and Values

• Component Symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of component symbol names.
• Min Value; Max Value — Minimum and maximum voltage tolerance values.

Description
When you enable drc-204, the Verify tool reports each component specified that has a voltage
drop less than the minimum voltage tolerance value or greater than the maximum voltage
tolerance value.

You specify each component symbol in the Component Symbol(s) option Value field as:
<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>. You may use an asterisk character (*) to represent one
or more characters, or a question mark (?) character, to represent a single character. For
example, “Sample.cappol.*” matches: Sample.cappol.1, Sample.cappol.2, or anything similar.

You specify the minimum and maximum voltage tolerance values in the Min Value; Max Value
option Value field. For example: 50mV;2.2V applies to all of the symbols specified by the
Components Symbol(s) option. Use a zero (0) to the left of the decimal point (.) to specify a
DRC Voltage property value that is less than 1.0. For example: use “0.5V” instead of “.5V”.

Note
You may specify electrical and electronic engineering units of voltage tolerance values with
a single character abbreviation as follows: Atto - a, Femto - f, Pico - p, Nano - n, Micro - u,
Milli - m, Kilo - k , Mega - M, Giga - G, and Tera - T.

546 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

An alternative to specifying a voltage tolerance to all specified symbols, is to assign the DRC
Voltage property and value to a symbol or part in the central library, or a component instance in
the schematic. You assign the DRC Voltage property to the specified component symbol. See
“Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.

The tool uses zero volts (0V) to calculate the value of ground nets.

You specify the power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
example in the Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610. The Verify tool reports:
“...Voltage drop cannot be calculated...” if a net that is not specified as a power or ground is
connected to a specified resistor.

Message
drc-204 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Calculated Voltage
Drop <voltagevalue> is lower than defined Min value <voltagevalue>

drc-204 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Calculated Voltage

Drop <voltagevalue> exceeds defined Max value <voltagevalue>

drc-204 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Voltage drop cannot be

calculated as net <netname> does not follow the expected naming convention

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <voltagevalue> — The minimum or maximum voltage tolerance value of a component.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-204 because the 5V voltage drop across the 100 ohm resistor exceeds
the resistor’s maximum voltage tolerance of 1.8V.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 547

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Voltage [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-205 - Power Tolerance Check

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks power across resistors against manufacturer's tolerances entered in Watts in the Min
Value;Max Value settings (e.g. 500mW;1W). Power is calculated from the voltage drop and
resistor value and compared to specified Min/Max values.

Options and Values

• Resistor Symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of resistor symbol names.
• Min Value; Max Value — Minimum and maximum power tolerance values.

Description
When you enable drc-205, the Verify tool reports each component specified that has a power
dissipation less than the minimum power tolerance value or greater than the maximum power
tolerance value.

You specify each resistor symbol in the Resistor Symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use the wildcard character (*) to represent
one or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For
example, Sample.resistor.*: Sample.resistor.1, Sample.resistor.2, or anything similar.

You specify the minimum and maximum power tolerance values in the Min Value; Max Value
option Value field. For example: 200mW;500mW applies to all of the symbols specified by the
Resistor Symbol(s) option. Use a zero (0) to the left of the decimal point (.) to specify a DRC
Power property value that is less than 1.0. For example: use “0.25W” instead of “.25W”. An
alternative to specifying a power tolerance to all specified symbols, is to assign the DRC Power
property to a symbol or part in the central library, or a component instance in the schematic.

548 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

Note
You may specify electrical and electronic engineering units with a single character
abbreviation as follows: Atto - a, Femto - f, Pico - p, Nano - n, Micro - u, Milli - m, Kilo - k
, Mega - M, Giga - G, and Tera - T.

You assign a resistance value to the Value property of each resistor component associated with
the resistor symbols you specified to check.

For each resistor symbol specified, you assign the DRC Positive property to the symbol pin that
connects to the power net and the DRC Negative property to the symbol pin that connects to the
ground net. See “Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.

You specify the power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example in the
Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610. The Verify tool reports: “...Voltage drop
cannot be calculated...” if a net that is not specified as a power or ground is connected to a
specified resistor.

Message
drc-205 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Calculated dissipated
power <powervalue> exceeds defined Max Power Rating <powervalue>

drc-205 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid> Calculated dissipated

power <powervalue> is lower than defined Min Power Rating <powervalue>

drc-205 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Voltage drop cannot be

calculated as net <netname> does not follow the expected naming convention

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <powervalue> — The minimum or maximum power tolerance value of a component.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 549

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

Example
This circuit violates drc-205 because the power dissipation of 0.0144W ((1.2V^2)/100ohms)
across the 100 ohm resistor connected to a +1.2V power supply, is lower than the resistor’s
minimum power tolerance of 0.02W (20mW).

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Power [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Positive [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Negative [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-206 - Tristate Buffer Not Pulled Up or Down

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports any tri-state pin which is not connected to a power/ground signal through a resistor
(defined in VerifyDefaults.ini).

Description
When you enable drc-206, the Verify tool reports each pin with a Tristate (TRI) pin type that
does not connect to a specified power or ground net through a specified resistor symbol.

You specify resistors in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults file). See the example in the
Resistors row of Table 6-4 on page 610.

550 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group

You specify the polarized power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example
in the Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610. An alternative to specifying
power and ground nets in VerifyDefaults.ini is to assign the Power Supply Net property to the
net.

Message
drc-206 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Tristate pin is not pulled up or down

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 551

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group

Hierarchy Rules Group

The Hierarchy Rules Group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Hierarchy category)
checks hierarchical design conditions related to parent and child schematic structure and
interfaces.
For example, if the name of child schematic does not match a block symbol, the Verify tool
reports a hierarchical design rule violation. Adjusting pin or port types, and renaming child
schematics or block symbols is often the way to correct a hierarchical rule violation. For more
information about hierarchical designs, see “Hierarchical Designs” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

drc-301 - Symbol Pin and Child Schematic Port Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

drc-302 - Unconnected Block Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
drc-303 - Missing Child Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
drc-304 - Net Connected To Multiple Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
drc-305 - Net Connected To Ports With Different Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

drc-301 - Symbol Pin and Child Schematic Port Mismatch

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the symbol pin on a hierarchical block symbol matches the corresponding port type
in the child schematic. Bi-directional and tri-state pins may optionally be ignored.

Options and Values

• Ignores Tri-state block symbol pins connected to Bi-directional port symbols and vice-
versa — Do not report connections between BI and TRI pin and port types as a
mismatch.
• Ignores block symbol output pins connected to Tri-state or Bi-directional port symbols
— Do not report connections between Pin Type OUT and Port Type TRI or Port Type
BI as a mismatch.

Description
When you enable drc-301, the Verify tool reports each block symbol pin that does not match the
port type of the child schematic.

Message
drc-301 - [symbol: <symbolname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>], Pin Type
mismatch -- symbol=<pintype>, schematic=<pintype>

552 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group

Where:

• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Designs [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Port Usage [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-302 - Unconnected Block Pin

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for unconnected or missing hierarchical ports in the child schematic.

Description
When you enable drc-302, the Verify tool reports each block symbol pin that has no
corresponding port on the child schematic.

Message
drc-302 - [symbol: <symbolname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] No corresponding
hierarchical I/O found underneath

Where:

• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Designs [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Port Usage [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 553

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group

drc-303 - Missing Child Schematic

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the hierarchical symbol name and child schematic match. Hierarchical symbols
must have the same name as their child schematic.

Description
When you enable drc-303, the Verify tool reports each block that is missing an underlying
schematic.

Message
drc-303 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] Missing composite symbol
underlying schematic

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Designs [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Port Usage [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-304 - Net Connected To Multiple Ports

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for nets connected to multiple ports of differing type (e.g. output and bi-directional) or
with different names.

Description
When you enable drc-304, the Verify tool reports each net connects to multiple ports of a child
schematic.

Message
drc-304 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: [<path>]\<netname>] is connected to two
hierarchical ports of different names (<portname>, <portname>)

554 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <portname> — The Name property value of a hierarchical pin (port) symbol of an
underlying schematic.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Designs [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Port Usage [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-305 - Net Connected To Ports With Different Name

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for nets connected to ports with different names.

Description
When you enable drc-305, the Verify tool reports each net connects to a child schematic port
with a mismatched name.

Message
drc-305 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] The Port is
connected to a net with different name '<netname>'

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 555

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group

Hierarchical Designs [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Port Usage [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

556 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Integrity Rules Group

The Integrity Rules Group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Integrity category) checks
design conditions related to properties, component placement, and the central library.
For example, if a part defined in the central library uses the wrong symbol on the schematic, the
Verify tool reports an integrity rule violation.

drc-401 - Missing Symbol Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

drc-402 - Missing Symbol Pin Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
drc-403 - Missing Block Symbol Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
drc-404 - Missing Block Symbol Pin Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
drc-405 - PIN Type Symbol Without a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
drc-406 - PIN Type Symbol With More Than One Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
drc-407 - Odd Number of Parentheses or Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
drc-408 - Component Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
drc-409 - Net Name Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
drc-410 - Power/Ground PIN Type Symbol Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
drc-411 - Symbol to Part Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
drc-412 - Component Symbol Does Not Exist in Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

drc-401 - Missing Symbol Property

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the properties specified in the Values column exist on the symbol and that they have
a value if the 'Check for missing value' option is selected.

Options and Values

• Properties — Space-delimited list of properties.
• Check for missing value — Report each property that is missing a value.

Description
When you enable drc-401, the Verify tool reports each component that is missing a specified
property.

If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each component that
includes a specified property but is missing a value.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 557

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Message
drc-401 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Missing symbol
property '<property>'

drc-401 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>)]

Symbol property '<property>' exists but value is missing

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-402 - Missing Symbol Pin Property

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the properties specified in the Values column exist on the pin and that they have a
value if the 'Check for missing value' option is selected.

Options and Values

• Properties — Space-delimited list of properties.
• Check for missing value — Report each property that is missing a value.

Description
When you enable drc-402, the Verify tool reports each component pin that is missing a
specified property.

If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each component pin
that includes a specified property but is missing a value.

558 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Message
drc-402 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Missing symbol pin property '<property>'

drc-402 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Symbol pin property '<property>' exists but value is missing

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-403 - Missing Block Symbol Property

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the properties specified in the Values column exist on the block symbol and that
they have a value if the 'Check for missing value' option is selected.

Options and Values

• Properties — Space-delimited list of properties.
• Check for missing value — Report each property that is missing a value.

Description
When you enable drc-403, the Verify tool reports each block symbol that is missing a specified
property.

If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each block symbol
that includes a specified property but is missing a value.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 559

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Message
drc-403 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] Missing block property
'<property>'

drc-403 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] Block property '<property>'

exists but value is missing

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-404 - Missing Block Symbol Pin Property

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the properties specified in the Values column exist on the block symbol pins and
that they have a value if the 'Check for missing value' option is selected.

Options and Values

• Properties — Space-delimited list of properties.
• Check for missing value — Report each property that is missing a value.

Description
When you enable drc-404, the Verify tool reports each block symbol pin that does not match the
port type of the child schematic.

If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each block symbol
pin that includes a specified property but is missing a value.

Message
drc-404 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Missing
block pin property '<property>'

560 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

drc-404 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Block pin

property '<property>' exists but value is missing

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <property> — The property name of a design object.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-405 - PIN Type Symbol Without a Pin

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that a PIN type symbol has at least one pin.

Description
When you enable drc-405, the Verify tool reports each PIN type symbol, also referred to as a
hierarchical pin (port) symbol, that is missing a pin.

Message
drc-405 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] PIN type symbol
<symbolname> has no pin when exactly one pin is expected

Where:

• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 561

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Pin (Port) Symbol Requirements [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-406 - PIN Type Symbol With More Than One Pin

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that a PIN type symbol does not have more than pin.

Description
When you enable drc-406, the Verify tool reports each PIN type symbol, also referred to as
hierarchical pin (port) symbol, that has multiple pins.

Message
drc-406 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] PIN type symbol
<symbolname> has multiple pins when exactly one pin is expected

Where:

• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Pin (Port) Symbol Requirements [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-407 - Odd Number of Parentheses or Brackets

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for an odd number of parentheses or brackets in names.

Description
When you enable drc-407, the Verify tool reports each bus or net name with an odd number of
parentheses or brackets such as “BUSA[8:0” and “NET44)”.

562 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Message
drc-407 - [schematic: <schematicname>, bus: <busname>] Odd number of brackets in bus
name: <busname>

drc-407 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Odd number of brackets in net

name: <netname>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <busname> — The Name property value of a bus on a sheet.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-408 - Component Overlap

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that symbols of the same size and orientation are not placed on top of each other.

Description
When you enable drc-408, the Verify tool reports each symbol in a schematic that overlap. The
symbols must have the same orientation and size to be reported as overlapping.

Message
drc-408 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Component
<componentid> overlaps component <componentid>.

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 563

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

drc-409 - Net Name Check

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports nets with the same name but different letter case or name delimiters, examples Enable
& ENABLE or Data7 & Data[7].

Description
When you enable drc-409, the Verify tool reports each net segment name that differs from a
parent net name because of letter case or a name delimiter.

Message
drc-409 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Net segment name '<netname>'
differentiate from parent net name: <netname>

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-410 - Power/Ground PIN Type Symbol Integrity

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that a PIN type symbol mapped on Power or Ground taps have proper pin type set on
own pin (needed for Power/Gnd nets detection).

Description
When you enable drc-410, the Verify tool reports each:

• Pin type symbol mapped as Power that does not have a pin with Pin Type POWER.
• Pin type symbol mapped as Ground that does not have a Pin Type GROUND.
See “Power and Ground Symbol Requirements” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

564 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Message
drc-410 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: <componentid>] Global symbol
'<symbolname>' mapped as Power has wrong pintype '<pintype>' ( expected 'Power' ) on
symbol pin '<pinname>'

drc-410 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: <componentid>] Global symbol

'<symbolname>' mapped as Ground has wrong pintype '<pintype>' ( expected 'Ground' ) on
symbol pin '<pinname>'

Where:

• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Power and Ground Symbol Requirements [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-411 - Symbol to Part Mapping

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when the wrong symbol is used for the part defined in the central library.

Description
When you enable drc-411, the Verify tool reports each symbol that does not map to a part in the
central library correctly.

Message
drc-411 - [Part: <partnumber>, component: <componentid>] Wrong symbol '<symbolname>'
used for Part Number '<partnumber>'

Where:

• <partnumber> — The Part Number property value of a component.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 565

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating Parts [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]

drc-412 - Component Symbol Does Not Exist in Central

Library
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when component symbol does not exist in central library.

Description
When you enable drc-412, the Verify tool reports each symbol that does not exist in the central
library.

Message
drc-412 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Symbol
<symbolname> does not exist in Central Library

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating Parts [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]

566 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Power & Ground Rules Group

The Power & Ground rules group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Power&Ground
category) checks design conditions related to power and ground nets, global and local net
definitions, and legal supply pin connections.
For example, if you have a global power net connected to an output pin, a power & ground
design rule is violated. Rewiring a net or adjusting properties is often the way to correct a rule
violation.

The power and ground rules use the Pin Type (Integrated) or PINTYPE (Netlist) properties of
symbol pins. For more information, see “Pin Type (PINTYPE)” in the
PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.

drc-501 - Global Net Connected to Output Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

drc-502 - Legal Global Net Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
drc-503 - Local Net Defined As Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
drc-504 - Global Signal Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
drc-505 - Supply Pin Connected to Wrong Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
drc-506 - Un-connected Supply Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
drc-507 - Supply Pin Connected to Incorrect Net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
drc-508 - Implicit or Explicit Power Not Connected to Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
drc-509 - Global Net Connected to Block Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
drc-510 - IC Device Powering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
drc-511 - Invalid Connection of POWER/GROUND Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

drc-501 - Global Net Connected to Output Pin

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when a component output pin is directly connected to a global net, usually a power or
ground.

Options and Values

• Report pins — Include the pin name in reports.

Description
When you enable drc-501, the Verify tool reports each global net that connects to a pin with a
Pin Type property value of OUT.

If you enable the “Report pins” option, the Verify tool reports each component and output pin
name connected to a global net.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 567

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Message
drc-501 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: <netname> Sheet: <sheetname>] Global net connected
to output pins

drc-501 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]

Output pin connected to Global Net [<globalnetname>]

Where:

• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <globalnetname> — The Name property value of a global net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-501 because global net AGNDX is connected to an output type pin.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-502 - Legal Global Net Names

Scope: PADS Designer
Compares the global nets in the design (nets connected to power or ground taps) against those
listed in the values column.

568 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Options and Values

• Names — A space-delimited list of legal global net names. For example: “VCC”
“GND” “+3.3V”.

Description
When you enable drc-502, the Verify tool reports each global signal name that is not in the list
of legal global net names specified by the Names option.

Message
drc-502 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Global net name not listed in
legal_globals

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
Given the Names option value “VCC GND +3.3V” this circuit violates drc-502 because global
net +12V is not in the list.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-503 - Local Net Defined As Global

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when global nets entered by the user in the Values column are not defined as global via
a supply tap in the design.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 569

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Options and Values

• Names — A space-delimited list of legal global net names. For example: “VCC”
“GND” “+3.3V”.

Description
When you enable drc-503, the Verify tool reports each local net that is in the list of legal global
net names specified by the Names option.

Message
drc-503 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Local net name is listed in
legal_globals

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-504 - Global Signal Validation

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that TAP symbols (global power and ground signals) are connected to a net are not
shorted nor have hanging connections.

Description
When you enable drc-504, the Verify tool reports each net that connects to a Global Signal pin
caused by a short between Global Symbols. The tool also reports each wire segment (dangling
net) used as a Global Signal but not terminated by a Global Symbol.

The Global Signal property is specified in the global_signal option of the

NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini file with netlist projects, and the VerifyDefaults.ini file with integrated
projects. With netlist projects, the default property name is NETNAME, and with integrated
projects, it is “Global Signal Name”.

For example, the Global Signal property, in the VerifyDefaults.ini file below defines several
global power and ground signals.

570 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

<Defines>
<Option Name="global_signal" Value="VCC +48V +5V -3.3V +3.3V +1.8V
+1.2V CGND GND +0V* G0V* A0V*" />
</Defines>

Message
drc-504 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Wire '<netname>' is used as a
global signal in this design, no global TAP symbol found on this segment '<netname>'. All such
wires must be terminated by a TAP symbol with the correct Global Signal Name property

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-504 because global net “+48V” connects to a dangling wire segment.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-505 - Supply Pin Connected to Wrong Voltage

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks the polarity of nets connected to 'Supply pins' based on + and - naming convention.

Description
When you enable drc-505, the Verify tool reports each component with a supply pin connected
to the wrong voltage.

You assign the DRC Supply Pin property to each pin that you want to verify connects to a net
with a valid polarity voltage value. A value of “Pos” indicates the pin must connect to a net
name preceded with a plus sign (+), such as “+3.3V”, to pass the check. A value of “Neg”
indicates the pin must connect to a net name preceded with a minus sign (-), to pass the check.

Optionally, you can specify the DRC Supply Pin property name in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
See an example in the DRC Supply Pin name row in Table 6-4 on page 610.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 571

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Message
drc-505 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Supply Pin is connected to wrong voltage.

drc-505 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]

Negative Supply Pin is connected to wrong voltage.

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

Example
This circuit violates drc-505 because the component with pin 2 with a DRC Supply Pin property
value of ‘Neg’ is connected to the +12V global net.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

drc-506 - Un-connected Supply Pin

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports un-connected "supply pins". A "Supply pin" is identified by the property specified in
supply_pin option of the VerifyDefaults.ini file.

Description
When you enable drc-506, the Verify tool reports each unconnected pin with a DRC Supply Pin
property.

572 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

You assign the DRC Supply Pin property to each pin that you want to confirm is connected to a
power net.

Optionally, you can specify the DRC Supply Pin property name in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
See an example in the DRC Supply Pin name row in Table 6-4 on page 610.

Message
drc-506 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Supply pin is not connected.

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

Example
This circuit violates drc-506 because component pin 40 has a DRC Supply Pin property but is
not connected.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Supply Pin [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-507 - Supply Pin Connected to Incorrect Net

Scope: PADS Designer

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 573

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Reports when a 'Supply pin' is not connected to the expected nets listed in the Values column.

Options and Values

• Power net name(s) — Space-delimited list of power net names.
• Ground net name(s) — Space-delimited list of ground net names.

Description
When you enable drc-507, the Verify tool reports each pin with a DRC Supply Pin property that
does not connect to a specified power or ground net.

You assign the DRC Supply Pin property to each pin that you want to verify is connected to a
power net.

Optionally, you can specify the DRC Supply Pin property name in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
See an example in the DRC Supply Pin name row in Table 6-4 on page 610.

Message
drc-507 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Supply pin is connected to incorrect Power/Ground net.

drc-507 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Supply pin is connected to incorrect Power/Ground net which is non-global.

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

574 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Example
Given Power net names(s) option value “POWER VCC VPP” this circuit violates drc-507
because component pin 90 is not connected to a net named POWER, VCC, or VPP.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
DRC Supply Pin [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-508 - Implicit or Explicit Power Not Connected to

Connector
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when an explicit or implicit power supply pin is not connected to a connector specified
in the Values column. Explicit pins are defined by a POWER or GROUND Pin Type. Implicit
pins are defined in the part database.

Options and Values

• Connector(s) — Space-delimited list of connector symbols.

Description
When you enable drc-508, the Verify tool reports each implicit or explicit power supply pin that
does not connect to a specified connector. See “Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition” in
the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 575

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

You specify each connector symbol in the Connector(s) option Value field as:
<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>. You may use the asterisk character (*) to match symbol
names. For example, Sample:pci_120.* matches: Sample:pci_120.1, Sample:pci_120.2, or
anything similar.

Message
drc-508 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Explicit Ground pin
'<pinname>' not connected to connector

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

Example
Given the Connector(s) option value “BIcomponent.*” this circuit violates drc-508 because the
component pin 1 GROUNDpin is not connected to a BIcomponent connector component.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

drc-509 - Global Net Connected to Block Pin

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks for global nets connected to hierarchical block pins. By definition global nets propagate
throughout the design hierarchy, connecting a global net to a hierarchical block symbol is
unnecessary.

Description
When you enable drc-509, the Verify tool reports each global net that connects to a block pin.

576 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Message
drc-509 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Global net
'<netname>' connected to block pin

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-509 because the block pin Reset is connected to the GND global net.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Designs [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Port Usage [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-510 - IC Device Powering

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks if the power supply pins of the specified symbols are connected to a power supply net.
Power Supply pins are defined by a 'Power' or 'Ground' pin type on the symbol. Additionally a
minimum number of power supply connections can be specified.

Options and Values

• FPGA symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of FPGA symbols.
• Power — Minimum number of power net connections.
• Ground — Minimum number of ground net connections.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 577

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Description
When you enable drc-510, the Verify tool reports each symbol with a power or ground pin that
is not connected to a power supply net or has fewer connections than the minimum number
specified.

You specify each FPGA symbol in the FPGA Symbol(s) option Value field as:
<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>. You may use wildcard characters (*) to match symbol
names. For example, “IC:LCMXO3L_Bank*.*” matches: IC:LCMXO3L-
1300_PartitionBank0.1, IC:LCMXO3L_PartitionBank1.1 or anything similar.

You specify a power supply net in one of the following ways:

• POWER or GROUND Special Component

• Nets with the Power Supply Net property
• Ground and power nets specified in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Power and
Ground Nets specification example in Table 6-4 on page 610.
Optionally, you can specify the minimum number of power net connections per symbol in the
Power option Value field and the minimum number of ground net connections per symbol in the
Ground option Value field.

Message
drc-510 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>)]
<objectcount> [power|ground] pins found on the symbol when <minimum> were expected

drc-510 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] [Power|Ground] pin is not connected to a power supply net

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <objectcount> — The number of design objects found by the Verify tool.
• <minimum> — The minimum number of design objects or circuit conditions required to
satisfy a design rule.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

578 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Example
Given a FPGA symbol(s) value, “FPGAs:LAMXO256C-TQFP100_NoBank.?”, and Ground
option value 4, this circuit violates drc-510 because the component has fewer than four Ground
type pins and because pin 40 is a Ground type pin but is not connected to a power supply net.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a User-Defined Property [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

drc-511 - Invalid Connection of POWER/GROUND Pins

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that pins with Pin Type of POWER or GROUND are connected to a global net, a net
with the 'Power Supply Net' property or a net defined in the VerifyDefaults.ini configuration
file.

Options and Values

• POWER or GROUND Special Component
• Nets with the Power Supply Net property
• Ground and power nets specified in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. For an example, see the
Power and Ground Nets row of the Table 6-4 on page 610.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 579

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

Description
When you enable drc-511, the Verify tool reports each component power or ground type pin
that does not connect to a power supply net.

Message
drc-511 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Pin of
Pin Type <pintype> is not connected to a power supply net

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.

Example
This circuit violates drc-511 because component pin 90 VCC is a power type pin but is not
connected to a power supply net.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a User-Defined Property [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

580 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group

DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 581

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

Device Specific Rules Group

The Device Specific rules group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Device Specific
category) checks design conditions related to a subset of devices you specify.
For example, it is a rule violation if a power net connects to the differential inputs of an
operational amplifier. Rewiring a net is often the way to correct a rule violation.

drc-601 - IC Device Specific Pin Connection Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

drc-603 - Bus Transceiver Pin(s) Hard-wired to Power/Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
drc-604 - Op. Amp. Differential Input Connected to Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
drc-605 - Multi-pin Capacitor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
drc-606 - Hardwired Bus Driver Output(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

drc-601 - IC Device Specific Pin Connection Checks

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that power and ground pins are connected to the same power and ground nets which
electrically supply the device through the specified symbols. These pins have a Pin Type
property of POWER or GROUND.

Options and Values

• IC symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of IC symbols.
• Pin(s) — Space-delimited list of power and ground pin names of the specified IC
symbols.
• Strap symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of strap (jumper) symbols.
• Resistor(s) — Space-delimited list of resistor symbols.
• Direct connection to ground — Report each pin that does not connect directly to a
ground net.
• Direct connection to power — Report each pin that does not connect directly to a power
net.
• Connection to power supply via resistor — Report each pin that does not connect to a
power net via a resistor.
• Connection to: Resistor, no power supply — Report each pin that connects to a resistor
but not a power supply net.
• Connection to: resistor, strap, no power supply — Report each pin that connects to a
resistor and a strap but not a power supply net.

582 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

• Connection to: strap, no resistor — Report each pin that connects to a strap but not a
resistor.
• Connection to: no resistor, no strap — Report each pin that is not connected to a resistor
and a strap.
• Connection to: no resistor — Report each pin that is not connected to a resistor.

Description
When you enable drc-601, the Verify tool reports each specified pin of the specified IC symbol
that does not connect to the circuit elements that you specify with the check options.

You specify each IC symbol in the IC symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “Sample:74HCT174.?” matches Sample:74HCT174.1,
Sample:74HCT174.2, or anything similar.

You specify each power and ground pin of the IC symbol in the Pin(s) option Value field. For
example, “VCC” “VSS” “GND”.

You specify each strap (jumper) symbol in the IC symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”.

You specify each resistor symbol in the Resistor(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”.

You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:

• Add a POWER or GROUND Special Component to the design.

• Assign the Power Supply Net property to nets.
• Specify ground and power nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
Power and Ground Nets specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini
Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

Message
drc-601 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Pin is connected to a resistor but strap is missing

drc-601 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Pin is connected to a strap but resistor is missing

drc-601 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Pin is connected to a resistor but not to a power supply

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 583

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

drc-601 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Pin is connected to a resistor and a strap but not to a power supply

drc-601 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Pin is not connected to a resistor

drc-601 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Pin is not connected to a resistor nor a strap

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

Example
This circuit violates drc-601 because pin VCC-2 connects to a resistor and a strap but not to a
power supply.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

584 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

drc-603 - Bus Transceiver Pin(s) Hard-wired to Power/

Ground
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports if the direction-control or the output-enable pins of the specified transceiver(s) are
connected to a global net, a net with the 'Power Supply Net' property or a power/ground net
defined in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.

Options and Values

• Transceiver symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of transceiver symbols.
• Direction-control pin(s) — Space-delimited list of direction-control pins of the specified
transceiver symbols.
• Output-enable pin(s) — Space-delimited list of output-enable pins of the specified
transceiver symbols.
• Hard-wired direction-control pin — Report each direction-control pin that is connected
to a power or ground net.
• Hard-wired output-enable pin — Report each output-enable pin that is connected to a
power or ground net.

Description
When you enable drc-603, the Verify tool reports each specified direction-control or output-
enable pin of the specified transceiver symbols that connects to a power or ground net.

You specify each transceiver symbol in the Transceiver symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “IC:DIFF-DVR-RCVR.?” matches IC:DIFF-DVR-RCVR.1, IC:DIFF-
DVR-RCVR.2, or anything similar.

You specify the name of each direction-control pin of the transceiver symbol in the Direction-
control pin(s) option Value field.

You specify the name of each output-enable pin of the transceiver symbol in the Output-enable
pin(s) option Value field.

You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:

• Add a POWER or GROUND Special Component to the design.

• Assign the Power Supply Net property to nets.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 585

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

• Specify ground and power nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
Power and Ground Nets specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini
Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

Message
drc-603 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Direction-control pin is connected to the power/ground net '<netname>'

drc-603 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Output-enable pin is connected to the power/ground net '<netname>'

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-603 because the direction-control pin DE connects to a power net VCC.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

586 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

drc-604 - Op. Amp. Differential Input Connected to Power

Supply
Scope: PADS Designer
Checks if the differential inputs of the specified operational amplifier(s) are not connected to a
power supply net, either a global net, a net with the 'Power Supply Net' property or a power/
ground net defined in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.

Options and Values

• Op. Amp. symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of operational amplifier symbols.
• Differential pair(s) — Space-delimited list of differential pair pin names of the specified
Op. Amp. symbols.
• Resistor symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of resistor symbols.
• Direct connection — Report input pins that connect to a power supply net.
• Through a resistor — Report inputs pins of the specified Op. Amps. that connect to a
power supply net via a specified resistor.

Description
When you enable drc-604, the Verify tool reports each input pin of the specified operational
amplifier symbols that connect to a power or ground net directly or via a specified resistor.

You specify each operational amplifier symbol in the Op. Amp. symbol(s) option Value field
as: “<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “Sample:OPAMP_DUAL.?” matches Sample:OPAMP_DUAL.1,
Sample:OPAMP_DUAL.2, or anything similar.

You specify differential input pins in the “Differential pairs(s)” option Value field.

You specify each resistor symbol in the Resistor Symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”.

You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:

• Add a POWER or GROUND Special Component to the design.

• Assign the Power Supply Net property to nets.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 587

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

• Specify ground and power nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
Power and Ground Nets specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini
Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

Message
drc-604 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Differential input is connected through resistor '<symbolname> to power net
'<netname>'

drc-604 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] Differential input is directly connected to power net '<netname>'

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-604 because the differential input IN- is connected through a resistor to
power net VCC.

588 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

drc-605 - Multi-pin Capacitor Connection

Scope: PADS Designer
Checks that the 'input' pins (1 to N/2) are connected together and 'output' pins (N/2+1 to N) are
connected together for an N pin component.

Options and Values

• N pin capacitor symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of N-pin capacitor symbols.

Description
When you enable drc-605, the Verify tool reports each N-pin capacitor that does not connect all
input pins to a common net or all output pins to a common net.

You specify each N-pin capacitor symbol in the N pin capacitor symbol(s) option Value field
as: “<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk character (*) to represent
one or more characters, or a question mark (?) to represent a single character. For example,
Sample:MSECCAP.* matches: Sample:MSECCAP.1, Sample:MSECCAP.2, or anything
similar.

Message
drc-605 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Component pins on one side must be connected together

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 589

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

drc-606 - Hardwired Bus Driver Output(s)

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when the outputs of bus driver components listed in the Driver symbols section, are
connected to a power supply (Power or Ground).

Options and Values

• Driver symbol(s) — Space-delimited list of bus-driver symbols.
• Direction control pin(s) — Space-delimited list of direction control pins of the specified
bus-drivers. For example, the direction input pin (DIR) of a 74245 bus transceiver
device controls transmission of data from bus A to bus B or bus B to bus A, depending
on its input state.
• Logical zero output pin(s) — Space-delimited list of output pin names when the
specified direction control pin input is in the logical 0 state. For example, when the DIR
input pin of a 74245 bus transceiver device is “0”, the pins A1 through A8 are the bus
drivers.
• Logical one output pin(s) — Space-delimited list of output pin names when the specified
direction control pin input is in the logical 1 state. For example, when the DIR input pin
of a 74245 bus transceiver device is “1”, the pins B1 through B8 are the bus drivers.

Description
When you enable drc-606, the Verify tool reports each specified output pin of the specified bus
driver that connects to a ground or power net.

You specify each bus driver symbol in the Driver symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “Sample:74_245.?” matches: Sample:74_245.1, Sample:74_245.2, or
anything similar.

You specify direction control pin names in the Direction control pin(s) option Value field.

You specify the names of output pins that are enabled when the direction control pin is logical 0
in the “Logical zero output pin(s)” option Value field.

590 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group

You specify the names of output pins that are enabled when the direction control pin is logical 1
in the “Logical one output pin(s)” option Value field.

You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:

• Add a POWER or GROUND Special Component to the design.

• Assign the Power Supply Net property to nets.
• Specify ground and power nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
Power and Ground Nets specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini
Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.

Message
drc-606 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] The outputs of the bus driver are hardwired to power supply signal '<netname>'

drc-606 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:

<pinname>] The outputs of the bus driver are hardwired to ground signal '<netname>'

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <refdesignator> — The Ref Designator (Integrated) or REFDES (Netlist) property
value of a component.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 591

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

HDL Checks Rules Group

The HDL Checks rules group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click HDL Checks category)
checks design conditions related to the generation of a VHDL or Verilog HDL format netlist.
For example, it is a rule violation if you use a Verilog HDL reserved keyword to name a net.

drc-701 - VHDL Reserved Keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

drc-702 - Verilog Reserved Keyword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
drc-703 - VHDL Data Type Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
drc-704 - VHDL Read-in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
drc-705 - VHDL Model Availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
drc-706 - Block Symbol Pin and Hierarchical Port Mismatch(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
drc-707 - Net and Bi-directional Hierarchical Port Incompatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
drc-708 - Symbol Pin Type and Associated Model Port Mode Inconsistency . . . . . . . . 599

drc-701 - VHDL Reserved Keyword

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports any VHDL reserved keyword used in the design which may create compilation errors in
the board simulation flow.

Description
When you enable drc-701, the Verify tool reports each pin name or net name that contains a
reserved VHDL keyword.

Message
drc-701 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Pin name
'<pinname>' contains reserved VHDL keyword

drc-701 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Net name '<netname>' contains

reserved VHDL keyword

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

592 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

Examples
This circuit violates drc-701 because the symbol pin name “abs” contains a reserved VHDL
keyword.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-702 - Verilog Reserved Keyword

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports any Verilog reserved keyword used in the design which may create compilation errors
in the board simulation flow.

Description
When you enable drc-702, the Verify tool reports each pin name or net name that contains a
reserved Verilog keyword.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 593

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

Message
drc-702 - [schematic: schematicname, block: blockname, pin: pinname] Pin name 'pinname'
contains reserved Verilog keyword

drc-702 - [schematic: schematicname, net: netname] Net name 'netname' contains reserved
Verilog keyword

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Examples
This circuit violates drc-702 because the symbol pin name “module” contains a reserved
Verilog keyword.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

594 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

drc-703 - VHDL Data Type Mismatch

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports when all the pins connected to the same net are not of the same VHDL data type.

Description
When you enable drc-703, the Verify tool reports each pin connected to the same net that does
not have the same VHDL data type. For example drc-703 is violated if two pins are joined by
the same net but one pin has a VHDL data type of BIT and the other pin has a VHDL data type
of STD_LOGIC.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-704 - VHDL Read-in Output

Scope: PADS Designer
VHDL Buffer data type should be used for read-in outputs to avoid compilation errors.

Description
When you enable drc-704, the Verify tool reports each output type port symbol that is read by
another design object. For example a circuit that connects an output type port symbol to an input
pin via wire violates drc-704.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 595

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-705 - VHDL Model Availability

Scope: PADS Designer
Reports all components without an associated simulation model. Components are parts or
Blocks carrying the Level property set to VHDL or Verilog.

Description
When you enable drc-705, the Verify tool reports each component that is missing a simulation
model.

Message
drc-705 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] No Mapping File found

drc-705 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] Simulation model missing.

'[VHDL File|Verilog File]' and '[VHDL Model|Verilog Model]' properties missing

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

596 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

drc-706 - Block Symbol Pin and Hierarchical Port

Mismatch(es)
Scope: PADS Designer
Block symbol pin and hierarchical port mismatch(es).

Options and Values

• Check Pin Type/Port Direction mismatch(es) — Report Pin Type and Port Direction
mismatches between block pins and underlying schematic ports.
• Check Missing Symbol Pin(s) — Report when the hierarchical ports of an underlying
schematic do not appear as pins on the block symbol.
• Check Missing Hierarchical Port(s) — Report when the pins on a block symbol do not
appear as ports in the underlying schematic.

Description
When you enable drc-706, the Verify tool reports any mismatch between a block symbol pin
type and the corresponding child schematic port’s direction including missing or additional
ports.

Message
drc-706 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Pin Type
mismatch: symbol=<pintype>, schematic=<porttype>

drc-706 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Pin

<pinname> has no corresponding hierarchical port underneath

drc-706 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] Hierarchical Port <portname>

has no corresponding pin on the block symbol

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <portname> — The Name property value of a hierarchical pin (port) symbol of an
underlying schematic.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.
• <porttype> — The Pin Type property value of a hierarchical pin (port) symbol of an
underlying schematic.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 597

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-707 - Net and Bi-directional Hierarchical Port

Incompatibility
Scope: PADS Designer
Check for Nets and bi-directional hierarchical ports of different names connected together. This
construct causes a problem when generating a VHDL netlist.

Description
When you enable drc-707, the Verify tool reports each bidirectional pin connected to a net with
a different name.

If this condition exists in the design, the design entry tool reports the following error when you
export a VHDL netlist:

ERROR: Hier Pin Name '<portname>' on hierarchical bidirectional pin does not match
attached Net name '<netname>'

Message
drc-707 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Bidirectional
Pin <pinname> is connected to net <netname>.

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.

598 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

drc-708 - Symbol Pin Type and Associated Model Port

Mode Inconsistency
Scope: PADS Designer
Reports inconsistencies between the Symbol's Pin Type and the corresponding Model's Port
Mode. Inconsistencies may cause compilation issues when netlisting. Optionally, ANALOG
type symbol pins may be ignored to reduce the number of errors on discrete components.

Options and Values

• Ignore ANALOG symbol pin(s) — Disregard pins with Pin Type ANALOG.

Description
When you enable drc-708, the Verify tool reports each symbol pin type that does not match the
port type of the associated model.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 599

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group

VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]

600 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Links Rules Group

Links Rules Group

The Links rules group (choose Tools > Verify menu item, click Links category) checks design
conditions related to links.
For example, it is a rule violation to have a link symbol that does not point to a sheet.

drc-820 - Isolated Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

drc-821 - Un-named Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
drc-822 - Multiple Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
drc-823 - Link and Net Naming Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

drc-820 - Isolated Link

Scope: PADS Designer and Xpedition System Designer
The link does not point anywhere.

Description
When you enable drc-820, the Verify tool reports each link that does not point to at least one
other link.

Message
drc-820 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The link does not point
anywhere

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-820 because the MyUndefinedBlock link is not associated with any
other links in the design.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 601

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Links Rules Group

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-821 - Un-named Link

Scope: PADS Designer and Xpedition System Designer
The link must be given a name.

Description
When you enable drc-821, the Verify tool reports each link that does not have a Name property
value.

Message
drc-821 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The link must be given
a name

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-821 because the link has no Name property value.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-822 - Multiple Destinations

Scope: PADS Designer and Xpedition System Designer
The link points to multiple destinations. This is legal but may be a mistake.

602 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Links Rules Group

Description
When you enable drc-822, the Verify tool reports each link that points to multiple links of the
same name.

Message
drc-822 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The link points to
multiple destinations

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.

Example
This circuit violates drc-822 because the link points to multiple links.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

drc-823 - Link and Net Naming Consistency

Scope: PADS Designer and Xpedition System Designer
Reports when the name of a Link symbol is different from the name of the net it is connected to.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 603

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax

Description
When you enable drc-823, the Verify tool reports each link that connects to a net with a
different name.

Message
drc-823 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The Link is connected
to a net with different name '<netname>'

Where:

• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.

• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.

Example
This circuit violates drc-823 because the link LinkWithFanout is connected to a net with
different name MyFlatNet.

Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular

Expression Syntax
The property and label syntax use the following regular expression syntax for pattern matching:
• A regular expression is zero or more branches, separated by |. If any one of the branches
contains a pattern match, the regular expression is a match.
• A branch is zero or more pieces, concatenated. The DRC regular expression interpreter
searches for a match for the first piece of the branch, followed by a match for the second
piece, until the regular expression interpreter reaches the end of the branch.
• A piece is an atom followed by one of the following quantifiers:
o * — the interpreter looks for a sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom.
o + — the interpreter looks for a sequence of 1 or more matches of the atom.

604 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

o ? — the interpreter looks for a match of the atom, or the null string.
• An atom is a regular expression in parentheses, which can contain any of the following:
o a range
o . (causes the interpreter to match any single character)
o ^ (causes the interpreter to match the null string at the beginning of the input string)
o $ (causes the interpreter to match the null string at the end of the input string)
o a \ followed by a single character (causes the interpreter to match that character)
o or a single character with no other significance (causes the interpreter to match that
character)
• A range is a sequence of characters enclosed in brackets ([]). The interpreter normally
matches any single character from the sequence. If the sequence begins with ^, the
interpreter matches any single character not from the rest of the sequence. A hyphen (-)
separating two characters in the sequence is shorthand for the full list of ASCII
characters between them (for example, [0-9] matches any decimal digit). To include a
literal ] in the sequence, make it the first character (following a possible ^). To include a
literal - in the sequence, make it the first or last character.
Related Topics
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity

Resolution
Regular expression ambiguity resolutions include:
• If a regular expression matches two different parts of the input string, the DRC regular
expression interpreter matches the part that begins earliest. If both matching parts of the
input string begin in the same place, but match different lengths, or match the same
length in different ways, the following occurs:
o The interpreter evaluates the possibilities in a list of branches, in order, from left-to-
right.
o The interpreter evaluates the possibilities for *, +, and ? by looking at the longest
first.
o The interpreter considers nested constructs from the outermost in, and the interpreter
considers concatenated constructs from the leftmost-first.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 605

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

o The interpreter chooses the match in the earliest part of the input string, in the first
chosen part.
o If there is more than one choice, the interpreter makes the next choice in the same
manner by looking at the earliest possibility, subject to the decision on the first
choice.
For example, (ab|a)b*c could match abc in one of two ways. The first choice is between ab and
a. Since ab is earlier, and does lead to a successful overall match, the interpreter chooses ab.
Since the b is already spoken for, the b* must match its last possibility-the empty string-since it
must respect the earlier choice.

In the particular case where no |'s are present and there is only one *, +, or ?, the result is that the
interpreter chooses the longest possible match. So ab*' presented with an input string xabbbby,
matches abbbb. Note that if ab* is tried against xabyabbbz, it matches ab just after x, due to the
begins-earliest rule. (In effect, the decision on where to start the match is the first choice made
by the interpreter, hence subsequent choices must respect the decision even if this leads the
interpreter to less-preferred alternatives.)

Related Topics
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax

DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

When you invoke the Design Rules Checker (DRC) Verify tool (Tools > Verify menu item),
the Verify dialog box opens. The Verify tool uses one or more .ini configuration files found
along the search path to configure the Verify dialog box (both the Settings and Rules tab).
The Verify tool uses the settings from the first defaults file found along the search path, and
then overwrites duplicate settings with any differences found in subsequently found .ini files.
You can view which defaults file(s) the Verify tool uses on the Verify dialog box Settings pane.

These .ini files use XML formatting. If you or an administrator has the proper file permissions,
you can modify the \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini file to
reconfigure the initial Verify defaults for anyone invoking the tool from \<install_dir>\
<release>\SDD_HOME\...

You can modify writable %WDIR%\<path>\VerifyDefaults.ini defaults file to affect multiple

Verify tool users in multiple projects.

The search order is a little different with an integrated project type that uses concurrent design
in comparison to a design that is not a concurrent design. In a concurrent design, it is not
desirable for each user’s local Verify settings to be saved to the same Verify.ini file located in
the concurrent design project directory. To prevent users from overwriting each other’s local

606 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

Verify settings, the tool saves each user’s Verify settings in a unique location in the first
writeable WDIR found along the search path, designated as the following:

\<1st_writeable_WDIR_path>\<release>\config\<unique_id>\Verify.ini

Verify Tool Search Order for a Netlist Project

The Verify tool checks the following netlist project type files in the order listed:

1. \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3>
The Verify tool loads and merges .ini file content and compares, key by key, whether a
new value is found. Then the tool overwrites the existing one.
3. \<project_dir>\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini (Netlist project)
4. \<project_dir>\NetlistVerify.ini (Netlist project - Locally saved settings)
Note: Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini orNetlistVerifyDefaults.ini
settings appear in your local NetlistVerify.ini file.

Verify Tool Search Order for an Integrated Project (No Current Design)
For a PADS Integrated project type that does not use the Remote Server Configuration Manager
(RSCM), the Verify tool checks the following files in the order listed:

1. \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3>
The Verify tool uses the first VerifyDefaults.ini file found in this path.
3. \<project_dir>\VerifyDefaults.ini
4. \<project_dir>\Verify.ini - Locally saved settings

Note
Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini settings appear in your local
Verify.ini file.

Verify Tool Search Order for an Integrated Project (Concurrent Design)

The following list presents the files in the order that the Verify tool checks for them in an
integrated project that uses a Remote Server Configuration Manager (RSCM) for concurrent
design.

1. \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini (PADS Integrated

project)

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 607

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3>
Integrated project — The Verify tool uses the first VerifyDefaults.ini file found in this
path.
3. \<first_writeableWDIR>\config\<unique_id>\Verify.ini (Integrated project - Locally
saved settings)

Note
Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini settings appear in your local
Verify.ini file.

Example 1 - Concurrent Project

Figure 6-1 shows an example of a search order for a concurrent project type.

Example 6-1. DRC Verify Tool File Precedence Order (Concurrent Design)

Example2 - Non-Concurrent Project

Figure 6-2 shows an example search orderfor a project type that does not use the Remote Server
Configuration Manager (RSCM).

608 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC

Example 6-2. DRC Verify Tool File Precedence Order (Non-Concurrent Project)

Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box

VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC

For some DRC checks, the Verify tool (choose Tools > Verify menu item) uses the
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file as input. You can specify a variety of circuit elements,
DRC option names, and corresponding values in the Defines section of the VerifyDefaults.ini
file.
For more information see “DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File” on page 41.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 609

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC

Table 6-4. VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites and Examples

DRC Circuit Element Prerequisites/Examples
• DRC Net Check Property You specify the name of the DRC Net Check and DRC
name Net Class properties in the Defines section of the
• DRC Net Class Property VerifyDefaults.ini file:
name <Defines>
<Option Name="net_class" Value="DRC_NCLS" /
>
<Option Name="net_check" Value="DRC_NCHK"/>
</Defines>
If you do not specify the property names, the default
name for the DRC Net Class property is “DRC_NCLS”
and the defautl name for the DRC Net Check property is
“DRC_NCHK”.
DRC Net Check Property and DRC Net Class property
name specifications are used by rules from the Verify
DRC “Connectivity Rules Group” on page 506.
DRC Net Class Default Property You specify a DRC Net Class Default property in the
Defines section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file:
<Defines>
<Option Name="net_class_default"
Value="POWER" />
/Defines>
The DRC Net Class Default Property specification is
used by rules from the Verify DRC “Connectivity Rules
Group” on page 506.
• DRC Positive Property name You specify the name of the DRC Positive property and
• DRC Negative Property DRC Negative property assigned to a symbol pin in the
name Defines section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file:
<Defines>
<Option Name="drc_negative" Value="DRC
Negative" />
<Option Name="drc_positive" Value="DRC
Positive"/>
</Defines>
If you do not specify the property name, the default
name for the DRC Positive property is “DRC Positive”
and the default name for the DRC Negative property is
“DRC Negative”.
DRC Positive Property and DRC Negative Property
name specifications are used by rules from the Verify
DRC “Electrical Rules Group” on page 543.

610 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC

Table 6-4. VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites and Examples (cont.)

DRC Circuit Element Prerequisites/Examples
DRC Supply Pin name You specify the name of the DRC Supply Pin assigned
to a net in the Defines section of the VerifyDefaults.ini
file:
<Defines>
<Option Name="supply_pin" Value="DRC Supply
Pin" />
</Defines>
If you do not specify the property name, the default
name for the DRC Supply Pin property is “DRC Supply
Pin”.
DRC Supply Pin name specification is used by rules
from the Verify DRC “Power & Ground Rules Group”
on page 567.
Power and Ground Nets You specify power and ground nets in the Defines
section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file:
<Defines>
<Option Name="ground_nets" Value="CGND GND
+0V* G0V* A0V*"/>
<Option Name="power_nets" Value="VCC +5V -
3.3V* +3.3V"/>
</Defines>
You can use wildcard character (*) in the ground_nets
and power_nets definitions. For example, to match
power net names such as +2.5VCC, +2.5VCCIO, or
anything similar, you can specify the value: +2.5V*.
Note: Use an asterick (*) wildcard to represent one
or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard
to represent a single character.
You can specify a polarized power net by preceding the
value with a plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) character
followed by a numerical value.
Power and ground nets specifications are used by rules
from the following Verify DRC groups:
• “Device Specific Rules Group” on page 582
• “Electrical Rules Group” on page 543
• “Power & Ground Rules Group” on page 567

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 611

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC

Table 6-4. VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites and Examples (cont.)

DRC Circuit Element Prerequisites/Examples
Resistors You specify resistors in the Defines section of the
VerifyDefaults.ini file.
By default, the Verify tool matches a resistor symbol
name that includes the string “res”:
<Defines>
<Option Name="resistors" Value=*res*.*" />
</Defines>
In the resistors definition, the wildcard character (*)
preceding and following "res", match symbol names:
res.1, vres.1, hres.1, resistor.1 or anything similar.
Note: Use an asterick (*) wildcard to represent one
or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard
to represent a single character.
If your resistor does not have the string “res” in the
symbol name, you need to add a similar definition line
(as shown in the previous example) in the Defines
section of the local Verify.ini file to include a symbol
name.
Resistor definitions are used by rules from the Verify
DRC groups:
• “Connectivity Rules Group” on page 506
• “Electrical Rules Group” on page 543
Serial Symbols You specify serial symbols in the Defines section of the
VerifyDefaults.ini file:
<Defines>
<Option Name="serials"
Value="discrete:res.1 *cap*.*" />
</Defines>
In the serials definition, the wildcard character (*)
preceding and following "cap", match symbol names
such as cap.1, cappol.1, bycap.1, cap.2 or anything
similar.
Note: Use an asterick (*) wildcard to represent one
or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard
to represent a single character.
Serial symbol definitions are used by rules from the
Verify DRC “Connectivity Rules Group” on page 506.

Related Topics
Verify Dialog Box

612 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC

Creating a User-Defined Property [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]

VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 613

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC

614 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Appendix A
Supplemental Information

The following topics provide supplemental reference information:

Design Entry Tool COLORS Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
HyperLynx LineSim - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Pin (Port) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Property Editing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Verilog HDL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Verilog HDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Using Parameters in Verilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Example VHDL Netlist Output File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
The QCV Netlist Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Search Query Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Design Entry Tool COLORS Element

Each object and layer defined in the design entry tool and stored in the DxDesigner.xml file
contains a COLOR definition line similar to the bolded line in the following example:
<NET>
<key name="VISIBLE" value="1" />
<key name="SELECTABLE" value="1" />
<key name="COLOR" value="0x00ff00" />
<key name="FILL_STYLE" value="1" />
<key name="LINE_STYLE" value="0" />
</NET>

Figure A-1 shows the default colors you can choose to assign to an object.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 615

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element

Figure A-1. Default Colors Choices for Objects and Layers

Note
Each object type uses the color defined in Setup > Settings menu item, Display (category),
Objects (subcategory), and the DxDesigner.xml file if the Color property (on that object) is
set to Automatic as shown in Figure A-2. Otherwise, each selected object color can be set
individually in the Properties window.

Figure A-2. Choosing Automatic Color Property Value in the Properties Window

The color choices are translated to a hex value in the DxDesigner.xml file. The hex value
defines the Red, Green, and Blue intensities to make up each unique color value. The following
example defines a value of black. The first two numbers following the 0x are the intensity
setting for Red (00, meaning no Red color), the next two are for green, the final two are for blue.

<!-- R-G-B- -->

<value>0x000000</value>

To help with converting colors from pre-Release 2007 PADS Designer designs, the COLORS
element definition section of the DxDesigner.xml file is divided into two sections, one for
SCREEN and one for PRINTER to correspond with pre-Release 2007 color settings as shown in
Figure A-3. When converting a pre-Release design to the current Release, this DxDesigner.xml
section helps to map the old settings to a new value set (or maintain the original defaults).

616 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element

In addition to the default colors, you can define your own custom colors by clicking the Other
button from the color palette to bring up the Color dialog box.

Figure A-3. Pre-Release-2007 Color Settings Mapped in Current

DxDesigner.xml

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 617

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
HyperLynx LineSim - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage

HyperLynx LineSim - Passives Prefixes -

Models Usage
Passive components are exported to LineSim® as a package/connector symbol.
Note
For information about assigning models to the symbol, refer to the topic Selecting Package
and Connector Models in the LineSim User Guide.

The property SIM_MODEL_FILE is used to connect a simulation model file with the symbol in
the design capture tool. The property SIM_MODEL names the model in a simulation model
file. If these two properties are not present, LineSim uses the Part Name property to identify the
model file with .sp at the end of the filename.

For example, you might use the SIM_MODEL_FILE property to identify a SPICE or
Touchstone model file for a connector component.

When the models are changed in HyperLynx®, importing from HyperLynx using HyperLynx
LineSim, the SIM_MODEL_FILE and SIM_MODEL properties are changed to the new value.

Related Topics
Exporting to HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Importing From HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]

Pin (Port) Types

Scope: Symbol Editor
Pins define the electrical connection between the symbol and wiring in a schematic design.
Each pin in a symbol object must have a type definition to enable placement and wiring in a
schematic design.

Description
Pins can represent either a single electrical connection point, multiple electrical connection
points, or a bus pin. The following table defines the available pin type definitions and direction
that appear in the Symbol Editor Pins window.
Table A-1. Pin (Port) Types Used in the Symbol Editor
Pin (Port) Type Description
IN (Input) Digital input pins.
OUT (Output) Digital output pins that are not TRI (Tristate), OEM (Open emitter), or
OCL (Open collector).

618 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Property Editing Rules

Table A-1. Pin (Port) Types Used in the Symbol Editor (cont.)
Pin (Port) Type Description
BI (Bidirectional or Digital pins that are both input and output (process input and output
Bidir) signals).
TRI (Tristate) Digital three-state output pin.
OCL (Open Open collector output pin.
collector)
OEM (Open emitter) Emitter coupled logic (ECL) output pin.
POWER Supply pin, typically used for power pins on symbols (positive and
negative rails). Apply this pin type to positive and negative tap
symbols.
GROUND Ground pin, typically used for ground pins on symbols. Apply this pin
type to ground tap symbols.
ANALOG Pin used for analog devices and for analog pins on digital devices (for
example, DAC output pins and ADC input pins).
TERMINAL Terminal pin for VHDL-AMS (Analog Mixed Signal).
Unknown symbol pin Pin that requires a pin (port) type association.
type

Property Editing Rules

When you place a symbol on your design, you can select which of the symbol properties to use,
and then add or edit them. The PADS Designer tool enforces rules for what property editing
actions are allowed depending on property type.
For editing purposes, there are three types of properties. The rules for editing them appear in
Table A-2 on page 619.
Table A-2. Property Editing Rules
Property Type Example Editing Actions Allowed
Symbol Property Partition • Change values
• Added by your librarian to the symbol
Component Property Description • Change values
• Added by the user to the placed • Delete
component
System Property Id • None
• Added by the design entry tool

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 619

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters

You control property and value visibility with the following order of precedence, with “1”
having the highest precedence and “3” the lowest:

1. Component level settings (when placed on the schematic)

2. Symbol level settings (assigned by your librarian)
3. Property Definition Editor level settings
In an integrated project, you create new properties with the PADS Library Tools Property
Definition Editor. See “Defining Properties for Use in Schematic and Layout Designs ” in the
PADS Library Tools User’s Guide.

In a netlist project, you create and edit properties with the Property Definition Editor (choose
Tools > Property Definition Editor menu item). For more information see “Property
Definitions in a Netlist Project” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.

Related Topics
Properties Window

Verilog HDL Parameters

In order to make lower-level blocks reusable, parameters are often used within them (for
example, as length and width values for a MOSFET). By passing named parameters to a lower-
level block and assigning them different values for each instance, the resulting properties of the
lower-level block can be changed without changing its definition.
The Verilog Netlister supports parameter passing by attaching a Parameter Value text property
to a lower-level block instance (that is, a block symbol or symbol with a Block Name text
property in the schematic). Any parameters defined in the Parameter value are passed to the
lower-level block and visible to all components in the lower-level block. The text of the
Parameter value might look like this:

MY_L=10
MY_W=20

If you specify more than one parameter on the same line, enclose each parameter in quotes. For
example:

"MY_L=10","MY_W=20"

620 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters

For SPICE, numbers can be suffixed with one of the following letters, using upper-case or
lower-case, to provide magnitude scaling:

f - 1E-15
p - 1E-12
n - 1E-9
u - 1E-6
mil - 25.4E-6
m - 1E-3
k - 1E+3
meg - 1E+6
g - 1E+9
t - 1E+12

More complex expressions can be defined for parameters, including mathematical operators (+,-
,*,/) parenthetic grouping, and references to other parameters. For example, the following is a
valid parameter definition:

MY_PARM=(10.5p+@MY_OTHER_PARM)*2

References to other parameters must include a @ prefix before the parameter name. Note that
parameters can be passed down multiple levels of hierarchy by explicitly including a reference
to the upper-level parameter in a Parameter Value text property attached to an instance of a
lower-level circuit. For example:

MY_PARM_2=@MY_PARM

In this case, @MY_PARM refers to the parameter passed in to the circuit containing an instance
of the lower-level circuit, and MY_PARM_2 defines a new parameter for the lower-level circuit
using the value of MY_PARM passed from above. If desired, the same name can be used for
both.

When defining parameters, additional white space can be inserted into the expression to
improve readability. Parameter names are case-insensitive.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 621

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Objects

Verilog HDL Objects

Verilog HDL parameters are valid for component instances and nets, and are defined by
attaching Parameter Value text properties to symbol instances and nets. When attached to a
symbol instance which represents either a block defined in the design or a model defined
outside the design (for example, in a library), the HDL parameters will act as user-defined
name/value pairs which are passed to the block definition or library model.
When HDL parameters are attached to a symbol which represents a primitive device or to a net,
the parameters are interpreted as physical properties of the device or net. The “Verilog HDL
Parameters Used as Physical Properties” on page 624 topic discusses this special case in more
detail.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog

Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined

Name/Value Pairs
HDL parameters can be used as as user-defined name/value pairs and you can see the
corresponding results in the netlist.

622 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs

Figure A-4. Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs

The schematic in Figure A-4 contains a single instance of a block named lower and has a
Parameter Value text property attached which defines three parameters: RISE, FALL, and OFF.
Assume that the pins of the instance are connected to nets of the same names as the pins. When
this instance is netlisted, the following results:

SPICE:
Xlower1 In1 In2 Out1 Out2 lower RISE=5 FALL=6 OFF=7
Verilog:
lower lower1 (.In1(In1), .In2(In2), .Out1(Out1), .Out2(Out2));
defparam lower1.RISE=5;
defparam lower1.FALL=6;
defparam lower1.OFF=7;

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 623

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties

Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical

Properties
You can use Verilog HDL parameters to define physical properties, and you can view the
corresponding results in the netlist.
Figure A-5. Verilog HDL Parameters for Defining Physical Properties

The schematic shown in Figure A-5 is the block definition for the lower block instance used in
the previous figure. It contains two Verilog primitive gates, a buffer 'buf' and an inverter 'not.'
The buffer 'buf' has a Parameter value which specifies a propagation delay for the gate. The
inverter 'not' has a Parameter value which specifies the drive strength for the gate. Finally, the
wire connected to port Out2 has a Parameter value which specifies rising, falling, and turn-off
propagation delay for the wire.

The following results would be obtained from the Verilog netlister for this schematic block:

module lower (In1, In2, Out1, Out2);

input In1, In2;
output Out1, Out2;
parameter RISE=0;
parameter FALL=0;
parameter OFF=0;
wire In1, In2, Out1;
wire #(RISE, FALL, OFF) Out2;
buf #(5) (Out1, In1);
not (strong1, strong0) (Out2, In2);
endmodule

624 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Using Parameters in Verilog

Note
Parameters used in a schematic block will be defined in the corresponding Verilog module
with a default value of zero. In order to prevent potential simulation errors, always override
the default values with specific values attached to each instance of the schematic block.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Using Parameters in Verilog

Using Parameters in Verilog

The following table defines the keywords recognized in Verilog, on which objects they can be
used, and what values the keyword can assume.

Table A-3. Verilog-Recognized Keywords

Keyword Objects Supported Values
DELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
RISEDELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
FALLDELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
OFFDELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
DECAY= Wires (trireg only) single delay value
STRENGTH= Components small medium large
STRENGTH1= Components supply1 strong1 pull1 weak1 highz1
STRENGTH0= Components supply0 strong0 pull0 weak0 highz0
WIRETYPE Wires trireg

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 625

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed

How the VHDL Netlist is Processed

All settings, such as mapping of names, external packages, etc. are stored in a hdlutils.ini file
that is created in the project directory during creation of the VHDL netlist.
Processing begins at the lowest-level block and proceeds to the highest-level block. Each block
is written as an entity, with a port map that lists all of its external pins.

The architecture is then written, declaring signals that are only visible within the block, any
needed temporary signals, and any needed component declarations. Then a component
instantiation is written for each instance of each component using the port mapping from the
component pin name to the block net name.

Temporary signals are sometimes necessary because VHDL does not allow the direct
connection of certain pin types to other pin types. The temporary signals provide a layer of
indirection that satisfies the VHDL semantics.

VHDL requires that the Hier Pin Name of a hierarchical bidirectional pin match the Net Name
of the net connected to the pin.

A project file that contains the location of the Remote Server Configuration Manager and
needed configuration files is required.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

Example VHDL Netlist Output File

The following is an example output file.

626 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

-- File : E:\scott\1405test\vhdltest1\genhdl\sbk\sample.vhd
-- CDB : E:\scott\1405test\vhdltest1\sample.cdb
-- By : CDB2VHDL Netlister version 15.0.0.0
-- Time : Mon January 27 11 14:46:27 2014
-- Entity/architecture declarations
use work.all;
library IEEE;
use IEEE.std_logic_1164.all;
entity bottom is
port(
P1 : out BIT;
P2 : out BIT;
X : in BIT;
Y : in BIT;
Z : in BIT
);
end bottom;
architecture bottom of bottom is
-- Component declarations
component INV
port(
A : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
-- Signal declarations
signal cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 : BIT;
begin
-- Signal assignments
cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 <= Y after 0 ns;
-- Component instances
XCMP1 : INV
port map(
A => X,
O => P1
);
XCMP3 : INV
port map(
A => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1,
O => P2
);
XCMP6 : INV
port map(
A => Z,
O => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1
);
end bottom;
use work.all;
library IEEE;
use IEEE.std_logic_1164.all;
entity top is
port(
A : in std_ulogic;
B : in std_ulogic;
C : in std_ulogic;
D : in std_ulogic;
ZZZ : out std_ulogic
);

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 627

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

end top;
architecture top of top is
-- Component declarations
component bottom
port(
P1 : out BIT;
P2 : out BIT;
X : in BIT;
Y : in BIT;
Z : in BIT
);
end component;
component TRISTA
port(
O : out BIT;
E : in BIT;
A : in BIT
);
end component;
component AND3
port(
A : in BIT;
B : in BIT;
C : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
component INV
port(
A : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
component AND2
port(
O : out BIT;
A : in BIT;
B : in BIT
);
end component;
-- Signal declarations
signal AAA : std_ulogic;
signal ABC : BIT;
signal cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 : BIT;
signal XSIG010010 : BIT;
signal XSIG010013 : BIT;
signal XSIG010017 : BIT;
signal XYZ0 : BIT;
begin
-- Signal assignments
AAA <= A after 0 ns;
cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 <= '0';
-- Component instances
lower : bottom
port map(
P1 => ABC,
P2 => XSIG010010,
X => XYZ0,

628 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
The QCV Netlist Output Format

Y => XSIG010013,
Z => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1
);
XCMP4 : TRISTA
port map(
To_stdulogic(O) => ZZZ,
E => XSIG010013,
A => XSIG010017
);
XCMP2 : AND3
port map(
A => ABC,
B => XSIG010010,
C => To_bit(D),
O => XSIG010017
);
XCMP3 : INV
port map(
A => To_bit(C),
O => XSIG010013
);
XYZ0_1 : AND2
port map(
O => XYZ0,
A => To_bit(AAA),
B => To_bit(B)
);
end top;

Related Topics
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed

The QCV Netlist Output Format

The Quick Connection View (QCV) netlist is divided into fields that are separated with a
separator (a space in these examples) as follows:
FIELD1[separator]FIELD2[separator]FIELD3[separator]FIELD4[separator]

Also see Figure A-6.

FIELD1 - Is a keyword to identify the type of net as either:

• NET
• PIN
FIELD2 - Is the colon character (“:”)

FIELD3 - Shows the hierarchical net name in between single quotes

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 629

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax

FIELD4 - Shows the net connections to all pins

Figure A-6. Quick Connection View Netlist Example 1

Related Topics
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]

Search Query Syntax

In addition to plain text, you can use operator and wildcard characters to search the design or
database in the Edit > Find and Replace > Search window to narrow the list of found parts.
In the search field at the top of the window, you can use any of the characters shown in the
following table to narrow the search for parts.

The following list describes some search considerations:

• Regarding wildcards (* or ?):

o They can be used in stand-alone values such as CAP* and 10*k.

630 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax

o They can be used with the Like (=) operator.

o They do not work with the Equal (==) operator.
• Searches are case-insensitive.
• In the case of a search that uses a property name on the left-side of an operator such as
<property> <operator> <text>, you do not need to double quote a property name
string that contains spaces.
• You must enclose the following special characters in double-quotes if you want to
search for a text string that contains any of them:
&=></@“”|
Some examples of text strings that require double-quotes are:
Search for Enter
strings with spaces “strings with spaces”
words “with” quotes “words ““with”” quotes”
logic@chip “logic@chip”

The - (not) character is only considered a special character if it is used as the first
character of a text string.

Table A-4. Search Query Syntax Examples

Search String Examples Result of Search
<text> CAP Displays all lines containing CAP.
?<text> ?n In the first example, using the “any single
<text>? character” wildcard (?), displays lines
containing in, on, Pn, and so on.
<text>* CAP* Using the “zero or more characters” wildcard
*<text> (*), displays lines containing CAP,
CAPACITOR, CAPACITY, and so on.
<text1> & <text2> CAP&10uF Using the AND (&) operator, displays lines
<text1>&<text2> CAP 10uF containing both CAP and 10uF. Because the &
operator is implied between multiple strings,
<text1> <text2> you do not need to use it, as shown in the
second example.
<text1> | <text2> CAP | RES 5% Using the OR ( | ) operator, displays lines
containing either CAP or RES, which contains
5%.
<property>==<text> Value==1 Using the Equal (==) operator, displays lines
with the Value property equal to 1.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 631

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax

Table A-4. Search Query Syntax Examples (cont.)

Search String Examples Result of Search
<property><compar Cost > .1 Using one of the comparison operators, displays
_operator><text> Cost >= .1 lines that satisfy the mathematical operation.
These comparisons also work on strings, not
Cost < .1 just numbers.
Cost <= .1
Cost <>.1
<property>=<text> Value=1 Using the Like (=) operator, displays lines with
the Value property containing 1, such as 10, 1,
1ohm.
“<text>” “Part Label” Using quotes (“ ”) to treat the text as a string of
characters, displays lines that contain the string
“Part Label”. Use quotes to escape special
characters used within a string such as “1/2”, or
“start->stop”.
@<database_type> @Parametric Data Using the Scope (@) operator, the first example
or @Parts.Capacitor displays all lines within the Parametric Data
database type.
@<database_type>.< @Capacitor
partition> The second example displays all lines within
the Parts database type, in the Capacitor library
or partition.
@<partition> Assuming that the third example has a
Capacitor partition in more than one database
type, the search displays all lines from all
databases types containing the Capacitor
partition.
Note: The following conditions apply to
using the Scope operator:
• When a search does not include the Scope
operator, the search uses the scope from the
Column Chooser window.
• When you use the Scope operator, the
search ignores the Column Chooser window
scope settings.
<property> / Value /Symbol =1 Using the Level character (/), displays lines that
<property_level> have a Value property value equal to 1 on the
=<value> Symbol property level.
-<text> -CAP Using the NOT (-) operator, the first example
or -@Parametric Data displays all lines except those containing CAP.
-@<database_type> The second example displays all lines except
those in the Parametric Data database type.

632 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches

Related Topics
Parts and Components Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Search for Objects in a Design or Components in a Library [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]

Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches

Scope: PADS Designer
Property and label syntax preferences use the following regular expression syntax:
• A regular expression is zero or more branches, separated by |. It matches anything that
matches one of the branches.
• A branch is zero or more pieces, concatenated. It matches a match for the first, followed
by a match for the second, until it reaches the end of a branch.
• A piece is an atom possibly followed by *, +, or ?. An atom followed by * matches a
sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom. An atom followed by + matches a sequence
of 1 or more matches of the atom. An atom followed by ? matches a match of the atom,
or the null string.
• An atom is a regular expression in parentheses (matching a match for the regular
expression), a range, . (matching any single character), ^ (matching the null string at the
beginning of the input string), $ (matching the null string at the end of the input string),
a \ followed by a single character (matching that character), or a single character with no
other significance (matching that character).
• A range is a sequence of characters enclosed in []. It normally matches any single
character from the sequence. If the sequence begins with ^, it matches any single
character not from the rest of the sequence. If two characters in the sequence are
separated by -, this is shorthand for the full list of ASCII characters between them (e.g.
[0-9] matches any decimal digit). To include a literal ] in the sequence, make it the first
character (following a possible ^). To include a literal -, make it the first or last
character.
Related Topics
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search

Conditions
Scope: PADS Designer
You can add numeric operators to your Databook database library search conditions.

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 633

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

Table A-5. Numeric Comparison Operators

Operator Function Example
= Represents values equal to the specified The = 20 operator returns a list
numeric value. of components for which the
numeric value of the specified
property equals 20.
> Represents values greater than the The > 20 operator matches all
specified numeric value. numeric values of the specified
property greater than 20.
< Represents values less than the specified The < 1.25 operator matches all
numeric value. numeric values of the specified
property less than 1.25.
>= Represents values greater than or equal to The >= 32 operator matches all
the specified numeric value. numeric values of the specified
property greater than or equal to
32.
<= Represents values less than or equal to the The <= 0.05 operator matches
specified numeric value. all numeric values of the
specified property less than or
equal to 0.05.
!= Represents values not equal to the The != 34 operator matches all
specified value. numeric values of the specified
property except those that equal
34.

Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search

Conditions
Scope: PADS Designer
The Databook tool supports using wildcards in your database library search conditions. By
default, the Databook tool uses the standard SQL percent (%) wildcard to match multiple string
characters and underscore (_) wildcard to match an individual character.

634 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

Note
To search for components using wildcards, the database is required to contain string data
and the “like” operator must be used.

The following wildcard characters are supported:

• Percent sign (%) which represents any of zero or more (multiple) characters.
For example:
o string% — Matches any value beginning with string.
o %string — Matches any value ending with string.
• Underscore (_) which represents any individual character.
For example:
o string_ — Matches string followed by one character.
o _string — Matches any two characters followed by string.
Use the question mark (?) wildcard symbol to match a single character and the asterisk (*)
wildcard symbol to match multiple characters in your database library search.

Note
Databook does not support question mark (?) and asterisk (*) wildcard symbols when
connected to PADS Library Tools through EDM Library Connector.

For example, using RESISTO? as a search string only yields RESISTOR whereas RESISTO*
yields a list of all parts in the database that include the RESISTO string (such as RESISTOR and
RESISTOR123).

Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7 635

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

636 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Third-Party Information
Open source and third-party software may be included in the System Design products.

For third-party information, refer to the Third-Party Software document.

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 End-User License Agreement
with EDA Software Supplemental Terms
Use of software (including any updates) and/or hardware is subject to the End-User License Agreement together with the
Mentor Graphics EDA Software Supplement Terms. You can view and print a copy of this agreement at:

mentor.com/eula